Technical reference manual Generator protection IED REG 670

Innovation

from

ABB

Document ID: 1MRK502013-UEN Issued: December 2007 Revision: B IED product version: 1.1

Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved

COPYRIGHT
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT THAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIAL PROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, IN PARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRD PARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED. THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, IN CASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLY REQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESS BELOW. THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FOR THE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BE DEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. IN THE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TO ENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATEST TECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SW PRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT. Manufacturer:
ABB AB Substation Automation Products SE-721 59 Vsters Sweden Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00 Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18 www.abb.com/substationautomation

Table of contents

Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................23
Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................23 About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................23 About the technical reference manual.........................................24 Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM).......................25 Introduction.............................................................................25 Principle of operation..............................................................25 Input and output signals.........................................................28 Function block........................................................................28 Setting parameters.................................................................28 Technical data........................................................................28 Intended audience.......................................................................29 Related documents......................................................................29 Revision notes.............................................................................29

Section 2

Local human-machine interface.....................................31

Human machine interface.................................................................31 Small size graphic HMI.....................................................................32 Introduction..................................................................................32 Design.........................................................................................32 Medium size graphic HMI.................................................................34 Introduction..................................................................................34 Design.........................................................................................34 Keypad.............................................................................................34 LED...................................................................................................36 Introduction..................................................................................36 Status indication LEDs................................................................36 Indication LEDs...........................................................................36 LHMI related functions......................................................................37 Introduction..................................................................................37 General setting parameters.........................................................37 Status indication LEDs................................................................38 Design....................................................................................38 Function block........................................................................38 Input and output signals.........................................................38 Indication LEDs...........................................................................39 Introduction.............................................................................39 Design....................................................................................39 Function block........................................................................46

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Table of contents

Input and output signals.........................................................46 Setting parameters.................................................................46

Section 3

Basic IED functions........................................................49

Analog inputs....................................................................................49 Introduction..................................................................................49 Principle of operation...................................................................49 Function block.............................................................................50 Setting parameters......................................................................50 Authorization.....................................................................................57 Authorization handling in the tool................................................58 Authorization handling in the IED................................................63 Self supervision with internal event list.............................................63 Introduction..................................................................................63 Principle of operation...................................................................63 Internal signals.......................................................................65 Run-time model......................................................................67 Function block.............................................................................68 Output signals..............................................................................68 Setting parameters......................................................................68 Technical data.............................................................................69 Time synchronization........................................................................69 Introduction..................................................................................69 Principle of operation...................................................................69 General concepts...................................................................69 Real Time Clock (RTC) operation..........................................70 Synchronization alternatives..................................................71 Function block.............................................................................75 Output signals..............................................................................75 Setting parameters......................................................................75 Technical data.............................................................................78 Parameter setting groups.................................................................79 Introduction..................................................................................79 Principle of operation...................................................................79 Function block.............................................................................80 Input and output signals..............................................................80 Setting parameters......................................................................81 Test mode functionality.....................................................................82 Introduction..................................................................................82 Principle of operation...................................................................82 Function block.............................................................................83 Input and output signals..............................................................83 Setting parameters......................................................................84 IED identifiers...................................................................................84

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Table of contents

Introduction..................................................................................84 Setting parameters......................................................................85 Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)..............................................85 Introduction..................................................................................85 Principle of operation...................................................................85 Function block.............................................................................86 Input and output signals..............................................................86 Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)..........................................86 Introduction..................................................................................86 Principle of operation...................................................................87 Function block.............................................................................87 Input and output signals..............................................................87 Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)..................................................88 Introduction..................................................................................88 Principle of operation...................................................................88 Function block.............................................................................88 Input and output signals..............................................................88 Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI).............................................89 Introduction..................................................................................89 Principle of operation...................................................................89 Function block.............................................................................89 Input and output signals..............................................................90 Setting parameters......................................................................90 Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)..............................................92 Introduction..................................................................................92 Principle of operation...................................................................92 Function block.............................................................................93 Input and output signals..............................................................93 Setting parameters......................................................................93 Authority status (AUTS)....................................................................94 Introduction..................................................................................94 Principle of operation...................................................................94 Function block.............................................................................95 Output signals..............................................................................95 Setting parameters......................................................................95 Goose binary receive........................................................................96 Function block.............................................................................96 Input and output signals..............................................................96 Setting parameters......................................................................98

Section 4

Differential protection.....................................................99
Generator differential protection (PDIF, 87G)...................................99 Introduction..................................................................................99 Principle of operation.................................................................100

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Table of contents

Function calculation principles.............................................101 Fundamental frequency differential currents........................101 Supplementary criteria.........................................................106 Harmonic restrain.................................................................109 Cross-block logic scheme....................................................109 Function block...........................................................................112 Input and output signals............................................................113 Setting parameters....................................................................113 Technical data...........................................................................115 Transformer differential protection (PDIF, 87T)..............................115 Introduction................................................................................116 Principle of operation.................................................................118 Function calculation principles.............................................119 Logic diagram.......................................................................139 Function block...........................................................................144 Input and output signals............................................................146 Setting parameters....................................................................148 Technical data...........................................................................155 Restricted earth fault protection (PDIF, 87N).................................155 Introduction................................................................................156 Introduction...........................................................................156 Principle of operation.................................................................156 Fundamental principles of the restricted earth fault protection (REF) ..................................................................156 REF as a differential protection............................................159 Calculation of differential current and bias current...............160 Detection of external earthground faults..............................161 Algorithm of the restricted earth fault protection (REF)........163 Function block...........................................................................164 Input and output signals............................................................164 Setting parameters....................................................................165 Technical data...........................................................................165 High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)..........................166 Introduction................................................................................166 Principle of operation.................................................................166 Logic diagram.......................................................................166 Function block...........................................................................167 Input and output signals............................................................167 Setting parameters....................................................................168 Technical data...........................................................................168

Section 5

Impedance protection ..................................................169

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21.....169 Introduction................................................................................169

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Table of contents

Principle of operation.................................................................169 Full scheme measurement...................................................169 Impedance characteristic.....................................................170 Basic operation characteristics.............................................171 Theory for operation.............................................................172 Function block...........................................................................183 Input and output signals............................................................183 Setting parameters....................................................................184 Technical data...........................................................................185 Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)................................................186 Introduction................................................................................187 Principle of operation.................................................................187 Directional impedance element for mho characteristic, ZDM......................................................................................187 Function block...........................................................................189 Input and output signals............................................................189 Setting parameters....................................................................190 Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)......................................................190 Introduction................................................................................191 Principle of operation.................................................................192 Function block...........................................................................196 Input and output signals............................................................196 Setting parameters....................................................................197 Technical data...........................................................................198 Loss of excitation (PDIS, 40)..........................................................198 Introduction................................................................................198 Principle of operation.................................................................198 Function block...........................................................................202 Input and output signals............................................................202 Setting parameters....................................................................202 Technical data...........................................................................204

Section 6

Current protection.........................................................205
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)................205 Introduction................................................................................205 Principle of operation.................................................................205 Function block...........................................................................206 Input and output signals............................................................206 Setting parameters....................................................................206 Technical data...........................................................................207 Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)................207 Introduction................................................................................208 Principle of operation.................................................................208 Function block...........................................................................212

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Table of contents

Input and output signals............................................................212 Setting parameters....................................................................214 Technical data...........................................................................220 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)...........221 Introduction................................................................................221 Principle of operation.................................................................222 Function block...........................................................................222 Input and output signals............................................................222 Setting parameters....................................................................223 Technical data...........................................................................223 Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N).........223 Introduction................................................................................224 Principle of operation.................................................................224 Operating quantity within the function..................................224 Internal polarizing facility of the function..............................225 External polarizing facility for EFGround Fault function.......227 Base quantities within the function.......................................228 Internal EFGround Fault function structure..........................228 Four residual overcurrent stages..........................................228 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparision stage ..............................................229 Second harmonic blocking element.....................................232 Switch on to fault feature......................................................234 Function block...........................................................................237 Input and output signals............................................................237 Setting parameters....................................................................238 Technical data...........................................................................245 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N) ..................................................................................246 Introduction................................................................................246 Principle of operation.................................................................247 Introduction...........................................................................247 Function block...........................................................................253 Input and output signals............................................................254 Setting parameters....................................................................256 Technical data...........................................................................259 Thermal overload protection, two time constants (PTTR, 49)........260 Introduction................................................................................260 Principle of operation.................................................................261 Function block...........................................................................264 Input and output signals............................................................264 Setting parameters....................................................................264 Technical data...........................................................................266 Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)........................................266

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Table of contents

Introduction................................................................................266 Principle of operation.................................................................267 Function block...........................................................................270 Input and output signals............................................................270 Setting parameters....................................................................271 Technical data...........................................................................272 Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)...................................272 Introduction................................................................................273 Principle of operation.................................................................273 Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker..................276 Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................276 Function block...........................................................................277 Input and output signals............................................................277 Setting parameters....................................................................277 Technical data...........................................................................278 Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)..............................278 Introduction................................................................................278 Principle of operation.................................................................279 Low pass filtering..................................................................281 Calibration of analog inputs..................................................282 Function block...........................................................................283 Input and output signals............................................................283 Setting parameters....................................................................284 Technical data...........................................................................285 Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)................................286 Introduction................................................................................286 Principle of operation.................................................................287 Low pass filtering..................................................................289 Calibration of analog inputs..................................................289 Function block...........................................................................290 Input and output signals............................................................291 Setting parameters....................................................................291 Technical data...........................................................................293

Section 7

Voltage protection........................................................295
Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)...............................295 Introduction................................................................................295 Principle of operation.................................................................295 Measurement principle.........................................................296 Time delay............................................................................296 Blocking................................................................................299 Design..................................................................................301 Function block...........................................................................302 Input and output signals............................................................302

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Table of contents

Setting parameters....................................................................303 Technical data...........................................................................306 Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59).................................306 Introduction................................................................................307 Principle of operation.................................................................307 Measurement principle.........................................................308 Time delay............................................................................308 Blocking................................................................................310 Design..................................................................................310 Function block...........................................................................312 Input and output signals............................................................312 Setting parameters....................................................................313 Technical data...........................................................................315 Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N).................316 Introduction................................................................................316 Principle of operation.................................................................316 Measurement principle.........................................................317 Time delay............................................................................317 Blocking................................................................................320 Design..................................................................................321 Function block...........................................................................322 Input and output signals............................................................322 Setting parameters....................................................................322 Technical data...........................................................................325 Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24).............................................325 Introduction................................................................................326 Principle of operation.................................................................326 Measured voltage.................................................................328 Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................329 Cooling.................................................................................332 OEX protection function measurands...................................332 Overexcitation alarm............................................................333 Logic diagram.......................................................................334 Function block...........................................................................334 Input and output signals............................................................334 Setting parameters....................................................................335 Technical data...........................................................................336 Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)......................................337 Introduction................................................................................337 Principle of operation.................................................................337 Function block...........................................................................338 Input and output signals............................................................339 Setting parameters....................................................................339

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................340 95% and 100% Stator earthground fault protection based on 3rd harmonic ........................................................................................340 Introduction................................................................................341 Principle of operation.................................................................341 Function block...........................................................................346 Input and output signals............................................................347 Setting parameters....................................................................348 Technical data...........................................................................348 Rotor earthground fault protection..................................................349 Introduction................................................................................349 Rotor earthground fault (GAPC, 64R)..................................349 Principle of operation.................................................................350 Rotor earthground fault........................................................350 Technical data...........................................................................353

Section 8

Frequency protection....................................................355
Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)..........................................355 Introduction................................................................................355 Principle of operation.................................................................355 Measurement principle.........................................................356 Time delay............................................................................356 Voltage dependent time delay..............................................356 Blocking................................................................................357 Design..................................................................................358 Function block...........................................................................359 Input and output signals............................................................359 Setting parameters....................................................................359 Technical data...........................................................................360 Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)............................................360 Introduction................................................................................361 Principle of operation.................................................................361 Measurement principle.........................................................361 Time delay............................................................................361 Blocking................................................................................362 Design..................................................................................362 Function block...........................................................................363 Input and output signals............................................................363 Setting parameters....................................................................364 Technical data...........................................................................364 Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)..........................364 Introduction................................................................................365 Principle of operation.................................................................365 Measurement principle.........................................................365

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Table of contents

Time delay............................................................................366 Blocking................................................................................366 Design..................................................................................366 Function block...........................................................................367 Input and output signals............................................................367 Setting parameters....................................................................368 Technical data...........................................................................368

Section 9

Multipurpose protection................................................371
General current and voltage protection (GAPC).............................371 Introduction................................................................................371 Inadvertent generator energization......................................372 Principle of operation.................................................................372 Measured quantities within the function...............................372 Base quantities for GF function............................................374 Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................375 Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................380 Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................381 Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................381 Inadvertent generator energization......................................381 Logic diagram.......................................................................383 Function block...........................................................................388 Input and output signals............................................................388 Setting parameters....................................................................390 Technical data...........................................................................400

Section 10 Secondary system supervision.....................................403

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)..................................................403 Introduction................................................................................403 Principle of operation.................................................................403 Function block...........................................................................405 Input and output signals............................................................405 Setting parameters....................................................................405 Technical data...........................................................................406 Fuse failure supervision (RFUF).....................................................406 Introduction................................................................................406 Principle of operation.................................................................407 Zero sequence ....................................................................407 Negative sequence...............................................................410 du/dt and di/dt.......................................................................410 Operation modes..................................................................411 Dead line detection...............................................................412 Function block...........................................................................412 Input and output signals............................................................412

10

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Table of contents

Setting parameters....................................................................413 Technical data...........................................................................414

Section 11 Control..........................................................................415
Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN, 25)..................................................................................................415 Introduction................................................................................415 Principle of operation.................................................................416 Basic functionality.................................................................416 Logic diagrams.....................................................................416 Function block...........................................................................424 Input and output signals............................................................425 Setting parameters....................................................................427 Technical data...........................................................................429 Autorecloser (RREC, 79)................................................................430 Introduction................................................................................430 Apparatus control (APC).................................................................431 Introduction................................................................................431 Bay control (QCBAY).................................................................431 Introduction...........................................................................431 Function block......................................................................431 Input and output signals.......................................................431 Setting parameters...............................................................432 Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)..............432 Introduction...........................................................................432 Principle of operation............................................................432 Function block......................................................................433 Input and output signals.......................................................434 Setting parameters...............................................................435 Switch controller (SCSWI).........................................................436 Introduction...........................................................................436 Principle of operation............................................................436 Function block......................................................................441 Input and output signals.......................................................441 Setting parameters...............................................................442 Circuit breaker (SXCBR)...........................................................443 Introduction...........................................................................443 Principle of operation............................................................443 Function block......................................................................448 Input and output signals.......................................................448 Setting parameters...............................................................449 Circuit switch (SXSWI)..............................................................449 Introduction...........................................................................449 Principle of operation............................................................449

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

11

Table of contents

Function block......................................................................454 Input and output signals.......................................................454 Setting parameters...............................................................455 Bay reserve (QCRSV)...............................................................455 Introduction...........................................................................455 Principle of operation............................................................455 Function block......................................................................458 Input and output signals.......................................................458 Setting parameters...............................................................459 Reservation input (RESIN)........................................................460 Introduction...........................................................................460 Principle of operation............................................................460 Function block......................................................................461 Input and output signals.......................................................461 Setting parameters...............................................................462 Interlocking.....................................................................................462 Introduction................................................................................462 Principle of operation.................................................................462 Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)........................................465 Introduction...........................................................................465 Principle of operation............................................................465 Function block......................................................................466 Input and output signals.......................................................466 Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE).........................................467 Introduction...........................................................................467 Function block......................................................................468 Logic diagram.......................................................................469 Input and output signals.......................................................474 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)...............................476 Introduction...........................................................................476 Function block......................................................................477 Logic diagram.......................................................................478 Input and output signals.......................................................482 Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)...........................485 Introduction...........................................................................485 Function block......................................................................486 Logic diagram.......................................................................487 Input and output signals.......................................................490 Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)........................492 Introduction...........................................................................492 Function block......................................................................492 Logic diagram.......................................................................493 Input and output signals.......................................................494

12

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Table of contents

Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)...............496 Introduction...........................................................................496 Function block......................................................................496 Logic diagram.......................................................................497 Input and output signals.......................................................499 Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES).......500 Introduction...........................................................................500 Function block......................................................................500 Logic diagram.......................................................................501 Input and output signals.......................................................501 Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)..........................................501 Introduction...........................................................................501 Function block......................................................................502 Logic diagrams.....................................................................503 Input and output signals ......................................................510 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)....................................................513 Introduction...........................................................................513 Function blocks....................................................................514 Logic diagrams.....................................................................516 Input and output signals.......................................................523 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking.............529 Function block......................................................................529 Input and output signals.......................................................529 Setting parameters...............................................................531 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)...................................................................531 Introduction................................................................................531 Principle of operation.................................................................532 Functionality and behaviour ................................................533 Graphical display..................................................................533 Function block...........................................................................535 Input and output signals............................................................536 Setting parameters....................................................................537 Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)......................................................537 Introduction................................................................................537 Principle of operation.................................................................538 Function block...........................................................................538 Input and output signals............................................................538 Setting parameters....................................................................539 Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)..............................539 Introduction................................................................................540 Principle of operation.................................................................540 Function block...........................................................................540

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

13

Table of contents

Input and output signals............................................................540 Setting parameters....................................................................540 Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO).......................541 Introduction................................................................................541 Principle of operation.................................................................541 Function block...........................................................................541 Input and output signals............................................................541 Setting parameters....................................................................542

Section 12 Logic.............................................................................545
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)...............................................................545 Introduction................................................................................545 Principle of operation.................................................................545 Logic diagram.......................................................................547 Function block...........................................................................550 Input and output signals............................................................550 Setting parameters....................................................................551 Technical data...........................................................................552 Trip matrix logic (GGIO).................................................................552 Application.................................................................................552 Principle of operation.................................................................552 Function block...........................................................................554 Input and output signals............................................................554 Setting parameters....................................................................555 Configurable logic blocks (LLD)......................................................556 Introduction................................................................................556 Inverter function block (INV)......................................................556 OR function block (OR).............................................................556 AND function block (AND).........................................................557 Timer function block (Timer)......................................................558 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)..........................................559 Exclusive OR function block (XOR)...........................................559 Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)............................560 Controllable gate function block (GT)........................................561 Settable timer function block (TS).............................................561 Technical data...........................................................................562 Fixed signal function block (FIXD)..................................................563 Introduction................................................................................563 Principle of operation.................................................................563 Function block...........................................................................563 Input and output signals............................................................563 Setting parameters....................................................................564 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................564 Introduction................................................................................564

14

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Table of contents

Principle of operation............................................................564 Function block......................................................................565 Input and output signals.......................................................565 Setting parameters...............................................................566 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation (B16IGGIO)....................................................................................566 Introduction................................................................................566 Principle of operation.................................................................566 Function block...........................................................................567 Input and output signals............................................................567 Setting parameters....................................................................568 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)........................................568 Introduction................................................................................568 Principle of operation.................................................................568 Function block...........................................................................569 Input and output signals............................................................569 Setting parameters....................................................................570 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation (IB16GGIO)....................................................................................570 Introduction................................................................................570 Principle of operation.................................................................570 Function block...........................................................................571 Input and output signals............................................................571 Setting parameters....................................................................572

Section 13 Monitoring.....................................................................573
Measurements (MMXU).................................................................573 Introduction................................................................................574 Principle of operation.................................................................576 Measurement supervision....................................................576 Service values (MMXU, SVR)..............................................580 Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)..............................................584 Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP).................................585 Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ).......................585 Function block...........................................................................585 Input and output signals............................................................587 Setting parameters....................................................................590 Technical data...........................................................................606 Event counter (GGIO).....................................................................606 Introduction................................................................................606 Principle of operation.................................................................607 Reporting..............................................................................607 Design..................................................................................607 Function block...........................................................................608

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

15

Table of contents

Input signals..............................................................................608 Setting parameters....................................................................608 Technical data...........................................................................608 Event function (EV).........................................................................608 Introduction................................................................................609 Principle of operation.................................................................609 Function block...........................................................................611 Input and output signals............................................................611 Setting parameters....................................................................612 Measured value expander block.....................................................614 Introduction................................................................................614 Principle of operation.................................................................615 Function block...........................................................................615 Input and output signals............................................................615 Disturbance report (RDRE)............................................................616 Introduction................................................................................616 Principle of operation.................................................................616 Function block...........................................................................623 Input and output signals............................................................625 Setting parameters....................................................................627 Technical data...........................................................................638 Event list (RDRE)...........................................................................639 Introduction................................................................................639 Principle of operation.................................................................639 Function block...........................................................................640 Input signals..............................................................................640 Technical data...........................................................................640 Indications (RDRE).........................................................................640 Introduction................................................................................640 Principle of operation.................................................................641 Function block...........................................................................642 Input signals..............................................................................642 Technical data...........................................................................642 Event recorder (RDRE)..................................................................642 Introduction................................................................................642 Principle of operation.................................................................643 Function block...........................................................................643 Input signals..............................................................................643 Technical data...........................................................................643 Trip value recorder (RDRE)............................................................644 Introduction................................................................................644 Principle of operation.................................................................644 Function block...........................................................................645

16

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Table of contents

Input signals..............................................................................645 Technical data...........................................................................645 Disturbance recorder (RDRE)........................................................645 Introduction................................................................................645 Principle of operation.................................................................646 Memory and storage............................................................646 IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................648 Function block...........................................................................648 Input and output signals............................................................648 Setting parameters....................................................................648 Technical data...........................................................................648

Section 14 Metering.......................................................................651
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)............................................................651 Introduction................................................................................651 Principle of operation.................................................................651 Function block...........................................................................653 Input and output signals............................................................653 Setting parameters....................................................................654 Technical data...........................................................................654 Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)...........................655 Introduction................................................................................655 Principle of operation.................................................................655 Function block...........................................................................656 Input and output signals............................................................656 Setting parameters....................................................................657

Section 15 Station communication.................................................659

Overview.........................................................................................659 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................659 Introduction................................................................................659 Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)..........................660 Introduction...........................................................................660 Principle of operation............................................................660 Function block......................................................................660 Input and output signals.......................................................661 Setting parameters...............................................................662 Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)................662 Introduction...........................................................................662 Principle of operation............................................................662 Function block......................................................................663 Input and output signals.......................................................663 Setting parameters...............................................................663 Setting parameters....................................................................664

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

17

Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................664 LON communication protocol.........................................................664 Introduction................................................................................664 Principle of operation.................................................................665 Setting parameters....................................................................682 Technical data...........................................................................683 SPA communication protocol.........................................................683 Introduction................................................................................683 Principle of operation.................................................................683 Communication ports...........................................................691 Design.......................................................................................692 Setting parameters....................................................................692 Technical data...........................................................................693 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................693 Introduction................................................................................693 Principle of operation.................................................................693 General.................................................................................693 Communication ports...........................................................703 Function block...........................................................................703 Input and output signals............................................................705 Setting parameters....................................................................710 Technical data...........................................................................714 Automation bits (AUBI)...................................................................714 Introduction................................................................................714 Principle of operation.................................................................714 Function block...........................................................................715 Input and output signals............................................................715 Setting parameters....................................................................716 Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................731 Introduction................................................................................731 Principle of operation.................................................................732 Function block...........................................................................732 Input and output signals............................................................732 Setting parameters....................................................................733 Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................733 Introduction................................................................................733 Principle of operation.................................................................734 Design.......................................................................................734 General.................................................................................734 Function block...........................................................................734 Input and output signals............................................................735 Setting parameters....................................................................737

Section 16 Remote communication................................................739

18 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Table of contents

Binary signal transfer to remote end...............................................739 Introduction................................................................................739 Principle of operation.................................................................740 Function block...........................................................................740 Input and output signals............................................................741 Setting parameters....................................................................743

Section 17 Hardware......................................................................747
Overview.........................................................................................747 Variants of case- and HMI display size.....................................747 Case from the rear side.............................................................749 Hardware modules.........................................................................751 Overview....................................................................................751 Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................752 Introduction...........................................................................752 Functionality.........................................................................752 Design..................................................................................753 Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................755 Introduction...........................................................................755 Functionality.........................................................................755 Design..................................................................................755 Power supply module (PSM).....................................................757 Introduction...........................................................................757 Design..................................................................................757 Technical data......................................................................758 Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................758 Introduction...........................................................................758 Functionality.........................................................................759 Block diagram.......................................................................760 Local human-machine interface (LHMI)....................................760 Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................760 Introduction...........................................................................760 Design..................................................................................761 Technical data......................................................................761 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM) .......................................................................................762 Introduction...........................................................................762 Design..................................................................................762 Binary input module (BIM).........................................................764 Introduction...........................................................................764 Design..................................................................................764 Technical data......................................................................767 Binary output modules (BOM)...................................................768 Introduction...........................................................................768

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

19

Table of contents

Design..................................................................................768 Technical data......................................................................770 Static binary output module (SOM)...........................................771 Introduction...........................................................................771 Design..................................................................................771 Technical data......................................................................773 Binary input/output module (IOM)..............................................774 Introduction...........................................................................774 Design..................................................................................774 Technical data......................................................................776 Line data communication module (LDCM)................................777 Introduction...........................................................................777 Design..................................................................................778 Technical data......................................................................778 Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM) ...........................................................................779 Introduction...........................................................................779 Design..................................................................................779 Technical data......................................................................781 Galvanic RS485 communication module...................................781 Introduction...........................................................................781 Design..................................................................................781 Technical data......................................................................783 Optical ethernet module (OEM).................................................783 Introduction...........................................................................783 Functionality.........................................................................783 Design..................................................................................783 Technical data......................................................................784 mA input module (MIM).............................................................785 Introduction...........................................................................785 Design..................................................................................785 Technical data......................................................................786 GPS time synchronization module (GSM).................................787 Introduction...........................................................................787 Design..................................................................................787 Technical data......................................................................788 GPS antenna.............................................................................789 Introduction...........................................................................789 Design..................................................................................789 Technical data......................................................................790 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B.............................791 Introduction...........................................................................791 Design..................................................................................791

20

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Table of contents

Technical data......................................................................792 Dimensions.....................................................................................792 Case without rear cover.............................................................792 Case with rear cover..................................................................793 Flush mounting dimensions.......................................................795 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions...................................796 Wall mounting dimensions.........................................................797 External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection...................................................................................797 Mounting alternatives.....................................................................798 Flush mounting..........................................................................798 Overview..............................................................................798 Mounting procedure for flush mounting................................799 19 panel rack mounting............................................................800 Overview..............................................................................800 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting.................801 Wall mounting............................................................................801 Overview..............................................................................801 Mounting procedure for wall mounting.................................802 How to reach the rear side of the IED..................................802 Side-by-side 19 rack mounting.................................................803 Overview..............................................................................803 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting............804 IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case.................................804 Side-by-side flush mounting......................................................805 Overview..............................................................................805 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting...........806 Technical data................................................................................806 Enclosure...................................................................................806 Connection system....................................................................807 Influencing factors.....................................................................807 Type tests according to standard..............................................808

Section 18 Labels...........................................................................811
Different labels................................................................................811

Section 19 Connection diagrams...................................................815 Section 20 Time inverse characteristics.........................................831

Application......................................................................................831 Principle of operation......................................................................833 Mode of operation......................................................................833 Inverse characteristics....................................................................839

Section 21 Glossary.......................................................................853
REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 21

Table of contents

Glossary.........................................................................................853

22

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 1 Introduction

Section 1

Introduction
About this chapter
This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.

1.1
1.1.1

Introduction to the technical reference manual

About the complete set of manuals for an IED
The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:
Application manual Technical reference manual Installation and commissioning manual Operators manual Engineering guide

en06000097.vsd

The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The manual should also be used when calculating settings. The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service. The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a reference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The chapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned. The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

23

Section 1 Introduction

can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault. The IED 670 Engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED 670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670 products and the PCM 600 tool. The IEC 61850 Station Engineering guide contains descriptions of IEC 61850 station engineering and process signal routing. The manual presents the PCM 600 and CCT tool used for station engineering. It describes the IEC 61850 attribute editor and how to set up projects and communication.

1.1.2

About the technical reference manual

The technical reference manual contains the following chapters: The chapter Local human-machine interface describes the control panel on the IED. Display characteristics, control keys and various local human-machine interface features are explained. The chapter Basic IED functions presents functions that are included in all IEDs regardless of the type of protection they are designed for. These are functions like Time synchronization, Self supervision with event list, Test mode and other functions of a general nature. The chapter Current protection describes functions such as overcurrent protection, breaker failure protection and pole discordance. The chapter Voltage protection describes functions like undervoltage and overvoltage protection as well as residual overvoltage protection. The chapter Frequency protection describes functions for overfrequency, underfrequency and rate of change of frequency. The chapter Multipurpose protection describes the general protection function for current and voltage. The chapter Secondary system supervision includes descriptions of functions like current based Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision. The chapter Control describes the control functions. These are functions like the Synchronization and energizing check as well as several others which are product specific. The chapter Logic describes trip logic and related functions. The chapter Monitoring describes measurement related functions used to provide data regarding relevant quantities, events, faults and the like. The chapter Metering describes primarily Pulse counter logic. The chapter Station communication describes Ethernet based communication in general including the use of IEC61850, and horizontal communication via GOOSE. The chapter Remote communication describes binary and analog signal transfer, and the associated hardware. The chapter Hardware provides descriptions of the IED and its components. REG 670

24

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 1 Introduction

The chapter Connection diagrams provides terminal wiring diagrams and information regarding connections to and from the IED. The chapter Time inverse characteristics describes and explains inverse time delay, inverse time curves and their effects. The chapter Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.

1.1.3

Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM)

The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (where applicable). The different sections are outlined below.

1.1.3.1

Introduction
Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.

1.1.3.2

Principle of operation
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.

Logic diagrams

Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered by dashed lines. Signal names Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes. The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in figure 4 is as follows: BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).

Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Input and output signals In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the outer border of the diagram. Input and output signals can be configured using the CAP531 tool. They can be connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs. Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

25

Section 1 Introduction
Setting parameters Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes. Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value. Internal signals Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately. 2 mm from the frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues, see figure 3.
BLKTR TEST TEST Block TUV=Yes BLOCK VTSU BLOCK-int. STUL1N BLOCK-int. STUL2N BLOCK-int. STUL3N & & >1 & t & TRIP START STL1 STL2 STL3 & >1

BLOCK-int.

xx04000375.vsd

Figure 1:

Logic diagram example with -int signals

External signals Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram have the suffix -cont., see figure 2 and figure 3.

26

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 1 Introduction

STCND & & & & & &

>1

STZMPP-cont.

STNDL1L2-cont. STNDL2L3-cont. STNDL3L1-cont. STNDL1N-cont. STNDL2N-cont. STNDL3N-cont. >1 STNDPE-cont.

1L1L2 1L2L3 1L3L1 1L1N 1L2N 1L3N

>1 1--VTSZ 1--BLOCK >1 & 1--STND BLK-cont.

xx04000376.vsd

Figure 2:

Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal

STNDL1N-cont. STNDL2N-cont. STNDL3N-cont. STNDL1L2-cont. STNDL2L3-cont. STNDL3L1-cont.

>1 & >1 & & & 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t 15 ms t STL1 STL2 STL3 START

>1 >1

BLK-cont.
xx04000377.vsd

Figure 3:

Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

27

Section 1 Introduction
1.1.3.3 Input and output signals
Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column contains the description of the signal.

1.1.3.4

Function block
Each function block is illustrated graphically. Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available. These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme, and are therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described in the settings table.
CAP531 Name Inputs
U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TUV1PH2PUVM TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en05000330.vsd

IEC 61850 - 8 -1 Logical Node

Outputs

Diagram Number

Figure 4:

Example of a function block

1.1.3.5

Setting parameters
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function in question.

1.1.3.6

Technical data
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function or hardware described.

28

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 1 Introduction 1.1.4 Intended audience

General
This manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.

Requirements
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.

1.1.5

Related documents
Documents related to REG 670 Operators manual Installation and commissioning manual Technical reference manual Application manual Buyers guide Setting example Identity number 1MRK 502 014-UEN 1MRK 502 015-UEN 1MRK 502 013-UEN 1MRK 502 016-UEN 1MRK 502 019-BEN 1MRK 502 020-WEN

Connection and Installation components Test system, COMBITEST Accessories for IED 670 Getting started guide IED 670 SPA and LON signal list for IED 670, ver. 1.1 IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670, ver. 1.1 Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet Engineering guide IED 670 products Buyers guide REG 216

1MRK 013 003-BEN 1MRK 512 001-BEN 1MRK 514 012-BEN 1MRK 500 080-UEN 1MRK 500 083-WEN 1MRK 500 084-WEN 1KHA001027-UEN 1MRS755552 1MRK 511 179-UEN 1MRB520004-BEN

Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation

1.1.6

Revision notes
Revision B Description No functionality added. Minor changes made in content due to problem reports.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

29

30

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Section 2

Local human-machine interface

About this chapter
This chapter describes the structure and use of the Local human machine interface (LHMI) or in other words, the control panel on the IED.

2.1

Human machine interface

The local human machine interface is available in a small, and a medium sized model. The principle difference between the two is the size of the LCD. The small size LCD can display seven line of text and the medium size LCD can display the single line diagram with up to 15 objects on each page. Up to 12 SLD pages can be defined, depending on the product capability. The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display the single line diagram with up to 15 objects. The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand the whole front plate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality: Status indication LEDs Alarm indication LEDs which consists of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from the PCM 600 tool Liquid crystal display (LCD) Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for selection between local and remote control and reset An isolated RJ45 communication port

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

31

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Figure 5:

Example of medium graphic HMI

2.2
2.2.1

Small size graphic HMI

Introduction
The small sized HMI is available for 1/2 and 1/1 x 19 case. The LCD on the small HMI measures 32 x 90 mm and displays 7 lines with up to 40 characters per line. The first line displays the product name and the last line displays date and time. The remaining 5 lines are dynamic. This LCD has no graphic display potential.

2.2.2

Design
The LHMI is identical for both the 1/2 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of the small LHMI is shown in figure 6

32

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

en05000055.eps

Figure 6:

Small graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs 2 LCD 3 Indication LEDs 4 Label 5 Local/Remote LEDs 6 RJ 45 port 7 Communication indication LED 8 Keypad

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

33

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

2.3
2.3.1

Medium size graphic HMI

Introduction
The 1/2 and 1/1 x 19 cases can be equipped with the medium size LCD. This is a fully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 120 x 90 mm. It has 28 lines with up to 40 characters per line. To display the single line diagram, this LCD is required.

2.3.2

Design
The different parts of the medium size LHMI is shown in figure 7The LHMI, exists in an IEC version and in an ANSI version. The difference is on the keypad operation buttons and the yellow LED designation.
Figure 7: Medium size graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs 2 LCD 3 Indication LEDs 4 Label 5 Local/Remote LEDs 6 RJ45 port 7 Communication indication LED 8 Keypad

2.4

Keypad
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look and feel in all IEDs in the IED 670 series. LCD screens and other details may differ but the way the keys function is identical. The keypad is illustrated in figure 8.

34

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Figure 8:

The HMI keypad.

The keys used to operate the IED are described below in table 1.
Table 1:
Key

HMI keys on the front of the IED

Function This key closes (energizes) a breaker or disconnector.

This key opens a breaker or disconnector.

The help key brings up two submenus. Key operation and IED information.

This key is used to clear entries, It cancels commands and edits.

Opens the main menu, and used to move to the default screen.

The Local/Remote key is used to set the IED in local or remote control mode.

This key opens the reset screen.

The E key starts editing mode and confirms setting changes when in editing mode.

The right arrow key navigates forward between screens and moves right in editing mode. Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

35

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Key Function The left arrow key navigates backwards between screens and moves left in editing mode.

The up arrow key is used to move up in the single line diagram and in menu tree.

The down arrow key is used to move down in the single line diagram and in menu tree.

2.5
2.5.1

LED
Introduction
The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that events may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to something that has occurred and needs some sort of action.

2.5.2

Status indication LEDs

There are three LEDs above the LCD. The information they communicate is described in the table below.
LED Indication Green: Steady Flashing Dark Yellow: Steady Flashing Red: Steady Trip command issued Dist. rep. triggered Terminal in test mode In service Internal failure No power supply Information

2.5.3

Indication LEDs
The LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in IED 670s. Its main purpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications or alarm signals. There are alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs on the right hand side of the front panel. The alarm LEDs are found to the right of the LCD screen. They can show steady or flashing light. Flashing would normally indicate an alarm.

36

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

The alarm LEDs are configurable using the PCM 600 tool. This is because they are dependent on the binary input logic and can therefore not be configured locally on the HMI. Some typical alarm examples follow: Bay controller failure CB close blocked Interlocking bypassed Differential protection trip SF6 Gas refill Position error CB spring charge alarm Oil temperature alarm Thermal overload trip Bucholtz trip

The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been established between the IED and a computer. The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or remote control of the IED is active.

2.6
2.6.1

LHMI related functions

Introduction
The adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with: function block LHMI (LocalHMI) function block HLED (LEDMonitor) setting parameters

2.6.2

General setting parameters

Table 2:
Parameter Language DisplayTimeout AutoRepeat

Basic general settings for the localHMI (LHM1-) function

Range English OptionalLanguage 10 - 120 Off On -10 - 20 Step 10 Default English 60 On Unit Min Description Local HMI language Local HMI display timeout Activation of autorepeat (On) or not (Off) Contrast level for display

ContrastLevel

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

37

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Parameter DefaultScreen EvListSrtOrder SymbolFont Range 0-0 Latest on top Oldest on top IEC ANSI Step 1 Default 0 Latest on top IEC Unit Description Default screen Sort order of event list Symbol font for Single Line Diagram

2.6.3
2.6.3.1

Status indication LEDs

Design
The function block LHMI (LocalHMI) controls and supplies information about the status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LHMI are configured with the PCM 600 tool. The function block can be used if any of the signals are required in a configuration logic. See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.

2.6.3.2

Function block
LHMILocalHMI CLRLEDS HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD en05000773.vsd

Figure 9:

LHMI function block

2.6.3.3

Input and output signals

Table 3:
Signal CLRLEDS

Input signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block

Description Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 4:
Signal HMI-ON RED-S YELLOW-S

Output signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block

Description Backlight of the LCD display is active Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady

Table continued on next page

38

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Signal YELLOW-F CLRPULSE LEDSCLRD Description Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are cleared Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active

2.6.4
2.6.4.1

Indication LEDs
Introduction
The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red and LEDs (number 715) for start indications are yellow. Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality. The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F). For details, refer to Technical reference manual.

2.6.4.2

Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED in some of the modes of the HLED. The latest LED picture appears immediately after the IED is successfully restarted.

Operating modes
Collecting mode LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

39

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed via the Reset-button and menus on the LHMI. For details, refer to the Operators manual.

From function input The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input, RESET, to the function. This input can for example be configured to a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

Automatic reset The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequences

The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is reset. The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and restarting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash. At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected sequence diagrams below. In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics shown in figure 10.

40

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

= No indication

= Steady light

= Flash
en05000506.vsd

Figure 10:

Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S) This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating signal

LED
en01000228.vsd

Figure 11:

Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

Sequence 2 (Follow-F) This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing steady light. Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd

Figure 12:

Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been alternated.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

41

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S) This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating signal

LED

Reset
en01000235.vsd

Figure 13:

Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S) In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences. Definition of a disturbance A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown in figure 14.

42

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

From disturbance length control per LED set to sequence 6

New disturbance

&

tRestart t

& 1 &

en01000237.vsd

Figure 14:

Activation of new disturbance

In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i diagram in figure 15.
Activating signal To LED

AND tMax t

To disturbance length control

en05000507.vsd

Figure 15:

Length control of activating signals

Timing diagram for sequence 6 Figure 16 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

43

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000239.vsd

Figure 16:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance

Figure 17 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2 Disturbance t Restart

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000240.vsd

Figure 17:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

44

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Figure 18 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000241.vsd

Figure 18:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 19 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Disturbance t Restart Activating signal 1 Activating signal 2

LED 1

LED 2 Automatic reset Manual reset

en01000242.vsd

Figure 19:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

45

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

2.6.4.3 Function block
HLEDLEDMonitor BLOCK RESET LEDTEST NEWIND ACK

en05000508.vsd

Figure 20:

HLED function block

2.6.4.4

Input and output signals

Table 5:
Signal BLOCK RESET LEDTEST

Input signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block

Description Input to block the operation of the LED-unit Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LED-unit Input for external LED test

Table 6:
Signal NEWIND ACK

Output signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block

Description A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

2.6.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 7:
Parameter Operation tRestart tMax

Basic general settings for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function

Range Off On 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0 Step 0.1 0.1 Default Off 0.0 0.0 Unit s s Description Operation mode for the LED function Defines the disturbance length Maximum time for the definition of a disturbance Sequence type for LED 1

SeqTypeLED1

Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Table continued on next page

46

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Parameter SeqTypeLED2 Range Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Step Default Follow-S Unit Description Sequence type for LED 2

SeqTypeLED3

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 3

SeqTypeLED4

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 4

SeqTypeLED5

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 5

SeqTypeLED6

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 6

SeqTypeLED7

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 7

SeqTypeLED8

Follow-S

sequence type for LED 8

SeqTypeLED9

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 9

SeqTypeLED10

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 10

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

47

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

Parameter SeqTypeLED11 Range Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Follow-S Follow-F LatchedAck-F-S LatchedAck-S-F LatchedColl-S LatchedReset-S Step Default Follow-S Unit Description Sequence type for LED 11

SeqTypeLED12

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 12

SeqTypeLED13

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 13

SeqTypeLED14

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 14

SeqTypeLED15

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 15

48

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Section 3

Basic IED functions

About this chapter
This chapter presents functions that are basic to all REx670 IEDs. Typical functions in this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.

3.1
3.1.1

Analog inputs
Introduction
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well. Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers. In order to make Service Values reading easier it is possible to define a reference PhaseAngleRef. Then this analog channels phase angle will be always fixed to zero degree and all other angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be freely change in order to facilitate testing and service values reading. VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type of Transformer Input Module (TRM).

3.1.2

Principle of operation
The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically star connected and can be connected with the star point to the object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current, power etc. means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative value means direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse, see figure 21

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

49

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Definition of direction for directional functions Reverse Forward

Definition of direction for directional functions Forward Reverse

Protected Object Line, transformer, etc

e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "ToObject" e.g. P, Q, I Measured quantity is positive when flowing towards the object Set parameter CTStarPoint Correct Setting is "FromObject" en05000456.vsd

Figure 21:

Internal convention of the directionality in IED 670

With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a direction defined as Forward always is looking towards the object. To be able to use primary system quantities for settings and calculation in the IED the ratios of the main CTs and VTs must be known. This information is given to the IED by setting of the rated secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs. The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under General settings/Analog module in the parameter settings tool PST.

3.1.3

Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.

3.1.4

Setting parameters
Dependent on ordered IED 670 type.
Table 8:
Parameter PhaseAngleRef

General settings for the AISERVAL (AISV-) function

Range 1 - 24 Step 1 Default 1 Unit Ch Description Reference channel for phase angle presentation

50

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 9:
Parameter CTStarPoint1

Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec6 CTprim6

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

51

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Parameter CTStarPoint7 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec7 CTprim7 CTStarPoint8

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec8 CTprim8 CTStarPoint9

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec9 CTprim9 CTStarPoint10

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec10 CTprim10 CTStarPoint11

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec11 CTprim11 CTStarPoint12

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec12 CTprim12

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

52

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 10:
Parameter CTStarPoint1

Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec6 CTprim6

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

53

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Parameter CTStarPoint7 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

CTsec7 CTprim7 CTStarPoint8

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec8 CTprim8 CTStarPoint9

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec9 CTprim9 VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12

1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00

1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05

1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00

A A V kV V kV V kV

Table 11:
Parameter CTStarPoint1

Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec1 CTprim1

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

Table continued on next page

54

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Parameter CTStarPoint2 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec4 CTprim4 CTStarPoint5

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec6 CTprim6 VTsec7 VTprim7 VTsec8 VTprim8 VTsec9 VTprim9

1 - 10 1 - 99999 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00

1 1 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05

1 3000 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00

A A V kV V kV V kV

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

55

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Parameter VTsec10 VTprim10 VTsec11 VTprim11 VTsec12 VTprim12 Range 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.001 - 999.999 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 0.001 0.05 Default 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 110.000 400.00 Unit V kV V kV V kV Description Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage Rated VT secondary voltage Rated VT primary voltage

Table 12:
Parameter CTStarPoint1

Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN6I (TB40-) function

Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec1 CTprim1 CTStarPoint2

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec2 CTprim2 CTStarPoint3

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec3 CTprim3 CTStarPoint4

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec4 CTprim4

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

Table continued on next page

56

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Parameter CTStarPoint5 Range FromObject ToObject Step Default ToObject Unit Description ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current ToObject= towards protected object, FromObject= the opposite Rated CT secondary current Rated CT primary current

CTsec5 CTprim5 CTStarPoint6

1 - 10 1 - 99999 FromObject ToObject

1 1 -

1 3000 ToObject

A A -

CTsec6 CTprim6

1 - 10 1 - 99999

1 1

1 3000

A A

3.2

Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED 670 and the tools that are accessing the IED 670 are protected, subject of authorization handling. The concept of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED 670 and the associated tools is based on the following facts: There are two types of points of access to the IED 670: local, through the local HMI remote, through the communication ports

There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the IED and tools functionality; the pre-defined user types are defined as follows:
Access rights Read only Full access Read only + control Control from LHMI, no bypass All settings Application configuration (including SMT, GDE and CMT) User and password administration for the IED

User type Guest SuperUser SPAGuest SystemOperator ProtectionEngineer DesignEngineer UserAdministrator

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management Tool (UMT) within PCM 600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI of the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on the IED LHMI.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

57

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.2.1 Authorization handling in the tool

Upon the creation of an IED in the Plant Structure, the User Management Tool is immediately accessible, by right clicking with the mouse on that specific IED name:

Figure 22:

Right-clicking to get the User Management Tool IED Users.

By left-clicking on the IED Users submenu, the tool will open in the right-side panel:

58

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 23:

User Manager Tool opened in the right-side panel.

By default, the IEDs are delivered so that users are not required to log on to operate the IED. The default user is the SuperUser. Before doing any changes to the User Management in the IED it is recommendable that the administrator uploads the Users and Groups existent in the IED. If situation requires so, one can restore the factory settings, overwriting all existing settings in the User Management Tool database. Even if the administrator empties the tool database, the users previously defined are still in the IED. They cannot be erased by downloading the empty list into the IED (the tool wont download an empty list), so it is strongly recommended that before you create any user you create one that belongs to the SuperUser group. If the administrator marks the check box User must logon to this IED, then the fields under the User Management tab are becoming accessible and one can add, delete and edit users. To add a new user, the administrator will press the button that is marked with a black arrow, see figure 24 on the User subtab:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

59

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 24:

User subtab and creation of a new user.

Upon pressing this button, a window will appear, enabling the administrator to enter details about the user, assign an access password and (after pressing Next and advancing to the next window) assign the user to a group:

Figure 25:

Enter details about the user.

60

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 26:

Assign the user to a group.

Once the new user is created, it will appear in the list of users. Once in the list, there are several operations that can be performed on the users, shown in figure 27

Figure 27:
No. Description 1 2 3

Operations on users in the users list.

Delete selected user Change password Add another group to the user permissions

The Group subtab is displaying all the pre-defined groups and gives short details of the permissions allowed to the members of a particular group:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

61

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 28:

The Groups subtab.

It also allows the administrator to add another (already created) user to a group, in the same way it could assign one more group to an user, on the Users subtab. The Functions subtab is a descriptional area, showing in detail what Read/Write permissions has each user group, in respect to various tools and components. Finally, after the desired users are created and permissions assigned to them by means of user groups, the whole list must be downloaded in the IED, in the same way as from the other tools:

No. Description 1 2 Upload from IED Download to IED

62

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.2.2 Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the superuser. No LogOn is required to operate the IED until a user has been created with the UMT(User Management Tool). See Application manual for more details. Once a user is created and downloaded into the IED, that user can perform a LogOn, introducing the password assigned in the tool. If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will cause the display to show a message box saying: No user defined! If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Settings \General Settings\HMI\Screen\ Display Timeout ) elapses, the IED will return to a Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes at delivery. If there are one or more users created with the UMT and downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a LogOn or when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the LogOn window will appear The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, one can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the pasword. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive!) choose OK and press E key again. If everything is O.K. at a voluntary LogOn the LHMI returns to the Authorization screen. If the LogOn is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting, the LHMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the LogOn has failed, then the LogOn window will pop-up again, until either the user makes it right or presses Cancel.

3.3
3.3.1

Self supervision with internal event list

Introduction
The self-supervision function listens and reacts to internal system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list.

3.3.2

Principle of operation
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

63

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Normal micro-processor watchdog function. Checking of digitized measuring signals. Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or a SMS/SCS system. Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Diagnostics\Internal Events or Diagnostics\IED Status\General. Refer to the Installation and Commissioning manual for a detailed list of supervision signals that can be generated and displayed in the local HMI. A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 30 and a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 29

Figure 29:

Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.

64

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 30:

Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block.

Some signals are available from the IES (IntErrorSign) function block. The signals from this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The signals from the IES function block can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired. Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the Signal Matrix Tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the time synchronization block TIME.

3.3.2.1

Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal life of the IED, they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. One group handles signals that are always present in the IED; standard signals. Another group handles signals that are collected depending on the hardware configuration. The standard signals are listed in table 13. The hardware dependent internal signals are listed in table 14. Explanations of internal signals are listed in table 15.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

65

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 13:
Name of signal FAIL WARNING NUMFAIL NUMWARNING RTCERROR

Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Description Internal Fail status Internal Warning status CPU module Fail status CPU module Warning status Real Time Clock status Time Synchronization status Runtime Execution Error status IEC 61850 Error status SW Watchdog Error status LON/Mip Device Error status Runtime Application Error status Settings changed Setting groups changed Fault Tolerant Filesystem status

TIMESYNCHERROR RTEERROR IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG LMDERROR APPERROR SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR

Table 14:
Card ADxx BIM BOM IOM MIM LDCM

Self-supervision's HW dependent internal signals

Name of signal ADxx BIM-Error BOM-Error IOM-Error MIM-Error LDCM-Error Description Analog In Module Error status Binary In Module Error status Binary Out Module Error status In/Out Module Error status Millampere Input Module Error status Line Differential Communication Error status

Table 15:
Name of signal FAIL

Explanations of internal signals

Reasons for activation This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--NUMFAIL, INT--LMDERROR, INT-WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT-FTFERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR, INT--TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT-RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal signals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the real time clock.

WARNING

NUMFAIL

NUMWARNING RTCERROR Table continued on next page

66

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Name of signal TIMESYNCHERROR Reasons for activation This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset. This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups, loading or unloading of application threads. This signal will be active if the IEC61850 stack did not succeed in some actions like reading IEC61850 configuration, startup etc. This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background task is used for the measurements. LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error state. This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, etc. This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any settings are changed. This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed. This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file are corrupted and can not be recovered.

RTEERROR

IEC61850ERROR WATCHDOG

LMDERROR APPERROR

SETCHGD SETGRPCHGD FTFERROR

3.3.2.2

Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see figure 31.

Figure 31:

Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the 600 platform.

The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converters with different amplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normal REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 67

Section 3 Basic IED functions

conditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion. The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the validation part, i.e. checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected. Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, i.e. the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higherADx_HI. When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given. The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

3.3.3

Function block
IS--InternalSignal FAIL WARNING CPUFAIL CPUWARN T SYNCERR RT CERR en04000392.vsd

Figure 32:

IS function block

3.3.4

Output signals
Table 16:
Signal FAIL WARNING CPUFAIL CPUWARN TSYNCERR RTCERR

Output signals for the InternalSignal (IS---) function block

Description Internal fail Internal warning CPU fail CPU warning Time synchronization status Real time clock status

3.3.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

68

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.3.6 Technical data

Table 17:
Data Recording manner List size

Self supervision with internal event list

Value Continuous, event controlled 1000 events, first in-first out

3.4
3.4.1

Time synchronization
Introduction
Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system possible.

3.4.2
3.4.2.1

Principle of operation
General concepts Time definitions

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called the clock accuracy and means how much the error increases, i.e. how much the clock gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.

Synchronization principle

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

69

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Syncronization from a higher level

Module

Optional syncronization of modules at a lower level

en05000206.vsd

Figure 33:

Synchronization principle

A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A module can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors, which gives the module the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as a function of: The maximum error of the last used synchronization message The time since the last used synchronization message The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.

3.4.2.2

Real Time Clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) with a resolution of one nanosecond. The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098.

RTC at power off

During power off, the time in the IED time is kept by a capacitor backed RTC that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will be lost completely.

RTC at startup

At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last up time, the time in the IED will be quite accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC power has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will start at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Time synchronization startup procedure" and section "Example, binary synchronization". The first message that contains full time (as for instance LON, SNTP, GPS etc.) will give an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is 70 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Time synchronization startup procedure

Section 3 Basic IED functions

thereafter set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things will happen with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as fine: If the synchronization message, that is similar to the other messages from its origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization, that is for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other messages, a spike-filter in the IED will remove this time-message. If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following message also has a large offset, the spike filter will not act and the offset in the synchronization message will be compared to a threshold that defaults to 100 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe state and the clock is thereafter set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the threshold, the clock will be adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it will take 100 seconds or 1.7 minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse will only be used for initial setting of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds will reset the time.

Rate accuracy

In the REx670 IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is about 100 ppm, but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy will be approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant. Normally it will take 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out, and a configured interface must receive time-messages regularly, in order not to give a TSYNCERR. Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR will be given.

3.4.2.3

Synchronization alternatives
Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either the synchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and time or as a minute pulse, connected to a binary input, or via GPS. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a Ping-Pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850 network. For SNTP to operate REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 71

Section 3 Basic IED functions

properly, there must be a SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server. SNTP server requirements The SNTP server to be used shall be connected to the local network, i.e. not more than 4-5 switches/routers away from the IED. The SNTP server shall be dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with at real-time operating system, i.e. not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server shall be stable, i.e. either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local i.e. without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server i.e. without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent. Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, i.e. year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds. Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the relay, but instead the offset between the local time in the relay and the time received from 103 is added to all times (in events and so on) sent via 103. In this way the relay acts as it is synchronized from various 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a local time for each 103 session. The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).

Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module (GSM).

Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated from e.g. station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine signal. The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input. If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED.

72

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank. Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency. Pulse data: Period time (a) should be 60 seconds. Pulse length (b): Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms. Maximum pulse length is optional.

Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

a b

c
en05000251.vsd

Figure 34:

Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given. If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce. If the minute pulses are perfect, e.g. it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, e.g. it is less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be accepted. Example, binary synchronization A IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

73

Section 3 Basic IED functions

fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will either synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within 1.7 minutes. Synchronization via IRIG Synchronization with DNP3.0 The DNP3.0 communication can be the source for the course time synchronization, while the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy. The IRIG interface to the IED supplies two possible synchronization methods, IRIGB and PPS. IRIG-B IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there is a number of figures stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted. To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG module, one galvanic BNC connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a figure in the range 1-7. 00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz modulation is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector. If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information only contains the time within the year, and year information has to come from the tool or HMI. The IRIG Module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by many IRIGB clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of time-zone. It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG module. In this case, also send the local time in the messages, as this local time plus the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times. PPS

74

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG module. The PPS signal is a transition from dark to light, that occurs 1 second +- 2 us after another PPS signal. The allowed jitter of 2 us is settable.

3.4.3

Function block
TIMETIME TSYNCERR RTCERR en05000425.vsd

Figure 35:

TIME function block

3.4.4

Output signals
Table 18:
Signal TSYNCERR RTCERR

Output signals for the TIME (TIME-) function block

Description Time synchronization error Real time clock error

3.4.5

Setting parameters
Path in local HMI: Setting/Time Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization
Table 19:
Parameter CoarseSyncSrc

Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function

Range Off SPA LON SNTP Off SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP Off SNTP-Server Slow Fast Step Default Off Unit Description Coarse time synchronization source Fine time synchronization source

FineSyncSource

Off

SyncMaster

Off

Activate IEDas synchronization master Adjust rate for time synchronization

TimeAdjustRate

Fast

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

75

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 20:
Parameter CoarseSyncSrc

Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function

Range Off SPA LON SNTP DNP Off SPA LON BIN GPS GPS+SPA GPS+LON GPS+BIN SNTP GPS+SNTP IRIG-B GPS+IRIG-B PPS Off SNTP-Server Slow Fast Step Default Off Unit Description Coarse time synchronization source

FineSyncSource

Off

Fine time synchronization source

SyncMaster

Off

Activate IEDas synchronization master Adjust rate for time synchronization

TimeAdjustRate

Slow

Table 21:
Parameter ModulePosition

General settings for the TimeSynchBIN (TBIN-) function

Range 3 - 16 Step 1 Default 3 Unit Description Hardware position of IO module for time synchronization Binary input number for time synchronization Positive or negative edge detection

BinaryInput

1 - 16

BinDetection

PositiveEdge NegativeEdge

PositiveEdge

Table 22:
Parameter ServerIP-Add RedServIP-Add

General settings for the TimeSynchSNTP (TSNT-) function

Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Unit Description Server IP-address Redundant server IPaddress

76

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 23:
Parameter MonthInYear

General settings for the DaySumDSTBegin (TSTB-) function

Range January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 86400 Step Default March Unit Description Month in year when daylight time starts

DayInWeek

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time starts

WeekInMonth

Last

Week in month when daylight time starts

UTCTimeOfDay

3600

UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time starts

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

77

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 24:
Parameter MonthInYear

General settings for the DaySumTimeEnd (TSTE-) function

Range January February March April May June July August September October November December Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Last First Second Third Fourth 0 - 86400 Step Default October Unit Description Month in year when daylight time ends

DayInWeek

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time ends

WeekInMonth

Last

Week in month when daylight time ends

UTCTimeOfDay

3600

UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight time ends

Table 25:
Parameter NoHalfHourUTC

General settings for the TimeZone (TZON-) function

Range -24 - 24 Step 1 Default 0 Unit Description Number of half-hours from UTC

Table 26:
Parameter SynchType TimeDomain Encoding

Basic general settings for the TimeSynchIRIGB (TIRI-) function

Range BNC Opto LocalTime UTC IRIG-B 1344 1344TZ MinusTZ PlusTZ Step Default Opto LocalTime IRIG-B Unit Description Type of synchronization Time domain Type of encoding

TimeZoneAs1344

PlusTZ

Time zone as in 1344 standard

3.4.6

Technical data

78

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 27:
Function

Time synchronization, time tagging

Value 1 ms 1.0 ms typically

Time tagging resolution, Events and Sampled Measurement Values Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), Events and Sampled Measurement Values Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, Sampled Measurement Values

1.0 ms typically

3.5
3.5.1

Parameter setting groups

Introduction
Use the six sets of settings to optimize IED operation for different system conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the humanmachine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety of system scenarios.

3.5.2

Principle of operation
The ACGR function block has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available. A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding input to the ACGR function block. Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED. To do this the PCM 600 configuration tool must be used. The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms. More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated. Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a pulse. The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch between.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

79

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Figure 36:

Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is active. The SGC function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the PST setting tool.

3.5.3

Function block
ACGRActiveGroup ACTGRP1 GRP1 ACTGRP2 GRP2 ACTGRP3 GRP3 ACTGRP4 GRP4 ACTGRP5 GRP5 ACTGRP6 GRP6 SETCHGD en05000433.vsd

Figure 37:

ACGR function block

SGC-NoOfSetGrp MAXSETGR en05000716.vsd

3.5.4
80

Input and output signals

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 28:
Signal ACTGRP1 ACTGRP2 ACTGRP3 ACTGRP4 ACTGRP5 ACTGRP6

Input signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block

Description Selects setting group 1 as active Selects setting group 2 as active Selects setting group 3 as active Selects setting group 4 as active Selects setting group 5 as active Selects setting group 6 as active

Table 29:
Signal GRP1 GRP2 GRP3 GRP4 GRP5 GRP6 SETCHGD

Output signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block

Description Setting group 1 is active Setting group 2 is active Setting group 3 is active Setting group 4 is active Setting group 5 is active Setting group 6 is active Pulse when setting changed

3.5.5

Setting parameters
Table 30:
Parameter t

General settings for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function

Range 0.0 - 10.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit s Description Pulse length of pulse when setting changed

Table 31:
Parameter ActiveSetGrp

General settings for the NoOfSetGrp (SGC--) function

Range SettingGroup1 SettingGroup2 SettingGroup3 SettingGroup4 SettingGroup5 SettingGroup6 1-6 Step Default SettingGroup1 Unit Description ActiveSettingGroup

NoOfSetGrp

No

Number of possible setting groups to switch between

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

81

Section 3 Basic IED functions

3.6
3.6.1

Test mode functionality

Introduction
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI or PST. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.

3.6.2

Principle of operation
To be able to test the functions in the IED, you must set the terminal in the TEST mode. There are two ways of setting the terminal in the TEST mode: By configuration, activating the input of the function block TEST. By setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under the menu: TEST/IED test mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TEST is activated. The other two outputs of the function block TEST are showing which is the generator of the Test mode: On state input from configuration (OUTPUT output activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output activated). While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions are blocked. Any function can be de-blocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling. Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (the output ACTIVE in function block TEST is set to true), see example in figure 38. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible. The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the blockings were not reset. The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will be activated. The TEST function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TEST function block.

82

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from TEST function block. A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 38. The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events e.g. during a maintenance test.

Disconnection

Normal voltage U1< U2<

tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466.vsd

tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min

Figure 38:

Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection function.

3.6.3

Function block
TESTTest INPUT ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING en05000443.vsd

Figure 39:

TEST function block

3.6.4
REG 670

Input and output signals

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 83

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 32:
Signal INPUT

Input signals for the Test (TEST-) function block

Description Sets terminal in test mode when active

Table 33:
Signal ACTIVE OUTPUT SETTING NOEVENT

Output signals for the Test (TEST-) function block

Description Terminal in test mode when active Test input is active Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off) Event disabled during testmode

3.6.5

Setting parameters
Table 34:
Parameter TestMode

Basic general settings for the Test (TEST-) function

Range Off On Off On Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Test mode in operation (On) or not (Off) Event disable during testmode Command bit for test required or not during testmode

EventDisable CmdTestBit

Off Off

3.7
3.7.1

IED identifiers
Introduction
There are two functions that allow you to identify each IED individually: ProductInformation function has seven pre-set, settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important: IED Type ProductDef FirmwareVer IEDMainFunType SerialNo. Ordering No. ProductionDate.

The settings are visable on the local HMI, under: 84 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Diagnostics/IED Status/ProductIdentifiers They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance). TerminalID function is allowing you to identify the individual IED in your system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

3.7.2

Setting parameters
Table 35:
Parameter StationName StationNumber ObjectName ObjectNumber UnitName UnitNumber

General settings for the TerminalID (TEID-) function

Range 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 0 - 18 0 - 99999 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default Station name 0 Object name 0 Unit name 0 Unit Description Station name Station number Object name Object number Unit name Unit number

3.8
3.8.1

Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)

Introduction
The SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way binary inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.

3.8.2

Principle of operation
The SMBI function block, see figure 40, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, named BI1 to BI10. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBI function block.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

85

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.8.3 Function block

SI01SMBI INSTNAME BI1NAME BI2NAME BI3NAME BI4NAME BI5NAME BI6NAME BI7NAME BI8NAME BI9NAME BI10NAME BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10

en05000434.vsd

Figure 40:

SI function block

3.8.4

Input and output signals

Table 36:
Signal BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10

Output signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block

Description Binary input 1 Binary input 2 Binary input 3 Binary input 4 Binary input 5 Binary input 6 Binary input 7 Binary input 8 Binary input 9 Binary input 10

3.9
3.9.1

Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)

Introduction
The SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way binary outputs are sent from one IED 670 configuration.

86

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.9.2 Principle of operation

The SMBO function block, see figure 41, receives logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the SMT. The inputs in the SMBO are named BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.

3.9.3

Function block
SO01SMBO BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 INSTNAME BO1NAME BO2NAME BO3NAME BO4NAME BO5NAME BO6NAME BO7NAME BO8NAME BO9NAME BO10NAME en05000439.vsd

Figure 41:

SO function block

3.9.4

Input and output signals

Table 37:
Signal BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10

Input signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block

Description Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

87

Section 3 Basic IED functions

3.10
3.10.1

Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)

Introduction
The SMMI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED670 configuration.

3.10.2

Principle of operation
The SMMI function block, see figure 42, receives its inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT. The outputs on the SMMI are normally connected to the MVGGIO function block for further use of the mA signals.

3.10.3

Function block
SMI1SMMI INSTNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI5NAME AI6NAME AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6

en05000440.vsd

Figure 42:

SMI function block

3.10.4

Input and output signals

Table 38:
Signal AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AI5 AI6

Output signals for the SMMI (SMI1-) function block

Description Analog milliampere input 1 Analog milliampere input 2 Analog milliampere input 3 Analog milliampere input 4 Analog milliampere input 5 Analog milliampere input 6

88

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

3.11
3.11.1

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)

Introduction
The SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block, as it is also known) is used within the PCM 600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the Application manual, chapter Engineering of the IED). It represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.

3.11.2

Principle of operation
Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 43 and figure 44. The outputs of the SMAI are giving information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the outputs of the function block. The output singal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the in SMT connected input to AI1 to AI4. AIN is always the neutral current, calculated residual sum or the signal connected to AI4. Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions (HEDIF, BBDIF) shall always be connected to AI3P.

3.11.3

Function block
PR01SMAI BLOCK DFTSPFC GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN NOSMPLCY en05000705.vsd

Figure 43:
PR02SMAI BLOCK GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME TYPE

PR01 function block

AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN en07000130.vsd

Figure 44:

PR0212 function block

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

89

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.11.4 Input and output signals

Table 39:
Signal BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC

Input signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block

Description Block group 1 Synchronisation of DFT calculation Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation

Table 40:
Signal SYNCOUT SPFCOUT AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

Output signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block

Description Synchronisation signal from internal DFT reference function Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT reference function Group 1 analog input 3-phase group Group 1 analog input 1 Group 1 analog input 2 Group 1 analog input 3 Group 1 analog input 4 Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

Table 41:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block

Description Block group 2

Table 42:
Signal AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

Output signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block

Description Group 2 analog input 3-phase group Group 2 analog input 1 Group 2 analog input 2 Group 2 analog input 3 Group 2 analog input 4 Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

3.11.5

Setting parameters

90

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency DFT reference is then the reference.
Table 43:
Parameter DFTRefExtOut

Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Range InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Step Default InternalDFTRef Unit Description DFT reference for external output

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

ConnectionType TYPE

Ph-N 1

Ch

Input connection type 1=Voltage,2=Current

Table 44:
Parameter Negation

Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Range Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 Step Default Off Unit Description Negation

MinValFreqMeas

10

Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base Voltage

UBase

0.05 - 2000.00

0.05

400.00

kV

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

91

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 45:
Parameter DFTReference

Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Range InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 AdDFTRefCh2 AdDFTRefCh3 AdDFTRefCh4 AdDFTRefCh5 AdDFTRefCh6 AdDFTRefCh7 AdDFTRefCh8 AdDFTRefCh9 AdDFTRefCh10 AdDFTRefCh11 AdDFTRefCh12 External DFT ref Ph-N Ph-Ph 1-2 Step Default InternalDFTRef Unit Description DFT reference

ConnectionType TYPE

Ph-N 1

Ch

Input connection type 1=Voltage,2=Current

Table 46:
Parameter Negation

Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Range Off NegateN Negate3Ph Negate3Ph+N 5 - 200 Step Default Off Unit Description Negation

MinValFreqMeas

10

Limit for frequency calculation in % of UBase Base Voltage

UBase

0.05 - 2000.00

0.05

400.00

kV

3.12
3.12.1

Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)

Introduction
The SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 ph analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

3.12.2

Principle of operation
The summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks, see figure 45. In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the outputs of the function block.

92

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.12.3 Function block

SU01Sum3Ph BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC G1AI3P G2AI3P AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 en05000441.vsd

Figure 45:

SU function block

3.12.4

Input and output signals

Table 47:
Signal BLOCK DFTSYNC DFTSPFC G1AI3P G2AI3P

Input signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block

Description Block Synchronisation of DFT calculation Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT calculation Group 1 analog input 3-phase group Group 2 analog input 3-phase group

Table 48:
Signal AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4

Output signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block

Description Group analog input 3-phase group Group 1 analog input Group 2 analog input Group 3 analog input Group 4 analog input

3.12.5

Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

93

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 49:
Parameter SummationType

Basic general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Range Group1+Group2 Group1-Group2 Group2-Group1 (Group1+Group2) InternalDFTRef AdDFTRefCh1 External DFT ref Step Default Group1+Group2 Unit Description Summation type

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

Table 50:
Parameter FreqMeasMinVal

Advanced general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Range 5 - 200 Step 1 Default 10 Unit % Description Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in % of Ubase Base voltage

UBase

0.05 - 2000.00

0.05

400.00

kV

3.13
3.13.1

Authority status (AUTS)

Introduction
The AUTS function block (or the authority status function block) is an indication function block, which informs about two events related to the IED and the user authorization: the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the output USRBLKED) the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

3.13.2

Principle of operation
Whenever on of the two events described above happens, the specific output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) will be activated. The output can e.g. be connected on Event function block for LON/SPA. The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.

94

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions 3.13.3 Function block

AUTSAuthStatus USRBLKED LOGGEDON en06000503.vsd

Figure 46:

AUTS function block

3.13.4

Output signals
Table 51:
Signal USRBLKED LOGGEDON

Output signals for the AuthStatus (AUTS-) function block

Description At least one user is blocked by invalid password At least one user is logged on

3.13.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

95

Section 3 Basic IED functions

3.14
3.14.1

Goose binary receive

Function block
GB01GooseBinRcv BLOCK INSTNAME OUT1 OUT1VAL OUT2 OUT2VAL OUT3 OUT3VAL OUT4 OUT4VAL OUT5 OUT5VAL OUT6 OUT6VAL OUT7 OUT7VAL OUT8 OUT8VAL OUT9 OUT9VAL OUT10 OUT10VAL OUT11 OUT11VAL OUT12 OUT12VAL OUT13 OUT13VAL OUT14 OUT14VAL OUT15 OUT15VAL OUT16 OUT16VAL OUT1NAM OUT2NAM OUT3NAM OUT4NAM OUT5NAM OUT6NAM OUT7NAM OUT8NAM OUT9NAM OUT10NAM OUT11NAM OUT12NAM OUT13NAM OUT14NAM OUT15NAM OUT16NAM en07000047.vsd

Figure 47:

GB function block

3.14.2

Input and output signals

96

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Table 52:
Signal BLOCK INSTNAME

Input signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block

Description Block of output signals Instance name in Signal Matrix Tool

Table 53:
Signal OUT1 OUT1VAL OUT2 OUT2VAL OUT3 OUT3VAL OUT4 OUT4VAL OUT5 OUT5VAL OUT6 OUT6VAL OUT7 OUT7VAL OUT8 OUT8VAL OUT9 OUT9VAL OUT10 OUT10VAL OUT11 OUT11VAL OUT12 OUT12VAL OUT13 OUT13VAL OUT14 OUT14VAL OUT15 OUT15VAL OUT16 OUT16VAL

Output signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block

Description Binary output 1 Valid data on binary output 1 Binary output 2 Valid data on binary output 2 Binary output 3 Valid data on binary output 3 Binary output 4 Valid data on binary output 4 Binary output 5 Valid data on binary output 5 Binary output 6 Valid data on binary output 6 Binary output 7 Valid data on binary output 7 Binary output 8 Valid data on binary output 8 Binary output 9 Valid data on binary output 9 Binary output 10 Valid data on binary output 10 Binary output 11 Valid data on binary output 11 Binary output 12 Valid data on binary output 12 Binary output 13 Valid data on binary output 13 Binary output 14 Valid data on binary output 14 Binary output 15 Valid data on binary output 15 Binary output 16 Valid data on binary output 16

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

97

Section 3 Basic IED functions

Signal OUT1NAM OUT2NAM OUT3NAM OUT4NAM OUT5NAM OUT6NAM OUT7NAM OUT8NAM OUT9NAM OUT10NAM OUT11NAM OUT12NAM OUT13NAM OUT14NAM OUT15NAM OUT16NAM Description Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool

3.14.3

Setting parameters
Table 54:
Parameter Operation

Basic general settings for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off/On

98

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Section 4

Differential protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in differential protection.

4.1

Generator differential protection (PDIF, 87G)

Function block name: GDPx ANSI number: 87G IEC 61850 logical node name: GENPDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Id>

4.1.1

Introduction
Short circuit between the phases of the stator windings causes normally very large fault currents. The short circuit gives risk of damages on insulation, windings and stator core. The large short circuit currents cause large current forces, which can damage other components in the power plant, such as turbine and generator-turbine shaft. To limit the damages in connection to stator winding short circuits, the fault clearance must be as fast as possible (instantaneous). If the generator block is connected to the power system close to other generating blocks, the fast fault clearance is essential to maintain the transient stability of the non-faulted generators. Normally the short circuit fault current is very large, i.e. significantly larger than the generator rated current. There is a risk that a short circuit can occur between phases close to the neutral point of the generator, thus causing a relatively small fault current. The fault current fed from the generator itself can also be limited due to low excitation of the generator. Therefore it is desired that the detection of generator phase to phase short circuits shall be relatively sensitive, thus detecting small fault currents. It is also of great importance that the generator short circuit protection does not trip for external faults, when large fault current is fed from the generator. In order to combine fast fault clearance, sensitivity and selectivity the generator current differential protection is normally the best choice for phase to phase generator short circuits.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

99

Section 4 Differential protection

The generator differential protection is also well suited to give fast, sensitive and selective fault clearance if used for shunt reactors and small busbars.

4.1.2

Principle of operation
The task of the generator differential protection is to determine whether a fault is within the protected zone, or outside the protected zone. The protected zone is delimited by the position of current transformers, figure 48.

xx06000430.vsd

Figure 48:

Position of current transformers

If the fault is found to be internal, the faulty generator must be quickly tripped, i.e. disconnected from the network, trip of the field breaker and the power from the prime mover will be interrupted. The differential function will always use reference directions towards the protected generator as shown in figure 48. Thus the IED will always internally measure the currents on the two sides of the generator with the same reference direction towards the generator windings. Numerical IEDs have brought a large number of well-known advantages and new functionality to the protective relaying. One of the benefits is the simplicity and accuracy of calculating symmetrical components from individual phase quantities. Within the firmware of a numerical IED, it is no more difficult to calculate negativesequence components than it is to calculate zero-sequence components. Diversity of operation principles integrated in the same protection function enhances the overall performance without a significant increase in cost. A novelty in generator differential protection, namely the negative-sequence-currentbased internal-external fault discriminator, is used with advantage in order to determine whether a fault is internal or external. Indeed, the internal-external fault discriminator not only positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but can as well independently detect minor faults which may not be felt by the "usual" differential protection based on operate-restrain characteristic. The function is using fundamental frequency phase current phasors and negative sequence current phasors. These quantities are derived outside the differential protection function block, in the general pre-processing blocks. The differentials function is also using the DC current and the 2nd and 5th harmonic currents. These currents are calculated in the differentials block using the current samples.

100

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

4.1.2.1 Function calculation principles
To make a differential IED as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained differential characteristic is used. The protection should be provided with a proportional bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain percentage differential current related to the current through the generator stator winding. This stabilizes the protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the system to have good basic sensitivity. The following chapters explain how these quantities are calculated. The fundamental frequency phasors of the phase currents from the both sides of the generator (neutral side and terminal side) are delivered to the differentials function from pre-processing modules in the IED.

4.1.2.2

Fundamental frequency differential currents

The fundamental frequency differential current is a vectorial sum (i.e. sum of fundamental frequency phasors) of the individual phase currents from the two sides of the protected generator. The magnitude of the fundamental frequency differential current, in phase L1, is as calculated in equation 1:
Idiff _ L1 =

( Re ( IL1n + IL1t ) ) + ( Im ( IL1n + IL1t ) )

2

(Equation 1)

One common fundamental frequency bias current is used. The bias current is the magnitude of the highest measured current in the protected circuit. The bias current is not allowed to drop instantaneously, instead, it decays exponentially with a time constant T = 250 ms. These principles make the differential relay more secure, with less risk to operate for external faults. The maximum principle brings as well more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the operate - restrain characteristic.
Ibias = max( IL1n, IL 2 n, IL3n, IL1t , IL 2t , IL 3t )
(Equation 2)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

101

Section 4 Differential protection

IL1n

IL1t

Internal fault: IL1t Idiff

IL1n

Idiff _ L1 =

(Re(IL1n + IL1t ))2 + (Im(IL1n + IL1t ))2

en07000018.vsd

Ibias = max(IL1n, IL2n, IL3n, IL1t, IL2t , IL3t )

Figure 49: Internal fault.

IL1n

IL1t

External fault: IL1n = - IL1t

IL1t Idiff = 0
Figure 50: External fault.

IL1n
en07000019.vsd

The generator differential protection function uses two mutually independent limits, to which magnitudes of the three fundamental frequency usual differential currents are compared at each execution of the differential protection function. These two 102 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

limits divide, each of them independently, the operate current restrain current plane into two regions: the operate (trip) region and the restrain (block) region, see figure 51.Two kinds of protection are obtained: the non-stabilized (instantaneous) differential protection the stabilized differential protection.

The non-stabilized (instantaneous) differential protection is used for very high differential currents, where it should be beyond any doubt, that the fault is internal. This limit, (defined by the setting UnrestrainedLimit), is a constant, not proportional the bias (restrain) current. No harmonic, or any other restrain is applied to this limit, which is therefore called the unrestrained limit. The reset ratio of the characteristic is equal to 0.95. The stabilized differential protection applies a differential (operate) current, and the common bias (restrain) current, on the operate restrain characteristic as shown in figure 51. Here, the actual limit, where the protection can operate, is adaptive, as the sensitivity of the protection is a function of the bias (restrain) current. The operate value, is stabilized by the bias current. This operate restrain characteristic is represented by a double-slope, double-breakpoint characteristic. The restrained characteristic is determined by the following 5 settings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, set as multiple of generator rated current) EndSection1 (End of section 1, set as multiple of generator rated current) EndSection2 (End of section 2, set as multiple of generator rated current) SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2 of the characteristic, set in percent) SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 3 of the characteristic, set in percent)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

103

Section 4 Differential protection

operate current [ times I1r ] 5

Operate unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit

Operate conditionally

2 Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 SlopeSection3

1 IdMin SlopeSection2 0 0 1 2 3

Restrain 4 5

EndSection1 EndSection2

restrain current [ times I1r ]

en05000187.vsd

Figure 51:

Operate - restrain characteristic

slope = D Ioperate 100% D Irestrain

(Equation 3)

The operate restrain characteristic is tailor-made, in other words, it can be constructed by the user. A default operate restrain characteristic is suggested which should give acceptably good results in a majority of applications. The operate restrain characteristic has in principle three sections with a section-wise proportionality of the operate value to the common restrain (bias) current. The reset ratio is in all parts of the characteristic equal to 0.95. Section 1 is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal currents flow through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for higher false differential currents is low. With generators the only cause of small false differential currents in this section can be tolerances of the current transformers used on both sides of the protected generator. Slope in section 1 is always zero percent. Normally, with the protected machine at rated load, the restrain, bias current will be around 1 pu, i.e. equal to the machine rated current.

104

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope with false differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents through the current transformers. The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher tolerance to substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault currents, which may be expected in this section. Temporarily decreased sensitivity of differential protection is activated if the input Boolean variable DESENSIT is (temporarily) set to 1 (TRUE). In this case, a new, separate limit is superposed the otherwise unchanged operate bias characteristic. This limit is called TempIdMin and is a setting. The value of the setting TempIdMin must be given as a multiple of the setting IdMin. In this case no trip command can be issued if all fundamental frequency differential currents are below the value of the setting TempIdMin.
operate current [ times I1r ] 5

Operate unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit

Operate conditionally

2 Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 SlopeSection3

TempIdMin IdMin

1 SlopeSection2 0 0 1 2 3

Restrain 4 5

EndSection1 EndSection2

restrain current [ times I1r ]

en06000637.vsd

Figure 52:

The value of TempIdMin

slope = D Ioperate 100% D Irestrain

(Equation 4)

The generator differential protection can be conditionally temporarily desensitized if the Boolean setting OperDCBiasing is set to 1 (TRUE). In this case, the DC REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 105

Section 4 Differential protection

component is on-line extracted from the instantaneous differential currents. The highest DC component is taken as a kind of bias in the sense that the highest sensitivity of the differential protection is inversely proportional to the ratio of this DC component to the maximum fundamental frequency differential current. Similar to the desensitization described above under 3.2.1 a separate (temporary) limit is activated. The value of this limit is limited upwards to the generator rated current, or 3 times IdMin, whichever is smaller. This temporary extra limit decays exponentially from its maximum value with a time constant equal to T = 1 second. This feature should be used when unmatched CT:s are used on the generator or shut reactor, especially where a long DC time constant can be expected. The new limit is superposed the otherwise unchanged operate bias characteristic, and temporarily determines the highest sensitivity of the differential protection. This temporary sensitivity should be lower than the sensitivity in section 1 of the operate bias characteristic. This DC desensitization is not active, if a disturbance has been detected and characterized as internal fault.

4.1.2.3

Supplementary criteria
To relieve somewhat the burden of constructing an exact optimal operate restrain characteristic, two special features supplement the basic stabilized differential protection function, making the generator differential protection a very reliable one. The supplementary criteria are: 1. 2. Internal/external fault discriminator. (enhances, or blocks, the trip command) Harmonic restrain. (blocks only)

The internal/external fault discriminator is a very reliable supplementary criterion. It discriminates with a high speed between internal and external faults. The discriminator is the main part of what is here called the negative-sequence-currentbased differential protections. It is recommended that this feature is always used (i.e. enabled, OpNegSeqDiff = 1). If a fault is classified as internal, then any eventual block signals by the harmonic criterion are overridden, and the differential protection can operate very quickly without any further delay. If a fault (disturbance) is classified as external, then generally, but not unconditionally, a trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external, further harmonic analysis of the fault conditions is initiated. If all the differential currents which caused their respective start signals to be set, are free of harmonic pollution, that is, if no harmonic block signal has been set, then a (minor) internal fault, simultaneous with a predominant external fault, can be suspected. This conclusion can be drawn because at external faults, major false

106

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

differential currents can only exist when one or more current transformers saturate. In this case, the false instantaneous differential currents are highly polluted by higher harmonic components, the 2nd, the 5th, etc. The existence of relatively high negative-sequence currents is in itself an indication of a disturbance, as the negative-sequence currents are superimposed, pure-fault quantities. The negative-sequence currents are measurable indications of abnormal conditions. The negative sequence currents are particularly suitable for directional tests. The negative sequence internal /external fault discriminator works satisfactorily even in case of three-phase faults. Because of the fundamental frequency components (50/60 Hz) of the decaying DC offset of the fault currents, the system is not quite symmetrical immediately after the fault. Thanks to the transient existence of the negative sequence system, faults can be distinguished as internal or external, even for symmetrical three-phase faults. The internal/external fault discriminator responds to the relative phase angles of the negative sequence fault currents at both ends of the stator winding. If the two negative sequence currents flow in the same direction, the fault is internal. If the two negative sequence currents flow in opposite directions, the fault is external. In other words, under external fault condition, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180. Under internal fault condition, the angle is ideally 0, referred to the Used CT reference directions, but due to possible different negative-sequence impedance angles on both sides of the internal fault, it may differ somewhat from 0.

The setting NegSeqROA, see figure 53, represents the so called Relay Operate Angle, which determines the boundary between the internal-, and external fault regions. It can be selected in the range 30 to 90, with a step of 1. The default value is 60. The default setting favours somewhat security in comparison to dependability. Magnitudes of both negative-sequence currents to be compared as to their phase positions must be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. The limit value IminNegSeq is settable in the range [0.02 0.20] of the protected generator rated current. Only if magnitudes of both currents are above the limit IminNegSeq, the angle between the two currents is calculated. If any of the two currents is too small, no decision is taken regarding the relative position of the fault, and this feature then remains inactive rather than to produce a wrong decision. The relative angle is then assigned the value of 120 (2.094 radians). If this value persists, then this is an indication that no directional comparison has been made. Neither internal-, nor external fault (disturbance) is declared in this case.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

107

Section 4 Differential protection

90 120 60

150

30

External Fault Zone 180

Internal Fault Zone ROA

CT1 I- : Reference 210 330

240 270

300

en06000433.vsd

Figure 53:

NegSeqROA determines the boundary between the internal- and external fault regions

Unrestrained negative sequence differential protection

If one or more start signals have been set by the restrained differential protection algorithm, because one or more of the fundamental frequency (usual) differential currents entered the operate region of the restrained differential protection, then the internal/external fault discriminator can enhance the final trip command by the differential protection, or it can cancel it. If a fault is classified as internal, then any eventual block signals by the harmonic criterion are overridden, and the differential protection operates immediately without any further delay. This makes the overall generator differential protection very fast. Operation of this protection is signalled on the output of the function as TRNSUNRE.

Sensitive negative sequence differential protection

The difference from the unrestrained negative sequence differential protection, described above, is that the sensitive one does not require any start signal to be set. It is enough that both of the negative sequence currents, contributions to the total negative sequence differential current, which should be compared, is above the setting IminNegSeq. Thus, this protection can be made very sensitive. Further, an intentional delay of one cycle is added in order not to inadvertently operate for some eventual transients. Further, the sensitive negative sequence differential protection is automatically disabled when the bias current exceeds 1.5 times the rated current of 108 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

the protected generator. Operation of this protection is signalled on the output of the function as TRNSENS.

4.1.2.4

Harmonic restrain
Harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power transformer differential protections. The goal there was to prevent an unwanted trip command due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, due to magnetizing currents at over-voltages, or external faults. Harmonic restrain is just as useful with generator differential protection. The harmonic analysis is only executed in those phases, where start signals have been set. There is no magnetizing inrush to a generator, but there may be some in case of shunt reactors. The false initial differential currents of a shunt reactor have an appreciable amount of higher harmonic currents. At external faults dangerous false differential currents can arise for different reasons, mainly due to saturation of one or more current transformers. The false differential currents will in this case have a considerable amount of higher harmonics which can therefore be used to prevent an unwanted trip of a healthy generator or shunt reactor. If a fault is recognized as external by the internal/external fault discriminator, but nevertheless one or more start signals have been set, then the harmonic analysis is initiated in the phases with start signal, as previously described. If all of the instantaneous differential currents are free of higher harmonics, then a (minor) internal fault is assumed to have happened simultaneously with a predominant external one. A trip command is then allowed.

4.1.2.5

Cross-block logic scheme

The cross-block logic says that in order to issue a common trip command, the harmonic contents in all phases with a start signal set (start = TRUE) must be below the limit defined with the setting HarmDistLimit. In the opposite case, no trip command will be issued. The cross-block logic is active if the setting OpCrossBlock = TRUE. Always using the cross-block logic, the false trips can be prevented for external faults in cases where the internal / external fault discriminator should for some reason fail to declare an external fault. For internal faults, the higher frequency components of an instantaneous differential current will most often be relatively low compared to the fundamental frequency component. While for an external (heavy) fault it will be relatively high. For external faults with moderate fault currents, there will be little or no current transformer saturation and only small false differential currents. The principle design of the generator differential protection is shown in figure 54.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

109

Section 4 Differential protection

Phasors IL1N, IL2N,IL3N Calculation Idiff and Ibias

Magnitude Idiff and Ibias

Phasors IL1T, IL2T,IL3T

Diff.prot. characteristic

Start phase selective

TRIP Signals

START Signals

BLOCK Signals Samples IL1N, IL2N,IL3N Calculation instantaneous Idiff Samples Idiff Hamonic analysis: DC, 2nd and 5th Harm. Block

Samples IAT, IBT,ICT

Start and trip logic

INTFAULT EXTFAULT OPENCT OPENCTAL

Phasor IL1N (neg.seq.)

Phasor IL1T (neg.seq.)

Calculation negative sequence Idiff

Internal/ External Fault Discriminator and Sensitive differential protection

Intern/ extern Fault

Analog Outputs

en06000434.vsd

Figure 54:

Principle design of the generator differential protection

Simplified logic diagrams of the function is shown in figures below.

110

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

BLKUNRES IdUnre IDL1MAG IBIAS BLOCK BLKRES STL1

a b

b>a

AND

TRIPUNREL1

AND

AND OR
IDL1 2nd and 5th Harmonic

TRIPRESL1

1
BLKHL1

Cross Block from L2 or L3 OpCrossBlock=On

AND AND

Cross Block to L2 or L3

en07000020.vsd

Figure 55:

Generator differential logic diagram 1.

Neg.Seq. Diff Current Contributions

Internal/ External Fault discrimin ator

EXTFAULT INTFAULT

TRNSSENS

OpNegSeqDiff=On
IBIAS
a b

AND

b>a

Constant
BLKNSSEN BLKNSUNR BLOCK STL1 STL2 STL3

AND OR

TRNSUNR

en07000021.vsd

Figure 56:

Generator differential logic diagram 2.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

111

Section 4 Differential protection

STL1 STL2 STL3 BLKHL1 BLKHL2 BLKHL3

OR

START

OR

BLKH

en07000022.vsd

Figure 57:

Generator differential logic diagram 3.

TRIPRESL1 TRIPRESL2 TRIPRESL3 TRIPUNREL1 TRIPUNREL2 TRIPUNREL3

OR

TRIPRES

OR

TRIPUNRE

TRNSSENS TRNSUNR

OR

TRIP

en07000023.vsd

Figure 58:

Generator differential logic diagram 4.

4.1.3

Function block
GDP1GENPDIF_87G I3PNCT1 I3PNCT2 I3PTCT1 I3PTCT2 BLOCK BLKRES BLKUNRES BLKNSUNR BLKNSSEN DESENSIT TRIP TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRNSUNR TRNSSENS START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLKH IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDNSMAG IBIAS en07000025.vsd

Figure 59:

GDP function block

112

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection 4.1.4 Input and output signals

Table 55:
Signal I3PNCT1 I3PNCT2 I3PTCT1 I3PTCT2 BLOCK BLKRES BLKUNRES BLKNSUNR BLKNSSEN DESENSIT

Input signals for the GENPDIF_87G (GDP1-) function block

Description Neutral side input1 Neutral side input2 Terminal side input1 Terminal side input2 Block of function Block of trip command by the restrained diff. protection Block of trip by unrestrained "instantaneous" diff. prot. Block of trip for unrestr. neg. seq. differential feature Block of trip for sensitive neg. seq. differential feature Raise pick up: function temporarily desensitized

Table 56:
Signal TRIP TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRNSUNR TRNSSENS START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLKH IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDNSMAG IBIAS

Output signals for the GENPDIF_87G (GDP1-) function block

Description General, common trip signal Trip signal from restrained differential protection Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection Trip signal from unrestr. neg. seq. diff. protection Trip signal from sensitive neg. seq. diff. protection Common start signal from any phase Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Common harmonic block signal Instantaneous differential current L1; in primary Amperes Instantaneous differential current L2; in primary Amperes Instantaneous differential current L3; in primary Amperes Negative Sequence Differential current; in primary Amperes Magnitude of the common Bias current; in primary Amperes

4.1.5

Setting parameters

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

113

Section 4 Differential protection

Table 57:
Parameter IBase

Basic general settings for the GENPDIF_87G (GDP1-) function

Range 100.0 - 100000.0 Step 0.1 Default 5000.0 Unit A Description Rated current of protected generator, Amperes Invert CT 2 curr., yes (1) or no (0). Default is no (0).

InvertCT2Curr

No Yes

No

Table 58:
Parameter Operation IdMin

Basic parameter group settings for the GENPDIF_87G (GDP1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 1.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 0.25 Unit IB Description Operation Off / On Section 1 sensitivity, multiple of generator rated current Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of generator rated current Negative Sequence Differential Enable Off/On Neg. sequence curr. limit, as multiple of gen. rated curr.

IdUnre

1.00 - 50.00

0.01

10.00

IB

OpNegSeqDiff

No Yes 0.02 - 0.20

Yes

IMinNegSeq

0.01

0.04

IB

Table 59:
Parameter EndSection1

Advanced parameter group settings for the GENPDIF_87G (GDP1-) function

Range 0.20 - 1.50 Step 0.01 Default 1.25 Unit IB Description End of section 1, multiple of generator rated current End of section 2, multiple of generator rated current Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Operation On / Off for cross-block logic between phases Operate Angle of int/ ext neg. seq. fault discriminator, deg (Total) relative harmonic distorsion limit, percent

EndSection2

1.00 - 10.00

0.01

3.00

IB

SlopeSection2

10.0 - 50.0

0.1

40.0

SlopeSection3

30.0 - 100.0

0.1

80.0

OpCrossBlock

No Yes 30.0 - 120.0

Yes

NegSeqROA

0.1

60.0

Deg

HarmDistLimit

5.0 - 100.0

0.1

10.0

Table continued on next page

114

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Parameter TempIdMin Range 1.0 - 5.0 Step 0.1 Default 2.0 Unit IdMin Description Temp. Id pickup when input raisePickUp=1, multiple of IdMin Additional trip delay, when input raisePickUp=1 Operation DC biasing On / Off

AddTripDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

OperDCBiasing

Off On

Off

4.1.6

Technical data
Table 60:
Function Reset ratio Unrestrained differential current limit Base sensitivity function Negative sequence current level Operate time, restrained function Reset time, restrained function Operate time, unrestrained function Reset time, unrestrained function Operate time, negative sequence unrestrained function Critical impulse time, unrestrained function

Generator differential protection (PDIF, 87G)

Range or value > 95% (1-50)pu of Ibase (0.051.00)pu of Ibase (0.020.2)pu of Ibase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x set level 20 ms typically at 2 to 0 x set level 12 ms typically at 0 to 5 x set level 25 ms typically at 5 to 0 x set level 15 ms typically at 0 to 5 x set level 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x set level Accuracy 2.0% of set value 2.0% of Ir 1.0% of Ir -

4.2

Transformer differential protection (PDIF, 87T)

Table 61: Transformer differential protection, two winding
IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: T2DxANSI number: 87T IEC 61850 logical node name: T2WPDIF

3Id/I

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

115

Section 4 Differential protection

Table 62:

Transformer differential protection, three winding

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: T3DxANSI number: 87T IEC 61850 logical node name: T3WPDIF

3Id/I

4.2.1

Introduction
The REx 670 differential function for two winding and three winding transformers is provided with internal CT ratio matching and vector group compensation, when required zero sequence current elimination is made internally in the software. The function can be provided with up to six three phase sets of current inputs. All current inputs are provided with percentage bias restraint features, making the REx 670 suitable for two- or three winding transformers in multi-breaker station arrangements.
2-winding applications 2-winding power transformer
xx05000048.vsd

xx05000049.vsd

2-winding power transformer with unconnected delta tertiary winding 2-winding power transformer with 2 circuit breakers on one side 2-winding power transformer with 2 circuit breakers and 2 CT-sets on both sides

xx05000050.vsd

xx05000051.vsd

3-winding applications Table continued on next page

116

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

3-winding power transformer with all three windings connected

xx05000052.vsd

3-winding power transformer with 2 circuit breakers and 2 CT-sets on one side

xx05000053.vsd

Autotransformer with 2 circuit breakers and 2 CT-sets on 2 out of 3 sides

xx05000057.vsd

Temp picture
Figure 60: CT group arrangement for differential protection and other protections

The setting facilities cover for applications of the differential protection to all types of power transformers and autotransformers with or without on-load tap-changer as well as for shunt reactor or and local feeder within the station. An adaptive stabilizing feature is included for heavy through-faults. By introducing the tap changer position, the differential protection pick-up can be set to optimum sensitivity covering internal faults with low fault level. Stabilization is included for inrush currents respectively for overexcitation condition. Adaptive stabilization is also included for system recovery inrush and CT saturation for external faults. A fast high set unrestrained differential current protection is included for very high speed tripping at high internal fault currents. Innovative sensitive differential protection feature, based on the theory of symmetrical components, offers best possible coverage for power transformer windings turn-to-turn faults.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

117

Section 4 Differential protection 4.2.2 Principle of operation

The task of the power transformer differential protection is to determine whether a fault is within the protected zone, or outside the protected zone. The protected zone is delimited by the position of current transformers (see figure 61), and in principle can include more objects than just transformer. If the fault is found to be internal, the faulty power transformer must be quickly disconnected. The main CTs are normally supposed to be starWYE connected. The main CTs can be stared in any way (i.e. either "ToObject" or "FromObject"). However internally the differential function will always use reference directions towards the protected transformer as shown in figure 61. Thus the IED will always internally measure the currents on all sides of the power transformer with the same reference direction towards the power transformer windings.
IW1 Z1S1 IW1 IW2 Z1S2 IW2

E1S1

E1S2

IED

en05000186.vsd

Figure 61:

Typical CT location and definition of positive current direction

Even in a healthy power transformer, the currents are generally not equal when they flow through the power transformer, due to the turn"s ratio and the connection group of the protected transformer. Therefore the differential protection must first correlate all currents to each other before any calculation can be performed. In numerical differential protections this correlation and comparison is performed mathematically. First, compensation for the protected transformer transformation ratio and connection group is made, and then the currents are compared. This makes the external auxiliary (i.e. interposing) current transformers unnecessary. Conversion of all currents to the common reference side of the power transformer is performed by pre-programmed coefficient matrices, which depend on the protected power transform transformation ratio and connection group. Once the power transformer vector group and rated currents and voltages has been entered by the user, the differential protection is capable to calculate off-line matrix coefficients in order to perform the required on-line current comparison in accordance with the fixed equation. Numerical IEDs have brought a large number of well-known advantages and new functionality to the protective relaying. One of the benefits is the simplicity and accuracy of calculating symmetrical components from individual phase quantities. Within the firmware of a numerical IED, it is no more difficult to calculate negative118 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

sequence components than it is to calculate zero-sequence components. Diversity of operation principles integrated in the same protection function enhances the overall performance without a significant increase in cost. A novelty in power transformer differential protection, namely the negativesequence-current-based internal-external fault discriminator, is used with advantage in order to determine whether a fault is internal or external. Indeed, the internalexternal fault discriminator not only positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but can as well independently detect minor faults which may not be felt by the "usual" differential protection based on operate-restrain characteristic.

4.2.2.1

Function calculation principles

To make a differential IED as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained differential characteristic have been developed and are now adopted as the general practice in the protection of power transformers. The protection should be provided with a proportional bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain percentage differential current related to the current through the transformer. This stabilizes the protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the system to have good basic sensitivity. The following chapters explain how these quantities are calculated.

Fundamental frequency differential currents

The fundamental frequency differential current is a vectorial sum (i.e. sum of fundamental frequency phasors) of the individual phase currents from different side of the protected power transformer. Before any differential current can be calculated, the power transformer phase shift, and its transformation ratio, must be allowed for. Conversion of all currents to a common reference is performed in two steps: all current phasors are phase-shifted to (i.e. referred to) the phase-reference side, (whenever possible a first winding with starWYE connection) all currents magnitudes are always referred to the first winding of the power transformer (typically transformer high-voltage side)

The two steps of conversion are made simultaneously on-line by the pre-programmed coefficient matrices, as shown in equation 5 for a two-winding power transformer, and in equation 6 for a three-winding power transformer. These are internal compensation within the differential function. The protected power transformer data are always entered as they are given on the nameplate. Differential function will by it self correlate nameplate data and select proper reference windings.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

119

Section 4 Differential protection

IDL1 IL1_ W 1 IL1_ W 2 IDL 2 = A IL 2 _ W 1 + Un _ W 2 B IL 2 _ W 2 Un _ W 1 IDL 3 IL 3 _ W 1 IL 3 _ W 2

1 2 3
(Equation 5)

where: 1. 2. 3. is Differential Currents is Differential current contribution from W1 side is Differential current contribution from W2 side

IDL1 IL1_ W 1 IL1_ W 2 IL1_ W 3 IDL 2 = A IL 2 _ W 1 + Vn _ W 2 B IL 2 _ W 2 + Vn _ W 3 C IL 2 _ W 3 Vn _ W 1 Vn _ W 1 IDL3 IL3 _ W 1 IL3 _ W 3 IL3 _ W 2

1 2 3 4
(Equation 6)

where: 1. 2. 3. 4. is Differential Currents is Differential current contribution from W1 side is Differential current contribution from W2 side is Differential current contribution from W3 side

and where, for equation 5 and equation 6: IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IL1_W1 IL2_W1 IL3_W1 IL1_W2 IL2_W2 IL3_W2 IL1_W3 IL2_W3 IL3_W3 Ur_W1 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L1 (in W1 side primary amperes) is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L2 (in W1 side primary amperes) is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L3C (in W1 side primary amperes) is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on W1 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on W1 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on W1 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on W2 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on W2 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on W3 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on W3 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on W3 side is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W1 side (setting parameter)

Table continued on next page

120

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Ur_W2 Ur_W3 A, B & C

is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2 side (setting parameter) is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W3 side (setting parameter) are three by three matrices with numerical coefficients

Values of the matrix A, B & C coefficients depend on: 1. 2. 3. Power transformer winding connection type, such as starWYE (i.e. Y/y) or delta (i.e. D/d) Transformer vector group such as Yd1, Dy11, YNautod5, Yy0d5 etc., which introduce phase displacement between individual windings currents in multiples of 30. Settings for elimination of zero sequence currents for individual windings.

When the end user enters all these parameters, transformer differential function automatically calculates off-line the matrix coefficients. During this calculations the following rules are used: For the phase reference, the first winding with set starWYE (i.e. Y) connection is always used. For example, if the power transformer is a Yd1 power transformer, the HV winding (Y) is taken as the phase reference winding. If the power transformer is a Dy1, then the LV winding (y) is taken for the phase reference. If there is no starWYE connected winding, such as in Dd0 type of power transformers, then the HV delta winding (D) is automatically chosen as the phase reference winding. The fundamental frequency differential currents are in general composed of currents of all sequences, i.e. the positive-, the negative-, and the zero-sequence currents. If the zero-sequence currents are eliminated (see section "Optional Elimination of Zerosequence Currents"), then the differential currents can consist only of the positive-, and the negative-sequence currents. When the zero-sequence current is subtracted on one power transformer side, then it is subtracted from each individual phase current. As it can be seen from equation 5 and equation 6 the first entered winding (i.e. W1) is always taken for ampere level reference (i.e. current magnitudes from all other sides are always transferred to W1 side). In other words, within the differential protection function, all differential currents and bias current are always expressed in HV side primary Amperes. It can be shown that the values of the matrix A, B & C coefficients (see equation 5 and equation 6) can be in advanced pre-calculated depending on the relative phase shift between the reference winding and other power transformer windings. Table 63 summarizes the values of the matrices for all standard phase shifts between windings.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

121

Section 4 Differential protection

Table 63:

Matrices for differential current calculation

Matrix with Zero Sequence Reduction set to On Matrix with Zero Sequence Reduction set to Off

Matrix for Reference Winding

2 -1 -1 1 -1 2 -1 3 -1 -1 2

1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
Not applicable. Matrix on the left used.

Matrix for winding with 30 lagging

1 -1 0 1 0 1 -1 3 -1 0 1
Matrix for winding with 60 lagging

1 1 1 3 -2
Matrix for winding with 90 lagging

-2 1 1

-2 1

0 -1 0 0 0 -1 -1 0 0
Not applicable. Matrix on the left used.

0 -1 1 1 1 0 -1 3 -1 1 0

Matrix for winding with 120 lagging

-1 -1 2 1 2 -1 -1 3 -1 2 -1
-1 0 1 1 1 -1 0 3 0 1 -1
-2 1 1 3 1
1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
Not applicable. Matrix on the left used.

Matrix for winding with 150 lagging

Matrix for winding which is in opposite phase

-2 1 1 -2

-1 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 -1
Not applicable. Matrix on the left used.

Matrix for winding with 150 leading

0 3 1

-1

1 -1 0

-1

Matrix for winding with 120 leading

-1 2 -1 1 -1 -1 2 3 2 -1 -1

0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

Table continued on next page

122

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Matrix with Zero Sequence Reduction set to On Matrix for winding with 90 leading Matrix with Zero Sequence Reduction set to Off Not applicable. Matrix on the left used.

0 1 -1 1 -1 0 1 3 1 -1 0
Matrix for winding with 60 leading

1 1 -2 3 1
Matrix for winding with 30 leading

1 1 -2

-2 1 1

0 0 -1 -1 0 0 0 -1 0
Not applicable. Matrix on the left used.

1 0 -1 1 -1 1 0 3 0 -1 1

By using this table complete equation for calculation of fundamental frequency differential currents for two winding power transformer with YNd5 vector group and enabled zero sequence current reduction on HV side will be derived. From the given power transformer vector group the following is possible to be concluded: 1. 2. HV winding will be used as reference winding and zero sequence currents shall be subtracted on that side LV winding is lagging for 150

With help of table 63, the following matrix equation can be written for this power transformer:

IDL1 2 -1 -1 IL1_ W1 -1 0 1 IL1_ W 2 IDL2 = 1 -1 2 -1 IL2 _ W1 + Ur _ W 2 1 1 -1 0 IL2 _ W 2 3 Ur _ W1 3 IDL 3 1 1 2 IL 3_ W 1 0 1 1 IL 3_ W 2 (Equation 25)

where: IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IL1_W1 IL2_W1 IL3_W1 IL1_W2 IL2_W2 is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L1 (in W1 side primary amperes) is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L2 (in W1 side primary amperes) is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase L3 (in W1 side primary amperes) is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on W1 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on W1 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on W1 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L1 on W2 side is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L2 on W2 side

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

123

Section 4 Differential protection

IL3_W2 Ur_W1 Ur_W2

is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase L3 on W2 side is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W1 side (setting parameter) is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2 side (setting parameter)

As marked in equation 5 and equation 6, the first term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from W1 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from W2 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. The third term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from W3 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These current contributions are important, because they are used for calculation of common bias current. The fundamental frequency differential currents are the "usual" differential currents, the magnitudes of which are applied in a phase-wise manner to the operate - restrain characteristic of the differential protection. The magnitudes of the differential currents can be read as service values from the function and they are available as outputs IDL1MAG, IDL2MAG, IDL3MAG from the differential protection function block. Thus they can be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault condition.

On-line compensation for on-load tap-changer movement

On-load tap-changer (OLTC) is a mechanical device, which is used to stepwise change number of turns within one power transformer winding. Consequently the power transformer overall turns ratio is changed. Typically the OLTC is located within the HV winding (i.e. winding 1) of the power transformer. By operating OLTC it is possible to stepwise regulate voltage on the LV side of the power transformer. However at the same time the differential protection for power transformer is unbalanced. Differential function in IED 670 has built-in feature to continuously monitor the OLTC position and dynamically compensate on-line for changes in power transformer turns ratio. Differential currents are calculated as shown in equation 5and equation 6. If by setting parameters is defined on which winding OLTC is located and what is the no-load voltage change for each step the differential function will make no load voltage on that power transformer side dependent on actual OLTC position. Thus, if for example the OLTC is located within winding 1 the no-load voltage Vn_W1 will be treated as function of actual OLTC position in equation 5and equation 6. Thus for every OLTC position corresponding value for Ur_W1 will be calculated and used in abovementioned equations. By doing this complete on-line compensation for OLTC movement is achieved. Differential protection will be ideally balanced for every OLTC position and no false differential current will appear irrespective on actual OLTC position. 124 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Typically the minimum differential protection pickup for power transformer with OLTC is set between 30% to 40%. However with this OLTC compensation feature it is possible to set differential protection in IED 670 to more sensitive pickup value of 15% to 20%. OLTC position is measured within IEC 670 by function block YLTC. Within this function block the OLTC position value is continuously monitored to insure its integrity. When any error with OLTC position is detected the alarm is given which shall be connected to the OLTCxAL input into the differential function block. While OLTCxAL input has logical value one the differential protection minimum pickup, originally defined by setting parameter IdMin, will be increased by the set range of the OLTC. Alternatively the differential current alarm feature can be used to alarm for any problems in the whole OLTC compensation chain. It shall be noted that: two-winding differential protection in IED 670 can on-line compensate for one OLTC within protected power transformer three-winding differential protection in IED 670 can on-line compensate for up to two OLTCs within protected power transformer

Differential current alarm

Fundamental frequency differential current level is monitored all the time within the differential function. As soon as all three fundamental frequency differential currents are above set threshold defined by setting parameter IDiffAlarm a delay on pickup timer is started. When the pre-set time, defined by setting parameter tAlarmDelay, has expired the differential current alarm is generated and output signal IDALARM is set to logical value one. This feature can be effectively used to provide alarm when OLTC position compensation is used and something in the whole compensation chain goes wrong. This alarm can be as well used with some additional IED configuration logic to desensitize the differential function.

Bias current

The bias current is calculated as the highest current amongst individual winding current contributions to the total fundamental frequency differential currents, as shown in equation 5 and equation 6. All individual winding current contributions are already referred to the power transformer winding one side Amperes (typically power transformer HV winding) and therefore they can be compared regarding their magnitudes. There are six (or nine in case of three winding transformer) contributions to the total fundamental differential currents, which are the candidates for the common bias current. The highest individual current contribution is taken as a common bias (restrain) current for all three phases. This "maximum principle" makes the differential protection more secure, with less risk to operate for external faults and in the same time brings more meaning to the breakpoint settings of the operate - restrain characteristic. It shall be noted that if the zero-sequence currents are subtracted from the separate contributions to the total differential current, then the zero-sequence component is automatically eliminated from the bias current as well. This ensures that for secondary REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 125

Section 4 Differential protection

injection from just one power transformer side the bias current is always equal to the highest differential current regardless of the fault type. During normal through-load operation of the power transformer, the bias current is equal to the maximum load current from two (three) power transformer windings. The magnitudes of the common bias (restrain) current expressed in the HV side Amperes can be read as service values from the function. In the same time it is available as outputs IBIAS from the differential protection function block. Thus, it can be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault condition. For application with so called "T" configuration, i.e. two restraint CT inputs from one side of the protected power transformer, such as in the case of breaker-and-a-half scheme the primary CT ratings can be much higher then the rating of the protected power transformer. In order to determine the bias current for such T configuration, the two separate currents flowing on the T-side can be scaled by additional setting. This is done in order to prevent unwanted de-sensitizing of the overall differential protection. In addition to that, the resultant currents into the protected power transformer winding, which is not directly measured is calculated, and included as well in the common bias calculation. The rest of the bias calculation procedure is the same as in protection schemes without breaker-and-a-half scheme.

Optional Elimination of Zero-sequence Currents

To avoid unwanted trips for external earth faults, the zero sequence currents should be subtracted on the side of power transformer, where the zero-sequence currents can flow at external earth faults. The zero-sequence currents can be explicitly eliminated from the differential currents and common bias current calculation by parameter settings, which are available for every individual winding. Elimination of the zero-sequence component of current is necessary whenever: protected power transformer cannot transform the zero-sequence currents to the other side the zero-sequence currents can only flow on one side of the protected power transformer.

In most cases, power transformers do not properly transform the zero sequence current to the other side. A typical example is a power transformer of the starWYE-delta type, e.g. YNd1. Transformers of this type do not transform the zero-sequence quantities, but zero-sequence currents can flow in the earthed star connected winding. In such cases, an external earth fault on the starWYE-side causes the zero-sequence currents to flow on the starWYE-side of the power transformer, but not on the other side. This results in false differential currents - consisting exclusively of the zero-sequence currents. If high enough, these false differential currents can cause an unwanted disconnection of the healthy power transformer. They must therefore be subtracted from the fundamental frequency differential currents if an unwanted trip is to be avoided.

126

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

For delta windings this feature shall be enabled only if an earthing transformer exist within differential zone on the delta side of the protected power transformer. Removing the zero-sequence current from the differential currents decreases to some extent sensitivity of the differential protection for the internal earth faults. In order to counteract this effect to some degree, the zero-sequence currents are subtracted not only from the three fundamental frequency differential currents, but automatically from the bias current as well.

Restrained, and Unrestrained Limits of the Differential Protection

Power transformer differential protection function uses two limits, to which actual magnitudes of the three fundamental frequency differential currents are compared at each execution of the function. The unrestrained (i.e. non-stabilized) part of the differential protection is used for very big differential currents, where it should be beyond any doubt, that the fault is internal. This settable limit is constant (i.e. not proportional the bias current). Neither harmonic, nor any other restrain is applied to this limit, which is therefore allowed to trip power transformer instantaneously. The restrained (i.e. stabilized) part of the differential protection compares the calculated fundamental differential (i.e. operating) currents, and the bias (i.e. restrain) current, by applying them to the operate - restrain characteristic. Practically, the magnitudes of the individual fundamental frequency differential currents are compared with an adaptive limit. This limit is adaptive because it is dependent on the bias (i.e. restrain) current magnitude. This limit is called the operate - restrain characteristic. It is represented by a double-slope, double-breakpoint characteristic, as shown in figure 62. The restrained characteristic is determined by the following 5 settings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, multiple of trans. HV side rated current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1) EndSection1 (End of section 1, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1) EndSection2 (End of section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1) SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1) SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)

The restrained characteristic in figure 62 is defined by the settings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. IdMin EndSection1 EndSection2 SlopeSection2 SlopeSection3

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

127

Section 4 Differential protection

operate current [ times I1r ] 5

Operate unconditionally

UnrestrainedLimit

Operate conditionally

2 Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 SlopeSection3

1 IdMin SlopeSection2 0 0 1 2 3

Restrain 4 5

EndSection1 EndSection2

restrain current [ times I1r ]

en05000187.vsd

Figure 62:
where:

Description of the restrained-, and the unrestrained operate characteristics

slope = D Ioperate 100% D Irestrain

The operate - restrain characteristic is tailor-made and can be designed freely by the user after his needs. A default characteristic is recommended to be used. It gives good results in a majority of applications. The operate - restrain characteristic has in principle three sections with a section-wise proportionality of the operate value to the bias (restrain) current. The reset ratio is in all parts of the characteristic is equal to 0.95. Section 1: This is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal currents flow through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for higher false differential currents is relatively low. Un-compensated on-load tapchanger is a typical reason for existence of the false differential currents in this section. Slope in section 1 is always zero percent. 128 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Section 2: In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope with false differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents through the current transformers. Section 3: The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher tolerance to substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault currents, which may be expected in this section. The operate - restrain characteristic should be designed so that it can be expected that: for internal faults, the operate (differential) currents are always safely, i.e. with a good margin, above the operate - restrain characteristic for external faults, the false (spurious) operate currents are safely, i.e. with a good margin, below the operate - restrain characteristic

Fundamental frequency negative-sequence differential currents

Existence of relatively high negative-sequence currents is in itself a proof of a disturbance on the power system, possibly a fault in the protected power transformer. The negative-sequence currents are measurable indications of abnormal conditions, similar to the zero-sequence currents. One of the several advantages of the negativesequence currents compared to the zero-sequence currents is however that they provide coverage for phase-to-phase and power transformer turn-to-turn faults as well, not only for earth-faults. Theoretically the negative sequence currents do not exist during symmetrical three-phase faults, however they do appear during initial stage of such faults for long enough time for the IED to make proper decision. Further, the negative sequence currents are not stopped at a power transformer of the Yd, or Dy connection. The negative sequence currents are always properly transformed to the other side of any power transformer for any external disturbance. Finally, the negative sequence currents are typically not affected by through-load currents. For power transformer differential protection application, the negative-sequence based differential currents are calculated by using exactly the same matrix equations, which are used to calculate the traditional phase-wise fundamental frequency differential currents. However, the same equation shall be fed by the negativesequence currents from the two power transformer sides instead of individual phase currents, as shown in matrix equation 27 for a case of two-winding, YNd5 power transformer.

IDL1 _ NS 2 IDL 2 _ NS = 1 -1 3 IDL3 _ NS -1

1

-1 2 -1

INS _ W 1 Ur _ W 2 -1 a INS _ W 1 + 2 Ur _ W 1 2 a INS _ W 1

2

-1

-1 1 3 0

0 -1 1

INS _ W 2 0 a INS _ W 2 2 -1 a INS _ W 2

1

(Equation 27)

where: 1. 2. is Neg. Seq. Diff Currents is Negative Sequence current contribution from W1 side

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

129

Section 4 Differential protection

3.

is Negative Sequence current contribution from W2 side

and where: IDL1_NS IDL2_NS IDL3_NS INS_W1 INS_W2 Ur_W1 Ur_W2 a is the negative sequence differential current in phase L1 (in W1 side primary amperes) is the negative sequence differential current in phase L2 (in W1 side primary amperes) is the negative sequence differential current in phase L3 (in W1 side primary amperes) is negative sequence current on W1 side in primary amperes (phase L1 reference) is negative sequence current on W1 side in primary amperes (phase L1 reference) is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W1 side (setting parameter) is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2 side (setting parameter) is the complex operator for sequence quantities, e.g.

a=e

j 120

=-

1 2

+ j

3 2

Because the negative sequence currents always form the symmetrical three phase current system on each transformer side (i.e. negative sequence currents in every phase will always have the same magnitude and be phase displaced for 120 electrical degrees from each other), it is only necessary to calculate the first negative sequence differential current i.e. IDL1_NS. As marked in equation 27, the first term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution of the negative sequence current from W1 side compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution of the negative sequence current from W2 side compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These negative sequence current contributions are phasors, which are further used in directional comparisons, made in order to characterize a fault as internal or external. See section "Internal/external fault discriminator" for more information. The magnitudes of the negative sequence differential current expressed in the HV side Amperes can be read as service values from the function. In the same time it is available as outputs IDNSMAG from the differential protection function block. Thus, it can be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault condition.

Internal/external fault discriminator

The internal / external fault discriminator is a very powerful and reliable supplementary criterion to the traditional differential protection. It is recommended that this feature shall be always used (i.e. enabled) when protecting three-phase power transformers. The internal / external fault discriminator detects even minor faults, with a high sensitivity and a high speed, and at the same time discriminates with a high degree of dependability between internal and external faults.

130

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

The algorithm of the internal/external fault discriminator is based on the theory of symmetrical components. Already in 1933, Wagner and Evans in their famous book "Symmetrical Components" have stated that:
1. 2. 3. Source of the negative-sequence currents is at the point of fault,
E NS = - I NS Z NS

Negative-sequence currents distribute through the negative-sequence network Negative-sequence currents obey the first Kirchhoff"s law

The internal/external fault discriminator responds to magnitudes and the relative phase angles of the negative-sequence fault currents at different windings (i.e. sides) of the protected power transformer. The negative sequence fault currents must of course first be referred to the same phase reference side, and put to the same magnitude reference. This is done by the matrix expression (see equation 27). Operation of the internal / external fault discriminator is based on the relative position of the two phasors representing winding one (i.e. W1) and winding two (i.e. W2) negative-sequence current contributions, defined by expression shown in equation 27. It practically performs directional comparison between these two phasors. First, the LV side phasors is positioned along the zero degree line. After that the relevant position of the HV side phasor in the complex plain is determined. In case of three-winding power transformers, a little more complex algorithm is applied, with two directional tests. The overall directional characteristic of the internal/ external fault discriminator is shown in figure 63, where the directional characteristic is defined by two setting parameters:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

131

Section 4 Differential protection

1. 2.

IMinNegSeq NegSeqROA
90 deg 120 deg

If one or the other of currents is too low, then no measurement is done, and 120 degrees is mapped

Internal/external fault boundary

NegSeqROA (Relay Operate Angle)

180 deg

0 deg

IMinNegSeq

External fault region

Internal fault region

270 deg
en05000188.vsd

Figure 63:

Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator

In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes must be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the other hand, in order to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault discriminator, the value of this minimum limit must not be too high. Therefore this limit value, called IminNegSeq, is settable in the range from 1% to 20% of the differential protection"s base current, which is the power transformer winding one rated current. The default value is 4%. Only if magnitudes of both negative sequence current contributions are above the set limit, the relative position between these two phasors is checked. If either of the negative sequence current contributions, which should be compared, is too small (less than the set value for IminNegSeq), no directional comparison is made in order to avoid the possibility to produce a wrong decision. This magnitude check, as well guarantee stability of the algorithm, when power transformer is energized. The setting NegSeqROA represents the so-called Relay Operate Angle, which determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions. It can be selected in the range from 30 degrees to 90 degrees, with a step of 1 degree. The default value is 60 degrees. The default setting somewhat favours security in comparison to dependability. If the above condition concerning magnitudes is fulfilled, the internal/external fault discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence

132

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

current contributions from the W1 and W2 sides of the power transformer using the following two rules: If the negative sequence currents contributions from W1 and W2 sides are in phase, the fault is internal (i.e. both phasors are within internal fault region) If the negative sequence currents contributions from W1 and W2 sides are 180 degrees out of phase, the fault is external (i.e. W1 phasors is outside internal fault region)

For example, for any unsymmetrical external fault, the respective negative sequence current contributions from the W1 and W2 power transformer sides will be exactly 180 degrees apart and equal in magnitude, regardless the power transformer turns ratio and phase displacement. One such example is shown in figure 64, which shows trajectories of the two separate phasors representing the negative-sequence current contributions from HV and LV sides of an Yd5 power transformer (e.g. after the compensation of the transformer turns ratio and phase displacement by using equation 27) for an unsymmetrical external fault. Observe that the relative phase angle between these two phasors is 180 electrical degrees at any point in time. There is not any current transformer saturation for this case.
"steady state" for HV side neg. seq. phasor

90 60

150 10 ms

30

180 0.1 kA 10 ms 210 0.2 kA 0.3 kA

0.4 kA

330

240 270

"steady state" for LV side neg. seq. phasor

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from HV side Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from LV side

en05000189.vsd

Figure 64:

Trajectories of Negative Sequence Current Contributions from HV and LV sides of Yd5 power transformer during external fault

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

133

Section 4 Differential protection

Therefore, under all external fault condition, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180 degrees. During internal fault, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to possible different negative sequence source impedance angles on W1 and W2 sides of the protected power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal zero value. However, during heavy faults, CT saturation might cause the measured phase angle to differ from 180 degrees for external, and from about 0 degrees for internal fault. See figure 65 for an example of a heavy internal fault with transient CT saturation.
Dire ctiona l Compa ris on Crite rion: Inte rna l fa ult a s s e e n from the HV s ide 90 120
35 ms

60

e xcurs ion from 0 de gre e s due to CT s a tura tion 30 de finite ly a n inte rna l fa ult

150

180 e xte rna l fa ult re gion

trip c o mmand in 12 ms Inte rna l fa ult de cla re d 7 ms a fte r inte rna l fa ult occure d

0.5 kA

210
1.0 kA

330

240 270
1.5 kA

300

HV s ide contribution to the tota l ne ga tive s e que nce diffe re ntia l curre nt in kA Dire ctiona l limit (within the re gion de limite d by 60 de gre e s is inte rna l fa ult)

en05000190.vsd

Figure 65:

Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator for internal fault with CT saturation

However it shall be noted that additional security measures are implemented in the internal/external fault discriminator algorithm in order to guaranty proper operation with heavily saturated current transformers. The trustworthy information on whether a fault is internal or external is typically obtained in about ten milliseconds after the fault inception, depending on the setting IminNegSeq, and the magnitudes of the fault currents. At heavy faults, approximately five milliseconds time-to-saturation of the main CT is sufficient in order to produce a correct discrimination between internal and external faults.

Unrestrained-, and sensitive negative-sequence protections

Two sub-functions, which are based on the internal / external fault discriminator with the ability to trip a faulty power transformer, are complimentary parts to the traditional power transformer differential protection.

134

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

The unrestrained negative sequence differential protection If one or more start signals have been set by the traditional differential protection algorithm, because one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents entered the operate region on the operate - restrain characteristic then the unrestrained negative sequence protection is activated. If the same fault has been positively recognized as internal, then the unrestrained negative sequence differential protection places its own trip request. Any block signals by the harmonic and / or waveform criteria, which can block the traditional differential protection are overridden, and the differential protection operates quickly without any further delay. This logic guarantees a fast disconnection of a faulty power transformer for any heavier internal faults. If the same fault has been classified as external, then generally, but not unconditionally, a trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external, the further analysis of the fault conditions is initiated. If all the instantaneous differential currents in phases where start signals have been issued are free of harmonic pollution, then a (minor) internal fault, simultaneous with a predominant external fault can be suspected. This conclusion can be drawn because at external faults, major false differential currents can only exist when one or more current transformers saturate. In this case, the false instantaneous differential currents are polluted by higher harmonic components, the 2nd, the 5th, etc. Sensitive negative-sequence based turn-to-turn fault protection The sensitive, negative-sequence-current-based turn-to-turn fault protection detects the low-level faults, which are not detected by the traditional differential protection. The sensitive protection is independent from the traditional differential protection and is a very good complement to it. The essential part of this sensitive protection is the internal/external fault discriminator previously described. In order to be activated, the sensitive protection requires no start signal from the traditional power transformer biased differential protection. If magnitudes of HV and LV negative sequence current contributions are above the set limit for IminNegSeq, then their relative positions are determined. If the disturbance is characterized as an internal fault, then a separate trip request will be placed. Any decision on the way to the final trip request must be confirmed several times in succession in order to cope with eventual CT transients. This causes a short additional operating time delay due to this security count. For very low-level turn-to-turn faults the overall response time of this protection is about thirty milliseconds.

Instantaneous differential currents

The instantaneous differential currents are calculated in order to perform the harmonic analysis and waveform analysis upon each one of them (see section "Harmonic-, and waveform block criteria" for more information). The instantaneous differential currents are calculated using the same matrix expression as shown in equation 5 and equation 6. The same matrixes A, B and C are used for these calculations as well. The only difference is that the matrix algorithm is fed by instantaneous values of currents, i.e. samples.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

135

Section 4 Differential protection

Harmonic-, and waveform block criteria

The two block criteria are the harmonic restrain and the waveform restrain. These two criteria have the power to block (i.e. prevent) a trip command by the traditional differential protection, which produces start signals by applying the differential currents, and the bias current, to the operate - restrain characteristic. Harmonic restrain The harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power transformer differential protections. The goal is to prevent an unwanted trip command due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, or due to magnetizing currents at over-voltages. The magnetizing currents of a power transformer flow only on one side of the power transformer (one or the other) and are therefore always the cause of false differential currents. The harmonic analysis (the 2nd and the 5th harmonic) is applied to instantaneous differential currents. Typically instantaneous differential currents during power transformer energizing are shown in figure 66. The harmonic analysis is only applied in those phases, where start signals have been set. For example, if the content of the 2nd harmonic in the instantaneous differential current of phase L1 is above the setting I2/I1Ratio, then a block signal is set for that phase, which can be read as BLK2HL1 output of the differential protection. Waveform restrain The waveform restrain criterion is a good complement to the harmonic analysis. The waveform restrain is a pattern recognition algorithm, which looks for intervals within each fundamental power system cycle with low instantaneous differential current. This interval is often called current gap in protection literature. However, within differential function this criterion actually searches for long-lasting intervals with low rate-of-change in instantaneous differential current, which are typical for the power transformer inrush currents. Block signals BLKWAVLx are set in those phases where such behavior is detected. The algorithm do not requires any end-user settings. The waveform algorithm is automatically adapted dependent only on the power transformer rated data.

136

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Figure 66:

Inrush currents to a transformer as seen by a protective IED. Typical is a high amount of the 2nd harmonic, and intervals of low current-, and low rate-of-change of current within each period.

Cross-blocking between phases Basic definition of the cross-blocking is that one of the three phases can block operation (i.e. tripping) of the other two phases due to the properties of the differential current in that phase (i.e. waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic content). In differential algorithm the user can control the cross-blocking between the phases via the setting parameter OpCrossBlock=On. When parameter OpCrossBlock=On cross blocking between phases will be introduced. There is not any time settings involved, but the phase with the operating point above the set bias characteristic (i.e. in the operate region) will be able to crossblock other two phases if it is self-blocked by any of the previously explained restrained criteria. As soon as the operating point for this phase is below the set bias characteristic (i.e. in the restrain region) cross blocking from that phase will be inhibited. In this way cross-blocking of the temporary nature is achieved. In should be noted that this is the default (i.e. recommended) setting value for this parameter. When parameter OpCrossBlock=Off, any cross blocking between phases will be disabled. It is recommended to use the value Off with caution in order to avoid the unwanted tripping during initial energizing of the power transformer.

Switch on to fault feature

Transformer differential function in IED 670 has a built-in, advanced switch on to fault feature. This feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter SOTFMode. When enabled this feature ensures quick differential protection tripping in cases where a transformer is energized with an internal fault (e.g. forgotten earthing on transformer LV side). Operation of this feature is based on the fact that a current gap (term current gap is explained under waveblock feature above) will exist within the first power system cycle when healthy power transformer is energized. If this is not the case the waveblock criterion will reset quickly. A quick reset of the waveblock criterion will temporarily disable the second harmonic blocking feature within the REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 137

Section 4 Differential protection

differential function. This consequently ensures fast operation of the transformer differential function for a switch on to a fault condition. It shall be noted that this feature is only active during initial power transformer energizing. When the switch on to fault feature is disabled by the setting parameter SOTFMode, the waveblock and second harmonic blocking features work in parallel and are completely independent from each other.

Open CT detection feature

Transformer differential function in IED 670 has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature. The open CT circuit condition will create unexpected operations for transformer differential protection function under the normal load conditions. It is also possible to damage secondary equipment due to high voltage produced from open CT circuit outputs. Therefore, it is always a requirement from security and reliability points of view to have open CT detection function to block the differential protection function in case of open CT conditions and at the same time, produce the alarm signal to the operational personal to make quick remedy actions to correct the open CT condition. The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter OpenCTEnable(Off/On). When enabled, this feature will prevent mal-operation when a loaded main CT connected to the differential protection is by mistake open circuited on the secondary side. It shall be noted that this feature can only detect interruption of one CT phase current at the time. If two or even all three-phase currents of one set of CT are accidentally interrupted at the same time this feature cannot operate and the differential function will give trip signal if the false differential current is sufficiently high. In order to ensure blocking of the differential protection for open CT condition this algorithm must operate within 10 ms in order to be able to prevent unwanted operation of the differential protection under all loading conditions. The principle applied in order to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method, similar to the waveform check which has been with advantage used by the Power Transformer Differential Protection in order to detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT detection principle is based on the fact, that for an open CT, the current in the phase with the open CT will suddenly drop (at least theoretically) to zero (i.e. as seen by the protection!), while the currents of the other two phases continue as before. The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions, that is, with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load. If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be detected. The open CT algorithm will only detect an open CT if the load on the power transformer is from 10% to 110% of the rated load. Outside this range an open CT condition is not even looked for. The search for an open CT starts after 60 seconds (50 seconds in 60 Hz systems) since the bias current enters the 10110% range. The Open CT detection feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 (Off). If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential functions are blocked, except of the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An alarm signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to 138 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

operational personal for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When the open CT condition is removed (i.e. the previously open CT reconnected), the functions remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also a setting (tOCTResetDelay). The task of this measure is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the reconnection of the previously open CT secondary circuit. The open CT feature will work only during normal loading condition. Thus, the open CT feature will be automatically disabled for all external faults, big overloads and inrush conditions. The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the defective CT secondary circuit. The algorithm will clearly indicate terminal side, CT input and phase in which open CT condition has been detected. These indications are provided via the following outputs from the differential function: 1. 2. 3. 4. Boolean output OPENCT will provide instant information to indicate that open CT circuit has been detected Boolean output OPENCTAL will provide time delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has been detected. Time delay is defined by setting parameter tOCTAlarm Integer output OPENCTINPUT will provide information on which CT input open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 1) 4. Integer output OPENCTPHASE will provide information in which phase open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase L1; 2= Phase L2; 3= Phase L3)

Once the open CT condition is declared the algorithm will stop to search for further open CT circuits. It will wait until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. First of all it shall be noted that once the open CT condition has been detected it can be only automatically reset within the differential function itself. It is not possible to externally reset open CT condition. In order to automatically reset the open CT circuit alarm the following conditions have to be fulfilled: Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 110% Open CT condition in defective CT circuit has been rectified (e.g. current asymmetry disappears) Above two conditions are fulfilled for longer time than defined by the setting parameter tOCTReset

After the reset the open CT detection algorithm will start again to search for any other open CT circuit within the protected zone.

4.2.2.2

Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for transformer differential protection are shown in the following figures.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

139

Section 4 Differential protection

RET670
ADM Trafo Data
Open CT logic on W1 side
IDL1

Differential function

A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio

Phasor calculation of individual phase current

Phasors & samples

Instantaneous (sample based) Differential current, phase L1 Instantaneous (sample based) Differential current, phase L2 Instantaneous (sample based) Differential current, phase L3

Derive equation to calculate differential currents

IDL2

IDL3

A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio

Phasor calculation of individual phase current

Negative sequence diff current & NS current contribution from individual windings

IDNSMAG

Open CT logic on W2 side

Phasors & samples

Fundamental frequency (phasor based) Diff current, phase L1 & phase current contributions from individual windings Fundamental frequency (phasor based) Diff current, phase L2 & phase current contributions from individual windings Fundamental frequency (phasor based) Diff current, phase L3 & phase current contributions from individual windings

IDL1MAG

IDL2MAG

IDL3MAG

MAX

IBIAS

Settings for Zer. Seq. Current Reduction

en06000544.vsd

Figure 67:

Treatment of measured currents within IED for transformer differential function

Figure 67 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done in case of two winding transformer. The following currents are inputs to the power transformer differential protection function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes, i.e. as measured. 1. 2. 3. Instantaneous values of currents (samples) from HV, and LV sides for twowinding power transformers, and from the HV, the first LV, and the second LV sides for three-winding power transformers. Currents from all power transformer sides expressed as fundamental frequency phasors, with their real, and imaginary parts. These currents are calculated within the protection terminal by the fundamental frequency Fourier filters. Negative-sequence currents from all power transformer sides expressed as phasors. These currents are calculated within the protection terminal by the symmetrical components module.

140

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

The power transformer differential protection: 1. Calculates three fundamental frequency differential currents, and one common bias current. The zero-sequence component can optionally be eliminated from each of the three fundamental frequency differential currents, and at the same time from the common bias current. Calculates three instantaneous differential currents. They are used for harmonic, and waveform analysis. Instantaneous differential currents are useful for postfault analysis using disturbance recording Calculates negative-sequence differential current. Contributions to it from both (all three) power transformer sides are used by the internal/external fault discriminator to detect and classify a fault as internal or external.

2. 3.

BLKUNRES IdUnre IDL1MAG IBIAS BLOCK BLKRES STL1

a b

b>a

AND

TRIPUNREL1

AND

AND OR
Switch on to fault logic
IDL1 2nd Harmonic Wave block 5th Harmonic Cross Block from L2 or L3 OpCrossBlock=On

TRIPRESL1

1
BLK2HL1 BLKWAVL1 BLK5HL1

AND

OR

AND

Cross Block to L2 or L3

en06000545.vsd

Figure 68:

Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for Phase L1.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

141

Section 4 Differential protection

Figure 69:

Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for external/internal fault discriminator

TRIPRESL1 TRIPRESL2 TRIPRESL3 TRIPUNREL1 TRIPUNREL2 TRIPUNREL3

OR

TRIPRES

OR

TRIPUNRE

TRNSSENS TRNSUNR

OR

TRIP

en05000278.vsd

Figure 70:

Transformer differential protection internal grouping of tripping signals.

142

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Figure 71:

Transformer differential protection internal grouping of logical signals.

Logic in figures 68, 69, 70 and 71 can be summarized as follows: 1. The three fundamental frequency differential currents are applied in a phase-wise manner to two limits. The first limit is the operate - restrain characteristic, while the other is the high-set unrestrained limit. If the first limit is exceeded, a start signal START is set. If the unrestrained limit is exceeded, an immediate unrestrained trip TRIPUNRE and common trip TRIP are issued. If a start signal is issued in a phase, then the harmonic-, and the waveform block signals are checked. Only a start signal, which is free of all of its respective block signals, can result in a trip command. If the cross-block logic scheme is applied, then only if all phases with set start signal are free of their respective block signals, a restrained trip TRIPRES and common trip TRIP are issued If a start signal is issued in a phase, and the fault has been classified as internal, then any eventual block signals (as described above in "") are overridden and a unrestrained negative-sequence trip TRNSUNR and common trip TRIP are issued without any further delay. This feature is called the unrestrained negativesequence protection. The sensitive negative sequence differential protection is independent of any start signals. It is meant to detect smaller internal faults, such as turn-to-turn faults, which are often not detected by the traditional differential protection. The sensitive negative sequence differential protection starts whenever both contributions to the total negative sequence differential current (that must be compared by the internal/external fault discriminator) are higher than the value of the setting IMinNegSeq. If a fault is positively recognized as internal, and the condition is stable with no interruption for at least one fundamental frequency cycle the sensitive negative sequence differential protection TRNSSENS and common trip TRIP are issued. This feature is called the sensitive negative sequence differential protection. If a start signal is issued in a phase, but the fault has been classified as external, then the instantaneous differential current of that phase is analyzed for the 2nd and the 5th harmonic contents. If there is less harmonic pollution, than allowed 143

2.

3.

4.

5.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 4 Differential protection

6.

by the settings I2/I1Ratio, and I5/I1Ratio, then it is assumed that a minor simultaneous internal fault must have occurred. Only under these conditions a trip command is allowed. The cross-block logic scheme is automatically applied under such circumstances. All start and blocking conditions are available as phase segregated as well as common (i.e. three-phase) signals.

IDL1 MAG I Diff Alarm

a a>b b

IDL2 MAG I Diff Alarm

a a>b b

tAlarm Delay

&

IDALARM

IDL3 MAG I Diff Alarm

a a>b b
en06000546.vsd

Figure 72:

Differential current alarm logic.

4.2.3

Function block

144

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

T2D1T2WPDIF_87T I3PW1CT1 TRIP I3PW1CT2 TRIPRES I3PW2CT1 TRIPUNRE I3PW2CT2 TRNSUNR TAPOLTC1 TRNSSENS OLTC1AL START BLOCK STL1 BLKRES STL2 BLKUNRES STL3 BLKNSUNR BLK2H BLKNSSEN BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 BLKWAV BLKWAVL1 BLKWAVL2 BLKWAVL3 IDALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG en06000249.vsd

Figure 73:

T2D function block

T3D1T3WPDIF_87T I3PW1CT1 TRIP I3PW1CT2 TRIPRES I3PW2CT1 TRIPUNRE I3PW2CT2 TRNSUNR I3PW3CT1 TRNSSENS I3PW3CT2 START TAPOLTC1 STL1 TAPOLTC2 STL2 OLTC1AL STL3 OLTC2AL BLK2H BLOCK BLK2HL1 BLKRES BLK2HL2 BLKUNRES BLK2HL3 BLKNSUNR BLK5H BLKNSSEN BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 BLKWAV BLKWAVL1 BLKWAVL2 BLKWAVL3 IDALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG en06000250.vsd

Figure 74:

T3D function block

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

145

Section 4 Differential protection 4.2.4 Input and output signals

Table 64:
Signal I3PW1CT1 I3PW1CT2 I3PW2CT1 I3PW2CT2 TAPOLTC1 OLTC1AL BLOCK BLKRES BLKUNRES BLKNSUNR BLKNSSEN

Input signals for the T2WPDIF_87T (T2D1-) function block

Description Three phase winding primary CT1 Three phase winding primary CT2 Three phase winding secondary CT1 Three phase winding secondary CT2 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1 OLTC1 alarm Block of function Block of trip for restrained differential feature Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature Block of trip for unrestr. neg. seq. differential feature Block of trip for sensitive neg. seq. differential feature

Table 65:
Signal TRIP TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRNSUNR TRNSSENS START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 BLKWAV BLKWAVL1 BLKWAVL2 BLKWAVL3

Output signals for the T2WPDIF_87T (T2D1-) function block

Description General, common trip signal Trip signal from restrained differential protection Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection Trip signal from unrestr. neg. seq. diff. protection Trip signal from sensitive neg. seq. diff. protection Common start signal from any phase Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Common second harmonic block signal from any phase Second harmonic block signal, phase L1 Second harmonic block signal, phase L2 Second harmonic block signal, phase L3 Common fifth harmonic block signal from any phase Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L1 Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L2 Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L3 Common block signal, waveform criterion, from any phase Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L1 Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L2 Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L3

Table continued on next page

146

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Signal IDALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG Description Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases An open CT was detected Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ... Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase L1 Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase L2 Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current, phase L1 Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current, phase L2 Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current, phase L3 Magnitude of the bias current, which is common to all phases Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current

Table 66:
Signal I3PW1CT1 I3PW1CT2 I3PW2CT1 I3PW2CT2 I3PW3CT1 I3PW3CT2 TAPOLTC1 TAPOLTC2 OLTC1AL OLTC2AL BLOCK BLKRES BLKUNRES BLKNSUNR BLKNSSEN

Input signals for the T3WPDIF_87T (T3D1-) function block

Description Three phase winding primary CT1 Three phase winding primary CT2 Three phase winding secondary CT1 Three phase winding secondary CT2 Three phase winding tertiary CT1 Three phase winding tertiary CT2 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1 Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 2 OLTC1 alarm OLTC2 alarm Block of function Block of trip for restrained differential feature Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature Block of trip for unrestr. neg. seq. differential feature Block of trip for sensitive neg. seq. differential feature

Table 67:
Signal TRIP TRIPRES TRIPUNRE TRNSUNR TRNSSENS

Output signals for the T3WPDIF_87T (T3D1-) function block

Description General, common trip signal Trip signal from restrained differential protection Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection Trip signal from unrestr. neg. seq. diff. protection Trip signal from sensitive neg. seq. diff. protection

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

147

Section 4 Differential protection

Signal START STL1 STL2 STL3 BLK2H BLK2HL1 BLK2HL2 BLK2HL3 BLK5H BLK5HL1 BLK5HL2 BLK5HL3 BLKWAV BLKWAVL1 BLKWAVL2 BLKWAVL3 IDALARM OPENCT OPENCTAL IDL1 IDL2 IDL3 IDL1MAG IDL2MAG IDL3MAG IBIAS IDNSMAG Description Common start signal from any phase Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3 Common second harmonic block signal from any phase Second harmonic block signal, phase L1 Second harmonic block signal, phase L2 Second harmonic block signal, phase L3 Common fifth harmonic block signal from any phase Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L1 Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L2 Fifth harmonic block signal, phase L3 Common block signal, waveform criterion, from any phase Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L1 Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L2 Block signal, waveform criterion, phase L3 Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases An open CT was detected Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ... Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase L1 Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase L2 Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase L3 Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current, phase L1 Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current, phase L2 Magnitude of fundamental freq. diff. current, phase L3 Magnitude of the bias current, which is common to all phases Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current

4.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 68:
Parameter RatedVoltageW1

Basic general settings for the T2WPDIF_87T (T2D1-) function

Range 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.05 Default 400.00 Unit kV Description Rated voltage of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in kV Rated voltage of transformer winding 2 in kV Rated current of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in A

RatedVoltageW2

0.05 - 2000.00

0.05

231.00

kV

RatedCurrentW1

1 - 99999

577

Table continued on next page

148

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Parameter RatedCurrentW2 Range 1 - 99999 Step 1 Default 1000 Unit A Description Rated current of transformer winding 2 in A Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or D-delta Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or D-delta Phase displacement between W2 & W1=HV winding, hour notation

ConnectTypeW1

WYE (Y) Delta (D) WYE (Y) Delta (D) 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg] 7 [150 deg lead] 8 [120 deg lead] 9 [90 deg lead] 10 [60 deg lead] 11 [30 deg lead] Off On Off On No Yes 1 - 99999

WYE (Y)

ConnectTypeW2

WYE (Y)

ClockNumberW2

0 [0 deg]

ZSCurrSubtrW1

On

Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W1 side, On / Off Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W2 side, On / Off Two CT inputs (Tconfig.) for winding 1, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W1 side CT primary in A, Tbranch 2, on transf. W1 side Two CT inputs (Tconfig.) for winding 2, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W2 side CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W2 side Transformer winding where OLTC1 is located OLTC1 lowest tap position designation (e.g. 1) OLTC1 rated tap/midtap position designation (e.g. 6)

ZSCurrSubtrW2

On

TconfigForW1

No

CT1RatingW1

3000

CT2RatingW1

1 - 99999

3000

TconfigForW2

No Yes 1 - 99999

No

CT1RatingW2

3000

CT2RatingW2

1 - 99999

3000

LocationOLTC1

Not Used Winding 1 (W1) Winding 2 (W2) 1

Not Used

LowTapPosOLTC 1 RatedTapOLTC1

0 - 10

1 - 100

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

149

Section 4 Differential protection

Parameter HighTapPsOLTC1 Range 11 Step 1 Default 1 - 100 Unit Description OLTC1 highest tap position designation (e.g. 11) OLTC1 end-tap position with winding highest no-load voltage Voltage change per OLTC1 step in percent of rated voltage

TapHighVoltTC1

1 - 100

StepSizeOLTC1

0.01 - 30.00

0.01

1.00

Table 69:
Parameter Operation SOTFMode tAlarmDelay IDiffAlarm

Basic parameter group settings for the T2WPDIF_87T (T2D1-) function

Range Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.00 Step 0.001 0.01 Default Off On 10.000 0.20 Unit s %IB Description Operation Off / On Operation mode for switch onto fault Time delay for diff currents alarm level Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr, usually W1 curr. Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr, usually W1 curr. End of section 1, multiple of Winding 1 rated current End of section 2, multiple of Winding 1 rated current Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of Winding 1 rated current Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Operation Off/On for cross-block logic between phases

IdMin

0.10 - 0.60

0.01

0.30

IB

EndSection1

0.20 - 1.50

0.01

1.25

IB

EndSection2

1.00 - 10.00

0.01

3.00

IB

SlopeSection2

10.0 - 50.0

0.1

40.0

SlopeSection3

30.0 - 100.0

0.1

80.0

IdUnre

1.00 - 50.00

0.01

10.00

IB

I2/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

1.0

15.0

I5/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

1.0

25.0

CrossBlockEn

Off On

On

Table continued on next page

150

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Parameter NegSeqDiffEn Range Off On 0.02 - 0.20 Step Default On Unit Description Operation Off/On for neg. seq. differential protections Neg. seq. curr. must be higher than this level to be used Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq. fault discriminator Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable Off/On Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated Unrestrained diff. protection blocked after this delay, in s

IMinNegSeq

0.01

0.04

IB

NegSeqROA

30.0 - 120.0

0.1

60.0

Deg

OpenCTEnable

Off On 0.100 - 10.000

On

tOCTAlarmDelay

0.001

3.000

tOCTResetDelay

0.100 - 10.000

0.001

0.250

tOCTUnrstDelay

0.10 - 6000.00

0.01

10.00

Table 70:
Parameter RatedVoltageW1

Basic general settings for the T3WPDIF_87T (T3D1-) function

Range 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.05 Default 400.00 Unit kV Description Rated voltage of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in kV Rated voltage of transformer winding 2 in kV Rated voltage of transformer winding 3 in kV Rated current of transformer winding 1 (HV winding) in A Rated current of transformer winding 2 in A Rated current of transformer winding 3 in A Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or D-delta Connection type of winding 2: Y-wye or D-delta Connection type of winding 3: Y-wye or D-delta

RatedVoltageW2

0.05 - 2000.00

0.05

231.00

kV

RatedVoltageW3

0.05 - 2000.00

0.05

10.50

kV

RatedCurrentW1

1 - 99999

577

RatedCurrentW2

1 - 99999

1000

RatedCurrentW3

1 - 99999

7173

ConnectTypeW1

WYE (Y) Delta (D) WYE (Y) Delta (D) WYE (Y) Delta (D)

WYE (Y)

ConnectTypeW2

WYE (Y)

ConnectTypeW3

Delta (D)

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

151

Section 4 Differential protection

Parameter ClockNumberW2 Range 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg] 7 [150 deg lead] 8 [120 deg lead] 9 [90 deg lead] 10 [60 deg lead] 11 [30 deg lead] 0 [0 deg] 1 [30 deg lag] 2 [60 deg lag] 3 [90 deg lag] 4 [120 deg lag] 5 [150 deg lag] 6 [180 deg] 7 [150 deg lead] 8 [120 deg lead] 9 [90 deg lead] 10 [60 deg lead] 11 [30 deg lead] Off On Off On Off On No Yes 1 - 99999 Step Default 0 [0 deg] Unit Description Phase displacement between W2 & W1=HV winding, hour notation

ClockNumberW3

5 [150 deg lag]

Phase displacement between W3 & W1=HV winding, hour notation

ZSCurrSubtrW1

On

Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W1 side, On / Off Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W2 side, On / Off Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W3 side, On / Off Two CT inputs (Tconfig.) for winding 1, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W1 side CT primary in A, Tbranch 2, on transf. W1 side Two CT inputs (Tconfig.) for winding 2, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W2 side CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W2 side Two CT inputs (Tconfig.) for winding 3, YES / NO CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf. W3 side

ZSCurrSubtrW2

On

ZSCurrSubtrW3

On

TconfigForW1

No

CT1RatingW1

3000

CT2RatingW1

1 - 99999

3000

TconfigForW2

No Yes 1 - 99999

No

CT1RatingW2

3000

CT2RatingW2

1 - 99999

3000

TconfigForW3

No Yes 1 - 99999

No

CT1RatingW3

3000

Table continued on next page

152

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Parameter CT2RatingW3 Range 1 - 99999 Step 1 Default 3000 Unit A Description CT primary rating in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W3 side Transformer winding where OLTC1 is located OLTC1 lowest tap position designation (e.g. 1) OLTC1 rated tap/midtap position designation (e.g. 6) OLTC1 highest tap position designation (e.g. 11) OLTC1 end-tap position with winding highest no-load voltage Voltage change per OLTC1 step in percent of rated voltage Transformer winding where OLTC2 is located OLTC2 lowest tap position designation (e.g. 1) OLTC2 rated tap/midtap position designation (e.g. 6) OLTC2 highest tap position designation (e.g. 11) OLTC2 end-tap position with winding highest no-load voltage Voltage change per OLTC2 step in percent of rated voltage

LocationOLTC1

Not Used Winding 1 (W1) Winding 2 (W2) Winding 3 (W3) 1

Not Used

LowTapPosOLTC 1 RatedTapOLTC1

0 - 10

1 - 100

HighTapPsOLTC1

11

1 - 100

TapHighVoltTC1

1 - 100

StepSizeOLTC1

0.01 - 30.00

0.01

1.00

LocationOLTC2

Not Used Winding 1 (W1) Winding 2 (W2) Winding 3 (W3) 1

Not Used

LowTapPosOLTC 2 RatedTapOLTC2

0 - 10

1 - 100

HighTapPsOLTC2

11

1 - 100

TapHighVoltTC2

1 - 100

StepSizeOLTC2

0.01 - 30.00

0.01

1.00

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

153

Section 4 Differential protection

Table 71:
Parameter Operation SOTFMode

Basic parameter group settings for the T3WPDIF_87T (T3D1-) function

Range Off On Off On 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 1.00 Step Default Off On Unit Description Operation Off / On Operation mode for switch onto fault feature Time delay for diff currents alarm level Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr, usually W1 curr. Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr, usually W1 curr. Unrestr. prot. limit, multi. of base curr. usually W1 curr. Operation Off/On for cross-block logic between phases Operation Off/On for neg. seq. differential protections Neg. seq. curr. limit, mult. of base curr, usually W1 curr. Operate Angle for int. / ext. neg. seq. fault discriminator

tAlarmDelay IDiffAlarm

0.001 0.01

10.000 0.20

s %IB

IdMin

0.10 - 0.60

0.01

0.30

IB

IdUnre

1.00 - 50.00

0.01

10.00

IB

CrossBlockEn

Off On Off On 0.02 - 0.20

On

NegSeqDiffEn

On

IMinNegSeq

0.01

0.04

IB

NegSeqROA

30.0 - 120.0

0.1

60.0

Deg

Table 72:
Parameter EndSection1

Advanced parameter group settings for the T3WPDIF_87T (T3D1-) function

Range 0.20 - 1.50 Step 0.01 Default 1.25 Unit IB Description End of section 1, multi. of base current, usually W1 curr. End of section 2, multi. of base current, usually W1 curr. Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Slope in section 3 of operate-restrain characteristic, in % Max. ratio of 2nd harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in % Max. ratio of 5th harm. to fundamental harm dif. curr. in %

EndSection2

1.00 - 10.00

0.01

3.00

IB

SlopeSection2

10.0 - 50.0

0.1

40.0

SlopeSection3

30.0 - 100.0

0.1

80.0

I2/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

1.0

15.0

I5/I1Ratio

5.0 - 100.0

1.0

25.0

Table continued on next page

154

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Parameter OpenCTEnable Range Off On 0.100 - 10.000 Step Default On Unit Description Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable Off/On Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is detected Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is activated Unrestrained diff. protection blocked after this delay, in s

tOCTAlarmDelay

0.001

3.000

tOCTResetDelay

0.100 - 10.000

0.001

0.250

tOCTUnrstDelay

0.10 - 6000.00

0.01

10.00

4.2.6

Technical data
Table 73:
Function Operating characteristic Reset ratio Unrestrained differential current limit Base sensitivity function Second harmonic blocking Fifth harmonic blocking Connection type for each of the windings Phase displacement between high voltage winding, W1 and each of the windings, w2 and w3. Hour notation Operate time, restrained function Reset time, restrained function Operate time, unrestrained function Reset time, unrestrained function Critical impulse time

Transformer differential protection (PDIF, 87T)

Range or value Adaptable > 95% (100-5000)% of Ibase on high voltage winding (10-60)% of Ibase (5.0-100.0)% of fundamental (5.0-100.0)% of fundamental Y-wye or D-delta 011 Accuracy 2.0% of Ir for I < Ir 2.0% of I for I > Ir 2.0% of set value 2.0% of Ir 2.0% of Ir 5.0% of Ir -

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Id 20 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Id 12 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Id 25 ms typically at 5 to 0 x Id 2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Id

4.3
REG 670

Restricted earth fault protection (PDIF, 87N)

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 155

Section 4 Differential protection

Function block name: REFxANSI number: 87N IEC 61850 logical node name: REFPDIF

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

IdN/I

4.3.1
4.3.1.1

Introduction
Introduction
Three low impedance restricted earth fault functions can be included in RET 670. The function can be used on all directly or low impedance earthed windings. The restricted earth fault function can provide higher sensitivity (down to 5%) and higher speed as it measures individually on each winding and thus do not need harmonics stabilization. The low impedance function is a percentage biased function with an additional zero sequence current directional comparison criteria. This gives excellent stability for through faults. The function allows use of different CT ratios and magnetizing characteristics on the phase and neutral CT cores and mixing with other functions and protection IED's on the same cores.

xx05000058.vsd

Figure 75:

Autotransformer low-impedance REF

4.3.2
4.3.2.1

Principle of operation
Fundamental principles of the restricted earth fault protection (REF)
The REF protection should detect earth faults on earthed power transformer windings. The REF protection is a unit protection of differential type. Because this protection is based on the zero sequence currents, which theoretically only exist in case of an earth fault, the REF can be made very sensitive; regardless of normal load currents. It is the fastest protection a power transformer winding can have. It must be borne in mind, however, that the high sensitivity, and the high speed, tend to make such a protection instable, and special measures must be taken to make it insensitive to conditions, for which it should not operate, for example heavy through faults of phaseto-phase type, or heavy external earth faults.

156

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

The REF protection is of low impedance type. At least three-phase power transformer terminal currents, and the power transformer neutral point current, must be fed separately to RET670. These input currents are then conditioned within RET670 by mathematical tools. Fundamental frequency components of all currents are extracted from all input currents, while other eventual zero sequence components (e.g. the 3rd harmonic currents) are fully suppressed. Then the residual current phasor is constructed from the three line current phasors. This zero sequence current phasor is then vectorially added to the neutral current, in order to obtain differential current. The following facts may be observed from the figure 76 and the figure 77 (where the three-phase line CTs are lumped into a single 3Io current, for the sake of simplicity).
zone of protection

s o A (L1) u B (L2) r c C (L3) e Uzs

Izs1 Izs1 Izs1

Ia = 0 Ib = 0 Ic = 0
Current in the neutral (IN) serves as a directional reference because it has the same direction for both internal and external faults.

a (L1) b (L2) c (L3)

3Io=3Izs1

IN = -3Izs1

IN

zs voltage is max. at the earth fault

For external fault

ROA

REF is a current polarized relay RCA (Relay Characteristic Angle) RCA = 0 deg. IN
ROA

3I0 MTA

REF is permanently set to operate for internal earth faults. REF should never operate for any faults external to the protected zone. Currents 3Io and IN are theoretically 180o out of phase for any external earth fault.
en05000724.vsd

Reference is neutral current

Restrain for external fault

Operate for internal fault

Figure 76:

Currents at an external earth fault.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

157

Section 4 Differential protection

power system contribution to fault current

zone of protection

s o u r c e

A (L1) B (L2) C (L3)

3Io = -3Izs2

Izs2 Izs2 Izs2

Ifault

Izs1 Izs1 Izs1

Ia = 0 Ib = 0 Ic = 0

a (L1) b (L2) c (L2)

Uzs IN = - 3Izs1

IN

Current in the neutral (IN) serves as a directional reference because it has the same direction for both internal and external faults.

Return path for 3Izs2

Return path for 3Izs1 currents 3Io and IN are approximately in phase for an internal earth fault.

ROA

For internal fault 3I0 MTA

IN
ROA

Reference is neutral current

en05000725.vsd

Restrain for external fault

Operate for internal fault

Figure 77:

Currents at an internal earth fault.

1.

2.

3. 4.

For an external earth fault, (figure 76) the residual current 3Io and the neutral conductor current IN have equal magnitude, but they are 180 degree out of phase due to internal CT reference directions used in IED670. This is easy to understand, as both CTs ideally measure exactly the same component of the earth fault current. For an internal fault, the total earth fault current is composed generally of two zero-sequence components. One zero-sequence component (i.e. 3IZS1) flows towards the power transformer neutral point and into the earth, while the other zero-sequence component (i.e. 3IZS2) flows out into the connected power system. These two primary currents can be expected to be of approximately opposite directions (about the same zero sequence impedance angle is assumed on both sides of the earth fault). However on the secondary CT sides they will be approximately in phase due to internal CT reference directions used in IED670. The magnitudes of the two components may be different, dependent on the magnitudes of zero sequence impedances of both sides. No current can flow towards the power system, if the only point where the system is earthed, is at the protected power transformer. Likewise, no current can flow into the power system, if the winding is not connected to the power system (circuit breaker open and power transformer energized from the other side). For both internal and external earth faults, the current in the neutral connection IN has always the same direction, that is, towards the earth. The two measured zero sequence current are 3Io and IN. The vectorial sum between them is the REF differential current, which is equal to Idiff = IN +3Io.

158

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Because REF is a differential protection where the line zero sequence (residual) current is constructed from 3 line (terminal) currents, a bias quantity must give stability against false operations due to high through fault currents. An operate - bias characteristic (only one) has been devised to the purpose. It is not only external earth faults that REF should be stable against, but also heavy phase-to-phase faults, not including earth. These faults may also give rise to false zero sequence currents due to saturated line CTs. Such faults, however, produce no neutral current, and can thus be eliminated as a source of danger, at least during the fault. As an additional measure against unwanted operation, a directional check is made in agreement with the above points 1, and 2. An operation is only allowed if currents 3Io and IN (see the figure 76 and the figure 77) are both within operating region. By taking a smaller ROA, the REF protection can be made more stable under heavy external fault conditions, as well as under the complex conditions, when external faults are cleared by other protections.

4.3.2.2

REF as a differential protection

The REF protection is a protection of differential type, a unit protection, whose settings are independent of any other protection. Compared to the transformer differential protection it has some advantages. It is simpler, as no current phase correction and magnitude correction are needed, not even in the case of an eventual On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC). REF is not sensitive to inrush and overexcitation currents. The only danger left is an eventual current transformer saturation. The REF has only one operate-bias characteristic, which is described in the table 74, and shown in the figure 78.
Table 74: Data of the operate - bias characterize of the REF.
Second slope % 100

Default sensitivity Idmin Max. base sensitivity Min. base sensitivity End of zone First slope (zone 1) Idmin (zone 1) Idmin (zone 1) 1 % Irated % Irated % Irated % Irated % 30 4 100 125 70

As a differential protection, the REF calculates a differential current and a bias current. In case of internal earth faults, the differential current is theoretically equal to the total earth fault current. The bias current is supposed to give stability to REF protection. The bias current is a measure of how high the currents are, or better, a measure of how difficult the conditions are under which the CTs operate. The higher the bias, the more difficult conditions can be suspected, and the more likely that the calculated differential current has a component of a false current, primarily due to CT saturation. This law is formulated by the operate-bias characteristic. This characteristic divides the Idif - Ibias plane into two parts. The part above the operate - bias characteristic is the so called operate area, while that below is the block area, see the figure 78.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

159

Section 4 Differential protection

operate current in pu 5

operate

Base Sensitivity Idmin ********************************************* Range : 5 % to 50 % rated current Step : 1 % transformer rated current

zone 1

zone 2

second slope

1
minimum base sensitivity 50 % default base sensitivity 30 % maximum base sensitivity 5 %

first slope 0 1 2 1.25 pu 3 4

block 5 6

bias current in per unit

(98000017)

Figure 78:

Operate - bias characteristic of the restricted earth fault protection REF.

4.3.2.3

Calculation of differential current and bias current

The differential current, (= operate current), as a fundamental frequency phasor, is calculated as (with designations as in the figure 76 and the figure 77)

Idiff = IN + 3 Io

(Equation 30)

where: IN 3Io current in the power transformer neutral as a fundamental frequency phasor, residual current of the power transformer line (terminal) currents as a phasor.

If there are two three-phase CT inputs on the HV winding side for the REF protection (such as in breaker-and-a-half configurations), then their respective residual currents are added within REF function so that: I3PW1 = I3PW1CT1 + I3PW1CT2 where these are defined in table 75 The bias current is a measure (expressed as a current in Amperes) of how difficult the conditions are under which the instrument current transformers operate. 160 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Dependent on the magnitude of the bias current, the corresponding zone (section) of the operate - bias characteristic ia applied, when deciding whether to trip, or not to trip. In general, the higher the bias current, the higher the differential current required to produce a trip. As the bias current the highest current of all separate input currents to REF protection, that is, of current in phase L1, phase L2, phase L3, and the current in the neutral point (designated as IN in the figure 76 and in the figure 77). If there are 2 feeders included in the zone of protection of the REF protection, then the respective bias current is found as the relatively highest of the following currents:
current[1] = max (I3PW1CT1) 1 CTFactorPri1
1 CTFactorPri2
1 CTFactorSec1
1 CTFactorSec2
(Equation 34) (Equation 35) (Equation 33) (Equation 32) (Equation 31)

current[2] = max (I3PW1CT2)

current[3] = max (I3PW2CT1)

current[4] = max (I3PW2CT2)

current[5] = IN

The bias current is thus generally equal to none of the input currents. If all primary ratings of the CTs were equal to IBase, then the bias current would be equal to the highest current in Amperes. IBase shall be set equal to the rated current of the protected winding where the REF function is applied.

4.3.2.4

Detection of external earthground faults

External faults are more common than internal earth faults for which the restricted earth fault protection should operate. It is important that the restricted earth fault protection remains stable during heavy external earth and phase-to-phase faults, and also when such a heavy external fault is cleared by some other protection such as overcurrent, or earth fault protection, etc. The conditions during a heavy external fault, and particularly immediately after the clearing of such a fault may be complex. The circuit breakers poles may not open exactly at the same moment, some of the CTs may still be highly saturated, etc. The detection of external earth faults is based on the fact that for such a fault a high neutral current appears first, while a false differential current only appears if and when one, or more, current transformers saturate. An external earth fault is thus assumed to have occurred when a high neutral current suddenly appears, while at the same time the differential current Idif remains low, at least for a while. This condition must

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

161

Section 4 Differential protection

be detected before a trip request is placed within REF protection. Any search for external fault is aborted if a trip request has been placed. A condition for a successful detection is that it takes not less than 4 ms for the first CT to saturate. For an internal earth fault, a true differential current develops immediately, while for an external fault it only develops if a CT saturates. If a trip request comes first, before an external fault could be positively established, then it must be an internal fault. If an external earth fault has been detected, then the REF is temporarily desensitized.

Directional criterion

The directional criterion is applied in order to positively distinguish between internaland external earth faults. This check is an additional criterion, which should prevent misoperations at heavy external earth faults, and during the disconnection of such faults by other protections. Earth faults on lines connecting the power transformer occur much more often than earth faults on a power transformer winding. It is important therefore that the restricted earth fault protection (REF) should remain secure during an external fault, and immediately after the fault has been cleared by some other protection. For an external earth fault with no CT saturation, the residual current in the lines (3Io in the figure 76) and the neutral current (IN in the figure 76) are theoretically equal in magnitude and are 180 degree out of phase. It is the current in the neutral (IN) which serves as a directional reference because it flows for all earth faults, and it has the same direction for all earth faults, both external as well as internal. The directional criterion in REF protection makes REF a current-polarized relay. If one or more CTs saturate, then the measured currents 3Io and IN may no more be equal, nor will their positions in the complex plane be exactly 180 degree apart.There is a risk that the resulting false differential current Idif enters the operate area when clearing the external fault. If this happens, a directional test may prevent a misoperation. A directional check is only executed if: 1. 2. a trip request signal has been issued, (REF function START signal set to 1) if the residual current in lines (3Io) is at least 3% of the IBase current.

If a directional check is either unreliable or not possible to do, due to too small currents, then the direction is cancelled as a condition for an eventual trip. If a directional check is executed, the REF protection operation is only allowed if currents 3Io and IN (see the figure 76and figure 77) are both within the operating region.
RCA = 0 degrees = constant; where RCA stands for the Relay Characteristic Angle, ROA = 60 to 90 degrees; where ROA stands for the Relay Operate Angle.

162

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

RCA determines a direction MTA (Maximum Torque Angle) where the line residual current 3Io should lie for an internal earth fault, while ROA sets a tolerance margin.

2nd harmonic analysis

At energizing of a reactor a false differential current may appear in REF even though it does not exist in the primary net. The phase CTs may saturate due to a high dccomponent with long duration where as the current through the neutral CT does not have either the same dc-component or the same amplitude and the risk for saturation in this CT is much lesser. The appearing differential current as a result of the saturation may be so high that it reaches the operate characteristic. A calculation of the content of 2nd harmonic in the neutral current is made when neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some windows and some timing criteria are fulfilled. If the ratio between second and fundamental harmonic exceeds 60%, the REF function will be blocked.

4.3.2.5

Algorithm of the restricted earth fault protection (REF)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if current in the neutral Ineutral (IN) is less than 50% of the base sensitivity Idmin. If yes, only service values are calculated, then the REF protection algorithm is exited. If current in the Ineutral (IN) is more than 50% of Idmin, then determine the bias current Ibias. Determine the differential (operate) current Idif as a phasor, and calculate its magnitude. Check if the point P(Ibias, Idif) is above the operate - bias characteristic. If yes, increment the trip request counter by 1. If the point P(Ibias, Idif) is found to be below the operate - bias characteristic, then the trip request counter is reset to 0. If the trip request counter is still 0, search for an eventual heavy external earth fault. The search is only made if the neutral current is at least 50% of the IBase current. If an external earth fault has been detected, a flag is set which remains set until the external fault has been cleared. The external fault flag is reset to 0 when Ineutral falls below 50% of the base sensitivity Idmin. Any search for external fault is aborted if trip request counter is more than 0. For as long as the external fault persists an additional temporary trip condition is introduced. That means that the REF protection is temporarily desensitized. If point P(Ibias, Idif) is found to be above the operate - bias characteristic), so that trip request counter is becomes more than 0, a directional check can be made. The directional check is made only if Iresidual (3Io) is more than 3% of the IBase current. If the result of the check means external fault, then the internal trip request is reset. If the directional check cannot be executed, then direction is no longer a condition for a trip. When neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some windows and some timing criteria are fulfilled, the ratio of 2nd to fundamental tone is calculated. If it is found to be above 60% the trip request counter is reset and TRIP remains zero. Finally, a check is made if the trip request counter is equal to, or higher than 2. If it is, and at the same time, the bias current is at least 50% of the highest bias 163

6. 7.

8.

9.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 4 Differential protection

current Ibiasmax (measured during the disturbance) then the REF function block sets output TRIP to 1. If the counter is less than 2, TRIP signal remains 0.

4.3.3

Function block
REF1REFPDIF_87N I3P I3PW1CT1 I3PW1CT2 I3PW2CT1 I3PW2CT2 BLOCK TRIP START DIROK BLK2H IRES IN IBIAS IDIFF ANGLE I2RATIO en06000251.vsd

Figure 79:

REF function block

4.3.4

Input and output signals

Table 75:
Signal I3P I3PW1CT1 I3PW1CT2 I3PW2CT1 I3PW2CT2 BLOCK

Input signals for the REFPDIF_87N (REF1-) function block

Description Group signal for neutral current input Group signal for primary CT1 current input Group signal for primary CT2 current input Group signal for secondary CT1 current input Group signal for secondary CT2 current input Block of function

Table 76:
Signal TRIP START DIROK BLK2H IRES IN IBIAS IDIFF ANGLE I2RATIO

Output signals for the REFPDIF_87N (REF1-) function block

Description Trip by restricted earth fault protection function Start by restricted earth fault protection function Directional Criteria has operated for internal fault Block due to 2-nd harmonic Magnitude of fund. freq. residual current Magnitude of fund. freq. neutral current Magnitude of the bias current Magnitude of fund. freq. differential current Direction angle from zerosequence feature Second harmonic ratio

164

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection 4.3.5 Setting parameters

Table 77:
Parameter Operation IBase IdMin CTFactorPri1

Basic parameter group settings for the REFPDIF_87N (REF1-) function

Range Off ON 1 - 99999 4.0 - 100.0 1.0 - 10.0 Step 1 0.1 0.1 Default Off 3000 10.0 1.0 Unit A %IB Description Operation Off / On Base current Maximum sensitivity in % of Ibase CT factor for HV side CT1 (CT1rated/ HVrated current) CT factor for HV side CT2 (CT2rated/ HVrated current) CT factor for MV side CT1 (CT1rated/ MVrated current) CT factor for MV side CT2 (CT2rated/ MVrated current)

CTFactorPri2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

CTFactorSec1

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

CTFactorSec2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Table 78:
Parameter ROA

Advanced parameter group settings for the REFPDIF_87N (REF1-) function

Range 60 - 90 Step 1 Default 60 Unit Deg Description Relay operate angle for zero sequence directional feature

4.3.6

Technical data
Table 79:
Function Operate characteristic Reset ratio Base sensitivity function Directional characteristic Operate time Reset time Second harmonic blocking

Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance (PDIF, 87N)

Range or value Adaptable >95% (4.0-100.0)% of Ibase Fixed 180 degrees or 60 to 90 degrees 20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id 25 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Id (5.0-100.0)% of fundamental Accuracy 2.0% of Ir for I < Ir 2.0% of I for I > Ir 2.0% of Ir 2.0 degree 2.0% of Ir

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

165

Section 4 Differential protection

4.4

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Function block name: HZDxANSI number: 87 IEC 61850 logical node name: HZPDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

IdN

4.4.1

Introduction
The high impedance differential protection can be used when the involved CT cores have the same turn ratio and similar magnetizing characteristic. It utilizes an external summation of the phases and neutral current and a series resistor and a voltage dependent resistor externally to the relay.

4.4.2

Principle of operation
The high impedance differential function is based on one current input with external stabilizing resistors and voltage dependent resistors. Three functions can be used to provide a three phase differential protection function. The stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the relay operating value UR calculated to achieve through fault stability. The supplied stabilizing resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct resistance value. Refer to Application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

4.4.2.1

Logic diagram
The logic diagram see figure 80 shows the operation principles for the high impedance differential protection function. It is a basically a simple one step relay with an additional lower alarm level. The function can be totally blocked totally or only tripping, can be blocked, by activating inputs from external signals.

166

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 4 Differential protection

Figure 80:

Logic diagram for High impedance differential protection.

4.4.3

Function block
HZD1HZPDIF_87 ISI BLOCK BLKTR TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT en05000363.vsd

Figure 81:

HZD function block

4.4.4

Input and output signals

Table 80:
Signal ISI BLOCK BLKTR

Input signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block of trip

Table 81:
Signal TRIP ALARM MEASVOLT

Output signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block

Description Trip signal Alarm signal Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

167

Section 4 Differential protection 4.4.5 Setting parameters

Table 82:
Parameter Operation U>Alarm

Basic parameter group settings for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function

Range Off On 2 - 500 Step 1 Default Off 10 Unit V Description Operation Off / On Alarm voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Time delay to activate alarm Operate voltage level in volts on CT secondary side Value of series resistor in Ohms

tAlarm U>Trip

0.000 - 60.000 5 - 900

0.001 1

5.000 100

s V

SeriesResistor

10 - 20000

250

ohm

4.4.6

Technical data
Table 83:
Function Operate voltage Reset ratio Maximum continuous voltage Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time

High impedance differential protection (PDIF, 87)

Range or value (20-400) V >95% U>TripPickup2/series resistor 200 W 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud 90 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Ud 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud Accuracy 1.0% of Ur for U < Ur 1.0% of U for U > Ur -

168

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

Section 5

Impedance protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes distance protection and associated functions. It includes function blocks, logic diagrams and data tables with information about distance protection, automatic switch onto fault, weak end in-feed and other associated functions. Quadrilateral characteristics are also covered.

5.1

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic, PDIS 21

Function block name: ZMHx-ANSI number: 21 IEC 61850 logical node name: ZMHPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

5.1.1

Introduction
The numerical mho line distance protection is a three zone full scheme protection for back-up detection of short circuit and earth faults. The three zones have fully independent measuring and settings which gives high flexibility for all types of lines. The modern technical solution offers fast operating time down to cycles. The function can be used as underimpedance back-up protection for transformers and generators.

5.1.2
5.1.2.1

Principle of operation
Full scheme measurement
The execution of the different fault loops within the REx 6xx are of full scheme type, which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults are executed in parallel.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

169

Section 5 Impedance protection

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compare to switched schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.

5.1.2.2

Impedance characteristic
The distance function consists of five instances. Each instance can be selected to be either forward or reverse with cross polarized mho characteristic alternatively self polarized offset Mho characteristics with reverse offset. The operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 82 below where zone5 is selected offset Mho.
jX Mho, zone4

Mho, zone3

Zs=0
Mho, zone2

R
Mho, zone1

Zs=Z1
R

Zs=2Z1
Offset mho, zone5 en06000400.vsd

Figure 82:

Mho, offset Mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the Mho characteristic

The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead of crossing the origin as for the offset mho in the left figure 82, which is only valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown in the right figure 82. The polarisation quantities used for the mho circle is 100% memorized positive sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions. The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cut off a section of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment function increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the PHSM function, where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load encroachment from the PHS to the zone measurement is given in binary format to the input signal LDCND. 170 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

5.1.2.3 Basic operation characteristics
Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter Operation. Each zone can also be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter DirMode . The operation for phase to earth and phase to phase fault can be individually switched On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP. For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced. The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3 elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally. The offset mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a directional line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the directional element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the input DIRCND. The zone reach for phase to earth fault and phase to phase fault is set individually in polar coordinates. The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the corresponding arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP. Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the earth return path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPE. KNMag and KNAng are defined according to equation 36 and equation 37.
KNMag = Z0-Z1 3 Z1

(Equation 36)

Z0-Z1 KNAng = ( ZAngPE ) - arg 3 Z1

(Equation 37)

Where: Z0 Z1 ZAngP E is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase line angle of the positive line impedance

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

171

Section 5 Impedance protection

The phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed individually by setting the parameter tPE and tPP respectively. To release the time delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPE and OpModetPP, has to be set to On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation. The function can be blocked in the following ways: activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based algorithm activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the algorithm for high SIR values activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs

The activation of signal BLKZ can either be by external fuse failure function or from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHODIS 21). The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected by the Mho supervision logic to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be connected to the BLKZMTD output signal at the Mho supervision function. At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built in resonance circuit in the CVT which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The input BLKHSIR shall be connected to the output signal HSIR on the Mho supervision logic for increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.

5.1.2.4

Theory for operation

The Mho algorithm is based on phase comparison of a operating phasor and a polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference phasor by more than 90 degrees, the function will operate and give a trip output.

Phase-to-phase fault
Mho The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as figure 83The condition for deriving the angle is according to equation 38.

b = arg(U L1 L 2 - I L1 L 2 ZPP ) - arg(U pol )

(Equation 38)

172

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

where: the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2

U L1 L 2
the current vector difference between phases L1 and L2

I L1 L 2
ZPP Upol the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault is the polarizing voltage

The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage (UL1L2 for phase L1 to L2 fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the Mho circle for close in faults. Operation occurs if 90270
IL1L2X

Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP IL1L2 ZPP

Upol UL1L2

IL1L2R

en07000109.vsd

Figure 83:

Simplified mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase L1 to L2 fault.

Offset Mho The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

173

Section 5 Impedance protection

The condition for operation at phase to phase fault is that the angle between the two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 figure 84. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle. The angle for L1 to L2 fault can be defined according to equation 42.

b = arg

U-(-IL1L2 ZRevPP)
U -IL1L2 ZPP

(Equation 41)

where:

U
ZRevPP

= is the UL1L2 voltage

= is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault in reverse direction

IL1L2jX

Ucomp1 = UL1L2 - IL1L2 ZPP IL1L2 ZPP

U Ucomp2 = U = IFZF=UL1L2 IL1L2R

- IL1L2 Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd

Figure 84:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase L1 to L2 fault.

For operation the angle should be 90<<270. Offset Mho, forward direction When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside the one for offset mho equation 43 is introdced, that is the angle between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth quadrant. See figure 85 below. So the condition for operation will be 174 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

90 < b < 270

and

(Equation 43)

ArgDir < j < ArgNegR e s

where

(Equation 44)

ArgDir ArgNegRes

is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant is calculated according to equation 42

The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See chapter Mho directional element for information about the mho directionalety element.
IL1L2jX

ZPP

UL1L2

ArgNegRes

IL1L2
ArgDir

en07000111.vsd

Figure 85:

Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase L1 to L2 fault.

Offset Mho, reverse direction The operation area for offset Mho in reverse direction is according to figure 86. The operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180. The conditions for operation are REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 175

Section 5 Impedance protection

90 < b < 270

and

(Equation 45)

180 - ArgDir < j < ArgNeg Re s + 180

(Equation 46)

The is derived according to equation 42 for the mho circle and is the angle between the voltage and current.
X ZPP

ArgNegRes

IL1L2

ArgDir
UL1L2

ZRevPP
en06000469.eps

Figure 86:

Operation characteristice for reverse phase L1phase L2 fault.

Phase-to-earth fault
Mho The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from the earth return path. For a earth fault in phase L1A, we can derive the compensation voltage Ucomp see figure 87 as

Ucomp = U pol - I L1 Z loop

(Equation 47)

176

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

where Upol Zloop is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1 to earth fault) is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as

Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN
where Z1 KN

positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase) zero sequence compensator factor

The angle between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1 to earth fault is

b = arg U L1 - I L1 + IN KN ZPE - arg(Upol)

(Equation 49)

where: UL1 VA IL1 IA IN = phase voltage in faulty phase L1 = phase voltage in faulty phase A = phase current in faulty phase L1 = phase current in faulty phase A = zero sequence current in faulty phase L1 =

KN

Z0-Z1 3 Z1

the setting parameter for the zero sequence compensation consisting of the magnitude KN and the angle KNAng.

Upol Vpol

= 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage UL1 = 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA

It is to be noted that the angle KNAng is the difference angle between the positive sequence impedance ZPE and the impedance ZN for the earth return path see figure 87

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

177

Section 5 Impedance protection

IL1X

KNAng IL1ZN

Ucomp

IL1 Zloop
IL1ZPE Upol f IL1 (Ref)

IL1R

en06000472.vsd

Figure 87:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase L1 to earth fault.

Operation occurs if

90 b 270

(Equation 52)

Offset Mho The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the settting reach for the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPE+180 The condition for operation at phase to earth fault is that the angle between the two compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see figure 88. The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle. The angle for L1 to earth fault can be defined as

b = arg
b = arg

UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )

UL1- IL1L ZPE
UL1- IL1L ZPE

UL1-(- IL1 Z Re vPE )

(Equation 53)

where is the phase L1 phase voltage

U L1
178 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

IL1L 2 jX

IL1 ZPE

U comp1 = UL1 - I L1 ZPE

UL1

U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 ZRevPE)

IL1L2 R

- I L1 Z Re vPe
en 06000465 .vsd

IABjX

IA ZPE

V comp1 = VA - IA ZPE

VA

V comp2 = VA - (-IA ZRevPE)

I AB R

- IA Z RevPe
en 06000465 _ansi. vsd

Figure 88:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1 to L2 fault.

Operation occurs if

90 b 270

(Equation 55)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

179

Section 5 Impedance protection

Offset Mho, forward direction In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset mho will introduce an extra criteria for operation. Beside the basic criteria for offset mho according to equations 53 and 55, also the criteria that the angle between the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. See figure 89. The condition for operation will hereby be 90<<270 and ArgDir<<ArgNegRes.
where

ArgDir ArgNegRes

is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant. is calculated according to equation 53

IL1 jX

UL1

ArgNegRes

IL1
ArgDir

IL1R

en 06000466 .vsd

Figure 89:

Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1 to earth fault.

Offset mho, reverse direction In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in reverse direction will introduce an extra criteria for operation compare to the normal offset Mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The operation area in second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 -ArgDir and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes+180, see figure 90 The conditions for operation of offset Mho in reverse direction for L1 to earth fault will be 90<<270 and 180-Argdir<<ArgNegRes+180.

180

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

The is derived according to equation 53 for the offset Mho circle and is the angle between the voltage and current.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

181

Section 5 Impedance protection

X ZPE

ArgNegRes IL1 ArgDir UL1 ZRevPE R

en06000470.eps

X ZPE

ArgNegRes IA ArgDir VA ZRevPE R

en06000470_ansi.eps

182

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

Figure 90: Simplified characteristic for offset Mho in reverse direction for L1 to earth fault.

5.1.3

Function block
ZMH1ZMHPDIS_21 I3P U3P CURR_INP VOLT_INP POL_VOLT BLOCK BLKZ BLKZMTD BLKHSIR BLKTRIP BLKPE BLKPP DIRCND STCND LDCND TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRPE TRPP START STL1 STL2 STL3 STPE STPP

en06000423.vsd

Figure 91:

ZMH function block

5.1.4

Input and output signals

Table 84:
Signal I3P U3P CURR_INP VOLT_INP POL_VOLT BLOCK BLKZ BLKZMTD BLKHSIR BLKTRIP BLKPE BLKPP DIRCND STCND LDCND

Input signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block

Description Connection for current sample signals Connection for voltage sample signals Connection for current signals Connection for voltage signals Connection for polarizing voltage Block of function Block due to fuse failure Block signal for blocking of time domaine function Blocks time domain function at high SIR Blocks all operate output signals Blocks phase-to-earth operation Blocks phase-to-phase operation External directional condition External start condition (loop enabler) External load condition (loop enabler)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

183

Section 5 Impedance protection

Table 85:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TRPE TRPP START STL1 STL2 STL3 STPE STPP

Output signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block

Description Trip General Trip phase L1 Trip phase L2 Trip phase L3 Trip phase-to-earth Trip phase-to-phase Start General Start phase L1 Start phase L2 Start phase L3 Start phase-to-earth Start phase-to-phase

5.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 86:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase DirMode

Basic parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function

Range Off ON 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off Offset Forward Reverse Off ON OverReach Underreach Off ON 0.005 - 3000.000 Step 1 0.05 Default ON 3000 400.00 Forward Unit A kV Description Operation Off/On Base current Base voltage Direction mode

LoadEnchMode ReachMode OpModePE

Off OverReach ON

Load enchroachment mode Off/On Reach mode Over/ Underreach Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Earth loops Positive sequence impedance setting for Phase-Earth loop Angle for positive sequence line impedance for PhaseEarth loop Magnitud of earth return compensation factor KN

ZPE

0.001

30.000

ohm/p

ZAngPE

10 - 90

80

Deg

KN

0.00 - 3.00

0.01

0.80

Table continued on next page

184

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

Parameter KNAng Range -180 - 180 Step 1 Default -15 Unit Deg Description Angle for earth return compensation factor KN Reverse reach of the phase to earth loop(magnitude) Delay time for operation of phase to earth elements Minimum operation phase to earth current Operation mode Off / On of Phase-Phase loops Impedance setting reach for phase to phase elements Angle for positive sequence line impedance for PhasePhase elements Reverse reach of the phase to phase loop(magnitude) Delay time for operation of phase to phase Minimum operation phase to phase current

ZRevPE

0.005 - 3000.000

0.001

30.000

ohm/p

tPE

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

IMinOpPE OpModePP

10 - 30 Off ON 0.005 - 3000.000

1 -

20 ON

%IB -

ZPP

0.001

30.000

ohm/p

ZAngPP

10 - 90

85

Deg

ZRevPP

0.005 - 3000.000

0.001

30.000

ohm/p

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

IMinOpPP

10 - 30

20

%UB

Table 87:
Parameter OffsetMhoDir

Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function

Range Non-directional Forward Reverse Off ON Off ON Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Direction mode for offset mho Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, PhE Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Phph

OpModetPE

ON

OpModetPP

ON

5.1.6

Technical data

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

185

Section 5 Impedance protection

Table 88:
Function

Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic (PDIS, 21)

Range or value 3 with selectable direction (1030)% of IBase (0.0053000.000) W/phase (1090) degrees (0.0053000.000) /phase (0.0053000.000) /phase (1090) degrees Accuracy 2.0% static accuracy Conditions: Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Number of zones with selectable directions Minimum operate current Positive sequence impedance, phaseearth loop Positive sequence impedance angle, phaseearth loop Reverse reach, phaseearth loop (Magnitude) Impedance reach for phase phase elements Angle for positive sequence impedance, phasephase elements Reverse reach of phasephase loop Magnitude of earth return compensation factor KN Angle for earth compensation factor KN Dynamic overreach Timers Operate time Reset ratio Reset time

(0.0053000.000) /phase (0.003.00) (-180180) degrees <5% at 85 degrees measured with CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30 (0.000-60.000) s 15 ms typically (with static outputs) 105% typically 30 ms typically 0.5% 10 ms -

5.2

Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)

Function block name: ZDMANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ZDMRDIR IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

186

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection 5.2.1 Introduction

The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be optionally supervised by a phase unselective directional function (phase unselective, because it is based on symmetrical components).

5.2.2
5.2.2.1

Principle of operation
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic, ZDM
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDM. Equation 56 and equation 57 are used to classify that the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault respectively.

- ArgDir < arg

0.85 U1L1 + 0.15 U1L1M I L1

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 56)

- ArgDir < arg

0.85 U1L1L 2 + 0.15 U1L1L 2M I L1L 2

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 57)

Where: ArgDir ArgNegRes U1L1 U1L1M IL1 U1L1L2 U1L1L2M IL1L2 Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15 (= -15 degrees) Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 115 degrees, see figure 92 Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1 Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1 Phase current in phase L1 Voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1) Current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)

The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively (see figure 92) and they should not be changed unless system studies show the necessity. The directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite radius).

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

187

Section 5 Impedance protection

X Zset reach point

ArgNegRes

-ArgDir

-Zs
en06000416.vsd

Figure 92:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180 degrees. The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults. For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination. The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored. After 100ms, the following occurs: If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the condition seals in. If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures. If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, no directional indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional function block ZDM has the following output signals: The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:

188

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

bit 11 (2048) STRVL3L1=1 bit 5 (32) STFWL3L1= 1

bit 10 (1024) STRVL2L3=1 bit 4 (16) STFWL2L3= 1

bit 9 (512) STRVL1L2=1 bit 3 (8) STFWL1L2= 1

bit 8 (256) STRVL3N=1 bit 2 (4) STFWL3N=1

bit 7 (128) STRVL2N=1 bit 1 (2) STFWL2N=1

bit 6 (64) STRVL1N=1 bit 0 (1) STFWL1N=1

The STFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-function of all the forward starting conditions, i.e. STFWL1N, STFWL2N, STFWL3N, STFWL1L2, STFWL2L3 and STFWL3L1. The STRV output is similar to the STFW output, the only difference being that it is made up as an OR-function of all the reverse starting conditions, i.e. STRVL1N, STRVL2N, STRVL3N, STRVL1L2, STRVL2L3 and STRVL3L1. Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service values: resistance phase L1 reactance phase L1 resistance phase L2 reactance phase L2 resistance phase L3 reactance phase L3 direction phase L1 direction phase L2 direction phase L3

5.2.3

Function block
ZDM1ZDMRDIR I3P U3P DIR_CURR DIR_VOLT DIR_POL STFW STRV STDIRCND en06000422.vsd

Figure 93:

ZDM function block

5.2.4

Input and output signals

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

189

Section 5 Impedance protection

Table 89:
Signal I3P U3P

Input signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block

Description group connection for current abs 1 group connection for voltage abs 1

Table 90:
Signal DIR_CURR DIR_VOLT DIR_POL STFW STRV STDIRCND

Output signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block

Description Group connection Group connection Group connection Start in forward direction Start in reverse direction Binary coded directional information per measuring loop

5.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 91:
Parameter IBase UBase DirEvalType

Basic parameter group settings for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Impedance Comparator Imp/Comp 90 - 175 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Comparator Unit Description Base setting for current level Base setting for voltage level Directional evaluation mode Impedance / Comparator Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward direction Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward direction Minimum operate phase current for Phase-Earth loops Minimum operate delta current for Phase-Phase loops

ArgNegRes

115

Deg

ArgDir

5 - 45

15

Deg

IMinOpPE

5 - 30

%IB

IMinOpPP

5 - 30

10

%IB

5.3

Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)

190

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

Function block name: ANSI number: 78 IEC 61850 logical node name:

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

<

5.3.1

Introduction
The phenomenon pole slip, also named out of step conditions, occurs when there is phase opposition between different parts of a power system. This is often shown in a simplified way as two equivalent generators connected to each other via an equivalent transmission line and the phase difference between the equivalent generators is 180.
Angle = 90 Angle = -90

Centre of Pole Slip

en07000003.vsd

Figure 94:

The centre of pole slip

The centre of the pole slip can occur in the generator itself or somewhere in the power system. When a pole slip occurs within the generator it is essential to trip the generator. If the centre of pole slip occurs outside any generator the power system should be split into two different parts that could have the ability to get stable operating conditions. The pole slip protection in IED 670 can be used both for generator protection application as well as line protection applications. The situation with pole slip of a generator can be caused by different reasons. A short circuit may occur in the external power grid, close to the generator. If the fault clearing time is too long, the generator will accelerate so much, that the synchronism cannot be maintained.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

191

Section 5 Impedance protection

Un-damped oscillations occur in the power system, where generator groups at different locations, oscillate against each other. If the connection between the generators is too weak the magnitude of the oscillations will increase until the angular stability is lost. The operation of a generator having pole slip will give risk of damages to the generator, shaft and turbine. At each pole slip there will be significant torque impact on the generator-turbine shaft. In asynchronous operation there will be induction of currents in parts of the generator normally not carrying current, thus resulting in increased heating. The consequence can be damages on insulation and stator/rotor iron.

The pole slip protection function shall detect pole slip conditions and trip the generator as fast as possible if the locus of the measured impedance is inside the generatortransformer block. If the centre of pole slip is outside in the power grid, the first action should be to split the network into two parts, after line protection action. If this fails there should be operation of the generator pole slip protection in zone 2, to prevent further damages to the generator, shaft and turbine.

5.3.2

Principle of operation
If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signalled. If the generator is slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring is signalled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor). The movements in the impedance plain can be seen in figure 95. The transient behaviour is described by the transient e.m.f's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the transient system impedance ZS.

192

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

Zone 1 EB Xd REG 670 jX XT

Zone 2 XS EA

A XS

Pole slip impedance movement

XT

Apparent generator impedance

Xd B

en06000437.vsd

Figure 95:
where: X'd XT ZS

Movements in the impedance plain

= transient reactance of the generator = short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer = impedance of the power system A

The detection of rotor angle is enabled when: the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general setting). the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and the corresponding direction is not blocked.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

193

Section 5 Impedance protection

en07000004.vsd

Figure 96:

Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the equivalent generators

An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds the angle set for 'WarnAngle'. Slipping is detected when: a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.

When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when 'EnableZone1' is enabled (external device detects the direction of the centre of slipping). After the first slip, the signals 'Zone1' or 'Zone2' and depending on the direction of slip - either 'Generator' or 'Motor' are issued. Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements. Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.

194

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

The 'Trip1' tripping command and signal are generated after n1 slips in zone 1, providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'. The 'Trip2' signal is generated after n2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'. All signals are reset if: the direction of movement reverses the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or no rotor relative movement was detected during the time 't-Reset'.

Imin > 0.10 IBase

Ucosj < 0.92 UBase

AND AND START

0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz

d startAngle ZONE1

Z cross line ZA - ZC

AND

Z cross line ZC - ZB

AND

ZONE2

Counter N1Limit

a b

ab

AND

TRIP1

d tripAngle Counter N2Limit

OR a b ab

TRIP

AND

TRIP2

en07000005.vsd

Figure 97:

Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

195

Section 5 Impedance protection 5.3.3 Function block

PSP1PSPPPAM_78 I3P U3P BLOCK BLKGEN BLKMOTOR EXTZONE1 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START ZONE1 ZONE2 GEN MOTOR SFREQ SLIPZOHM SLIPZPER UCOSKV UCOSPER en07000030.vsd

Figure 98:

PSP function block

5.3.4

Input and output signals

Table 92:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKGEN BLKMOTOR EXTZONE1

Input signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block

Description Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block operation in generating direction Block operation in motor direction Extension of zone1 with zone2 region

Table 93:
Signal TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START ZONE1 ZONE2 GEN MOTOR SFREQ SLIPZOHM

Output signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block

Description Common trip signal Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1 Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2 Common start signal First slip in zone1 region First slip in zone2 region Generator is faster then the system Generator is slower then the system Slip frequency Slip impedance in ohms

Table continued on next page

196

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

Signal SLIPZPER UCOSKV UCOSPER Description Slip impedance in percent of ZBase UCosPhi voltage in kV UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase

5.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 94:
Parameter IBase

Basic general settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range 0.1 - 99999.9 Step 0.1 Default 3000.0 Unit A Description Base Current (primary phase current in Amperes) Base Voltage (primary phase-tophase voltage in kV) Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3, L3L1) Invert current direction

UBase

0.1 - 9999.9

0.1

20.0

kV

MeasureMode

PosSeq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 No Yes

PosSeq

InvertCTcurr

No

Table 95:
Parameter Operation OperationZ1 OperationZ2 ImpedanceZA ImpedanceZB ImpedanceZC AnglePhi StartAngle TripAngle N1Limit N2Limit

Basic parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range Off On Off On Off On 0.00 - 1000.00 0.00 - 1000.00 0.00 - 1000.00 72.00 - 90.00 0.0 - 180.0 0.0 - 180.0 1 - 20 1 - 20 Step 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 1 1 Default Off On On 10.00 10.00 10.00 85.00 110.0 90.0 1 3 Unit % % % Deg Deg Deg Description Operation On / Off Operation Zone1 On / Off Operation Zone2 On / Off Forward impedance in % of Zbase Reverse impedance in % of Zbase Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase Angle of the slip impedance line Rotor angle for the start signal Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals Count limit for the trip1 signal Count limit for the trip2 signal

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

197

Section 5 Impedance protection

Table 96:
Parameter ResetTime

Advanced parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit s Description Time without slip to reset all signals

5.3.6

Technical data
Table 97:
Function Impedance reach Characteristic angle Start and trip angles Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters

Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)

Range or value (0.001000.00)% of Zbase (72.0090.00) degrees (0.0180.0) degrees (1-20) Accuracy 2.0% of Ur/Ir 5.0 degrees 5.0 degrees -

5.4

Loss of excitation (PDIS, 40)

Function block name: UEXx ANSI number: 40 IEC 61850 logical node name: LEXPDIS IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Z<

5.4.1

Introduction
There are limits for the under-excitation of a synchronous machine. A reduction of the excitation current weakens the coupling between the rotor and the external power system. The machine may lose the synchronism and start to operate like an induction machine. Then, the reactive consumption will increase. Even if the machine does not loose synchronism it may not be acceptable to operate in this state for a long time. The under-excitation increases the generation of heat in the end region of the synchronous machine. The local heating may damage the insulation of the stator winding and even the iron core. To prevent damages to the generator it should be tripped at under-excitation.

5.4.2

Principle of operation
The underexcitation protection in REG 670 measures the apparent impedance seen out from the generator. The measurement loop of apparent impedance can be chosen as the positive sequence loop or any one of the three phase-to-phase loops.

198

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

Measured mode Measured apparent impedance

Zposseq

U posseq I posseq

ZL1L2

U L1 - U L 2 I L1 - I L 2
U L 2 - U L3 I L 2 - I L3
U L 3 - U L1 I L 3 - I L1

ZL2L3

ZL3L1

There are three characteristics in the underexcitation protection as shown in figure 99.
X

Underexcitation Protection Restrain area R

Z1, Fast zone Z2, Slow zone

en06000455.vsd

Figure 99:

Three characteristics in the underexcitation protection

When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z1 this zone will operate, normally with a short delay. The zone is related to the dynamic stability of the generator. REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 199

Section 5 Impedance protection

When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z2 this zone will operate, normally with a longer delay. The zone is related to the static stability of the generator. The protection also has a restrain area as shown in figure 99. In the function the zone measurement is done as shown in figure 100.
X

R XoffsetZ1 Z (apparent impedance)

Z1diameter

Z1 = Z - (XoffsetZ1 + Z1diameter/2)

Z1 or Z2

en06000456.vsd

Figure 100:

Zone measurement in the underexcitation protection function

The impedance Z1 is constructed out from the apparent impedance Z and the impedance corresponding to the centre point of the impedance characteristic (Z1 or Z2). If the amplitude of this impedance is less than the radius (diameter/2) of the characteristic, this part of the protection will operate. If the directional restrain is set off the impedance zone operation will start the appropriate timer and the function will trip after the set delay (tZ1 or tZ2). If the directional restrain is set On the directional release function must operate to enable operation. A new impedance is constructed as Z XoffsetDirLine. If the phase angle of this impedance is less than the set DirAngle the function will be released, see figure 101.

200

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

Underexcitation Protection Restrain area

XoffsetDirLine DirAngle

Z (apparent impedance)

en06000457.vsd

Figure 101:

Impedance constructed as Z - XoffsetDirLine in underexcitation protection

The function is schematically described in figure 102.

tZ1 t

Chosen current phasor Chosen voltage phasor Apparent impedance calculation Z

Z in Z1 char.

&

startZ1

TripZ1

Z in Z2 char.

&

startZ2

tZ2 t

TripZ2

Dir. Restrain Dir.Restrain ON

en06000458.vsd

Figure 102:

Simplified logic diagram of the underexcitation protection

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

201

Section 5 Impedance protection 5.4.3 Function block

UEX1LEXPDIS_40 I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTRZ1 BLKTRZ2 TRIP TRZ1 TRZ2 START STZ1 STZ2 XOHM XPERCENT ROHM RPERCENT en07000031.vsd

Figure 103:

UEX function block

5.4.4

Input and output signals

Table 98:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTRZ1 BLKTRZ2

Input signals for the LEXPDIS_40 (UEX1-) function block

Description Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block trip of zone Z1 Block trip of zone Z2

Table 99:
Signal TRIP TRZ1 TRZ2 START STZ1 STZ2 XOHM XPERCENT ROHM RPERCENT

Output signals for the LEXPDIS_40 (UEX1-) function block

Description Common trip signal Trip signal from impedance zone Z1 Trip signal from impedance zone Z2 Common start signal Start signal from impedance zone Z1 Start signal from impedance zone Z2 Reactance in Primary Ohms Reactance in percent of Zbase Resistance in Primary Ohms Resistance in percent of Zbase

5.4.5

Setting parameters

202

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 5 Impedance protection

Table 100:
Parameter IBase

Basic general settings for the LEXPDIS_40 (UEX1-) function

Range 0.1 - 99999.9 Step 0.1 Default 3000 Unit A Description Base Current (primary phase current in Amperes) Base Voltage (primary phase-tophase voltage in kV) Measuring mode (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3, L3L1)

UBase

0.1 - 9999.9

0.1

20

kV

MeasureMode

PosSeq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1

PosSeq

Table 101:
Parameter Operation OperationZ1 XoffsetZ1

Basic parameter group settings for the LEXPDIS_40 (UEX1-) function

Range Off On Off On -1000.00 1000.00 0.01 - 3000.00 Step 0.01 Default Off On -10.00 Unit % Description Operation Off / On Operation Off/On zone Z1 Offset of Z1 circle top point along X axis in % of Zbase Diameter of imedance circle for Z1 in % of Zbase Trip time delay for Z1 Operation Off/On zone Z2 Offset of Z2 circle top point along X axis in % of Zbase Diameter of imedance circle for Z2 in % of Zbase Trip time delay for Z2

Z1diameter

0.01

100.00

tZ1 OperationZ2 XoffsetZ2

0.00 - 6000.00 Off On -1000.00 1000.00 0.01 - 3000.00

0.01 0.01

0.01 On -10.00

s %

Z2diameter

0.01

200.00

tZ2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Table 102:
Parameter invertCTcurren

Advanced general settings for the LEXPDIS_40 (UEX1-) function

Range No Yes Step Default No Unit Description Invert CT current

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

203

Section 5 Impedance protection

Table 103:
Parameter DirSuperv

Advanced parameter group settings for the LEXPDIS_40 (UEX1-) function

Range Off On -1000.00 3000.00 -180.0 - 180.0 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off/On for additional directional criterion Offset of directional line along X axis in % of Zbase Angle between directional line and Raxis in degrees

XoffsetDirLine

0.01

0.00

DirAngle

0.1

-13.0

Deg

5.4.6

Technical data
Table 104:
Function X offset of Mho top point Diameter of Mho circle Timers

Loss of excitation (PDIS, 40)

Range or value (1000.001000.00)% of Zbase (0.003000.00)% of Zbase (0.006000.00) s Accuracy 2.0% of Ur/Ir 2.0% of Ur/Ir 0.5% 10 ms

204

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Section 6

Current protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection, Pole discordance protection and Residual overcurrent protection.

6.1

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)

Function block name: IOCxANSI number: 50 IEC 61850 logical node name: PHPIOC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3I>>

6.1.1

Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the fault current at minimum source impedance.

6.1.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the IOC function. In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn (n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

205

Section 6 Current protection

There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

6.1.3

Function block
IOC1PHPIOC_50 I3P BLOCK ENMULT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 en04000391.vsd

Figure 104:

IOC function block

6.1.4

Input and output signals

Table 105:
Signal I3P BLOCK ENMULT

Input signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block

Description Three phase current Block of function Enable current start value multiplier

Table 106:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3

Output signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block

Description Trip signal from any phase Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3

6.1.5

Setting parameters

206

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Table 107:
Parameter Operation IBase OpMode

Basic parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 2 out of 3 1 out of 3 1 - 2500 Step 1 Default Off 3000 1 out of 3 Unit A Description Operation Off / On Base current Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1out of 3 Operate phase current level in % of IBase

IP>>

200

%IB

Table 108:
Parameter StValMult

Advanced parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function

Range 0.5 - 5.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit Description Multiplier for operate current level

6.1.6

Technical data
Table 109:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50)

Range or value (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset < 5% at t = 100 ms Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir -

6.2

Four step phase overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51_67)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

207

Section 6 Current protection

Function block name: TOCxANSI number: 51/67 IEC 61850 logical node name: OC4PTOC

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3I> 4 4 alt

6.2.1

Introduction
The four step phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined time characteristic. The function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.

6.2.2

Principle of operation
The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x an operation mode is set (DirModex): Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. The protection design can be decomposed in four parts: The direction element, indicates the over current fault direction The harmonic Restraint Blocking function The 4 step over current function The Mode Selection If VT inputs are not available or not connected, func parameter DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

208

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

faultState I3P U3P

Direction Element

dirPh1Flt dirPh2Flt dirPh3Flt

4 step over current element One element for each step

faultState

START

TRIP

I3P

Harmonic Restraint Element

harmRestrBlock

enableDir Mode Selection enableStep1-4 DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740.vsd

Figure 105:

Functional overview of TOC.

A common setting for all steps, StPhaseSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3. The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a pre-processing function blocks. By a parameter setting within the general settings for the TOC function it is then possible to select type of measurement which shall be used by TOC function for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filer (RMS). If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are fed to the TOC function. In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase and step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal Start for this phase/step, the Start signal REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 209

Section 6 Current protection

common for all three phases for this step and a common Start signal. It shall be noted that the selection of measured value (i.e. DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of directional part of TOC function. Service value for individually measured phase currents are available from the TOC function. This feature simplifies testing, commissioning and in service operational checking of the function. A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level. The function can use a directional option. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1
Phase-earth short circuit:

I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1

U refL1 = U L1

I dirL1 = I L1

U refL 2 = U L 2
U refL 3 = U L 3

I dirL 2 = I L 2
I dirL 3 = I L 3

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an angle window AngleROA.

210

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Reverse

Uref RCA

ROA

ROA

Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd

Figure 106:

Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle sector from AngleRCA for directional borders. A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set: IminOpPhSel. If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inverse characteristics". Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inverse characteristics". There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult, x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

211

Section 6 Current protection 6.2.3 Function block

TOC1OC4PTOC_51_67 I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR3L1 TR3L2 TR3L3 TR4L1 TR4L2 TR4L3 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STL1 STL2 STL3 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST3L1 ST3L2 ST3L3 ST4L1 ST4L2 ST4L3 2NDHARM DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 en06000187.vsd

Figure 107:

TOC function block

6.2.4

Input and output signals

Table 110:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 Table continued on next page

Input signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of trip Block of Step1

212

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Signal BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 Description Block of Step2 Block of Step3 Block of Step4 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4

Table 111:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 TR3L1 TR3L2 TR3L3 TR4L1 TR4L2 TR4L3 START ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 STL1 STL2 STL3

Output signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block

Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Common trip signal from step2 Common trip signal from step3 Common trip signal from step4 Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L3 Trip signal from step3 phase L1 Trip signal from step3 phase L2 Trip signal from step3 phase L3 Trip signal from step4 phase L1 Trip signal from step4 phase L2 Trip signal from step4 phase L3 General start signal Common start signal from step1 Common start signal from step2 Common start signal from step3 Common start signal from step4 Start signal from phase L1 Start signal from phase L2 Start signal from phase L3

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

213

Section 6 Current protection

Signal ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST3L1 ST3L2 ST3L3 ST4L1 ST4L2 ST4L3 2NDHARM DIRL1 DIRL2 DIRL3 Description Start signal from step1 phase L1 Start signal from step1 phase L2 Start signal from step1 phase L3 Start signal from step2 phase L1 Start signal from step2 phase L2 Start signal from step2 phase L3 Start signal from step3 phase L1 Start signal from step3 phase L2 Start signal from step3 phase L3 Start signal from step4 phase L1 Start signal from step4 phase L2 Start signal from step4 phase L3 Block from second harmonic detection Direction for phase1 Direction for phase2 Direction for phase3

6.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 112:
Parameter MeasType

Basic general settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range DFT RMS Step Default DFT Unit Description Selection between DFT and RMS measurement

Table 113:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA AngleROA StartPhSel

Basic parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 40 - 65 40 - 89 Not Used 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 Step 1 0.05 1 1 Default Off 3000 400.00 55 80 1 out of 3 Unit A kV Deg Deg Description Operation Off / On Base current Base voltage Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Relay operation angle (ROA) Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)

Table continued on next page

214

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter DirMode1 Range Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

Characterist1

ANSI Def. Time

I1>

1000

%IB

Phase current operate level for step1 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Multiplier for current operate level for step 1 Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

t1 k1

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

0.001 0.01

0.000 0.05

s -

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

I1Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

DirMode2

Off Non-directional Forward Reverse

Non-directional

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

215

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter Characterist2 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

I2>

500

%IB

Phase current operate level for step2 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Multiplier for current operate level for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 3

t2 k2

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

0.001 0.01

0.400 0.05

s -

I2Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

DirMode3

Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

Non-directional

Characterist3

ANSI Def. Time

I3>

250

%IB

Phase current operate level for step3 in % of IBase

Table continued on next page

216

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter t3 k3 Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00 Step 0.001 0.01 Default 0.800 0.05 Unit s Description Definitive time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Multiplier for current operate level for step 3 Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Selection of time delay curve type for step 4

t3Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

I3Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

DirMode4

Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

Non-directional

Characterist4

ANSI Def. Time

I4>

175

%IB

Phase current operate level for step4 in % of IBase Definitive time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 4 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 4 Multiplier for current operate level for step 4

t4 k4

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

0.001 0.01

2.000 0.05

s -

t4Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

I4Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

217

Section 6 Current protection

Table 114:
Parameter IMinOpPhSel

Advanced parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function

Range 1 - 100 Step 1 Default 7 Unit %IB Description Minimum current for phase selection in % of IBase Operate level of 2nd harm restrain op in % of Fundamental Selection of reset curve type for step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2

2ndHarmStab

5 - 100

20

%IB

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Instantaneous

tReset1

0.001

0.020

tPCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain1

Off On Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Off

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous

tReset2

0.001

0.020

tPCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Table continued on next page

218

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter tACrv2 Range 0.005 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 13.500 Unit Description Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 3 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 3

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain2

Off On Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Off

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous

tReset3

0.001

0.020

tPCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

219

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter tTRCrv3 Range 0.005 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 13.500 Unit Description Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3 Enable block of step3 from harmonic restrain Selection of reset curve type for step 4 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain3

Off On Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000

Off

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous

tReset4

0.001

0.020

tPCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

HarmRestrain4

Off On

Off

6.2.6

Technical data

220

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Table 115:
Function Operate current Reset ratio

Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51/67)

Setting range (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% (1-100)% of lbase (-70.0 -50.0) degrees (40.070.0) degrees (75.090.0) degrees (5100)% of fundamental (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees 2.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms See table 517 and table 518 -

Min. operating current Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Maximum forward angle Minimum forward angle Second harmonic blocking Independent time delay Minimum operate time Inverse characteristics, see table 517 and table 518 Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

6.3

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)

Function block name: IEFxANSI number: 50N IEC 61850 logical node name: EFPIOC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

IN>>

6.3.1

Introduction
The single input overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping times to allow use for instantaneous earth fault protection, with the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance. The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

221

Section 6 Current protection 6.3.2 Principle of operation

The sampled analogue residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current the RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to the IEF function. In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP. There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

6.3.3

Function block
IEF1EFPIOC_50N I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTEN TRIP

en06000269.vsd

Figure 108:

IEF function block

6.3.4

Input and output signals

Table 116:
Signal I3P BLOCK BLKAR MULTEN

Input signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block

Description Three phase currents Block of function Block input for auto reclose Enable current multiplier

Table 117:
Signal TRIP

Output signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block

Description Trip signal

222

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection 6.3.5 Setting parameters

Table 118:
Parameter Operation IBase IN>>

Basic parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 1 - 2500 Step 1 1 Default Off 3000 200 Unit A %IB Description Operation Off / On Base current Operate residual current level in % of IBase

Table 119:
Parameter StValMult

Advanced parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function

Range 0.5 - 5.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 Unit Description Multiplier for operate current level

6.3.6

Technical data
Table 120:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Operate time Reset time Critical impulse time Dynamic overreach

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (PIOC, 50N)

Range or value (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset 35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset < 5% at t = 100 ms Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir -

6.4

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PTOC, 51N/67N)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

223

Section 6 Current protection

Function block name: TEFxANSI number:51N/ 67N IEC 61850 logical node name: EF4PTOC

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

IN 4 4 alt

6.4.1

Introduction
The four step residual single input overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately. All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined characteristic. A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step. The function can be used as main protection for phase to earth faults. The function can be used to provide a system back-up e.g. in the case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure. Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication blocks into permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weakend infeed functionality are available as well. The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.

6.4.2

Principle of operation
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool: 1. 2. 3. I3P, input for the function Operating Quantity. U3P, input for the function Voltage Polarizing Quantity. IP3P, input for the function Current Polarizing Quantity.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the Configuration Tool within PCM.

6.4.2.1

Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (i.e. 3Io) for its operating quantity. The residual current can be:

224

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

1.

directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF function input I3P). This dedicated IED 670 CT input can be for example connected to: parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (well known Holm-Green connection). one single core balance, current instrument transformer (i.e. cable CT). one single current instrument transformer located between power system star point and ground (i.e. current transformer located in the star point of a star connected transformer winding). one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a protected object (i.e. current transformer located between two star points of double star shunt capacitor bank).

2.

calculated from three phase current input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

I op = 3 Io = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where: IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the TEF function to compare it with the set operation current value of the four stages (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal START for this step and a common START signal.

6.4.2.2

Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the function in order to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing. When Voltage Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Voltage (i.e. 3Uo) as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage can be: 1. directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

225

Section 6 Current protection

2.

function input U3P). This dedicated IED 670 VT input shall be then connected to open delta winding of a three phase main VT. calculated from three phase voltage input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analogue Input U3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3Uo from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

U VPol = 3 Uo = UL1 + UL 2 + UL3

where: UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages. Note! In order to use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED 670 VT inputs.

The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived. This phasor is used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter UpolMin. It shall be noted that 3Uo is used to determine the location of the earth fault.Thus the setting parameter ROT3U0, located under General Settings for Earth Fault function, has default value of ROT3U0=180 deg. This insures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the earth fault function. When Current Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Current (i.e. 3Io) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be: 1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of IED 670 is connected in SMT tool to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to TEF function input IP3P). This dedicated IED 670 CT input is then typically connected to one single current instrument transformer located between power system star point and ground (i.e. current transformer located in the star point of a star connected transformer winding). For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED 670 CT input can be connected to parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (well known Holm-Green connection)

2.

calculated from three phase current input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analog Input IP3P is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such case

226

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
I Pol = 3 Io = IL1 + IL 2 + IL 3
where: IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents. However this option can be as well only used for some special line protection applications as explained in the Application Manual. (Equation 70)

The residual polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. This phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent Zero Sequence Source Impedance in order to calculate equivalent Polarizing Voltage UIPol in accordance with the following formula:
U IPol = ZoS I Pol = (RNPol+j XNPol) I Pol
(Equation 71)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPollMin. When Dual Polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
U TotPol = U UPol + U IPol = 3Uo + ZoS I Pol = 3Uo + (RNPol+j XNPol) I Pol
(Equation 72)

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse).

6.4.2.3

External polarizing facility for EFGround Fault function

The individual stages within the function can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x indicates the relevant step within the function) to provide external directional control (i.e. torque control) by for example using one of the following functions available in IED 670:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

227

Section 6 Current protection

1. 2.

Distance protection directional unit. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose protection function.

6.4.2.4

Base quantities within the function

The base quantities shall be entered as setting parameters for every EF function. Base current shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes. Base voltage shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

6.4.2.5

Internal EFGround Fault function structure

The function is internally divided into the following parts: 1. 2. 3. 4. Four residual overcurrent stages. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent stages with integrated Directional Comparison stage for communication based earth fault protection schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking). Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking during switching of parallel transformers. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

Each part is described separately in the following paragraphs.

6.4.2.6

Four residual overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity IOp (i.e. Residual Current) as measuring quantity. Every of the four residual overcurrent stage has the following built-in facilities: Operating mode (i.e. Off / Non-directional / Forward / Reverse). By this parameter setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. It shall be noted that the directional decision (i.e. Forward/Reverse) is not made within residual overcurrent stage itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision Element described in the next paragraph. Residual current pickup value. Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for earth fault function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to Chapter "Time inverse characteristics" Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI Rest). By this parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the complete list of available reset curves please refer to Chapter "Time inverse characteristics" REG 670

228

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 6 Current protection

Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined. Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (i.e. On/Off). By this parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the stage if the second harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level. Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent stage is shown in the following figure:
BLKTR Characteristx=DefTime
a b a>b

|IOP| ENMULTx INxMult INx> BLKSTx BLOCK 2ndH_BLOCK_Int HarmRestrain1=Disabled DirModex=Off DirModex=Non-directional DirModex=Forward DirModex=Reverse

tx
OR

AND

TRINx

T F

AND

STINx

Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

OR

OR

STAGEx_DIR_Int

FORWARD_Int

AND

OR

REVERSE_Int

AND

en07000064.vsd

Figure 109:

Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2 ,3 or 4

The function can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from the function for each stage can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

6.4.2.7

Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparision stage

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent stages shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

229

Section 6 Current protection

directional supervision element and the integrated directional comparison stage. The function has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current IOp is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways: 1. 2. 3. When polMethod=Voltage, UVPol will be used as polarizing quantity. When polMethod=Current, UIPol will be used as polarizing quantity. When polMethod=Dual, UTotPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in the following figure, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

Reverse Area

0.4*IN>Dir

AngleRCA 0.4*IN>Dir

Upol=-3Uo

Forward Area Iop=3Io

en07000066.vsd

Figure 110:

Operating characteristic for earth fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

230

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Operating Current Pickup IN>Dir. However it shall be noted that the directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as IOp cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger then 40% of IN>Dir. Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of Forward & Reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional Comparison stage, built-in within directional supervision element, will set EF function output binary signal: 1. 2. STFW=1 when Operating Quantity magnitude is bigger than setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction. STRV=1 when Operating Quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse direction.

These signals shall be used for communication based earth fault teleprotection schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking). Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison stage is shown in the following figure:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

231

Section 6 Current protection

|IOP|

a b

a>b

REVERSE_Int

AND

STRV

0.6

X
a a>b b

IN>Dir

FORWARD_Int

AND

STFW

0.4

FWD

PolMethod=Voltage PolMethod=Current PolMethod=Dual

OR

UPolMin UPol 0.0 IPolMin

OR

T F

IOP UTotPol

IPol RNPol XNPol

Directional Characteristic

AngleRCA

AND

FORWARD_Int

AND RVS COMPLEX NUMBER

REVERSE_Int

UIPol 0.0

T F
STAGE1_DIR_Int STAGE2_DIR_Int STAGE3_DIR_Int STAGE4_DIR_Int

OR

BLOCK

AND

en07000067.vsd

Figure 111:

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison stage

6.4.2.8

Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level (defined by parameter setting 2ndHarmStab) any of the four residual overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active the EF function output signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one. In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to stabilize the EF function during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial

232

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will be a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we will have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short period this current will however be small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking will reset. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will be latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level. This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic sealin feature will be activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled: 1. 2. 3. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf=On. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70 ms. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible to select which one of the four start values that will be used (i.e. IN1> or IN2> or IN3> or IN4>).

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal will be sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above). Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in the following figure:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

233

Section 6 Current protection

BLOCK 2ndHarmStab IOP

X
a b a>b OR

Extract second harmonic current component Extract fundamental current component t=70ms t BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a b a>b OR

2NDHARMD

q-1

AN D

OR

2ndH_BLOCK_Int

UseStartValue IN1> IN2> IN3> IN4>

en07000068.vsd

Figure 112:

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers feature

6.4.2.9

Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic (SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U. The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 100 ms). The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-Time logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately

234

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

235

Section 6 Current protection

236
Setting tpulse posClsPls AND PwrMode tpulse SOTFActive operationMode AND AND closeCBPls OR TON IN Q PT ET AND AND Exec Exec NOT Setting Setting onOrOffPos PwrMode tpulse UTimeActive activationUnderTime switchOntoFaultDelayTime PwrMode block step2Or3in AND Setting False PwrMode start Exec NOT tpulse posOpnPls cbClosed activationSOTF

Figure 113:
SOTF

Exec

cbPosition

EF Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF function is shown in the following Figure 1:
Under Time
OR OR opnOrClsCBPls AND Setting Exec Exec step4in AND harmonic2ndRestraint NOT cbSwitchingFaultDelayTime AND OR TON IN Q PT ET AND

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Exec

closeCB

operate

Exec

Exec

en06000643.vsd

Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Directional Check Element

signal to communication scheme

INPol 3U0 3I0 DirMode enableDir

Direction Element

operatingCurrent earthFaultDirection angleValid

4 step over current element One element for each step

TRIP

3I0

Harmonic Restraint Element

harmRestrBlock

start step 2, 3 and 4 Blocking at parallel transformers SwitchOnToFault CB pos or cmd TRIP

Mode Selection

DirMode enableDir enableStep1-4 DirectionalMode1-4

en06000376.vsd

Figure 114:

Functional overview of TEF

6.4.3

Function block
TEF1EF4PTOC_51N67N I3P U3P I3PPOL BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 CBPOS CLOSECB OPENCB TRIP TRIN1 TRIN2 TRIN3 TRIN4 TRSOTF START STIN1 STIN2 STIN3 STIN4 STSOTF STFW STRV 2NDHARMD

en06000424.vsd

Figure 115:

TEF1 function block

6.4.4
REG 670

Input and output signals

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 237

Section 6 Current protection

Table 121:
Signal I3P U3P I3PPOL BLOCK BLKTR BLKST1 BLKST2 BLKST3 BLKST4 ENMULT1 ENMULT2 ENMULT3 ENMULT4 CBPOS CLOSECB OPENCB

Input signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block

Description Current connection Polarizing voltage connection Polarizing current connection Block of function Block of trip Block of step 1 (Start and trip) Block of step 2 (Start and trip) Block of step 3 (Start and trip) Block of step 4 (Start and trip) When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4 Breaker position Breaker close command Breaker open command

Table 122:
Signal TRIP TRIN1 TRIN2 TRIN3 TRIN4 TRSOTF START STIN1 STIN2 STIN3 STIN4 STSOTF STFW STRV 2NDHARMD

Output signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block

Description Trip Trip signal from step 1 Trip signal from step 2 Trip signal from step 3 Trip signal from step 4 Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function General start signal Start signal step 1 Start signal step 2 Start signal step 3 Start signal step 4 Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function Forward directional start signal Reverse directional start signal 2nd harmonic block signal

6.4.5
238

Setting parameters
Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Table 123:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase AngleRCA polMethod

Basic parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 -180 - 180 Voltage Current Dual 1 - 100 Step 1 0.05 1 Default Off 3000 400.00 65 Voltage Unit A kV Deg Description Operation Off / On Base value for current settings Base value for voltage settings Relay characteristic angle (RCA) Type of polarization

UPolMin

%UB

Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of UBase Minimum current level for polarization in % of IBase Real part of source Z to be used for current polarisation Imaginary part of source Z to be used for current polarisation Residual current level for Direction release in % of IBase Second harmonic restrain operation in % of IN amplitude Enable blocking at parallel transformers Current level blk at parallel transf (step1, 2, 3 or 4) SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/ Undertime/SOTF +undertime) Select signal that shall activate SOTF Selection of step used for SOTF Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF Time delay for SOTF

IPolMin

2 - 100

%IB

RNPol

0.50 - 1000.00

0.01

5.00

ohm

XNPol

0.50 - 3000.00

0.01

40.00

ohm

IN>Dir

1 - 100

10

%IB

2ndHarmStab

5 - 100

20

BlkParTransf UseStartValue

Off On IN1> IN2> IN3> IN4> Off SOTF UnderTime SOTF +UnderTime Open Closed CloseCommand Step 2 Step 3 Off On 0.000 - 60.000

Off IN4>

SOTF

Off

ActivationSOTF

Open

StepForSOTF HarmResSOTF

Step 2 Off

tSOTF

0.001

0.200

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

239

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter t4U DirMode1 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Non-directional Unit s Description Switch-onto-fault active time Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Time delay curve type for step 1

Characterist1

ANSI Def. Time

IN1>

100

%IB

Operate residual current level for step 1 in % of IBase Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir, forward, reverse)

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

k1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

IN1Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

HarmRestrain1

Off On Off Non-directional Forward Reverse

On

DirMode2

Non-directional

Table continued on next page

240

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter Characterist2 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Time delay curve type for step 2

IN2>

50

%IB

Operate residual current level for step 2 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 2 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves step 2 Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Time delay curve type for step 3

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

k2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

IN2Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

HarmRestrain2

Off On Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type

On

DirMode3

Non-directional

Characterist3

ANSI Def. Time

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

241

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter IN3> Range 1 - 2500 Step 1 Default 33 Unit %IB Description Operate residual current level for step 3 in % of IBase Independent time delay of step 3 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 3 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 3 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 3 Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir, forward, reverse) Time delay curve type for step 4

t3 k3

0.000 - 60.000 0.05 - 999.00

0.001 0.01

0.800 0.05

s -

IN3Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t3Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

HarmRestrain3

Off On Off Non-directional Forward Reverse ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 1 - 2500

On

DirMode4

Non-directional

Characterist4

ANSI Def. Time

IN4>

17

%IB

Operate residual current level for step 4 in % of IBase Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for step 4 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for step 4 Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4 Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain

t4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.200

k4

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

IN4Mult

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

t4Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

HarmRestrain4

Off On

On

242

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Table 124:
Parameter ActUnderTime

Advanced parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function

Range CB position CB command Step Default CB position Unit Description Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos/ CBCommand) Time delay for under time Reset curve type for step 1 Reset curve type for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 1 Reset curve type for step 2 Reset curve type for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2

tUnderTime ResetTypeCrv1

0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000

0.001 -

0.300 Instantaneous

s -

tReset1 tPCrv1

0.001 0.001

0.020 1.000

s -

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000

Instantaneous

tReset2 tPCrv2

0.001 0.001

0.020 1.000

s -

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

243

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter tBCrv2 Range 0.00 - 20.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit Description Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 2 Reset curve type for step 3 Reset curve type for step 3 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 3 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 3 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for step 3

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000

Instantaneous

tReset3 tPCrv3

0.001 0.001

0.020 1.000

s -

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Table continued on next page

244

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter ResetTypeCrv4 Range Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 3.000 Step Default Instantaneous Unit Description Reset curve type for step 4 Reset curve type for step 4 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter A for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 4 Parameter C for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve step 4 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve step 4

tReset4 tPCrv4

0.001 0.001

0.020 1.000

s -

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

6.4.6

Technical data
Table 125:
Function Operate current Reset ratio Operate current for directional comparison Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 517 and table 518 Second harmonic restrain operation Relay characteristic angle Table continued on next page

Four step residual overcurrent protection (PEFM, 51N/67N)

Range or value (1-2500)% of lbase > 95% (1100)% of lbase (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types (5100)% of fundamental (-180 to 180) degrees Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms See table 517 and table 518 2.0% of Ir 2.0 degrees

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

245

Section 6 Current protection

Function Minimum polarizing voltage Minimum polarizing current RNS, XNS Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Range or value (1100)% of Ubase (130)% of Ibase (0.503000.00) W/phase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically Accuracy 0.5% of Ur 0.25% of Ir -

6.5

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Function block name: SDExANSI number: 67N IEC 61850 logical node name: SDEPSDE IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

6.5.1

Introduction
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase to earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network. Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with an check of angle 3I0 and cos . Directional residual power can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual power component 3I03U0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. A normal undirectional residual current function can also be used and be with definite or inverse time delay. A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for undirectional sensitive back-up protection.

246

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90 phase shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such a network. In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil, with a parallel resistor, the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0. As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity. When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have the following facts to consider: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks, with large capacitive earth fault current In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used. Such a resistor will give a resistive earth fault current component of about 200 - 400 A at a zero resistive phase to earth fault. In such a system the directional residual power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power characteristics.

6.5.2
6.5.2.1

Principle of operation
Introduction
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from preprocessor blocks. The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions included:

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) ). Uref = -3U0 ejRCADir. RCAdir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCAdir is set equal to -90 in an isolated

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

247

Section 6 Current protection

network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0 cos gets larger than the set value.
Uref RCA = 0, ROA = 90

3I0

= ang(3I0) - ang(3Uref) 3I0 cos -3U0=Uref

en06000648.vsd

Figure 116:

RCADir set to 0
Uref RCA = -90, ROA = 90

3I0 3I0 cos = ang(3I0) ang(Uref) -3U0

en06000649.vsd

Figure 117:

RCADir set to -90

For trip, both the residual current 3I0 cos and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels: INCosPhi> and UNRel>. Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

248

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time delay. There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle is larger than a set value as shown in the figure below. This is equivalent to blocking of the function if > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument transformers.

3I0

Operate area

3I0 cos ROA

-3U0=Uref

RCA = 0

en06000650.vsd

Figure 118:

Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function will indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 cos ( + 180) the set value. It shall also be possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure below:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

249

Section 6 Current protection

Operate area

-3U0=Uref

RCA = 0

Instrument transformer angle error

RCAcomp Characteristic after angle compensation

3I0 (prim)

3I0 (to prot)

en06000651.vsd

Figure 119:

Explanation of RCAcomp.

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)ang(Uref) ). Uref = -3U0 ejRCA. The function operates when 3I0 3U0 cos gets larger than the set value. For trip, both the residual power 3I03U0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR. When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as 3I0 3U0 cos ( + 180) the set value. This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay. The inverse time delay is defined as: 250 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3U0 cos

Section 6 Current protection

t inv =

kSN (3I 0 3U 0 cos f (reference)) 3I 0 3U 0 cos f (measured)

(Equation 73)

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and

The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the angle = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref) is within the sector RCADir ROADir
RCA = 0 ROA = 80

Operate area 3I0 80 -3U0

en06000652.vsd

Figure 120:

Example of characteristic

For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (INDir> and UNREL>) and the angle shall be in the set sector (ROADir and RCADir). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR. When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir This variant shall have definite time delay.

Directional functions

For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in the forward direction, and STRV: start in the reverse direction. Even if the directional REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 251

Section 6 Current protection

function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is set to operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the start signal STFW.

Non-directional earthground fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as alternative or back-up to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current function via the input BLKNDN. If available the non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect crosscountry faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive earth fault protection will saturate. This variant shall have the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3. For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set levels (INNonDir>). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN. When the function is activated binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.

Residual overvoltage release and protection

The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than a set level. There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this set voltage level. For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set levels (UN>). Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN. When the function is activated binary output signal STUN is activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tUNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 121.

252

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

INNonDir> t UN> t
OpMODE=INcosPhi

STNDIN TRNDIN STUN TRUN

IN> INcosPhi>
OpMODE=INUNcosPhi

&

& INUNcosPhi> Phi in RCA +- ROA

OpMODE=IN and Phi

&
t

STARTDIRIN

SN TimeChar = InvTime

&

TRDIRIN

&
TimeChar = DefTime

&

DirMode = Forw Forw DirMode = Rev Rev

&

1 STFW

& STRV
en06000653.vsd

Figure 121:

Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection

6.5.3

Function block
SDE1SDEPSDE_67N I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN BLKUN TRIP TRDIRIN TRNDIN TRUN START STDIRIN STNDIN STUN STFW STRV STDIR UNREL en07000032.vsd

Figure 122:

SDE function block

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

253

Section 6 Current protection 6.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 126:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKTR BLKTRDIR BLKNDN BLKUN

Input signals for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function block

Description Group signal for current Group signal for voltage Blocks all the outputs of the function Blocks the operate outputs of the function Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs

Table 127:
Parameter IBase UBase SBase

Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 200000000.00 Step 1 0.05 0.05 Default 100 63.50 6350.00 Unit A kV kVA Description Base Current, in A Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral Base Power, in kVA. IBase*UBase

Table 128:
Parameter Operation OpMode

Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range Off On 3I0Cosfi 3I03U0Cosfi 3I0 and fi Forward Reverse -179 - 180 -10.0 - 10.0 0 - 90 Step Default Off 3I0Cosfi Unit Description Operation Off/On Selection of operation mode for protection Direction of operation forward or reverse Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg Relay characteristic angle compensation Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode, in deg Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over current, in %Ib Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv time count, in %Sb

DirMode RCADir RCAComp ROADir

1 0.1 1

Forward -90 0.0 90

Deg Deg Deg

INCosPhi>

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

1.00

%IB

SN>

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

10.00

%SB

Table continued on next page

254

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter INDir> Range 0.25 - 200.00 Step 0.01 Default 5.00 Unit %IB Description Set level for directional residual over current prot, in %Ib Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent, in sec Reference value of res power for inverse time count, in %Sb Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode Operation of nondirectional residual overcurrent protection Set level for non directional residual over current, in %Ib Time delay for nondirectional residual over current, in sec Operation curve selection for IDMT operation

tDef

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

SRef

0.03 - 200.00

0.01

10.00

%SB

kSN

0.00 - 2.00

0.01

0.10

OpINNonDir>

Off On

Off

INNonDir>

1.00 - 400.00

0.01

10.00

%IB

tINNonDir

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

TimeChar

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 0.000 - 60.000

IEC Norm. inv.

tMin

0.001

0.040

Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in sec IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current protection Operation of nondirectional residual overvoltage protection Set level for nondirectional residual over voltage, in %Ub

kIN

0.00 - 2.00

0.01

1.00

OpUN>

Off On

Off

UN>

1.00 - 200.00

0.01

20.00

%UB

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

255

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter tUNNonDir Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.100 Unit s Description Time delay for nondirectional residual over voltage, in sec Residual release current for all directional modes, in %Ib Residual release voltage for all direction modes, in %Ub

INRel>

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

1.00

%IB

UNRel>

0.01 - 200.00

0.01

3.00

%UB

Table 129:
Parameter RotResU

Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 0 deg 180 deg Step Default 180 deg Unit Description Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if necessary

Table 130:
Parameter tReset

Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.040 Unit s Description Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in sec Setting P for customer programmable curve Setting A for customer programmable curve Setting B for customer programmable curve Setting C for customer programmable curve Reset mode when current drops off. Setting PR for customer programmable curve Setting TR for customer programmable curve Setting CR for customer programmable curve

tPCrv tACrv tBCrv tCCrv

0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0

0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1

1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0

ResetTypeCrv

Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.005 - 3.000

IEC Reset

tPRCrv

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

6.5.5

Setting parameters

256

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Table 131:
Parameter IBase UBase SBase

Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 200000000.00 Step 1 0.05 0.05 Default 100 63.50 6350.00 Unit A kV kVA Description Base Current, in A Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral Base Power, in kVA. IBase*Ubase

Table 132:
Parameter Operation OpMode

Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range Off On 3I0Cosfi 3I03U0Cosfi 3I0 and fi Forward Reverse -179 - 180 -10.0 - 10.0 0 - 90 Step Default Off 3I0Cosfi Unit Description Operation Off / On Selection of operation mode for protection Direction of operation forward or reverse Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg Relay characteristic angle compensation Relay open angle ROA used as release in phase mode, in deg Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over current, in %Ib Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv time count, in %Sb Set level for directional residual over current prot, in %Ib Definite time delay directional residual overcurrent, in sec Reference value of res power for inverse time count, in %Sb Time multiplier setting for directional residual power mode Operation of nondirectional residual overcurrent protection Set level for non directional residual over current, in %Ib

DirMode RCADir RCAComp ROADir

1 0.1 1

Forward -90 0.0 90

Deg Deg Deg

INCosPhi>

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

1.00

%IB

SN>

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

10.00

%SB

INDir>

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

5.00

%IB

tDef

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

SRef

0.03 - 200.00

0.01

10.00

%SB

kSN

0.00 - 2.00

0.01

0.10

OpINNonDir>

Off On

Off

INNonDir>

1.00 - 400.00

0.01

10.00

%IB

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

257

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter tINNonDir Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit s Description Time delay for nondirectional residual over current, in sec Operation curve selection for IDMT operation

TimeChar

ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Reserved Programmable RI type RD type 0.000 - 60.000

IEC Norm. inv.

tMin

0.001

0.040

Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in sec IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current protection Operation of nondirectional residual overvoltage protection Set level for nondirectional residual over voltage, in %Ub Time delay for nondirectional residual over voltage, in sec Residual release current for all directional modes, in %Ib Residual release voltage for all direction modes, in %Ub

kIN

0.00 - 2.00

0.01

1.00

OpUN>

Off On

Off

UN>

1.00 - 200.00

0.01

20.00

%UB

tUNNonDir

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

INRel>

0.25 - 200.00

0.01

1.00

%IB

UNRel>

0.01 - 200.00

0.01

3.00

%UB

Table 133:
Parameter RotResU

Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 0 deg 180 deg Step Default 180 deg Unit Description Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if necessary

258

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Table 134:
Parameter tReset

Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.040 Unit s Description Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in sec Setting P for customer programmable curve Setting A for customer programmable curve Setting B for customer programmable curve Setting C for customer programmable curve Reset mode when current drops off. Setting PR for customer programmable curve Setting TR for customer programmable curve Setting CR for customer programmable curve

tPCrv tACrv tBCrv tCCrv

0.005 - 3.000 0.005 - 200.000 0.00 - 20.00 0.1 - 10.0

0.001 0.001 0.01 0.1

1.000 13.500 0.00 1.0

ResetTypeCrv

Immediate IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.005 - 3.000

IEC Reset

tPRCrv

0.001

0.500

tTRCrv

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

tCRCrv

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

6.5.6

Technical data
Table 135:
Function Operate level for 3I0 cosj directional residual overcurrent

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)

Range or value (0.25-200.00)% of lbase At low setting: (2.5-10) mA (10-50) mA Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0 mA 0.5 mA 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 10% of set value 1.0% of Ir at Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0 mA 0.5 mA 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0 mA

Operate level for 3I03U0 cosj directional residual power

(0.25-200.00)% of Sbase At low setting: (0.25-5.00)% of Sbase

Operate level for 3I0 and j residual overcurrent

(0.25-200.00)% of Ibase At low setting: (2.5-10) mA (10-50) mA

Operate level for non directional overcurrent

(1.00-400.00)% of Ibase At low setting: (10-50) mA

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

259

Section 6 Current protection

Function Operate level for non directional residual overvoltage Residual release current for all directional modes Range or value (1.00-200.00)% of Ubase (0.25-200.00)% of Ibase At low setting: (2.5-10) mA (10-50) mA Residual release voltage for all directional modes Reset ratio Timers Inverse characteristics, see table 517 and table 518 Relay characteristic angle RCA Relay open angle ROA Operate time, non directional residual over current Reset time, non directinal residual over current Operate time, start function Reset time, start function (0.01-200.00)% of Ubase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 19 curve types (-179 to 180) degrees (0-90) degrees 60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 60 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 150 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 50 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset Accuracy 0.5% of Ur at UUr 0.5% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0 mA 0.5 mA 0.5% of Ur at UUr 0.5% of U at > Ur 0.5% 10 ms See table 517 and table 518 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees -

6.6

Thermal overload protection, two time constants (PTTR, 49)

Function block name: TTRxANSI number: 49 IEC 61850 logical node name: TRPTTR IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

6.6.1

Introduction
If the temperature of a power transformer/generator reaches too high values the equipment might be damaged. The insulation within the transformer/generator will have forced ageing. As a consequence of this the risk of internal phase to phase or phase to earth faults will increase. High temperature will degrade the quality of the transformer/generator oil.

260

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer/ generator (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the transformer/generator with two time constants, which is based on current measurement. Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the trip value, the protection initiates trip of the protected transformer/generator.

6.6.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the THL function. From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat content) is calculated according to the expression:

Q final

I = I ref

(Equation 74)

where: I Iref is the largest phase current and is a given reference current

If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level corresponding to the set operate (trip) current a start output signal START is activated. The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
If

Q final > Q n

Dt Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t

If

Q final < Qn

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

261

Section 6 Current protection

Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Q n -1 ) e
where: Qn Qn-1 Qfinal Dt t

Dt

is the calculated present temperature, is the calculated temperature at the previous time step, is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current, is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and is the set thermal time constant for the protected transformer

The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure HEATCONT. When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or Alarm2 the corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level which corresponds to continuous current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is set. There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current. This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:

Q - Qoperate toperate = -t ln final Q final - Q n

(Equation 79)

The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure TTRIP. After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ResLo. The time to lockout release is calculated, i.e. a calculation of the cooling time to a set value.

Q - Qlockout _ release tlockout _ release = -t ln final Q final - Q n

(Equation 80)

Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature. The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure. 262 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

When the current is so high that it has given a start signal START, the estimated time to trip is continuously calculated and given as analogue output TTRIP. If this calculated time get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output WARNING is activated. In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.

Final Temp > TripTemp

START

Calculation of heat content

actual heat comtent

I3P Calculation of final temperature

Actual Temp > Alarm1,Alarm2 Temp

ALARM1 ALARM2

Current base used TRIP Actual Temp > TripTemp Binary input: Forced cooling On/Off S R Actual Temp < Recl Temp LOCKOUT

Management of setting parameters: Tau, IBase

Tau used

Calculation of time to trip

time to trip warning if time to trip < set value

Calculation of time to reset of lockout

time to reset of lockout

en05000833.vsd

Figure 123:

Functional overview of TTR

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

263

Section 6 Current protection 6.6.3 Function block

TTR1TRPTTR_49 I3P BLOCK COOLING ENMULT RESET TRIP START ALARM1 ALARM2 LOCKOUT WARNING en06000272.vsd

Figure 124:

TTR function block

6.6.4

Input and output signals

Table 136:
Signal I3P BLOCK COOLING ENMULT RESET

Input signals for the TRPTTR_49 (TTR1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Block of function Cooling input Off / On. Changes Ib setting and time constant Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting Reset of function

Table 137:
Signal TRIP START ALARM1 ALARM2 LOCKOUT WARNING

Output signals for the TRPTTR_49 (TTR1-) function block

Description Trip Signal Start signal First level alarm signal Second level alarm signal Lockout signal Warning signal: Trip within set warning time

6.6.5

Setting parameters
Table 138:
Parameter Operation IBase IRef

Basic parameter group settings for the TRPTTR_49 (TTR1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 10.0 - 1000.0 Step 1 1.0 Default Off 3000 100.0 Unit A %IB Description Operation Off / On Base current in A Reference current in % of IBASE

Table continued on next page

264

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter IRefMult IBase1 Range 0.01 - 10.00 30.0 - 250.0 Step 0.01 1.0 Default 1.00 100.0 Unit %IB Description Multiplication Factor for reference current Base current,IBase1 without Cooling inpout in % of IBASE Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input ON in % of IBASE Time constant without cooling input in min, with IBase1 Time constant with cooling input in min, with IBase2 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1 by TC1-IHIGH Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is > IHIGH-TC1 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1 by TC1-ILOW Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is < ILOW-TC1 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling TC2 by TC2-IHIGH Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is >IHIGH-TC2 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling TC2 by TC2-ILOW Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is < ILOW-TC2 Steady state operate current level in % of IBasex First alarm level in % of heat content trip value Second alarm level in % of heat content trip value Lockout reset level in % of heat content trip value

IBase2

30.0 - 250.0

1.0

100.0

%IB

Tau1

1.0 - 500.0

1.0

60.0

Min

Tau2

1.0 - 500.0

1.0

60.0

Min

IHighTau1

30.0 - 250.0

1.0

100.0

%IB1

Tau1High

5 - 2000

100

%tC1

ILowTau1

30.0 - 250.0

1.0

100.0

%IB1

Tau1Low

5 - 2000

100

%tC1

IHighTau2

30.0 - 250.0

1.0

100.0

%IB2

Tau2High

5 - 2000

100

%tC2

ILowTau2

30.0 - 250.0

1.0

100.0

%IB2

Tau2Low

5 - 2000

100

%tC2

ITrip

50.0 - 250.0

1.0

110.0

%IBx

Alarm1

50.0 - 99.0

1.0

80.0

%Itr

Alarm2

50.0 - 99.0

1.0

90.0

%Itr

ResLo

10.0 - 95.0

1.0

60.0

%Itr

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

265

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter ThetaInit Range 0.0 - 95.0 Step 1.0 Default 50.0 Unit % Description Initial Heat content, in % of heat content trip value Time setting, below which warning would be set (in min) Length of the pulse for trip signal (in msec).

Warning

1.0 - 500.0

0.1

30.0

Min

tPulse

0.01 - 0.30

0.01

0.10

6.6.6

Technical data
Table 139:
Function Base current 1 and 2 Operate time:

Thermal overload protection, two time constants (PTTR, 49)

Range or value (30250)% of Ibase Ip = load current before overload occurs Time constant = (1500) minutes Accuracy 1.0% of Ir IEC 602558, class 5 + 200 ms

I 2 - I p2 t = t ln 2 I - Ib 2
I = Imeasured Alarm level 1 and 2 Operate current

(5099)% of heat content trip value (50250)% of Ibase (1095)% of heat content trip

2.0% of heat content trip 1.0% of Ir 2.0% of heat content trip

Reset level temperature

6.7

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Function block name: BFPxANSI number: 50BF IEC 61850 logical node name: CCRBRF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3I>BF

6.7.1

Introduction
The circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding breakers. The breaker failure protection operation can be current based, contact based or adaptive combination between these two principles.

266

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achieve a high security against unnecessary operation. The breaker failure protection can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase tripping applications. For the three-phase version of the breaker failure protection the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four e.g. two phases or one phase plus the residual current starts. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command. The function can be programmed to give a single- or three phase re-trip of the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.

6.7.2

Principle of operation
The breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command, either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from external protection devices. The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The retrip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level. The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signal gets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the backup trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by the function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted algorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activated after an added settable time after the first back-up trip. Further the following possibilities are available: The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the backup trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker. In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

267

Section 6 Current protection

residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection. The current detection for the residual current can be set different from the setting of phase current detection. It is possible to have different re-trip time delays for single phase faults and for multi-phase faults. The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option activated for small load currents only. It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

Current AND BLOCK Current & Contact t1 AND t tp TRRETL1

STIL1 AND START STL1 OR

OR TRRET

OR CBCLDL1 AND AND Contact L2 L3

en05000832.vsd

Figure 125:

Simplified logic scheme of the retrip function

268

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Figure 126:

Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function

Internal logical signals STIL1, STIL2, STIL3 have logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter IP>. Internal logical signal STN has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitude larger than setting parameter IN>.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

269

Section 6 Current protection

More than 1 current high 1 of 3 AND

t2MPh t tp OR TRBU

1 of 4

OR

t2 t t3 t tp TRBU2

2 of 3 AND CBFLT CBALARM t CBALARM

en06000223.vsd

Figure 127:

Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function

6.7.3

Function block
BFP1CCRBRF_50BF I3P BLOCK START STL1 STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 CBALARM

en06000188.vsd

Figure 128:

BFP function block

6.7.4

Input and output signals

Table 140:
Signal I3P BLOCK START STL1 Table continued on next page

Input signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block

Description Current connection Block of function Three phase start of breaker failure protection function Start signal of phase L1

270

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Signal STL2 STL3 CBCLDL1 CBCLDL2 CBCLDL3 CBFLT Description Start signal of phase L2 Start signal of phase L3 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously.

Table 141:
Signal TRBU TRBU2 TRRET TRRETL1 TRRETL2 TRRETL3 CBALARM

Output signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block

Description Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function Retrip by breaker failure protection function Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L2 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L3 Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

6.7.5

Setting parameters
Table 142:
Parameter Operation IBase FunctionMode

Basic parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 Current Contact Current&Contact 2 out of 4 1 out of 3 1 out of 4 Retrip Off CB Pos Check No CBPos Check 5 - 200 Step 1 Default Off 3000 Current Unit A Description Operation Off / On Base current Detection principle for back-up trip Back-up trip mode

BuTripMode

1 out of 3

RetripMode

Retrip Off

Operation mode of retrip logic Operate phase current level in % of IBase Operate residual current level in % of IBase Time delay of re-trip

IP>

10

%IB

IN>

2 - 200

10

%IB

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

271

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter t2 t2MPh Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 Default 0.150 0.150 Unit s s Description Time delay of back-up trip Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase start Trip pulse duration

tPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Table 143:
Parameter I>BlkCont

Advanced parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function

Range 5 - 200 Step 1 Default 20 Unit %IB Description Current for blocking of CB contact operation in % of IBase Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip Time delay for CB faulty signal

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.030

tCBAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

6.7.6

Technical data
Table 144:
Function Operate phase current Reset ratio, phase current Operate residual current Reset ratio, residual current Phase current level for blocking of contact function Reset ratio Timers Operate time for current detection Reset time for current detection

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Range or value (5-200)% of lbase > 95% (2-200)% of lbase > 95% (5-200)% of lbase > 95% (0.000-60.000) s 10 ms typically 15 ms maximum Accuracy 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Ir at I Ir 1.0% of I at I > Ir 0.5% 10 ms -

6.8

Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)

272

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Function block name: PDx-ANSI number: 50PD IEC 61850 logical node name: CCRPLD

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

PD

6.8.1

Introduction
Single pole operated circuit breakers can due to electrical or mechanical failures end up with the different poles in different positions (close-open). This can cause negative and zero sequence currents which gives thermal stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions. Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct the positions. If the situation consists the remote end can be intertripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation. The pole discordance function operates based on information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase current when required.

6.8.2

Principle of operation
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated. This is shown in figure 129
C.B.

poleDiscordance Signal from C.B.

en05000287.vsd

Figure 129:

Pole discordance external detection logic

This single binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set delay.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

273

Section 6 Current protection

There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED. This is shown in figure 130
C.B.

poleOneClosed from C.B. poleTwoClosed from C.B. poleThreeClosed from C.B. + poleOneOpened from C.B. poleTwoOpened from C.B. poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd

Figure 130:

Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the PD (RPLD) function. The difference between the smallest and the largest phase current is derived. If this difference is larger than a set ratio the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay. The current based pole discordance function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command. The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used. The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based pole discordance function is shown in figure 131.

274

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

BLOCK BLKDBYAR OR

PolPosAuxCont POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL AND Discordance detection AND OR PD Signal from CB EXTPDIND CLOSECMD OPENCMD OR AND Unsymmetry current detection en05000747.vsd t+200 ms AND t t 150 ms TRIP

Figure 131:

Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function - contact and current based

The pole discordance function is blocked if: The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes) The input signal BLOCK is high The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal AR01-1PT1 if the autoreclosing function is integrated in the terminal; if the autoreclosing function is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input of the terminal and this binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the external autoreclosing device. If the pole discordance function is enabled, then two different criteria will generate a trip signal TRIP:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

275

Section 6 Current protection

Pole discordance signalling from the circuit breaker. Unsymmetrical current detection.

6.8.2.1

Pole discordance signalling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole discordance status), then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval t (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the pole discordance function.

6.8.2.2

Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current detection is based on checking that: any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the remaining two phases the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevelof the rated current

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay t (0-60 s) if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions. The pole discordance function is informed that a trip or close command has been given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (i.e. from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (i.e. close command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

276

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection 6.8.3 Function block

PD01CCRPLD_52PD I3P BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXTPDIND POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL TRIP START

en06000275.vsd

Figure 132:

PD function block

6.8.4

Input and output signals

Table 145:
Signal I3P BLOCK BLKDBYAR CLOSECMD OPENCMD EXTPDIND POLE1OPN POLE1CL POLE2OPN POLE2CL POLE3OPN POLE3CL

Input signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Block of function Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle Close order to CB Open order to CB Pole discordance signal from CB logic Pole one opened indication from CB Pole one closed indication from CB Pole two opened indication from CB Pole two closed indication from CB Pole three opened indication from CB Pole three closed indication from CB

Table 146:
Signal TRIP START

Output signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block

Description Trip signal to CB Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

6.8.5

Setting parameters

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

277

Section 6 Current protection

Table 147:
Parameter Operation IBase tTrip

Basic parameter group settings for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.000 - 60.000 Step 1 0.001 Default Off 3000 0.300 Unit s Description Operation Off / On Base current Time delay between trip condition and trip signal Contact function selection Current function selection

ContSel

Off PD signal from CB Pole pos aux cont. Off CB oper monitor Continuous monitor 0 - 100 -

Off

CurrSel

Off

CurrUnsymLevel

80

Unsym magn of lowest phase current compared to the highest. Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase

CurrRelLevel

0 - 100

10

%IB

6.8.6

Technical data
Table 148:
Function Operate current Time delay

Pole discordance protection (RPLD, 52PD)

Range or value (0100)% of Ibase (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 1.0% of Ir 0.5% 10 ms

6.9

Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)

Function block name: ANSI number: 32 IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

P><

6.9.1

Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

278

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Figure 133 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
Underpower Relay Q Overpower Relay Q

Operate Line Margin

Operate Line Margin

Operating point without turbine torque

Operating point without turbine torque

en06000315.vsd

Figure 133:

Protection with underpower relay and overpower relay

6.9.2

Principle of operation
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 134. The function has two stages with individual settings.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

279

Section 6 Current protection

Chosen current phasors Complex power calculation

P Derivation of S(composant) in Char angle S(angle) S(angle) < Power1 t Trip1 Start1

Chosen voltage phasors

S(angle) < Power2

Trip2 Start2

P = POWRE Q = POWIM

en06000438.vsd

Figure 134:

Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 149.
Table 149:
L1, L2, L3

Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation

Set value: measureMode

S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *

Arone

PosSeq

L1L2

S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )

L2L3

L3L1

L1

S = 3 U L1 I L1*

Table continued on next page

280

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Set value: measureMode L2 Formula used for complex power calculation

S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U NegSeq I NegSeq *

L3

NegSeq

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault recording. The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated. The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated. To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2) For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 * Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value. If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant that the timer of the stage will reset.

6.9.2.1

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

281

Section 6 Current protection

S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
Where S Sold is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

(Equation 92)

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.

6.9.2.2

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 135.
% of Ir -10 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 -10 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 Measured current % of Ir Amplitude compensation

Degrees -10 IAngComp30 IAngComp5 IAngComp100 -10

Angle compensation

Measured current 5 30 100 % of Ir

en05000652.vsd

Figure 135:

Calibration curves

282

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals. Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

6.9.3

Function block
GUP1GUPPDUP_37 I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT en07000027.vsd

Figure 136:

GUP function block

6.9.4

Input and output signals

Table 150:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2

Input signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block

Description Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block of stage 1 Block of stage 2

Table 151:
Signal TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P

Output signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block

Description Common trip signal Trip of stage 1 Trip of stage 2 Common start Start of stage 1 Start of stage 2 Active Power in MW

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

283

Section 6 Current protection

Signal PPERCENT Q QPERCENT Description Active power in % of SBASE Reactive power in Mvar Reactive power in % of SBASE

6.9.5

Setting parameters
Table 152:
Parameter IBase UBase Mode

Basic general settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Pos Seq Unit A kV Description Current-Reference (primary current A) Voltage-Reference (primary voltage kV) Selection of measured current and voltage

Table 153:
Parameter Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2

Basic parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range Off On Off UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Off UnderPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default Off UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 UnderPower 1.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 Unit %SB Deg s s %SB Deg s s Description Operation Off / On Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2

284

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Table 154:
Parameter k

Advanced parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function

Range 0.00 - 0.99 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit Description Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IAmpComp5

0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000

0.1 0.1 0.001

0.5 0.5 0.000

pu pu %

IAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000 0.000

Deg Deg Deg

6.9.6

Technical data
Table 155:
Function Power level

Directional underpower protection (PDUP)

Range or value (0.0500.0)% of Sbase At low setting: (0.5-2.0)% of Sbase (2.0-10)% of Sbase Accuracy 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr < 50% of set value < 20% of set value 2 degrees 0.5% 10 ms

Characteristic angle Timers

(-180.0180.0) degrees (0.00-6000.00) s

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

285

Section 6 Current protection

6.10

Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)

Function block name: GOPx ANSI number: 32 IEC 61850 logical node name: GOPPDOP IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

P><

6.10.1

Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy. Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system. Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator itself. Figure 137 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

286

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Underpower Relay Q

Overpower Relay Q

Operate Line Margin

Operate Line Margin

Operating point without turbine torque

Operating point without turbine torque

en06000315.vsd

Figure 137:

Reverse power protection with underpower relay and overpower relay

6.10.2

Principle of operation
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in figure 138. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current phasors Complex power calculation

P Derivation of S(composant) in Char angle S(angle) S(angle) > Power1 t Trip1 Start1

Chosen voltage phasors

S(angle) > Power2

Trip2 Start2

P = POWRE Q = POWIM

en06000567.vsd

Figure 138:

Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in table 156.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

287

Section 6 Current protection

Table 156:
L1, L2, L3

Complex power calculation

Formula used for complex power calculation

Set value: measureMode

S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *

Arone

PosSeq

L1L2

S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )

L2L3

S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )

L3L1

L1

S = 3 U L1 I L1*
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*

L2

L3

S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for monitoring and fault recording. The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated. The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated. To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-power1(2)). For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) Hysteresis1(2)

288

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 * Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value. If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant that the timer of the stage will reset.

6.10.2.1

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
Where S Sold is a new measured value to be used for the protection function is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle (Equation 102)

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.

6.10.2.2

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 139.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

289

Section 6 Current protection

% of Ir -10 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 -10

Amplitude compensation

Measured current 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 % of Ir

Degrees -10 IAngComp30 IAngComp5 IAngComp100 -10

Angle compensation

Measured current 5 30 100 % of Ir

en05000652.vsd

Figure 139:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals. Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

6.10.3

Function block
GOP1GOPPDOP_32 I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2 TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT en07000028.vsd

Figure 140:

GOP function block

290

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection 6.10.4 Input and output signals

Table 157:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLOCK1 BLOCK2

Input signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block

Description Current group connection Voltage group connection Block of function Block of stage 1 Block of stage 2

Table 158:
Signal TRIP TRIP1 TRIP2 START START1 START2 P PPERCENT Q QPERCENT

Output signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block

Description Common trip signal Trip of stage 1 Trip of stage 2 Common start Start of stage 1 Start of stage 2 Active Power in MW Active power in % of SBASE Reactive power in Mvar Reactive power in % of SBASE

6.10.5

Setting parameters
Table 159:
Parameter IBase UBase Mode

Basic general settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 Step 1 0.05 Default 3000 400.00 Pos Seq Unit A kV Description Current-Reference (primary current A) Voltage-Reference (primary voltage kV) Selection of measured current and voltage

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

291

Section 6 Current protection

Table 160:
Parameter Operation OpMode1 Power1 Angle1 TripDelay1 DropDelay1 OpMode2 Power2 Angle2 TripDelay2 DropDelay2

Basic parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Range Off On Off OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Off OverPower 0.0 - 500.0 -180.0 - 180.0 0.010 - 6000.000 0.010 - 6000.000 Step 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.001 0.001 Default Off OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 OverPower 120.0 0.0 1.000 0.060 Unit %SB Deg s s %SB Deg s s Description Operation Off / On Operation mode 1 Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 1 Trip delay for stage 1 Drop delay for stage 1 Operation mode 2 Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase Angle for stage 2 Trip delay for stage 2 Drop delay for stage 2

Table 161:
Parameter k

Advanced parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function

Range 0.00 - 0.99 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit Description Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, P and Q Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of Sbase Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of Sbase Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur

Hysteresis1 Hysteresis2 IAmpComp5

0.2 - 5.0 0.2 - 5.0 -10.000 - 10.000

0.1 0.1 0.001

0.5 0.5 0.000

pu pu %

IAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Table continued on next page

292

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 6 Current protection

Parameter IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100 Range -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 0.000 Unit Deg Deg Deg Description Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

6.10.6

Technical data
Table 162:
Function Power level

Directional overpower protection (PDOP)

Range or value (0.0500.0)% of Sbase At low setting: (0.5-2.0)% of Sbase (2.0-10)% of Sbase Accuracy 1.0% of Sr at S < Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr < 50% of set value < 20% of set value 2 degrees 0.5% 10 ms

Characteristic angle Timers

(-180.0180.0) degrees (0.00-6000.00) s

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

293

294

Section 7 Voltage protection

Section 7

Voltage protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

7.1

Two step undervoltage protection (PTUV, 27)

Function block name: TUVxANSI number: 27 IEC 61850 logical node name: UV2PTUV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3U<

7.1.1

Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. The function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary protection. The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

7.1.2

Principle of operation
The two-step undervoltage protection function (TUV) is used to detect low power system voltage. The function has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding start signal is issued. TUV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

295

Section 7 Voltage protection

The undervoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to earth fundamental value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or phase to phase RMS value. The choise of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType in PST or LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set i kV phase-phase voltage This means operation for phase to earth voltage under:

U < (%) UBase( kV ) 3

and operation for phase to phase voltage under:
U < (%) UBase(kV)
(Equation 104) (Equation 103)

7.1.2.1

Measurement principle
All the three phase to earth voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3" phases have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding start signal. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.1.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:

t=

k U < -U U<

(Equation 105)

The type B curve is described as:

t=

k 480 U < -U - 0.5 32 U<

2.0

+ 0.055
(Equation 106)

The programmable curve can be created as:

296

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

kA +D t= p U < -U -C B U<

(Equation 107)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn -C > 0 100

(Equation 108)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics". Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 141 and figure 142.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

297

Section 7 Voltage protection

Voltage

START Hysteresis

tReset 1 TRIP

tReset 1 Measured Voltage

U1<

Time START TRIP

t1

Time Integrator t1

Froozen Timer

Instantaneous Reset

Time
Linear Decrease en05000010.vsd

Figure 141:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

298

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Voltage START

tReset1 tReset1 START Hysteresis TRIP Measured Voltage

U1<

Time START t1

TRIP

Time Integrator t1

Froozen Timer

Time Instantaneous Reset Linear Decrease en05000011.vsd

Figure 142:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

7.1.2.3

Blocking
The undervoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

299

Section 7 Voltage protection

BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2:

blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the start outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to "off" resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2. In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very low. The event will start both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in figure 143. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.

Disconnection

Normal voltage U1< U2<

tBlkUV1 < t1,t1Min IntBlkStVal1 IntBlkStVal2 Time Block step 1 Block step 2
en05000466.vsd

tBlkUV2 < t2,t2Min

Figure 143:

Blocking function.

300

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

7.1.2.4 Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral voltages or the three phase to phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or RMS filters based on one fundamental cycle filter the input voltage signals. The voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the start condition. The design of the TimeUnderVoltage function is schematically described in figure 144.
UL1 Comparator UL1 < U1< Comparator UL2 < U1< Comparator UL3 < U1< ST1L1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3
Phase 1

UL2

ST1L2
Phase 2 Phase 3

UL3

START Time integrator t1 tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

Start & Trip Output Logic Step 1

ST1L3 ST1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR1

OR

MinVoltSelect or

TRIP

OR

Comparator UL1 < U2< Comparator UL2 < U2< Comparator UL3 < U2<

Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST2 TR2L1 TR2L2

START Time integrator t2 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

Start & Trip Output Logic Step 2

OR

MinVoltSelect or

TRIP

TR2L3
TR2 OR START

OR

OR

TRIP

en05000012.vsd

Figure 144:

Schematic design of the TUV function

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

301

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.1.3 Function block

TUV1UV2PTUV_27 U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en06000276.vsd

Figure 145:

TUV function block

7.1.4

Input and output signals

Table 163:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2

Input signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block

Description Three phase voltages Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 164:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START

Output signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block

Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L3 Common trip signal from step2 Trip signal from step2 phase L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L3 General start signal

Table continued on next page

302

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Signal ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 Description Common start signal from step1 Start signal from step1 phase L1 Start signal from step1 phase L2 Start signal from step1 phase L3 Common start signal from step2 Start signal from step2 phase L1 Start signal from step2 phase L2 Start signal from step2 phase L3

7.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 165:
Parameter ConnType

Basic general settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range PhN DFT PhPh RMS PhN RMS PhPh DFT Step Default PhN DFT Unit Description Group selector for connection type

Table 166:
Parameter Operation UBase OperationStep1 Characterist1

Basic parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3

U1<

70

%UB

t1 t1Min

0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000

0.01 0.001

5.00 5.000

s s

k1

0.05

0.01

0.05 - 1.10

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

303

Section 7 Voltage protection

Parameter IntBlkSel1 Range Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100 Step Default Off Unit Description Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 1 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2 Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2 Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of UBase, step 2 Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

IntBlkStVal1

20

%UB

tBlkUV1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2

0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 100

0.1 -

0.5 On Definite time

%UB -

OpMode2

1 out of 3

U2<

50

%UB

t2 t2Min

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

5.000 5.000

s s

k2

0.05

0.01

0.05 - 1.10

IntBlkSel2

Off Block of trip Block all 1 - 100

Off

IntBlkStVal2

20

%UB

tBlkUV2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.5

%UB

304

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 167:
Parameter tReset1

Advanced parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Unit s Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 1.000

Instantaneous

tIReset1 ACrv1

0.001 0.001

0.025 0.005 - 200.000

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2

BCrv1

1.00

0.01

0.50 - 100.00

CCrv1

0.0

0.1

0.0 - 1.0

DCrv1

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 60.000

PCrv1

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 3.000

CrvSat1

0 - 100

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 1.000

Instantaneous

tIReset2 ACrv2

0.001 0.001

0.025 0.005 - 200.000

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2

BCrv2

1.00

0.01

0.50 - 100.00

CCrv2

0.0

0.1

0.0 - 1.0

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

305

Section 7 Voltage protection

Parameter DCrv2 Range 0.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 - 60.000 Unit Description Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. under voltage IDMT curve, step 2

PCrv2

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 3.000

CrvSat2

0 - 100

7.1.6

Technical data
Table 168:
Function Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Internal blocking level, low and high step Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 519 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, inverse characteristics Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)

Range or value (1100)% of Ubase (0100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s (0.00060.000) s 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur See table 519 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -

7.2

Two step overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59)

Function block name: TOVxANSI number: 59 IEC 61850 logical node name: OV2PTOV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3U>

306

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.2.1 Introduction

Overvoltages will occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines. The function can be used as open line end detector, normally then combined with directional reactive over-power function or as system voltage supervision, normally then giving alarm only or switching in reactors or switch out capacitor banks to control the voltage. The function has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed. The overvoltage function has an extremely high reset ratio to allow setting close to system service voltage.

7.2.2

Principle of operation
The two-step overvoltage protection function (TOV) is used to detect high power system voltage. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If one, two or three phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding start signal is issued. TOV can be set to start/trip based on "one out of three", "two out of three", or "three out of three" of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay. The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase. The overvoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to earth fundamental value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or phase to phase RMS value. The choise of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType in PST or LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage. The function will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage over:

U > (%) UBase( kV ) 3

and operation for phase for phase voltage over:
U > (%) UBase(kV)
(Equation 109)

Vpickup > (%) VBase(kV)

(Equation 110)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

307

Section 7 Voltage protection

7.2.2.1 Measurement principle
All the three phase voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3" phases have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding start signal. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.2.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:
t= TD

V - Vpickup Vpickup

(Equation 111)

The type B curve is described as:

t=

k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>

2.0

- 0.035
(Equation 112)

The type C curve is described as:

t=

k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>

TD 480 V - Vpickup 32 Vpickup - 0.5 - 0.035
3.0

3.0

- 0.035

t=

(Equation 113)

The programmable curve can be created as:

t=

kA U -U > -C B U>
p

+D
(Equation 114)

308

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn -C > 0 100

(Equation 115)

The highest phase (or phase to phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration, see figure 146. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics"

Voltage IDMT Voltage

UL1 UL2 UL3

Time
en05000016.vsd

Figure 146:

Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable (HystAbs2) to allow an high and accurate reset of the function. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 309

Section 7 Voltage protection

voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time..

7.2.2.3

Blocking
The overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals where:
BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2: blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

7.2.2.4

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth voltages or the three phase to phasel voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" and "3 out of 3" criteria to fulfill the start condition. The design of the TimeOverVoltage function is schematically described in figure 147.

310

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

UL1

Comparator UL1 > U1> Comparator UL2 > U1> Comparator UL3 > U1>

ST1L1 Voltage Phase Selector OpMode1 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3

Phase 1

UL2

ST1L2
Phase 2 Phase 3

UL3

START Time integrator t1 tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

Start & Trip Output Logic Step 1

ST1L3 ST1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR1

OR

MaxVoltSelect or

TRIP

OR

Comparator UL1 > U2> Comparator UL2 > U2> Comparator UL3 > U2>

Voltage Phase Selector OpMode2 1 out of 3 2 outof 3 3 out of 3

Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 ST2 TR2L1 TR2L2

START Time integrator t2 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

Start & Trip Output Logic Step 2

OR

MaxVoltSelect or

TRIP TR2L3 TR2

START

OR OR

OR

TRIP

en05000013.vsd

Figure 147:

Schematic design of the TimeOverVoltage function

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

311

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.2.3 Function block

TOV1OV2PTOV_59 U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 en06000277.vsd

Figure 148:

TOV function block

7.2.4

Input and output signals

Table 169:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2

Input signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block

Description Group signal for three phase voltage input Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 170:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR1L1 TR1L2 TR1L3 TR2 TR2L1 TR2L2 TR2L3 START

Output signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block

Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L3 Common trip signal from step2 Trip signal from step2 phase L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L3 General start signal

Table continued on next page

312

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Signal ST1 ST1L1 ST1L2 ST1L3 ST2 ST2L1 ST2L2 ST2L3 Description Common start signal from step1 Start signal from step1 phase L1 Start signal from step1 phase L2 Start signal from step1 phase L3 Common start signal from step2 Start signal from step2 phase L1 Start signal from step2 phase L2 Start signal from step2 phase L3

7.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 171:
Parameter ConnType

Basic general settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

Range PhG PhPh PhG RMS PhPh RMS Step Default PhG Unit Description TBD

Table 172:
Parameter Operation UBase OperationStep1 Characterist1

Basic parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 1 Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1

U1>

120

%UB

t1 t1Min

0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000

0.01 0.001

5.00 5.000

s s

k1

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

313

Section 7 Voltage protection

Parameter HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2 Range 0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 out of 3 2 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 - 200 Step 0.1 Default 0.5 On Definite time Unit %UB Description Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

OpMode2

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in % of UBase, step 2 Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

U2>

150

%UB

t2 t2Min

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

5.000 5.000

s s

k2

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.5

%UB

Table 173:
Parameter tReset1

Advanced parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Unit s Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000

Instantaneous

tIReset1 ACrv1

0.001 0.001

0.025 1.000

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Table continued on next page

314

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Parameter DCrv1 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit Description Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat1

0 - 100

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000

Instantaneous

tIReset2 ACrv2

0.001 0.001

0.025 1.000

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat2

0 - 100

7.2.6

Technical data

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

315

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 174:
Function

Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)

Range or value (1-200)% of Ubase (0100)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur See table 520 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -

Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 520 Definite time delays Minimum operate time, Inverse characteristics Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

7.3

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Function block name: TRVxANSI number: 59N IEC 61850 logical node name: ROV2PTOV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3U0

7.3.1

Introduction
Residual voltages will occur in the power system during earth faults. The function can be configured to calculate the residual voltage from the three phase voltage input transformers or from a single phase voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer. The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delayed.

7.3.2

Principle of operation
The two-step residual overvoltage protection function (TRV) is used to detect high single-phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three phase

316

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

voltages and internally in the protection terminal calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to the TRV function block. The function has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-phase.

7.3.2.1

Measurement principle
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

7.3.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve. The type A curve is described as:
t= TD

V - Vpickup Vpickup

(Equation 116)

The type B curve is described as:

t=

k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>

2.0

- 0.035
(Equation 117)

The type C curve is described as:

t=

k 480 U -U > - 0.5 32 U>

3.0

- 0.035
(Equation 118)

The programmable curve can be created as:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

317

Section 7 Voltage protection

t=

kA U -U > -C B U>
TD A
p

+D

t=

V - Vpickup -C B Vpickup

+D
(Equation 119)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn -C > 0 100

(Equation 120)

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in chapter "Inverse characteristics". Trip signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 149 and figure 150.

318

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

tReset 1 Voltage START tReset1 TRIP

U1>

Hysteresis

Measured Voltage

Time START t1

TRIP

Time Integrator Froozen Timer t1

Linear Decrease

Instantaneous Reset

Time en05000019.vsd

Figure 149:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

319

Section 7 Voltage protection

Voltage START

tReset1 START Hysteresis TRIP

tReset1

U1> Measured Voltage

Time START t1

TRIP

Time Integrator

Froozen Timer

t1

Time Instantaneous Reset Linear Decrease en05000020.vsd

Figure 150:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay

7.3.2.3

Blocking
The residual overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals where:

320

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

BLOCK: BLKTR1: BLKST1: BLKTR2: BLKST2:

blocks all outputs blocks all trip outputs of step 1 blocks all startrip outputs related to step 1 blocks all trip outputs of step 2 blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2

7.3.2.4

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of the TRV function is schematically described in figure 151.

UN

Comparator UN > U1> START

Phase 1 Start & Trip Output Logic Step 1

ST1 TR1

Time integrator t1 tReset1 ResetTypeCrv1

TRIP

Comparator UN > U2> START Time integrator t2 tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

Phase 1 Start & Trip Output Logic Step 2 OR

ST2 TR2

OR

START

TRIP

TRIP

en05000748.vsd

Figure 151:

Schematic design of the TRV function

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

321

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.3.3 Function block

TRV1ROV2PTOV_59N U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2 TRIP TR1 TR2 START ST1 ST2 en06000278.vsd

Figure 152:

TRV function block

7.3.4

Input and output signals

Table 175:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTR1 BLKST1 BLKTR2 BLKST2

Input signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block

Description Three phase voltages Block of function Block of operate signal, step 1 Block of step 1 Block of operate signal, step 2 Block of step 2

Table 176:
Signal TRIP TR1 TR2 START ST1 ST2

Output signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block

Description Trip Common trip signal from step1 Common trip signal from step2 General start signal Common start signal from step1 Common start signal from step2

7.3.5

Setting parameters

322

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 177:
Parameter Operation UBase OperationStep1 Characterist1

Basic parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 200 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 On Definite time Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Enable execution of step 1 Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

U1>

30

%UB

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 1 in % of UBase Definitive time delay of step 1 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 1 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 1 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1 Enable execution of step 2 Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

t1 t1Min

0.00 - 6000.00 0.000 - 60.000

0.01 0.001

5.00 5.000

s s

k1

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

HystAbs1 OperationStep2 Characterist2

0.0 - 100.0 Off On Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 1 - 100

0.1 -

0.5 On Definite time

%UB -

U2>

45

%UB

Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT), step 2 in % of UBase Definitive time delay of step 2 Minimum operate time for inverse curves for step 2 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for step 2 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

t2 t2Min

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

5.000 5.000

s s

k2

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.5

%UB

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

323

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 178:
Parameter tReset1

Advanced parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.025 Unit s Description Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve step 1 Selection of reset curve type for step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000

Instantaneous

tIReset1 ACrv1

0.001 0.001

0.025 1.000

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 1 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 1 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2 Selection of reset curve type for step 2

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat1

0 - 100

tReset2 ResetTypeCrv2

0.000 - 60.000 Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.000 - 60.000 0.005 - 200.000

0.001 -

0.025 Instantaneous

s -

tIReset2 ACrv2

0.001 0.001

0.025 1.000

s -

Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for step 2

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Table continued on next page

324

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Parameter DCrv2 Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit Description Parameter D for customer programmable curve for step 2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for step 2 Tuning param for prog. over voltage IDMT curve, step 2

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

CrvSat2

0 - 100

7.3.6

Technical data
Table 179:
Function Operate voltage, low and high step Absolute hysteresis Inverse time characteristics for low and high step, see table 521 Definite time setting Minimum operate time Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N)

Range or value (1-200)% of Ubase (0100)% of Ubase (0.00060.000) s (0.000-60.000) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of Ur at U < Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur See table 521 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms -

7.4

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Function block name: OEXxANSI number: 24 IEC 61850 logical node name: OEXPVPH IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

U/f >

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

325

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.4.1 Introduction

When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time. Function has settable inverse operating curve and independent alarm stage.

7.4.2

Principle of operation
The importance of overexcitation protection is growing as the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate most of the time near their designated limits. Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types. This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if emergency that includes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system. Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a unit is on load, but are more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load occurrence. Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see equation 121, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.
E = 4.44 f n B max A

(Equation 121)

The relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is therefore according to equation 122.

V- Ef ---------------------------M = relative Hz = ( Ur ) ( fr )
(Equation 122)

Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla), the flux will no longer be contained within the core only but will extend into other (non-laminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to Eddy current circulations. Overexcitation will result in: 326 overheating of the non-laminated metal parts, a large increase in magnetizing currents, an increase in core and winding temperature, an increase in transformer vibration and noise. REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 7 Voltage protection

Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative Volts per Hertz (V / Hz) ratio. The action of the protection is usually to initiate a reduction of excitation and, if this should fail, or is not possible, to trip the transformer after a delay which can be from seconds to minutes, typically 5 - 10 seconds. Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such cases, the overexcitation protection may trip the field breaker during a startup of a machine, by means of the overexcitation ALARM signal from the transformer terminal. If this is not possible, the power transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal. The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers shall be capable of operating continuously at 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained basis, see equation 123.
E --- 1.1 Ur ----f fr

(Equation 123)

or equivalently, with 1.1 Ur = V/Hz> according to equation 124.

E V/Hz> --- --------------------f fr

(Equation 124)

where:

V/Hz>

is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.

V/Hz> is an OEX setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 150%. If the user does not know exactly what to set, then the standard IEC 60076 - 1, section 4.4, the default value V/Hz> = 1.10 pu shall be used. In OEX protection function the relative excitation M (relative V/Hz) is expressed according to equation 125.
Ef V- -----M = relative Hz = ------------Ur fr
(Equation 125)

It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for any E and f, where the ratio E / f is equal to Ur / fr. A power transformer is not overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in %. The relative overexcitation is thus defined as shown in equation 126.
overexcitation = M V/Hz>
(Equation 126)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

327

Section 7 Voltage protection

The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage U which is in general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage U which is measured and fed to OEX, depending on the direction of the power flow through the power transformer, the power transformer side where OEX is applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to specify on the OEX function block in CAP 531 configuration tool worksheet on which side of the power transformer OEX is placed As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load, 0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 = Xleak2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.. OEX calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage reactance of the winding where OEX is connected) is known to the user. The assumption taken for 2-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is unfortunately most often not true. For a 2-winding power transformer the leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance, then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to Xc/2. The OEX protection will then take the given measured terminal voltage U, as the induced voltage E. It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such as loss of load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-earth voltage does not mean overexcitation. For example, in an unearthed power system, a single-phase-toearth fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases to earth, but no overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.

7.4.2.1

Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where OEX protection is applied, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure this voltage, MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that must be used.This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI. It is extremely important that MeasuredU and MeasuredI is set to same value! If, for example, voltage Uab is fed to OEX, then currents Ia, and Ib must be applied, etc. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by the

328

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

OEX protection algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of the rated value, otherwise the OEX protection algorithm is exited without calculating the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000. If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where OEX is connected, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are used by OEX protection. A check is made within OEX protection if the positive sequence voltage is higher than 70% rated phase-to-earth voltage; below this value, OEX is exited immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000. The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function is in operation for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 and 60 Hz respectively. OEX protection function can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from the power flow. The side with a possible On-Load-Tap-Changer (OLTC) must not be used.

7.4.2.2

Operate time of the overexcitation protection.

The operate time of the overexcitation protection is a function of the relative overexcitation. Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between: the so called IEEE law, and a tailor-made law.

The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They can match well a transformer core capability. The square law is according to equation 127.
0.18 k 0.18 k - = -------------------------------------t o p = -------------------------------------------2 2 overexcitation ( M V/Hz> )

(Equation 127)

where: M is excitation, mean value in the interval from t = 0 to t = top is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and is time multiplier setting for inverse time functions, see figure 154. Parameter k (time multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.

V/Hz>
k

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

329

Section 7 Voltage protection

An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to equation 128.
t op

( M(t) V/Hz> )
0

dt 0.18 k
(Equation 128)

A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (i.e. j = n) where it becomes true that:
n

Dt

( M(j)
j=k

V/Hz> ) 0.18 k
(Equation 129)

where: Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of overexcitation function and M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given as Ur/fr.

As long as M > V/Hz> (i.e. overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be tripped at j = n. Inverse delays as per figure 154, can be modified (limited) by two special definite delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 153.
delay in s tMax

under excitation

inverse delay law

overexcitation tMin 0 M=V/Hz> V/Hz> Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz> Mmax Emax Excitation M E (only if f = fr = const) 99001067.vsd

Figure 153:

Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by tMax, and tMin

A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In case the inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEX trips after tMaxt_MaxTripDelay seconds. 330 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin, OEX function trips after tMint_MinTripDelay seconds. Also, the inverse delay law is no more valid beyond excitation Mmax. Beyond Mmax (beyond overexcitation Mmax - V/Hz>), the delay will always be tMin, no matter what overexcitation.
Time (s) IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES

1000

100 k = 60

k = 20

10

k = 10 k=9 k=8 k=7 k=6 k=5 k=4 k=3 k=2

k=1 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40

OVEREXCITATION IN %

(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373.vsd

Figure 154:

Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation.

The critical value of excitation Mmax is determined indirectly via OEX protection function setting V/Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load-rated-frequency voltage, where the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If, for example, V/Hz>> = 140 %, then Mmax is according to equation 130.
(V/Hz>>) f - = 1.40 Mmax = ------------------------Ur fr

(Equation 130)

The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

331

Section 7 Voltage protection

five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6) as shown in the figure 155. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.
delay in s

tMax

underexcitation 0 Emaxcont

tMin Overexcitation M-Emaxcont Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M Mmax 99001068.vsd

Figure 155:

An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic

Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear interpolation. Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.

7.4.2.3

Cooling
The overexcitation protection OEX is basically a thermal protection; therefore a cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied. Parameter Tcool is an OEX setting, with a default time constant tCooling of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times tCooling minutes. If an overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be otherwise.

7.4.2.4

OEX protection function measurands

A service value data item called Time to trip, and designated on the display by tTRIP is available in seconds on the local HMI, or monitoring tool. This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip if the overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This information can be useful with small or moderate overexcitations. If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is tMax, then the estimation of the remaining time to trip is done against tMax. The displayed relative excitation M, designated on the display by V/Hz is calculated from the expression:
V Ef - = ------------M = relative ----- Hz Uf fr

(Equation 131)

332

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

If less than V / Hz = V/Hz> (in pu) is shown on the HMI display (or read via SM/ RET521), the power transformer is underexcited. If the value of V/Hz is shown which is equal to V/Hz> (in pu), it means that the excitation is exactly equal to the power transformer continuous capability. If a value higher than the value of V/Hz> is shown, the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if V/Hz = 1.100 is shown, while V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous excitation limit. The third item of the OEX protection service report is the thermal status of the protected power transformer iron core, designated on the display by ThermalStatus. This gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which corresponds to 100%. Thermal Status should reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched off, the ThermalStaus shall go over 100%. If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or TMin, then the Thermal Status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long delay is limited by tMax, then the OEX TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.

7.4.2.5

Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. The voltages are normally set 2% lower and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator an early abnormal voltages warning.
OVEX: FS = 1 = 2*SI + SU BLOCK SIDE Prepool I SI1
V/Hz> M>V/Hz>

AlarmLevel

t
tAlarm

t>tAlarm

&

ALARM

t
Calculation of internal induced voltage Ei tMin k M

t>tMin

&

TRIP

SI2 Prepool O SU1 2

Ei

M= (Ei / f) (Ur / fr)

IEEE law

M Tailor-made law M>V/Hz>> Xleak

t
tMax

ERROR V/Hz>>

M = relative V/Hz as service value

en05000162.vsd

Figure 156:

A logic diagram over Overexcitation protection function.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

333

Section 7 Voltage protection

7.4.2.6 Logic diagram

Figure 157:

A simplified diagram of the OEX protection function

Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.

7.4.3

Function block
OEX1OEXPVPH_24 I3P U3P BLOCK RESET TRIP START ALARM

en05000329.vs d

Figure 158:

OEX function block

7.4.4

Input and output signals

Table 180:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK RESET

Input signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block

Description Current connection Voltage connection Block of function Reset operation

334

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 181:
Signal TRIP START ALARM

Output signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block

Description Trip from overexcitation function Overexcitation above set operate level (instantaneous) Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)

7.4.5

Setting parameters
Table 182:
Parameter MeasuredU

Basic general settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range PosSeq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 PosSeq Step Default L1L2 Unit Description Selection of measured voltage

MeasuredI

L1L2

Selection of measured current

Table 183:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase V/Hz>

Basic parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 100.0 - 180.0 Step 1 0.05 0.1 Default Off 3000 400.00 110.0 Unit A kV %UB/f Description Operation Off / On Base current (rated phase current) in A Base voltage (main voltage) in kV Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated freq in % of (Ubase/ frated) High level of V/Hz above which tMin is used, in % of (Ubase/ frated) Winding leakage reactance in primary ohms Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec) Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in sec

V/Hz>>

100.0 - 200.0

0.1

140.0

%UB/f

XLeak

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

ohm

TrPulse tMin

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

0.100 7.000

s s

tMax

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

1800.00

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

335

Section 7 Voltage protection

Parameter tCooling Range 0.10 - 9000.00 Step 0.01 Default 1200.00 Unit s Description Transformer magnetic core cooling time constant, in sec Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor made Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve Alarm operate level as % of operate level Alarm time delay, in sec

CurveType

IEEE Tailor made 1 - 60

IEEE

kForIEEE

AlarmLevel tAlarm

50.0 - 120.0 0.00 - 9000.00

0.1 0.01

100.0 5.00

% s

Table 184:
Parameter t1Tailor

Advanced parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function

Range 0.00 - 9000.00 Step 0.01 Default 7200.00 Unit s Description Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made curve, in sec

t2Tailor t3Tailor t4Tailor t5Tailor t6Tailor

0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00 0.00 - 9000.00

0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01

3600.00 1800.00 900.00 450.00 225.00

s s s s s

7.4.6

Technical data
Table 185:
Function Operate value, start Operate value, alarm Operate value, high level Table continued on next page

Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24)

Range or value (100180)% of (Ubase/frated) (50120)% of start level (100200)% of (Ubase/frated) Accuracy 1.0% of U 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U > Ur 1.0% of U

336

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Function Curve type Range or value IEEE or customer defined Accuracy Class 5 + 40 ms

IEEE : t =

(0.18 k ) ( M - 1) 2

where M = relative (V/Hz) = (E/f)/ (Ur/fr) Minimum time delay for inverse function Maximum time delay for inverse function Alarm time delay (0.00060.000) s (0.009000.00) s (0.00060.000) s 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

7.5

Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)

Function block name: VDC ANSI number: 60 IEC 61850 logical node name: VDCPTOV IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

7.5.1

Introduction
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip step. It can be used to supervise the voltage from two fuse groups or two different voltage transformers fuses as a fuse/MCB supervision function.

7.5.2

Principle of operation
The function is based on comparison of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx The voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip level UDTrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three phases. Loss of one U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow=No.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

337

Section 7 Voltage protection

The function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary BLOCK input. It can e.g. be activated from a fuse failure supervision function block. To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance in normal service. The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 159.
UDTripL1>

AND O R tReset tTrip t t

UDTripL1>

AND

AND

TRIP

UDTripL1>

AND AND

START

UDAlarmL1>

AND O R tAlarm

UDAlarmL1>

AND

AND

ALARM

UDAlarmL1>

AND

U1<L1 U1<L2 U1<L3 BlkDiffAtULow U2<L1 U2<L2 U2<L3 BLOCK AND t1 t AND U2LOW OR OR tAlarm t AND U1LOW

AND

en06000382.vsd

Figure 159:

Principle logic for voltage differential function

7.5.3

Function block
VDC1VDCPTOV_60 U3P1 U3P2 BLOCK TRIP START ALARM U1LOW U2LOW UL1DIFF UL2DIFF UL3DIFF en06000528.vsd

Figure 160:

VDC function block

338

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 186:
Signal U3P1 U3P2 BLOCK

Input signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block

Description Bus voltage Capacitor voltage Block of function

Table 187:
Signal TRIP START ALARM U1LOW U2LOW UL1DIFF UL2DIFF UL3DIFF

Output signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block

Description Voltage differential protection operated Start of voltage differential protection Voltage differential protection alarm Loss of U1 voltage Loss of U2 voltage Differential Voltage phase L1 Differential Voltage phase L2 Differential Voltage phase L3

7.5.5

Setting parameters
Table 188:
Parameter Operation UBase BlkDiffAtULow UDTrip tTrip

Basic parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function

Range Off On 0.50 - 2000.00 No Yes 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.01 0.1 0.001 Default Off 400.00 Yes 5.0 1.000 Unit kV %UB s Description Operation Off/On Base Voltage Block operation at low voltage Operate level, in % of UBase Time delay for voltage differential operate, in milliseconds Time delay for voltage differential reset, in seconds Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase

tReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

U1Low U2Low

0.0 - 100.0 0.0 - 100.0

0.1 0.1

70.0 70.0

%UB %UB

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

339

Section 7 Voltage protection

Parameter tBlock UDAlarm tAlarm Range 0.000 - 60.000 0.0 - 100.0 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.1 0.001 Default 0.000 2.0 2.000 Unit s %UB s Description Reset time for undervoltage block Alarm level, in % of UBase Time delay for voltage differential alarm, in seconds

Table 189:
Parameter RFL1

Advanced parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function

Range 0.000 - 3.000 Step 0.001 Default 1.000 Unit Description Ratio compensation factor phase L1 UCap*RFL1=UL1Bus Ratio compensation factor phase L2 UCap*RFL2=UL2Bus Ratio compensation factor phase L3 UCap*RFL3=UL3Bus

RFL2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

RFL3

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

7.5.6

Technical data
Table 190:
Function Voltage difference for alarm and trip Under voltage level Timers

Voltage differential protection (PTOV)

Range or value (0.0100.0) % of Ubase (0.0100.0) % of Ubase (0.00060.000)s Accuracy 0.5 % of Ur 0.5% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms

7.6

95% and 100% Stator earthground fault protection based on 3rd harmonic
Function block name: ANSI number: 64S IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

UN> / U0d(3rd harm)

340

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.6.1 Introduction

Stator earth fault is a fault type having relatively high fault rate. The generator systems normally have high impedance earthing, i.e. earthing via a neutral point resistor. This resistor is normally dimensioned to give an earth fault current in the range 5 15 A at a solid earth fault directly at the generator high voltage terminal. The relatively small earth fault currents give much less thermal and mechanical stress on the generator, compared to the short circuit case. Anyhow, the earth faults in the generator have to be detected and the generator has to be tripped, even if longer fault time compared to short circuits, can be allowed. In normal non-faulted operation of the generating unit the neutral point voltage is close to zero, and there is no zero sequence current flow in the generator. When a phase-to-earth fault occurs the neutral point voltage will increase and there will be a current flow through the neutral point resistor. To detect an earth fault on the windings of a generating unit one may use a neutral point overvoltage relay, a neutral point overcurrent relay, a zero sequence overvoltage relay or a residual differential protection. These protection schemes are simple and have served well during many years. However, at best these simple schemes protect only 95% of the stator winding. They leave 5% at the neutral end unprotected. Under unfavourable conditions the blind zone may extend to 20% from the neutral. The 95% stator earth fault typically measures the fundamental frequency voltage component in the generator star point and it operates when it exceeds the preset value. By using this principle earth fault protection for approximately 95% of the stator winding can be protected. In order to protect the last 5% of the stator winding close to the neutral end the third harmonic voltage measurement can be performed. In REG 670 either third harmonic differential principle of neutral point third harmonic undervoltage principle can be provided. Combination of these two measuring principles provide coverage for entire stator winding against earth faults.

7.6.2

Principle of operation
The protection is a combination of a 95% fundamental frequency earth fault protection and a 100% 3rd harmonic base earth fault protection. The 3rd harmonic based 100% stator earth fault protection is using the 3rd harmonic voltage generated by the generator itself. To assure reliable function of the protection it is necessary that the 3rd harmonic voltage generation is at least 1% of the generator rated voltage. The third harmonic voltage generated by the generator has the same phase angle in the three phases. It has the characteristic of a zero sequence component. If the generator is connected to the power system via a block transformer that cannot transform zero sequence voltages between the voltage levels, the 3rd harmonic voltage in the generator system will not influence nor be influenced by the external power system. At normal operation the generator third harmonic voltage characteristic can be described as in figure 161.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

341

Section 7 Voltage protection

- DU 3 +

U3

+ U3T,L
1

U3N

+ U3T,L2 -

+ U3T,L3 -

U3T

U3N

en06000448.vsd

Figure 161:

Generator third harmonic voltage characteristic at normal operation

The generator is modelled as parts of a winding where a 3rd harmonic voltage is induced along the winding, represented by the voltage U3 in the figure. Via the winding capacitances to earth and the neutral point resistor there will be a small 3rd harmonic current flow, giving the voltages U3N and U3T. It can easily be seen that the 3rd harmonic voltage in the generator neutral point (U3N) will be close to zero in case of a stator earth fault close to the neutral. This fact alone can be used as an indication of stator earth fault. To enable better sensitivity and stability also measurement of the terminal 3rd harmonic zero sequence voltage is used. In addition to the decrease of U3N the terminal voltage U3T will increase at the stator earth fault close to the generator neutral point. Therefore the 3rd harmonic zero sequence voltage U3T is used in the protection. In the protection algorithm equation 133 is used:
U 3N + U 3T b U 3N
(Equation 133)

The factor b must be set not to risk operation at non-faulted conditions. The voltage U3N is measured via a voltage transformer between the generator neutral point and earth. The voltage U3T can be measured in different ways. The setting 342 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

TVoltType defines how the protection function is fed from voltage transformers at the high voltage side of the generator. If UT3 is lower than the set level UT3Blk Level, the function is blocked. 0: There is no voltage measured from the generator terminal side. This can be the case when there are only phase-to-phase voltage transformers available at the generator terminal side. In this case the protection will operate as a simple neutral point 3rd harmonic undervoltage protection, which must be blocked externally during generator start-up and shut-down. 1: The function is fed from an open delta connection of the phase to earth connected voltage transformers at the generator terminal side, U3T=(1/3)*U_Open_Delta. 2: The function is fed from the three phase to earth connected voltage transformers at the generator terminal side. The 3rd harmonic voltage U3T is calculated in the IED, U3T=(1/3)*(U3L1+U3L2+U3L3). 35: The function is fed from one phase voltage transformer only. The 3rd harmonic zero sequence voltage is assumed to be equal to any of the phase voltages, as the third harmonic voltage is of zero sequence type, U3T=U3Lx. A simplified block diagram describing the stator earth fault protection function shown in figure 162.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

343

Section 7 Voltage protection

Samples: Generator terminal voltage

3rd harmonic Fourier filtering giving UT3

TRIP Complex UT3 Stator Earth Fault detection 100 % Start Start and trip logic TRIP3H TRIPUN START3H STARTUN

Samples: Generator neutral point voltage

3rd harmonic Fourier filtering giving UN3

Complex UN3

Fundamental frequency residual voltage

Stator Earth Fault detection 90 %

Start

CB Status Block

en06000449.vsd

Figure 162:

Simplified logic diagram for stator earth fault protection

The function can be described in a simplified logical diagram as shown in figure 163.

344

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Figure 163:

Simplified logical diagram of the 100 % stator earth fault protection

There are two different cases of generator block configuration; with or without generator circuit breaker. If there is no generator breaker the capacitive coupling to earth is the same at all operating conditions. When there is a generator breaker the capacitive coupling to earth differ between the operating conditions when the generator is running with the generator breaker open (before synchronization) and with the circuit breaker open. This can be shown as in figure 164.
- DU 3 + + U3T,L1 U3 +

U3N

+ U3T,L2 -

+ U3T,L3 -

en07000002.vsd

Figure 164:

Generator block with generator circuit breaker

With the circuit breaker open the total capacitance will be smaller compared to normal operating conditions. This means that the neutral point third harmonic voltage will be reduced compared to the normal operating condition. Therefore there is a

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

345

Section 7 Voltage protection

possibility to reduce the sensitivity of the protection when the generator circuit breaker is open. With the setting CBExists change of the sensitivity is enabled. If the binary input signal CBCLOSED is activated the set sensitivity is valid. If the generator circuit breaker is opened the binary input CBCLOSED is deactivated and the sensitivity is changed. This is done by changing the factor b with a set constant FactorCBOpen. In addition to the binary outputs also some analog outputs are available from the protection function: E3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage induced in the stator given in primary volts UN3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the neutral point of the generator UT3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the terminal point of the generator ANGLE: the angle between the phasors UN3 and UT3 given in radians DU3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic differential voltage BU3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic bias voltage UN: the fundamental frequency voltage measured in the neutral point of the generator

7.6.3

Function block
STE1STEFPHIZ_59THD NEUTVOLT TRIP UT3HL1RE TRIP3H TERMVOLT TRIPUN UT3HL1IM START UT3HL2RE START3H UT3HL2IM STARTUN UT3HL3RE UT3 UT3HL3IM UN3 UT3RESRE E3 UT3RESIM ANGLE UN3HRE DU3 UN3HIM BU3 UNFUNDH UN CBCLOSED BLOCK BLOCK3RD BLOCKUN en07000033.vsd

Figure 165:

STE function block

346

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.6.4 Input and output signals

Table 191:
Signal NEUTVOLT UT3HL1RE TERMVOLT UT3HL1IM UT3HL2RE UT3HL2IM UT3HL3RE UT3HL3IM UT3RESRE UT3RESIM UN3HRE UN3HIM UNFUNDH CBCLOSED BLOCK BLOCK3RD BLOCKUN

Input signals for the STEFPHIZ_59THD (STE1-) function block

Description Voltage connection neutral side Voltage, terminal side, 3rd harmonic L1, real part Open-Delta connection on Terminal side Voltage, terminal side, 3rd harmonic L1, imag part Voltage, terminal side, 3rd harmonic L2, real part Voltage, terminal side, 3rd harmonic L2, imag part Voltage, terminal side, 3rd harmonic L3, real part Voltage, terminal side, 3rd harmonic L3, imag part Voltage, terminal side, 3rd harmonic residual, real part Voltage, terminal side, 3rd harmonic residual, imag part 3rd harmonic voltage, neutral side, real part 3rd harmonic voltage, neutral side, imaginary part Voltage neutral side fundamental harmonic, magnitude Input 1 (TRUE) means breaker between gen. & tr. is closed Complete block of the stator earth fault protecion function Block of the 3rd harmonic-based parts of the protection Block of the fund. harmonic-based part of the protection

Table 192:
Signal TRIP TRIP3H TRIPUN START START3H STARTUN UT3 UN3 E3 ANGLE DU3 BU3 UN

Output signals for the STEFPHIZ_59THD (STE1-) function block

Description Main, common trip command Trip by one of two 3rd harmonic voltage-based prot. Trip by fund. freq. neutral over-voltage protection Main, common start signal Start by one of two 3rd harmonic voltage-based prot. Start signal by fund. freq. neutral over-voltage prot. Mag. of 3rd harm. voltage at generator terminal side, Volts Mag. of 3rd harm. voltage at generator neutral side, Volts Total induced stator 3rd harmonic voltage, primary Volts Angle between 3rd harmonic votage phasors, radians Diff. between 3rd harm. volt. at both sides of gen., Volts Bias voltage, a part of voltN3rdHarmonic, primary Volts Fund. frequency voltage at generator neutral, primary Volts

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

347

Section 7 Voltage protection 7.6.5 Setting parameters

Table 193:
Parameter GenRatedVolt

Basic general settings for the STEFPHIZ_59THD (STE1-) function

Range 1.0 - 100.0 Step 0.1 Default 10.0 Unit kV Description Generator rated (nominal) phase-tophase voltage in kV Used connection type for gen. terminal voltage transformer

TVoltType

NoVoltage ResidualVoltage AllThreePhases PhaseL1 PhaseL2 PhaseL3

ResidualVoltage

Table 194:
Parameter Operation Beta

Basic parameter group settings for the STEFPHIZ_59THD (STE1-) function

Range Off On 0.50 - 10.00 Step 0.01 Default Off 1.00 Unit Description Operation Off / On Portion of voltN3rdHarmonic used as bias Defines if generator CB exists (between Gen & Transformer) Beta is multiplied by this factor when CB is open Pickup 3rd Harm U< protection (when activated) % of UB/ 1,732 If UT3 is below limit 3rdH Diff is blocked, in % of UB/1,732 Pickup fundamental UN> protection (95% SEF), % of UB/1,732 Operation delay of 3rd harm-based protection (100% SEF) in s Operation delay of fundamental UN> protection (95% SEF) in s

CBexists

No Yes 1.00 - 10.00

No

FactorCBopen

0.01

1.00

UN3rdH<

0.5 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

UT3BlkLevel

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

UNFund>

1.0 - 50.0

0.1

5.0

t3rdH

0.020 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

tUNFund

0.020 - 60.000

0.001

0.500

7.6.6

Technical data

348

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Table 195:
Function

100% stator earth fault protection (PHIZ, 59THD)

Range or value (1.050.0)% of Ubase (0.510.0)% of Ubase (0.110.0)% of Ubase (0.02060.000) s Reject third harmonic by 140 Reject fundamental harmonic by 140 Accuracy 0.5% of Ur 0.5% of Ur 0.5% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms -

Fundamental frequency level UN (95% Stator EF) Third harmonic differential level Third harmonic differential block level Timers Filter characteristic: Fundamental Third harmonic

7.7

Rotor earthground fault protection

Function block name: ANSI number: 64R IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

IN> Rotor

7.7.1
7.7.1.1

Introduction
Rotor earthground fault (GAPC, 64R)
The field winding, including the rotor winding and the non-rotating excitation equipment, is always insulated from the metallic parts of the rotor. The insulation resistance is high if the rotor is cooled by air or by hydrogen. The insulation resistance is much lower if the rotor winding is cooled by water. This is true even if the insulation is intact. A fault in the insulation of the field circuit will result in a conducting path from the field winding to earth. This means that the fault has caused a field earth fault. The field circuit of a synchronous generator is normally unearthed. Therefore, a single earth fault on the field winding will cause only a very small fault current. Thus the earth fault does not produce any damage in the generator. Furthermore, it will not affect the operation of a generating unit in any way. However, the existence of a single earth fault increases the electric stress at other points in the field circuit. This means that the risk for a second earth fault at another point on the field winding has increased considerably. A second earth fault will cause a field short-circuit with severe consequences. The rotor earth fault protection is based on injection of an AC voltage to the isolated field circuit. In non-faulted conditions there will be no current flow associated to this injected voltage. If a rotor earth fault occurs, this condition will be detected by the

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

349

Section 7 Voltage protection

rotor earth fault protection. Depending on the generator owner philosophy this operational state will be alarmed and/or the generator will be tripped.

7.7.2
7.7.2.1

Principle of operation
Rotor earthground fault
The protection function uses injection of an ac voltage to the generator field circuit. The COMBIFLEX voltage injection unit RXTTE4, Part No 1MRK 002 108-AB contains a voltage transformer with a primary winding for connection to 120 or 230 V, 50 or 60 Hz supply voltage. From the secondary winding of this internal voltage transformer approximately 40 V AC is injected via series capacitors and resistors into the rotor circuit. The injected voltage and current are fed to one voltage input and one current input of the REG 670 IED. 1A rated current input into REG 670 must be used for this function.

The current caused by the injection is fed to a current input of the REG 670 IED via injection unit RXTTE4, as shown in figure 166.

350

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

Generator rotor winding

Connection to be done by the panel builder / field contractor

RXTTE 4 REG 670 221

Optional external resistor

222

421 I 428

313 314 324 U 325 321 315

230 V AC 120 V AC 0

en07000185.vsd

Figure 166:

Connection of rotor earth fault protection

By using a two stage directional current measurement in the general application multipurpose function (GAPC), as shown in figure 167, the earth fault current on the DC side of the excitation is detected. The protection operates when the resistive component of the measured injected current exceeds the pre-set operate level. Stage one provides an alarm signal and stage two trips the generator after a short time delay for fully developed rotor earth faults.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

351

Section 7 Voltage protection

Operating Region

IINJECTED

UINJECTED

en06000447.vsd

Figure 167:

Two stage directional current measurement in the general application multipurpose function

The sensitivity of the rotor earth fault protection is dependent of the rotor winding capacitance to earth and the set pick-up current level of the measurement multipurpose function (GAPC). The sensitivity is shown in figure 168.

352

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 7 Voltage protection

REG 670 : 50 Hz : Raxle=0

10 0

10

ko hm

0 ,1 0 1 2 uF 3 0 mA 4 0 mA 50 mA 70 mA 10 0 mA 150 mA 2 0 0 mA 3 0 0 mA 3 4 5

en06000445.vsd

Figure 168:

Sensitivity dependence of winding capacitance at different current settings

The undervoltage stage of the general application multipurpose function (GAPC) can be used to monitor the injection voltage and give alarm if the injection voltage is absent. It shall be set to 80% of the rated value of the rated value of the injected voltage with a time delay of about 10 s. An additional instance of the general application multipurpose function (GAPC) can be used to provide a third non-directional overcurrent stage which can be used to detect earth faults on the AC side of the rectifier in case of a static excitation system. It shall be set to operate when the magnitude of the injected current into the rotor circuit exceeds 125 mA and with a delay of 5 s. As the CT in RXTTE4 has a ratio 10:1 the current measured by REG 670 will be at least 1.25 A for this fault.

7.7.3

Technical data
Table 196:
Function Permitted field voltage maximum Supply voltage 120 or 230 V Operate earth fault resistance value Table continued on next page

Rotor earth fault protection (PHIZ, 59THD) Based on General current and voltage protection (GAPC) and (RXTTE4)
Range or value 1200 V DC 50/60 Hz Approx. 120 k Accuracy -

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

353

Section 7 Voltage protection

Function Influence of harmonics in the DC field voltage Permitted leakage capacitance Permitted shaft earthing resistance Protective resistor Range or value Negligible influence of 50 V, 150 Hz or 50 V, 300 Hz (15) F Maximum 200 220 , 100 W, plate 135 x 160 mm Accuracy -

354

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

Section 8

Frequency protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

8.1

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Function block name: TUFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPTUF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

f<

8.1.1

Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of lack of generation in the network. The function can be used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine start-up etc. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Up to independent under frequency steps are available.

8.1.2

Principle of operation
The underfrequency (TUF) function is used to detect low power system frequency. The function can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied the time delay will be longer if the voltage is higher and shorter if the voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

355

Section 8 Frequency protection

8.1.2.1

Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting IntBlkStVal, the underfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.1.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the underfrequency function can be either a settable definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tTrip sets the time delay For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 169 and equation 134. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time delay to apply. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST. Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. On the output of the underfrequency function a 100 ms pulse is issued, after a time delay corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.

8.1.2.3

Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system, except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to equation 134. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar

356

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage functions.
U - UMin t= UNom - UMin
Exponent

( tMax - tMin ) + tMin

(Equation 134)

where: t U Exponent tMax, tMin is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage), is the measured voltage is a setting, are time settings.

UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 169, for:

UMin UNom tMax tMin Exponent = 90% = 100% = 1.0 s = 0.0 s = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

TimeDlyOperate [s]

Exponenent 3
0.5

1 2

90

95

100

U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd

Figure 169:

Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for the underfrequency function. The time delay to operate is plotted as a function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.

8.1.2.4

Blocking
The underfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

357

Section 8 Frequency protection

BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST:

blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.

8.1.2.5

Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay TimeDlyRestore. The design of the underfrequency function is schematically described in figure 170.

Block OR Comparator U < IntBlockLevel BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Time integrator TimerOperation Mode Selector TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset START TRIP Start & Trip Output Logic START

Frequency

Comparator f < StartFrequency

TRIP

100 ms Comparator f > RestoreFreq TimeDlyRestore RESTORE

en05000726.vsd

Figure 170:

Schematic design of the underfrequency function

358

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 8 Frequency protection 8.1.3 Function block

TUF1SAPTUF_81 U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN Frequency en06000279.vsd

Figure 171:

TUF function block

8.1.4

Input and output signals

Table 197:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST

Input signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block

Description Voltage connection Block of function Blocking operate output. Blocking restore output.

Table 198:
Signal TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN Frequency

Output signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block

Description Operate/trip signal for frequency. Start/pick-up signal for frequency. Restore signal for load restoring purposes. Blocking indication due to low amplitude. Measured frequency

8.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 199:
Parameter Operation UBase StartFrequency IntBlockLevel

Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 Step 0.05 0.01 1 Default Off 400.00 48.80 50 Unit kV Hz %UB Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Frequency setting/ start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase.

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

359

Section 8 Frequency protection

Parameter TimeDlyOperate Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.200 Unit s Description Operate time delay in over/under-frequency mode. Time delay for reset. Restore time delay. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value. Setting for choosing timer mode. Nominal voltage in % of UBase for voltage based timer. Lower operation limit in % of UBase for voltage based timer. For calculation of the curve form for voltage based timer. Maximum time operation limit for voltage based timer. Minimum time operation limit for voltage based timer.

TimeDlyReset TimeDlyRestore RestoreFreq

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 45.00 - 65.00

0.001 0.001 0.01

0.000 0.000 50.10

s s Hz

TimerOperation UNom

Definite timer Volt based timer 50 - 150

Definite timer 100

%UB

UMin

50 - 150

90

%UB

Exponent

1.0

0.1

0.0 - 5.0

tMax

0.010 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

tMin

0.010 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

8.1.6

Technical data
Table 200:
Function Operate value, start function Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Operate time, definite time function Reset time, definite time function Voltage dependent time delay
U - UMin t= UNom - UMin
Exponent

Underfrequency protection (PTUF, 81)

Range or value (35.00-75.00) Hz 100 ms typically 100 ms typically (0.000-60.000)s (0.000-60.000)s Settings: UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase Exponent=0.0-5.0 tMax=(0.000-60.000)s tMin=(0.000-60.000)s Accuracy 2.0 mHz 0.5% + 10 ms 0.5% + 10 ms Class 5 + 200 ms

( tMax - tMin ) + tMin

U=Umeasured

8.2
360

Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

Function block name: TOFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPTOF

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

f>

8.2.1

Introduction
Overfrequency will occur at sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network. In some cases close to generating part governor problems can also cause overfrequency. The function can be used for generation shedding, remedial action schemes etc. It can also be used as a sub-nominal frequency stage initiating load restoring. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.

8.2.2

Principle of operation
The Overfrequency (TOF) function is used to detect high power system frequency. The function has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued.

8.2.2.1

Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlkStVal, the overfrequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.2.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the overfrequency function is a settable definite time delay, specified by the setting tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

361

Section 8 Frequency protection

Trip signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.

8.2.2.3

Blocking
The overfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
TOF-BLOCK: TOF-BLKTRIP: blocks all outputs blocks the TOF-TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.

8.2.2.4

Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of the overfrequency function is schematically described in figure 172.

362

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

BLOCK BLKTRIP Comparator U < IntBlockLevel OR BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Time integrator Definite Time Delay START Comparator f > StartFrequency

Start & Trip Output Logic

START

Frequency

TimeDlyOperate TRIP TimeDlyReset TRIP

en05000735.vsd

Figure 172:

Schematic design of the overfrequency function

8.2.3

Function block
TOF1SAPTOF_81 U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP TRIP START BLKDMAGN Frequency en06000280.vsd

Figure 173:

TOF function block

8.2.4

Input and output signals

Table 201:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP

Input signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block

Description Voltage connection Block of function Blocking operate output.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

363

Section 8 Frequency protection

Table 202:
Signal TRIP START BLKDMAGN Frequency

Output signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block

Description Operate/trip signal for frequency. Start/pick-up signal for frequency. Blocking indication due to low amplitude. Measured frequency

8.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 203:
Parameter Operation UBase StartFrequency IntBlockLevel TimeDlyOperate

Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 35.00 - 75.00 0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.05 0.01 1 0.001 Default Off 400.00 51.20 50 0.000 Unit kV Hz %UB s Description Operation Off / On Base voltage Frequency setting/ start value. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in over/under-frequency mode. Time delay for reset.

TimeDlyReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

8.2.6

Technical data
Table 204:
Function Operate value, start function Operate time, start function Reset time, start function Operate time, definite time function Reset time, definite time function

Overfrequency protection (PTOF, 81)

Range or value (35.00-75.00) Hz 100 ms typically 100 ms typically (0.000-60.000)s (0.000-60.000)s Accuracy 2.0 mHz 0.5% + 10 ms 0.5% + 10 ms

8.3

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

364

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

Function block name: RCFxANSI number: 81 IEC 61850 logical node name: SAPFRC

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

df/dt > <

8.3.1

Introduction
Rate of change of frequency function gives an early indication of a main disturbance in the system. The function can be used for generation shedding, load shedding, remedial action schemes etc. The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement. Each step can discriminate between positive or negative change of frequency.

8.3.2

Principle of operation
The rate-of-change of frequency (RCF) function is used to detect fast power system frequency changes, increase as well as decrease, at an early stage. The function has a settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, i.e. if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage, the function is blocked and no start or trip signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

8.3.2.1

Measurement principle
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. The rate-of-change of frequency function is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, the rate-of-change of frequency function is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad, controls if the rate-of-change of frequency function reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If the rate-of-change of frequency function is used for decreasing frequency, i.e. the setting StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

365

Section 8 Frequency protection

setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of StartFreqGrad, sets the rate-of-change of frequency function to start and trip for frequency increases. To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.3.2.2

Time delay
The rate-of-change of frequency function has a settable definite time delay, tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time. Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area. The RESTORE output of the rate-of-change of frequency function is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.

8.3.2.3

Blocking
The rate-of-change of frequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: BLKTRIP: BLKREST: blocks all outputs blocks the TRIP output blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the start and the trip outputs, are blocked.

8.3.2.4

Design
The rate-of-change of frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the

366

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of the rate-of-change of frequency function is schematically described in figure 174.
BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKRESET OR Comparator U < IntBlockLevel Start & Trip Output Logic BLOCK BLKDMAGN

Voltage

Rate-of-Change of Frequency

Comparator If [StartFreqGrad<0 START AND df/dt < StartFreqGrad] OR [StartFreqGrad>0 AND df/dt > StartFreqGrad] Then START

Time integrator Definite Time Delay TimeDlyOperate TimeDlyReset

START

TRIP

100 ms Frequency Comparator f > RestoreFreq TimeDlyRestore RESTORE

en05000835.vsd

Figure 174:

Schematic design of the rate-of-change of frequency function

8.3.3

Function block
RCF1SAPFRC_81 U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN en06000281.vsd

Figure 175:

RCF function block

8.3.4

Input and output signals

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

367

Section 8 Frequency protection

Table 205:
Signal U3P BLOCK BLKTRIP BLKREST

Input signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block

Description Group signal for voltage input Block of function Blocking operate output. Blocking restore output.

Table 206:
Signal TRIP START RESTORE BLKDMAGN

Output signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block

Description Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient Restore signal for load restoring purposes. Blocking indication due to low amplitude.

8.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 207:
Parameter Operation UBase

Basic parameter group settings for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 Step 0.05 Default Off 400.00 Unit kV Description Operation Off / On Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV Frequency gradient start value. Sign defines direction. Internal blocking level in % of UBase. Operate time delay in pos./neg. frequency gradient mode. Restore frequency if frequency is above frequency value (Hz) Restore time delay. Time delay for reset.

StartFreqGrad

-10.00 - 10.00

0.01

0.50

Hz/s

IntBlockLevel tTrip

0 - 100 0.000 - 60.000

1 0.001

50 0.200

%UB s

RestoreFreq

45.00 - 65.00

0.01

49.90

Hz

tRestore tReset

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000

s s

8.3.6

Technical data

368

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 8 Frequency protection

Table 208:
Function

Rate-of-change frequency protection (PFRC, 81)

Range or value (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s (0-100)% of Ubase 100 ms typically Accuracy 10.0 mHz/s 1.0% of Ur -

Operate value, start function Operate value, internal blocking level Operate time, start function

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

369

370

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Section 9

Multipurpose protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current and voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

9.1

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Function block name: GFxxANSI number: 46, 51, 67, 51N, 67N, 27, 59, 21, 40 IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

I<

I>

IEC 61850 logical node name: CVGAPC

U<

U>

9.1.1

Introduction
The protection module is recommended as a general backup protection with many possible application areas due to its flexible measuring and setting facilities. The built-in overcurrent protection feature has two settable current levels. Both of them can be used either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. The overcurrent protection steps can be made directional with selectable voltage polarizing quantity. Additionally they can be voltage and/or current controlled/ restrained. 2nd harmonic restraining facility is available as well. At too low polarizing voltage the overcurrent feature can be either blocked, made non directional or ordered to use voltage memory in accordance with a parameter setting. Additionally two overvoltage and two undervoltage steps, either with definite time or inverse time characteristic, are available within each function. The general function suits applications with underimpedance and voltage controlled overcurrent solutions. The general function can also be utilized for generator

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

371

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

transformer protection applications where positive, negative or zero sequence components of current and voltage quantities is typically required. Additionally generator applications such as loss of field, inadvertent energizing, stator or rotor overload, circuit breaker head flash-over and open phase detection are just a few of possible protection arrangements with these functions.

9.1.1.1

Inadvertent generator energization

When the generator is taken out of service, and non-rotating, there is a risk that the generator circuit breaker flashes over or is closed by mistake. To prevent damages on the generator or turbine, it is essential that high speed tripping is provided in case of inadvertent energization of the generator. This tripping should be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms). There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be limited so that the normal overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should, therefore, be included in the protective scheme.

9.1.2
9.1.2.1

Principle of operation
Measured quantities within the function
The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool. The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 209.
Table 209: Current selection for the GF function

Set value for the parameter CurrentInput Comment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh GF function will measure the phase L1 current phasor GF function will measure the phase L2 current phasor GF function will measure the phase L3 current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude

Table continued on next page

372

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Set value for the parameter CurrentInput Comment 9 UnbalancePh GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2 current phasor (i.e. IL1-IL2) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3 current phasor (i.e. IL2-IL3) GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1 current phasor (i.e. IL3-IL1) GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

10

Phase1-Phase2

11

Phase2-Phase3

12

Phase3-Phase1

13 14 15

MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 210:
Table 210: Voltage selection for the GF function
Comment GF function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor GF function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor GF function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence voltage phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used. GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude GF function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

VoltageInput
1 2 3 4 5 Phase1 Phase2 Phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq

Set value for the parameter

-3ZeroSeq

7 8 9

MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

373

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Set value for the parameter Phase1-Phase2

VoltageInput
10

Comment GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (i.e. UL1-UL2) GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (i.e. UL2-UL3) GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor (i.e. UL3-UL1) GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum magnitude GF function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum magnitude GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

11

Phase2-Phase3

12

Phase3-Phase1

13 14 15

MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 210 is always applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic care about it. The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 211 for built-in current restraint feature:
Table 211: Restraint current selection for the GF function
Comment GF function will measure internally calculated positive sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated negative sequence current phasor GF function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current phasor multiplied by factor 3 GF function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude

Set value for the parameter RestrCurr 1 2 3 4 PosSeq NegSeq 3ZeroSeq MaxPh

9.1.2.2

Base quantities for GF function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (i.e. 100%) for pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every GF function.

374

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Base current shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 209. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3 (i.e. 1,732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 209.

Base voltage shall be entered as: 1. 2. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 210. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 210.

9.1.2.3

Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 209) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.

Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the measured current quantity (see table 209). However it shall be noted that this feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected: PosSeq (i.e. positive sequence current) NegSeq (i.e. negative sequence current) UnbalancePh (i.e. unbalance phase current) UnbalancePh-Ph (i.e. unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level. The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 209) and measured voltage phasor (see table 210). In protection terminology it means that the PGPF function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with the set direction (i.e. Forward, which means towards the protected object, or REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 375

Directional feature

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 210) and measured current phasor (see table 209) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. The PGPF function will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria. Table 212 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for these two quantities for traditional directional relays.
Table 212: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Comment Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90 depending on the power system voltage level (i.e. X/R ratio) Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90 depending on the power system earthing (i.e. solidly earthed, earthed via resistor, etc.) Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Set value for the Set value for the parameter CurrentInput parameter

VoltageInput
PosSeq

PosSeq

NegSeq

-NegSeq

3ZeroSeq

-3ZeroSeq

Phase1 Phase2 Phase3

Phase2-Phase3 Phase3-Phase1 Phase1-Phase2

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature is enabled. Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:

376

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 176).

RCADir Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

U=-3U0

Operate region mta line

en05000252.vsd

Figure 176:
where:

I & U directional operating principle for the GF function

RCADir is -75 ROADir is 50

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

377

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle between the current phasor and the mta line that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 176).

RCADir Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io

U=-3U0

Operate region mta line

en05000253.vsd

Figure 177:
where: RCADir is -75 ROADir is 50

GF, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the preset value. User can select one of the following three options: Non-directional (i.e. operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Block (i.e. operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage) Memory (i.e. memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a measured voltage quantity (see table 210). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

378

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

ULowLimit_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000324.vsd

Figure 178:

Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step has value = step)
OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1

Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd

Figure 179:

Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simple change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 379

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves (i.e. overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions).

Current restraint feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a restraining current quantity (see table 211). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.

IMeasured

pe O
IsetHigh

te ra

ea ar
eff Co r t es I>R

tr es *Ir

ain

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff) Restraint
en05000255.vsd

Figure 180:

Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude. When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

9.1.2.4

Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 209) with the set pickup level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value one for longer

380

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.

9.1.2.5

Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 210) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 0.99. The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

9.1.2.6

Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and therefore only one will be explained here. Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see table 210 with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level. Reset ratio is settable, with default value of 1.01. The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user setting.

9.1.2.7

Inadvertent generator energization

The inadvertent energization function is realized by means of the general current and voltage protection function (CAGVPC). The function is configured as shown in figure 181.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

381

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

CVGAPC 3IP 3UP TROC1

TROV1 1 TRUV1 BLKOC1

en06000497.vsd

Figure 181:

Configuration of the inadvertent energization function

The setting of the general current and voltage function (typical values) is done as shown in table 213.
Table 213: The setting of the general current and voltage function
Measured Quantity Undervoltage U< Overvoltage U> Overcurrent I> Maximum generator Phase to Phase voltage Maximum generator Phase to Phase voltage Maximum generator Phase current Pickup in % of generator Time delay in seconds rating < 70% > 85% > 50% 10.0 s 1.0 s 0.05 s

In normal operation the overvoltage trip signal is activated and the undervotage trip signal is deactivated. This means that the overcurrent function is blocked. When the generator is taken out of service the generator voltage gets low. The overvoltage trip signal will be deactivated and the undervoltage trip signal will be activated after the set delay. At this moment the block signal to the overcurrent function will be deactivated.

382

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

It the generator is energized at stand still conditions, i.e. when the voltage is zero, the overcurrent function will operate after the short set delay if the generator current is larger than the set value. When the generator is started the overvoltage trip signal will be activared the set time delay after the moment when the voltage has reached the set value. At this moment the blocking of the overcurrent function is activated. The delay of the undervoltage function will prevent false operation at short circuits in the external power grid.

9.1.2.8

Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for the PGPF function are shown in the following figures.
REx670
ADM PGPF function
Current and voltage selection settings

Phasor calculation of individual currents

A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio

Phasors & samples

Selection of which current and voltage shall be given to the built-in protection elements

Selected current Selected voltage

Restraint current selection

A/D conversion scaling with CT ratio

Phasor calculation of individual voltages

Selection of restraint current

Selected restraint current

Phasors & samples

en05000169.vsd

Figure 182:

Treatment of measured currents within IED for PGPF function

Figure 182 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose protection function The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

383

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

1. 2. 3.

Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one threephase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function: 1. 2. 3. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured current. Selects one voltage from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured voltage. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally measured restraint current.

384

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1 2
Selected current
nd

Harmonic restraint

TRUC1

UC2 2nd Harmonic restraint OC1 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1

STUC2 TRUC2

STOC1 TROC1 BLK2ND DIROC1

Selected restraint current

OC2 2nd Harmonic restraint Current restraint Directionality Voltage control / restraint 1

STOC2 TROC2

UDIRLOW DIROC2

STOV1

OV1

TROV1 STOV2

OV2
Selected voltage

TROV2 STUV1

UV1

TRUV1 STUV2

UV2

TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd

Figure 183:

PGPF function main logic diagram for built in protection elements

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

385

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Logic in figure 183 can be summarized as follows: 1. 2. 3. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its START and TRIP output signals. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following four figures Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

Enable second harmonic

Second harmonic check

DEF time selected

DEF
OR

BLKTROC 1

AND

TROC1

Selected current

a b

a>b

OC1=On BLKOC1

StartCurr_OC1

AND

STOC1

Inverse Voltage control or restraint feature Directionality check DIR_OK Inverse time selected

Selected voltage

Selected restrain current

Current Restraint Feature Imeasured > k Irestraint

en05000831.vsd

Figure 184:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step i.e. OC1 (step OC2 has the same internal logic)

386

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current

a b

b>a

DEF

AND

TRUC1

StartCurr_UC1

AND

Operation_UC1=On Bin input: BLKUC1

STUC1

en05000750.vsd

Figure 185:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step i.e. UC1 (step UC2 has the same internal logic)

DEF time selected Selected voltage

a b

DEF

BLKTROV1

AND

TROV1

OR
a>b

StartVolt_OV1

AND
Inverse

STOV1

Operation_OV1=On BLKOV1 Inverse time selected

en05000751.vsd

Figure 186:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step i.e.OV1 (step OV2 has the same internal logic)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

387

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

DEF time selected Selected voltage

a b

DEF OR

BLKTRUV 1

AND

TRUV1

b>a

StartVolt_UV1

AND Inverse

STUV1

Operation_UV1=On BLKUV1 Inverse time selected

en05000752.vsd

Figure 187:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step i.e.UV1 (step UV2 has the same internal logic)

9.1.3

Function block
GF01CVGAPC I3P U3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1 STUC2 STOV1 STOV2 STUV1 STUV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 UDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE UIANGLE en05000372.vsd

Figure 188:

GF function block

9.1.4

Input and output signals

388

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Table 214:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK BLKOC1 BLKOC1TR ENMLTOC1 BLKOC2 BLKOC2TR ENMLTOC2 BLKUC1 BLKUC1TR BLKUC2 BLKUC2TR BLKOV1 BLKOV1TR BLKOV2 BLKOV2TR BLKUV1 BLKUV1TR BLKUV2 BLKUV2TR

Input signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input Block of function Block of over current function OC1 Block of trip for over current function OC1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1 Block of over current function OC2 Block of trip for over current function OC2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2 Block of under current function UC1 Block of trip for under current function UC1 Block of under current function UC2 Block of trip for under current function UC2 Block of over voltage function OV1 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1 Block of over voltage function OV2 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2 Block of under voltage function UV1 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1 Block of under voltage function UV2 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 215:
Signal TRIP TROC1 TROC2 TRUC1 TRUC2 TROV1 TROV2 TRUV1 TRUV2 START STOC1 STOC2 STUC1

Output signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block

Description General trip signal Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1 Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2 General start signal Start signal from overcurrent function OC1 Start signal from overcurrent function OC2 Start signal from undercurrent function UC1

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

389

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Signal STUC2 STOV1 STOV2 STUV1 STUV2 BLK2ND DIROC1 DIROC2 UDIRLOW CURRENT ICOSFI VOLTAGE UIANGLE Description Start signal from undercurrent function UC2 Start signal from overvoltage function OV1 Start signal from overvoltage function OV2 Start signal from undervoltage function UV1 Start signal from undervoltage function UV2 Block from second harmonic detection Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Low voltage for directional polarization Measured current value Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi) Measured voltage value Angle between voltage and current

9.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 216:
Parameter Operation CurrentInput

Basic parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function

Range Off On phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 1 - 99999 Step Default Off MaxPh Unit Description Operation Off / On Select current signal which will be measured inside function

IBase

3000

Base Current

Table continued on next page

390

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter VoltageInput Range phase1 phase2 phase3 PosSeq -NegSeq -3*ZeroSeq MaxPh MinPh UnbalancePh phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 MaxPh-Ph MinPh-Ph UnbalancePh-Ph 0.05 - 2000.00 Off On 10.0 - 50.0 Step Default MaxPh Unit Description Select voltage signal which will be measured inside function

UBase OperHarmRestr

0.05 -

400.00 Off

kV -

Base Voltage Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off / On Ratio of second to fundamental current harmonic in % Harm analyse disabled above this current level in % of Ibase Enable current restrain function On / Off Select current signal which will be used for curr restrain Restraining current coefficient Relay Characteristic Angle Relay Operate Angle Below this level in % of Ubase setting ActLowVolt takes over Operation OC1 Off / On Operate current level for OC1 in % of Ibase

l_2nd/l_fund

1.0

20.0

BlkLevel2nd

10 - 5000

5000

%IB

EnRestrainCurr

Off On PosSeq NegSeq 3*ZeroSeq Max 0.00 -180 - 180 1 - 90 0.0 - 5.0

Off

RestrCurrInput

PosSeq

RestrCurrCoeff RCADir ROADir LowVolt_VM

0.01 1 1 0.1

0.00 - 5.00 -75 75 0.5

Deg Deg %UB

Operation_OC1 StartCurr_OC1

Off On 2.0 - 5000.0

1.0

Off 120.0

%IB

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

391

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter CurveType_OC1 Range ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default ANSI Def. Time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for OC1

tDef_OC1

0.01

0.50

Independent (definitive) time delay of OC1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC1 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC1 Control mode for voltage controlled OC1 function Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC1 Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir, Blk, Mem)

k_OC1

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

tMin_OC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

VCntrlMode_OC1

Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 1.00

Off

VDepMode_OC1

Step

VDepFact_OC1

0.01

0.02 - 5.00

ULowLimit_OC1

1.0 - 200.0

0.1

50.0

%UB

UHighLimit_OC1

1.0 - 200.0

0.1

100.0

%UB

HarmRestr_OC1

Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U Non-directional Block Memory

Off

DirMode_OC1

Non-directional

DirPrinc_OC1

I&U

ActLowVolt1_VM

Non-directional

Table continued on next page

392

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter Operation_OC2 StartCurr_OC2 CurveType_OC2 Range Off On 2.0 - 5000.0 ANSI Ext. inv. ANSI Very inv. ANSI Norm. inv. ANSI Mod. inv. ANSI Def. Time L.T.E. inv. L.T.V. inv. L.T. inv. IEC Norm. inv. IEC Very inv. IEC inv. IEC Ext. inv. IEC S.T. inv. IEC L.T. inv. IEC Def. Time Programmable RI type RD type 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 1.0 Default Off 120.0 ANSI Def. Time Unit %IB Description Operation OC2 Off / On Operate current level for OC2 in % of Ibase Selection of time delay curve type for OC2

tDef_OC2

0.01

0.50

Independent (definitive) time delay of OC2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OC2 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for OC2 Control mode for voltage controlled OC2 function Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope) Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2 is U dependent Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of Ubase Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse) Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for OC2

k_OC2

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

tMin_OC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

VCntrlMode_OC2

Voltage control Input control Volt/Input control Off Step Slope 1.00

Off

VDepMode_OC2

Step

VDepFact_OC2

0.01

0.02 - 5.00

ULowLimit_OC2

1.0 - 200.0

0.1

50.0

%UB

UHighLimit_OC2

1.0 - 200.0

0.1

100.0

%UB

HarmRestr_OC2

Off On Non-directional Forward Reverse I&U IcosPhi&U

Off

DirMode_OC2

Non-directional

DirPrinc_OC2

I&U

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

393

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter ActLowVolt2_VM Range Non-directional Block Memory Off On Off On 0 - 150 Step Default Non-directional Unit Description Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir, Blk, Mem) Operation UC1 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC1 Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC1 Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation UC2 Off / On Enable internal low current level blocking for UC2 Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in % of Ibase Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of Ibase Independent (definitive) time delay of UC2 Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain Operation OV1 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV1

Operation_UC1 EnBlkLowI_UC1

Off Off

BlkLowCurr_UC1

20

%IB

StartCurr_UC1

2.0 - 150.0

1.0

70.0

%IB

tDef_UC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

tResetDef_UC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

HarmRestr_UC1

Off On Off On Off On 0 - 150

Off

Operation_UC2 EnBlkLowI_UC2

Off Off

BlkLowCurr_UC2

20

%IB

StartCurr_UC2

2.0 - 150.0

1.0

70.0

%IB

tDef_UC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

HarmRestr_UC2

Off On Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00

Off

Operation_OV1 StartVolt_OV1 CurveType_OV1

0.1 -

Off 150.0 Definite time

%UB -

tDef_OV1

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1

Table continued on next page

394

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter tMin_OV1 Range 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.05 Unit s Description Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV1 Operation OV2 Off / On Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for OV2

k_OV1

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

Operation_OV2 StartVolt_OV2 CurveType_OV2

Off On 2.0 - 200.0 Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Inverse curve C Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00

0.1 -

Off 150.0 Definite time

%UB -

tDef_OV2

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for OV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for OV2 Operation UV1 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of Ubase Selection of time delay curve type for UV1 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV1 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV1 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV1 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in % of Ubase Operation UV2 Off / On Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in % of Ubase

tMin_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

k_OV2

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

Operation_UV1 StartVolt_UV1

Off On 2.0 - 150.0

0.1

Off 50.0

%UB

CurveType_UV1

Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00

Definite time

tDef_UV1

0.01

1.00

tMin_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

k_UV1

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

EnBlkLowV_UV1

Off On 0.0 - 5.0

On

BlkLowVolt_UV1

0.1

0.5

%UB

Operation_UV2 StartVolt_UV2

Off On 2.0 - 150.0

0.1

Off 50.0

%UB

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

395

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter CurveType_UV2 Range Definite time Inverse curve A Inverse curve B Prog. inv. curve 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default Definite time Unit Description Selection of time delay curve type for UV2 Operate time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves for UV2 Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for UV2 Enable internal low voltage level blocking for UV2 Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in % of Ubase

tDef_UV2

0.01

1.00

tMin_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

k_UV2

0.30

0.01

0.05 - 999.00

EnBlkLowV_UV2

Off On 0.0 - 5.0

On

BlkLowVolt_UV2

0.1

0.5

%UB

Table 217:
Parameter CurrMult_OC1

Advanced parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function

Range 2.0 Step 0.1 Default 1.0 - 10.0 Unit Description Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC1 Selection of reset curve type for OC1 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC1

ResCrvType_OC1

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OC1

0.01

0.00

P_OC1

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

A_OC1

0.140

0.001

0.000 - 999.000

B_OC1

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 99.000

C_OC1

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 1.000

PR_OC1

0.500

0.001

0.005 - 3.000

Table continued on next page

396

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter TR_OC1 Range 13.500 Step 0.001 Default 0.005 - 600.000 Unit Description Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC1 Multiplier for scaling the current setting value for OC2 Selection of reset curve type for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve OC2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter PR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter TR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Parameter CR for customer programmable curve for OC2 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time curve UC2 Selection of reset curve type for OV1

CR_OC1

1.0

0.1

0.1 - 10.0

CurrMult_OC2

2.0

0.1

1.0 - 10.0

ResCrvType_OC2

Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI reset 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OC2

0.01

0.00

P_OC2

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

A_OC2

0.140

0.001

0.000 - 999.000

B_OC2

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 99.000

C_OC2

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 1.000

PR_OC2

0.500

0.001

0.005 - 3.000

TR_OC2

13.500

0.001

0.005 - 600.000

CR_OC2

1.0

0.1

0.1 - 10.0

tResetDef_UC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

ResCrvType_OV1

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OV1

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV1

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

397

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter tResetIDMT_OV1 Range 0.00 - 6000.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit s Description Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV1 Selection of reset curve type for OV2

A_OV1

0.140

0.001

0.005 - 999.000

B_OV1

1.000

0.001

0.500 - 99.000

C_OV1

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 1.000

D_OV1

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 10.000

P_OV1

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

ResCrvType_OV2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_OV2

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of OV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for OV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for OV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for OV2

tResetIDMT_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

A_OV2

0.140

0.001

0.005 - 999.000

B_OV2

1.000

0.001

0.500 - 99.000

C_OV2

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 1.000

D_OV2

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 10.000

P_OV2

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

Table continued on next page

398

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter ResCrvType_UV1 Range Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00 Step Default Instantaneous Unit Description Selection of reset curve type for UV1

tResetDef_UV1

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV1 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV1 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV1 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV1 Selection of reset curve type for UV2

tResetIDMT_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

A_UV1

0.140

0.001

0.005 - 999.000

B_UV1

1.000

0.001

0.500 - 99.000

C_UV1

1.000

0.001

0.000 - 1.000

D_UV1

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 10.000

P_UV1

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

ResCrvType_UV2

Instantaneous Frozen timer Linearly decreased 0.00 - 6000.00

Instantaneous

tResetDef_UV2

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of UV2 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves for UV2 Parameter A for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter B for customer programmable curve for UV2

tResetIDMT_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

A_UV2

0.140

0.001

0.005 - 999.000

B_UV2

1.000

0.001

0.500 - 99.000

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

399

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Parameter C_UV2 Range 1.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 - 1.000 Unit Description Parameter C for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter D for customer programmable curve for UV2 Parameter P for customer programmable curve for UV2

D_UV2

0.000

0.001

0.000 - 10.000

P_UV2

0.020

0.001

0.001 - 10.000

9.1.6

Technical data
Table 218:
Function Measuring current input

General current and voltage protection (GAPC)

Range or value phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph (1 - 99999) A phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, -NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph (0.05 - 2000.00) kV (2 - 5000)% of Ibase (2 - 150)% of Ibase (0.00 - 6000.00) s 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset Accuracy -

Base current Measuring voltage input

Base voltage Start overcurrent, step 1 and 2 Start undercurrent, step 1 and 2 Definite time delay Operate time start overcurrent Reset time start overcurrent Operate time start undercurrent Reset time start undercurrent Table continued on next page

1.0% of Ir for I<Ir 1.0% of I for I>Ir 1.0% of Ir for I<Ir 1.0% of I for I>Ir 0.5% 10 ms -

400

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 9 Multipurpose protection

Function See table 517 and table 518 Range or value Parameter ranges for customer defined characteristic no 17: k: 0.05 - 999.00 A: 0.0000 - 999.0000 B: 0.0000 - 99.0000 C: 0.0000 - 1.0000 P: 0.0001 - 10.0000 PR: 0.005 - 3.000 TR: 0.005 - 600.000 CR: 0.1 - 10.0 (0.0 - 5.0)% of Ubase (2.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase (2.0 - 150.0)% of Ubase 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 25 ms typically 2 to 0 x Uset 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset (1.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse (-180 to +180) degrees (1 to 90) degrees > 95% < 105% > 95% < 105% Accuracy See table 517 and table 518

Voltage level where voltage memory takes over Start overvoltage, step 1 and 2 Start undervoltage, step 1 and 2 Operate time, start overvoltage Reset time, start overvoltage Operate time start undervoltage Reset time start undervoltage High and low voltage limit, voltage dependent operation Directional function Relay characteristic angle Relay operate angle Reset ratio, overcurrent Reset ratio, undercurrent Reset ratio, overvoltage Reset ratio, undervoltage Overcurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undercurrent: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Overvoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time Undervoltage: Critical impulse time Impulse margin time

1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur 1.0% of U for U>Ur 2.0 degrees 2.0 degrees -

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset 15 ms typically

10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset 15 ms typically

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset 15 ms typically

10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset 15 ms typically

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

401

402

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

About this chapter
This chapter describes functions like Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure supervision. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

10.1

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Function block name: CCSxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CCSRDIF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

10.1.1

Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many protection functions such as differential, earth fault current and negative sequence current functions. It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurring open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will stress the secondary circuit. The current circuit supervision function compares the residual current from a three phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer. A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.

10.1.2

Principle of operation
The supervision function compares the absolute value of the vectorial sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 189. The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

403

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|. The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set operate value IMinOp. No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms. The current circuit supervision is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms a ALARM will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the ANDgate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.

Figure 189:

Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 190.

| I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Slope = 0.8 I MinOp

Operation area

| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd

Figure 190:

Operate characteristics

404

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

10.1.3

Function block
CCS1CCSRDIF I3P IREF BLOCK FAIL ALARM

en05000389.vsd

Figure 191:

CCS function block

10.1.4

Input and output signals

Table 219:
Signal I3P IREF BLOCK

Input signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block

Description Group signal for three phase current input TBD Block of function

Table 220:
Signal FAIL ALARM

Output signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block

Description Detection of current circuit failure Alarm for current circuit failure

10.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 221:
Parameter Operation IBase

Parameter group settings for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 Step 1 Default Off 3000 Unit A Description Operation Off / On IBase value for current level detectors Block of the function at high phase current, in % of IBase Minimum operate current differential level in % of IBase

Ip>Block

5 - 500

150

%IB

IMinOp

5 - 200

20

%IB

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

405

Section 10 Secondary system supervision 10.1.6 Technical data

Table 222:
Function Operate current Block current

Current circuit supervision (RDIF)

Range or value (5-200)% of Ir (5-500)% of Ir Accuracy 10.0% of Ir at I Ir 10.0% of I at I > Ir 5.0% of Ir at I Ir 5.0% of I at I > Ir

10.2

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Function block name: FSDxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SDDRFUF IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

10.2.1

Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FSD) is to block voltage measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might occur. The fuse failure supervision function basically has two different algorithms, negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm and an additional delta voltage and delta current algorithm. The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2. The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities, a high value of voltage 3U0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0. A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations. For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation

406

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

modes makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the negative sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.

10.2.2
10.2.2.1

Principle of operation
Zero sequence
The function can be set in five different modes by setting the parameter OpMode. The zero sequence function continuously measure the internal currents and voltages in all three phases and calculate: the zero-sequence voltage 3U0 the zero-sequence current 3I0.

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0< and 3I0>. The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured zero sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0>, the measured zero sequence current is below the set value 3I0< and the operation mode selector (OpMode is set to 2 (zero sequence mode). This will activate the output signal BLKU, intended to block voltage related protection functions in the IED. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activaded at the same time. If the fuseFailDetected signal is present for more than 5 seconds at the same time as all phase voltages are below the set value UPh> and the setting parameter ISealIn is set to On, the function will activate the output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ. The same signals will aslo be activated if all phase voltages are below the value UPh>, SealIn=On and any of the phase voltages below the setting value for more than 5 seconds. It is recommended to always set SealIn to On since this will secure that no unwanted operation of fuse failure will occur at closing command of breaker when the line is already energized from the other end. The system voltages shall be normal before fuse failure is allowed to be activated and initiate block of different protection functions. The output signal BLKU can also be activated if no phase voltages is below the setting UPh> for more than 60 seconds at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the set value 3U0> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated). This condition covers for fuse failure at open breaker position. Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

407

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED. In the new start-up procedure the IED checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and establishes the corresponding starting conditions.
TEST
TEST ACTIVE BlocFuse = Yes AND

BLOCK BLKTRIP fufailStarted AND

OR

OR All UL less than Uph> AND 3PH

SealIn = On AND 5s t

AND

Any UL less than Uph> Fuse fail detected (3U0 high and 3I0 low for t>3 ms)

OR

fuseFaildetected AND OR AND BLKU

OpMode = 2 setLatch U I deadLineCondition 200 ms t AND OR AND BLKZ

MCBOP

150 ms t 60 sec t AND UN > 3U0> for t>5 s All IL < IDLD< AND

All UL> UPh>

CBCLOSED DISCPOS

en06000394.vsd

Figure 192:

Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, zero sequence based

408

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions: The input BLOCK is activated The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal fufailStarted is not present The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off. The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs. The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate. The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-off time delay. The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker. The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause maloperation of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated. The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions (undervoltage protection, synchro-check etc.) except for the impedance protection. The function output BLKZ can be used for blocking the impedance protection function.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

409

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

The BLKZ will only be activated if not the internal dead line detection is activated at the same time. The fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored. When the output 3PH is activated, all three voltage are low.

10.2.2.2

Negative sequence
The negative sequence operates in the same way as the zero sequence, but it calculates the negative sequence component of current and voltage. the negative sequence current 3I2 the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2>, the measured negative sequence current is below the value 3I2< and the operation mode selector (OpMode) is set to 1 (negative sequence mode).

10.2.2.3

du/dt and di/dt

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OperationDUDI to On. When it is selected On it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithm. The current and voltage is continuously measured in all three phases and the following quantities are calculated: The change of voltage DU/Dt The change of current DI/Dt

The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and DU>. The delta current and delta voltage algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient negative change in voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in current amplitude is detected in each phase separately. This check is performed if the circuit breaker is closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is brought to the function input CBCLOSED through a binary input of the IED. There are two conditions for activating the internal STDU signal and set the latch:

410

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

The magnitude of U is higher than the corresponding setting DU> and I is below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = 1) The magnitude U is higher than the setting DU> and the magnitude of I is below the setting DI> in any phase at the same time as the magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting IPh>.

The first criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to bee an important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only the second criterion can activate the delta function. The second criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high current for the same phase will set the latch. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur. To prevent that the phase current criterion is introduced. If the signal setLatchUI is set (see figure 192) and if all measured voltages are low (lower than the setting UPh>) the output 3PH will be activated indicating fuse failure in all three phases. The output BLKU and BLKZ will be activated as well. If the signal setLatchUI is activated but not all three phases are below the setting UPh> only BLKU will be activated. The BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activated.

10.2.2.4

Operation modes
The fuse failure supervision function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to On or Off.

Negative and zero sequence algorithm

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode selector, OperationMode has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithm. The different operation modes are: OpMode = 0, the negative and zero sequence function is switched off OpMode = 1; Negative sequence is selected OpMode = 2; Zero sequence is selected

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

411

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

OMode = 3; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel in an OR-condition OpMode = 4; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series (AND-condition for operation) OpMode = 5; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).

du/dt and di/dt algorithm

The DU and DI function can be switched on or off by the setting parameter OpDUDI to On or Off.

10.2.2.5

Dead line detection

The function input signal deadLineCondition (see figure 192) is related to the internal dead line detection function. This signal is activated from the dead line condition function when the voltage and the current in at least one phase is below their respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. It prevents the blocking of the impedance protection by a fuse failure detection during dead line condition (that occurs also during single pole auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line condition after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of the impedance protection for unequal pole closing.

10.2.3

Function block
FSD1SDDRFUF I3P U3P BLOCK CBCLOSED MCBOP DISCPOS BLKTRIP BLKZ BLKU 3PH DLD1PH DLD3PH

en05000700.vsd

Figure 193:

FSD function block

10.2.4

Input and output signals

Table 223:
Signal I3P U3P BLOCK CBCLOSED Table continued on next page

Input signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block

Description Current connection Voltage connection Block of function Active when circuit breaker is closed

412

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

Signal MCBOP DISCPOS BLKTRIP Description Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit Active when line disconnector is open Blocks operation of function when active

Table 224:
Signal BLKZ BLKU 3PH DLD1PH DLD3PH

Output signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block

Description Start of current and voltage controlled function General start of function Three-phase start of function Dead line condition in at least one phase Dead line condition in all three phases

10.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 225:
Parameter Operation IBase UBase OpMode

Basic parameter group settings for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function

Range Off On 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 Off UNsINs UZsIZs UZsIZs OR UNsINs UZsIZs AND UNsINs OptimZsNs 1 - 100 Step 1 0.05 Default On 3000 400.00 UZsIZs Unit A kV Description Operation Off / On Base current Base voltage Operating mode selection

3U0>

30

%UB

Operate level of residual overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of residual undercurrent element in % of IBase Operate level of neg seq overvoltage element in % of UBase Operate level of neg seq undercurrent element in % of IBase Operation of change based function Off/On

3I0<

1 - 100

10

%IB

3U2>

1 - 100

30

%UB

3I2<

1 - 100

10

%IB

OpDUDI

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

413

Section 10 Secondary system supervision

Parameter DU> Range 1 - 100 Step 1 Default 60 Unit %UB Description Operate level of change in phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of change in phase current in % of IBase Operate level of phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level of phase current in % of IBase Seal in functionality Off/On Operate level of sealin phase voltage in % of UBase Operate level for open phase current detection in % of IBase Operate level for open phase voltage detection in % of UBase

DI<

1 - 100

15

%IB

UPh>

1 - 100

70

%UB

IPh>

1 - 100

10

%IB

SealIn USealln<

Off On 1 - 100

On 70

%UB

IDLD<

1 - 100

%IB

UDLD<

1 - 100

60

%UB

10.2.6

Technical data
Table 226:
Function Operate voltage, zero sequence Operate current, zero sequence Operate voltage, negative sequence Operate current, negative sequence Operate voltage change level Operate current change level

Fuse failure supervision (RFUF)

Range or value (1-100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase (1100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase (1100)% of Ubase (1100)% of Ibase Accuracy 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ir 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ir 5.0% of Ur 5.0% of Ir

414

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

Section 11 Control
About this chapter
This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

11.1

Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Function block name: SYNxANSI number: 25 IEC 61850 logical node name: SESRSYN IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

sc/vc

11.1.1

Introduction
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct moment including the breaker closing time. The systems can thus be reconnected after an auto-reclose or manual closing which improves the network stability. The synchrocheck function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely. The function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and one- and a half or ring busbar arrangements. Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can have different settings. For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. It is used for slip frequencies that are larger than those for synchrocheck and lower than a set maximum level for the synchronizing function.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

415

Section 11 Control 11.1.2

11.1.2.1

Principle of operation
Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are simultaneously within their set limits. The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is only given when the actual measured quantities match the set conditions. The synchronizing measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and it also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is only given when all measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit. For single circuit breaker and 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, the SYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers The internal logic for each function block as well as the Input and Outputs and the setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For application related information, please refer to the Application manual.

11.1.2.2

Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the Synchrocheck function components such as Synchronism check, Energizing check and Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchronism check

The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for the Synchrocheck function for evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start. The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.

416

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiff, PhaseDiff and UDiff. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages on the Bus and Line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values. The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value. Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and used for the Manual closing and Auto-Reclose functions respectively as required. The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete Synchrocheck function and block of the Synchronism check function respectively. TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output Two outputs MANSYOK resp. AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANSYOK conditions and for AUTOSYOK. A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions. UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFM/A, PHDIFFM/A shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference conditions are met.

Synchronizing

When the function is set to OperationSynch=On the measuring will be performed. The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch which is a supervision that the voltages are both live. If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, rate of change of frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiffMax, FreqDiffMin and UDiffSynch. Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function reset. The function will also reset if the syncronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This will then prevent that the functions is by mistake maintained in operation a long time waiting for conditions to be fulfilled. The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete function resp. of the Synchronizing part.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

417

Section 11 Control

SYN1 OPERATION SYNCH OFF ON TEST MODE OFF ON

STARTSYN
AND

BLKSYNCH OR

S R

AND

SYNPROGR

UDiffSynch
50 ms

UHighBusSynch UHighLineSynch FreqDiffMax FreqDiffMin

AND

AND

SYNOK

OR AND OR

TSTSYNOK

FreqRateChange fBus&fLine 5 Hz PhaseDiff < 15 deg PhaseDiff=closing angle

AND

AND

tClose Pulse

tMax Synch

SYNFAIL

en06000636.vsd

Figure 194:

Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

Energizing check

Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by the Synchrocheck function. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-neutral, (or the opposite) this needs to be compensated. This is done with a setting, which scales the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage. The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighBusEnergand ULowBusEnerg for line energizing. The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and shall not exceed a set value. The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for MANENOK conditions and for AUTOENOK. The Energizing direction can also be 418 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 11 Control

selected by an integer input AENMODE resp MENMODE, which e.g. can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block BI 16 (BAxx or BBxx). Integers supplied shall be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with connection of INTZERO output from Fixed Signals function block will mean that the setting is done from PST tool. The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both. The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete Synchrocheck function resp. block of the Energizing check function. TSTENOK will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate test output.
Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.

OperationSC = On
AND AND

TSTAUTOSY

TSTSC BLKSC BLOCK

OR AND AND 0-60 s t tSCA AND

AUTOSYOK

UDiffSC
AND

50 ms t

UHighBusSC UHighLineSC
AND 1

UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA UDIFFME FRDIFFME

FreqDiffA PhaseDiffA voltageDifferenceValue frequencyDifferenceValue phaseAngleDifferenceValue

1 1

PHDIFFME

en07000114.vsd

Figure 195:

Simplified logic diagram for the Synchrocheck function

Voltage selection

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the Synchrocheck function and determines the parameters fed to the Synchronism check and Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and fuse supervision.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

419

Section 11 Control

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig. The different alternatives are described below. If NoVoltageSel is set the default voltages used will be ULine1 and UBus1. This is also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must also be connected. The voltage selection function selected voltages and fuse conditions are the Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs. For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but it is of course also possible to use an inverter for one of the positions.

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of the Synchrocheck functions in the terminal. Alternatively the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty. The SYN1(2)-UB1/2OK and SYN1(2)-UB1/2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the SYN1(2)-ULN1/2OK and SYN1(2)-ULN1/2FF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary inputs or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check functions are blocked. The synchronism check requires full voltage on both sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of fuse failures.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 2 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 1 is opened the bus 2 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 1 voltage. The Outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage. The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1. UB2OK-UB2FF supervises the fuse for Bus 2 and ULNOK-ULNFF supervises the fuse for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 196.

420

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD

AND AND

B1SEL B2SEL

1
AND

invalidSelection busVoltage

bus1Voltage bus2Voltage

UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF

OR

AND OR AND AND AND

selectedFuseOK USELFAIL

OR

OR

BLOCK

en05000779.vsd

Figure 196:

Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with 1 breaker schemes two Synchrocheck functions must be used in the IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breakers is described. This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the Synchrocheck (Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement. Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD, LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The Outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage. The fuse supervision is connected to ULNOK-ULNFF etc. and with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available for each of fuse (MCB). The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

421

Section 11 Control

The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed. The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit breaker is closed. The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed. The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 Circuit breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in 197 and for the tie circuit breaker in 198

422

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD B1QOPEN B1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD

AND AND AND AND AND OR AND AND

LN1SEL

LN2SEL B2SEL invalidSelection

line1Voltage line2Voltage bus2Voltage UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF

OR OR OR AND AND

lineVoltage

selectedFuseOK USELFAIL

OR

AND

AND

ULN2OK ULN2FF BLOCK

OR

AND

en05000780.vsd

Figure 197:

Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2 breaker arrangement.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

423

Section 11 Control

LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD
AND

LN1SEL 1 B1SEL
AND

B1QOPEN B1QCLD
AND

AND

line1Voltage bus1Voltage LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD

AND

busVoltage

LN2SEL 1 B2SEL
AND OR

B2QOPEN B2QCLD
AND

invalidSelection

AND

line2Voltage bus2Voltage UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF BLOCK

lineVoltage

OR

AND OR AND

OR

AND

selectedFuseOK USELFAIL

OR

AND

AND

OR

AND

en05000781.vsd

Figure 198:

Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement.

11.1.3

Function block
The Synchrocheck function block is shown in 199. Tables describing the inputs, outputs and setting parameters of this function are presented in the following sections of this document. Refer to the Application manual for the use of inputs and outputs in your particular application.

424

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

SYN1SESRSYN_25 U3PBB1 U3PBB2 U3PLN1 U3PLN2 BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD LN1QOPEN LN1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK MANSYOK MANENOK TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY TSTENOK USELFAIL B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL SYNPROGR SYNFAIL UOKSYN UDIFFSYN FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM UDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN en06000534.vsd

Figure 199:

SYN function block

11.1.4

Input and output signals

Table 227:
Signal U3PBB1 U3PBB2 U3PLN1 U3PLN2 BLOCK BLKSYNCH BLKSC BLKENERG B1QOPEN B1QCLD B2QOPEN B2QCLD LN1QOPEN Table continued on next page

Input signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block

Description Group signal for voltage input busbar 1 Group signal for voltage input busbar 2 Group signal for voltage input line 1 Group signal for voltage input line 2 General block Block synchronizing Block synchro check Block energizing check Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

425

Section 11 Control
Signal LN1QCLD LN2QOPEN LN2QCLD UB1OK UB1FF UB2OK UB2FF ULN1OK ULN1FF ULN2OK ULN2FF STARTSYN TSTSYNCH TSTSC TSTENERG AENMODE MENMODE Description Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line1 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line2 Bus1 voltage transformer OK Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure Bus2 voltage transformer OK Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure Line1 voltage transformer OK Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure Line2 voltage transformer OK Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure Start synchronizing Set synchronizing in test mode Set synchro check in test mode Set energizing check in test mode Input for setting of automatic energizing mode Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 228:
Signal SYNOK AUTOSYOK AUTOENOK MANSYOK MANENOK TSTSYNOK TSTAUTSY TSTMANSY TSTENOK USELFAIL B1SEL B2SEL LN1SEL LN2SEL SYNPROGR SYNFAIL UOKSYN UDIFFSYN

Output signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block

Description Synchronizing OK output Auto synchro check OK Automatic energizing check OK Manual synchro check OK Manual energizing check OK Synchronizing OK test output Auto synchro check OK test output Manual synchro check OK test output Energizing check OK test output Selected voltage transformer fuse failed Bus1 selected Bus2 selected Line1 selected Line2 selected Synchronizing in progress Synchronizing failed Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing

Table continued on next page

426

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal FRDIFSYN FRDIFFOK FRDERIVA UOKSC UDIFFSC FRDIFFA PHDIFFA FRDIFFM PHDIFFM UDIFFME FRDIFFME PHDIFFME MODEAEN MODEMEN Description Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing Frequency difference in band for synchronizing Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing Voltage amplitudes above set limits Voltage difference out of limit Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation Calculated difference in voltage Calculated difference in frequency Calculated difference of phase angle Selected mode for automatic energizing Selected mode for manual energizing

11.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 229:
Parameter Operation SelPhaseBus1

Basic parameter group settings for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function

Range Off On phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 phase1 phase2 phase3 phase1-phase2 phase2-phase3 phase3-phase1 Step Default Off phase2 Unit Description Operation Off / On Select phase for bus1

SelPhaseBus2

phase2

Select phase for bus2

SelPhaseLine1

phase2

Select phase for line1

SelPhaseLine2

phase2

Select phase for line2

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

427

Section 11 Control
Parameter CBConfig Range No voltage sel. Double bus 1 1/2 bus CB 1 1/2 bus alt. CB Tie CB 0.001 - 9999.999 -180 - 180 1.000 Off On 50.0 - 120.0 Step Default No voltage sel. Unit Description Select CB configuration

UBase PhaseShift URatio OperationSynch

0.001 5 0.001 -

400.000 0 0.040 - 25.000 Off

kV Deg -

Base voltage in kV Phase shift Voltage ratio Operation for synchronizing function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for synchronizing in % of UBase Voltage difference limit for synchronizing in % of UBase Minimum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum frequency difference limit for synchronizing Maximum allowed frequency rate of change Closing time of the breaker Breaker closing pulse duration Resets synch if no close has been made before set time Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions Operation for synchronism check function Off/On Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of UBase Voltage difference limit in % of UBase

UHighBusSynch

1.0

80.0

%UB

UHighLineSynch

50.0 - 120.0

1.0

80.0

%UB

UDiffSynch

2.0 - 50.0

1.0

10.0

%UB

FreqDiffMin

0.003 - 0.250

0.001

0.010

Hz

FreqDiffMax

0.050 - 0.250

0.001

0.200

Hz

FreqRateChange

0.000 - 0.500

0.001

0.300

Hz/s

tBreaker tClosePulse tMaxSynch

0.000 - 60.000 0.050 - 60.000 0.00 - 6000.00

0.001 0.001 0.01

0.080 0.200 600.00

s s s

tMinSynch

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

OperationSC

Off On 50.0 - 120.0

On

UHighBusSC

1.0

80.0

%UB

UHighLineSC

50.0 - 120.0

1.0

80.0

%UB

UDiffSC

2.0 - 50.0

1.0

15.0

%UB

Table continued on next page

428

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Parameter FreqDiffA Range 0.003 - 1.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.010 Unit Hz Description Frequency difference limit between bus and line Auto Frequency difference limit between bus and line Manual Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Auto Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Manual Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto Time delay output for synchrocheck Manual Automatic energizing check mode

FreqDiffM

0.003 - 1.000

0.001

0.010

Hz

PhaseDiffA

5.0 - 90.0

1.0

25.0

Deg

PhaseDiffM

5.0 - 90.0

1.0

25.0

Deg

tSCA tSCM AutoEnerg

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Off DLLB DBLL Both Off DLLB DBLL Both Off On 50.0 - 120.0

0.001 0.001 -

0.100 0.100 DBLL

s s -

ManEnerg

Both

Manual energizing check mode

ManEnergDBDL UHighBusEnerg

1.0

Off 80.0

%UB

Manual dead bus, dead line energizing Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage high limit line for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in % of UBase Voltage low limit line for energizing check in % of UBase Maximum voltage for energizing in % of UBase Time delay for automatic energizing check Time delay for manual energizing check

UHighLineEnerg

50.0 - 120.0

1.0

80.0

%UB

ULowBusEnerg

10.0 - 80.0

1.0

40.0

%UB

ULowLineEnerg

10.0 - 80.0

1.0

40.0

%UB

UMaxEnerg

50.0 - 180.0

1.0

115.0

%UB

tAutoEnerg

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

tManEnerg

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

11.1.6

Technical data

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

429

Section 11 Control

Table 230:
Function

Synchronizing, synchrocheck check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)

Range or value (-180 to 180) degrees (0.20-5.00)% of Ubase (50.0-120.0)% of Ubase > 95% (0.003-1.000) Hz (5.0-90.0) degrees (2.0-50.0)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s (50.0-120.0)% of Ubase > 95% (10.0-80.0)% of Ubase < 105% (80.0-140.0)% of Ubase (0.000-60.000) s 160 ms typically 80 ms typically Accuracy 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U >Ur 2.0 mHz 2.0 degrees 1.0% of Ur 0.5% 10 ms 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U >Ur 1.0% of Ur 1.0% of Ur at U Ur 1.0% of U at U >Ur 0.5% 10 ms -

Phase shift, jline - jbus Voltage ratio, Ubus/Uline Voltage high limit for synchrocheck Reset ratio, synchrocheck Frequency difference limit between bus and line Phase angle difference limit between bus and line Voltage difference limit between bus and line Time delay output for synchrocheck Voltage high limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage high limit Voltage low limit for energizing check Reset ratio, voltage low limit Maximum voltage for energizing Time delay for energizing check Operate time for synchrocheck function Operate time for energizing function

11.2
11.2.1

Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Introduction
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications. Up to five reclosing attempts can be programmed. The first attempt can be single-, two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively. Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if the fault proved to be transient. Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchrocheck function.

430

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

11.3
11.3.1

Apparatus control (APC)

Introduction
The apparatus control is a function for control and supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

11.3.2
11.3.2.1

Bay control (QCBAY)

Introduction
This function is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. The bay control function also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.

11.3.2.2

Function block
CB01QCBAY LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD

en05000796.vsd

Figure 200:

CB function block

11.3.2.3

Input and output signals

Table 231:
Signal LR_OFF LR_LOC LR_REM LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD

Input signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block

Description External Local/Remote switch is in Off position External Local/Remote switch is in Local position External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position Data representing the L/R switch position is valid Steady signal to block the position updates Steady signal to block the command

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

431

Section 11 Control

Table 232:
Signal PSTO UPD_BLKD CMD_BLKD

Output signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block

Description The value for the operator place allocation The update of position is blocked The function is blocked for commands

11.3.2.4

Setting parameters
Table 233:
Parameter AllPSTOValid

General settings for the QCBAY (CB01-) function

Range Priority No priority Step Default Priority Unit Description The priority of originators

11.3.3
11.3.3.1

Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)

Introduction
The signals from the local LCD HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl to the Bay control QCBAY function block. A parameter in function block LocalRemote is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local LCD HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

11.3.3.2

Principle of operation
The function block LocalRemote handles the signals coming from the local/remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 201, where the inputs on function block LocalRemote are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When a local LCD HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the configuration. The outputs from the LocalRemote function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on QCBAY.

432

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

LR01LocalRemote CTRLOFF OFF LOCCTRL LOCAL REMCTRL REMOTE LHMICTRL VALID

CB01QCBAY LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD CB02QCBAY LR_OFF PSTO LR_LOC UPD_BLKD LR_REM CMD_BLKD LR_VALID BL_UPD BL_CMD

LR02LocalRemote CTRLOFF OFF LOCCTRL LOCAL REMCTRL REMOTE LHMICTRL VALID

LRC1LocRemControl PSTO1 HMICTR1 PSTO2 HMICTR2 PSTO3 HMICTR3 PSTO4 HMICTR4 PSTO5 HMICTR5 PSTO6 HMICTR6 PSTO7 HMICTR7 PSTO8 HMICTR8 PSTO9 HMICTR9 PSTO10 HMICTR10 PSTO11 HMICTR11 PSTO12 HMICTR12 en05000250.vsd

Figure 201:

Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local LCD HMI with two bays and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be different for the included bays. When the local LCD HMI is used the position of the local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block LocRemControl controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and screen page. The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT.

11.3.3.3

Function block

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

433

Section 11 Control

LR01LocalRemote CT RLOFF OFF LOCCT RL LOCAL REMCT RL REMOT E LHMICT RL VALID en05000360.vsd

Figure 202:

LR function block

LRC1LocRemControl PST O1 HMICT R1 PST O2 HMICT R2 PST O3 HMICT R3 PST O4 HMICT R4 PST O5 HMICT R5 PST O6 HMICT R6 PST O7 HMICT R7 PST O8 HMICT R8 PST O9 HMICT R9 PST O10 HMICT R10 PST O11 HMICT R11 PST O12 HMICT R12 en05000361.vsd

Figure 203:

LRC function block

11.3.3.4

Input and output signals

Table 234:
Signal CTRLOFF LOCCTRL REMCTRL LHMICTRL

Input signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block

Description Disable control Local in control Remote in control LHMI control

Table 235:
Signal OFF LOCAL REMOTE VALID

Output signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block

Description Control is disabled Local control is activated Remote control is activated Outputs are valid

434

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

Table 236:
Signal PSTO1 PSTO2 PSTO3 PSTO4 PSTO5 PSTO6 PSTO7 PSTO8 PSTO9 PSTO10 PSTO11 PSTO12

Input signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block

Description PSTO input channel 1 PSTO input channel 2 PSTO input channel 3 PSTO input channel 4 PSTO input channel 5 PSTO input channel 6 PSTO input channel 7 PSTO input channel 8 PSTO input channel 9 PSTO input channel 10 PSTO input channel 11 PSTO input channel 12

Table 237:
Signal HMICTR1 HMICTR2 HMICTR3 HMICTR4 HMICTR5 HMICTR6 HMICTR7 HMICTR8 HMICTR9 HMICTR10 HMICTR11 HMICTR12

Output signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block

Description Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

11.3.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 238:
Parameter ControlMode

Basic general settings for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function

Range Internal LR-switch External LRswitch Step Default Internal LR-switch Unit Description Control mode for internal/external LRswitch

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

435

Section 11 Control 11.3.4

11.3.4.1

Switch controller (SCSWI)

Introduction
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase switching devices.

11.3.4.2

Principle of operation
The function is provided with verification checks for the select - execute sequence, i.e. checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.

Command handling

Two types of command models can be used. The two command models are "direct with enhanced security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". Which one of these two command models that are used is defined by the parameter CtlModel. The meaning with "direct with enhanced security" model is that no select is required. The meaning with "SBO with enhanced security" model is that a select is required before execute. In this function only commands with enhanced security is supported regarding changing of the position. With enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable "cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC61850 communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and used for example at commissioning. The meaning of the cause signals can be found in table 2. There is not any relation between the command direction and the actual position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to execute a close command. Before an executing command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no executing command is send. If the parameter is false the execution command is send independent of the position value.

Evaluation of position

In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the

436

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the onephase switches, following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position: All switches in close position: One switch =open, two switches= close (or inversely): Any switch in intermediate position: Any switch in bad state: switch control position = open switch control position = close switch control position = intermediate switch control position = intermediate switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase. In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, i.e. the position of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set. In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the switch modules XCBR/XSWI. At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the IEC61850 communication from the operator place. The different blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible. The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function, i.e. no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Interaction with synchrochecksynchronism-check and synchronizing functions

The switch controller works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the synchronizing function SECRSYN. It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 437

Section 11 Control

continuously in operation and gives the result to the SCSWI. The result from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the switch controller SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function SXCBR. When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the SCSWI will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to the SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see figure 204. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing function. The SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-bysynchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 208.
SCSWI EXE_CL OR SXCBR CLOSE

SYNC_OK START_SY SY_INPRO SECRSYN . CB CLOSE Synchro Check Synchronizing function

en05000091.vsd

Figure 204:

Example of interaction between SCSWI, SECRSYN (synchrocheck and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams

The SCSWI function has timers for evaluating different time supervision conditions. These timers are explained here. The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command signal, i.e. the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the object to operate.

438

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

select execute command tSelect timer t1 t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause' is set
en05000092.vsd

Figure 205:

tSelect

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the reservation, i.e. the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
select reservation request RES_RQ reservation granted RES_GRT command termination tResResponse timer t1 t1>tResResponse, then 1-of-n-control in 'cause' is set
en05000093.vsd

Figure 206:

tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command termination, see figure 207.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

439

Section 11 Control

execute command position L1 open close position L2 open close position L3 open close cmd termination L1 cmd termination L2 cmd termination L3 cmd termination position open close tExecutionFB timer t1>tExecutionFB, then long-operation-time in 'cause' is set *

t1

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094.vsd

Figure 207:

tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled.
execute command SYNC_OK tSynchrocheck START_SY SY_INPRO tSynchronizing t2 t2>tSynchronizing, then blocked-by-synchrocheck in 'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd

t1

Figure 208:

tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

440

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Error handling

Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 239 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 239:
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35

Values for "cause" signal in priority order

Description wrongCTLModel blockedForCommand blocked-for-open-command blocked-for-close-command longOperationTime switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position

11.3.4.3

Function block
CS01SCSWI BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3 EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT

en05000337.vsd

Figure 209:

CS function block

11.3.4.4

Input and output signals

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

441

Section 11 Control

Table 240:
Signal BLOCK PSTO L_SEL L_OPEN L_CLOSE AU_OPEN AU_CLOSE BL_CMD RES_GRT RES_EXT SY_INPRO SYNC_OK EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE XPOS1 XPOS2 XPOS3

Input signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block

Description Block of function Operator place selection Select signal from local panel Open signal from local panel Close signal from local panel Used for local automation function Used for local automation function Steady signal for block of the command Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made Reservation is made externally Synchronizing function in progress Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck Enables open operation Enables close operation Group signal for XCBR input Group signal for XCBR input Group signal for XCBR input

Table 241:
Signal EXE_OP EXE_CL SELECTED RES_RQ START_SY POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS POLEDISC CMD_BLK L_CAUSE XOUT

Output signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block

Description Execute command for open direction Execute command for close direction The select conditions are fulfilled Request signal to the reservation function Starts the synchronizing function Position indication Open position indication Closed position indication The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time Commands are blocked Latest value of the error indication during command Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

11.3.4.5

Setting parameters

442

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

Table 242:
Parameter CtlModel

Basic general settings for the SCSWI (CS01-) function

Range Dir Norm SBO Enh (ABB) Dir Norm (ABB) SBO Enh Always permitted Not perm at 00/11 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default SBO Enh Unit Description Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850 Permission to operate depending on the position Max time between select and execute signals Allowed time from reservation request to reservation granted Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil close conditions Supervision time to get the signal synchronizing in progress Max time from command execution to termination Allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles

PosDependent

Always permitted

tSelect

0.001

30.000

tResResponse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

tSynchrocheck

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

10.00

tSynchronizing

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

tExecutionFB

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

30.000

tPoleDiscord

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

11.3.5
11.3.5.1

Circuit breaker (SXCBR)

Introduction
The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

11.3.5.2

Principle of operation
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

443

Section 11 Control

The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place. One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/ remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 210.
Local= Operation at switch yard level

Local/Remote switch

TR

UE

From I/O

switchLR
FAL SE

Remote= Operation at IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd

Figure 210:

Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles

The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure etc. The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

444

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Substitution

The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process. It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 211 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
EXE_CL Close pulse duration AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Time diagrams

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

tStartMove timer t1 tStartMove

if t1 > tStartMove then "switch-not-start-moving" attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate timer t2 tIntermediate

if t2 > tIntermediate then "persisting-intermediate-state" attribute in 'cause' is set

en05000097.vsd

Figure 211:

The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 212 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

445

Section 11 Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000098.vsd

Figure 212:

Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when: the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has elapsed. If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has elapsed. There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 213 .

446

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP tOpenPulse EXE_OP tOpenPulse tStartMove timer

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000099.vsd

Figure 213:

Open command with open position indication

Error handling

Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 243 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 243:
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35

Vendor specific cause values for Apparatus control in priority order

Description wrongCTLModel blockedForCommand blocked-for-open-command blocked-for-close-command longOperationTime switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

447

Section 11 Control
11.3.5.3 Function block
XC01SXCBR GRPConABS1 EXE_OP GRPConABS2 EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE

BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN TERVALUE OSEVALUE PENVALUE

en05000338.vsd

Figure 214:

XC function block

11.3.5.4

Input and output signals

Table 244:
Signal BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE TR_OPEN TR_CLOSE RS_CNT XIN

Input signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block

Description Block of function Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch Signal to block the open command Signal to block the close command Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Signal for open position of truck from I/O Signal for close position of truck from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI

Table 245:
Signal XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL

Output signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block

Description Group signal for XCBR output Executes the command for open direction Executes the command for close direction

Table continued on next page

448

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS TR_POS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE Description Indication that the position is substituted Indication that the function is blocked for open commands Indication that the function is blocked for close commands The update of position indication is blocked Apparatus position indication Apparatus open position Apparatus closed position Truck position indication The value of the operation counter Latest value of the error indication during command

11.3.5.5

Setting parameters
Table 246:
Parameter tStartMove

Basic general settings for the SXCBR (XC01-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.100 Unit s Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position The output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command

tIntermediate AdaptivePulse

0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive

0.001 -

0.150 Not adaptive

s -

tOpenPulse tClosePulse

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000

0.001 0.001

0.200 0.200

s s

11.3.6
11.3.6.1

Circuit switch (SXSWI)

Introduction
The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

11.3.6.2

Principle of operation
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or a 61850 client residing in another IED

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

449

Section 11 Control

or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value. The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or remotely from the operator place. One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/ remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 215.
Local= Operation at switch yard level

Local/Remote switch

TR

UE

From I/O

switchLR
FAL SE

Remote= Operation at IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd

Figure 215:

Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles

The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place, protection functions, autoreclosure etc. The blocking possibilities are: Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command. Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command. Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other signals related to the position will be reset. Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible. REG 670

450

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 11 Control

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution

The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process. It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 216 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
EXE_CL Close pulse duration AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Time diagrams

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

tStartMove timer t1 tStartMove

if t1 > tStartMove then "switch-not-start-moving" attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate timer t2 tIntermediate

if t2 > tIntermediate then "persisting-intermediate-state" attribute in 'cause' is set

en05000097.vsd

Figure 216:

The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 217 shows the principle of

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

451

Section 11 Control

the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000098.vsd

Figure 217:

Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse. The execute output pulses are reset when: the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to true the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has elapsed. If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only when timer "tOpenPulse" or "tClosePulse" has elapsed. There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed. An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in figure 218.

452

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP tOpenPulse EXE_OP tOpenPulse tStartMove timer

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

en05000099.vsd

Figure 218:

Open command with open position indication

Error handling

Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a value. Table 247 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 247:
Apparatus control function 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35

Values for "cause" signal in priority order

Description wrongCTLModel blockedForCommand blocked-for-open-command blocked-for-close-command longOperationTime switch-not-start-moving persistent-intermediate-state switch-returned-to-initial-position switch-in-bad-state not-expected-final-position

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

453

Section 11 Control
11.3.6.3 Function block
XS01SXSWI BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE en05000339.vsd

Figure 219:

XS function block

11.3.6.4

Input and output signals

Table 248:
Signal BLOCK LR_SWI OPEN CLOSE BL_OPEN BL_CLOSE BL_UPD POSOPEN POSCLOSE RS_CNT XIN

Input signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block

Description Block of function Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch Signal to block the open command Signal to block the close command Steady signal for block of the position updating Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O Resets the operation counter Execution information from CSWI

Table 249:
Signal XPOS EXE_OP EXE_CL SUBSTED OP_BLKD CL_BLKD UPD_BLKD

Output signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block

Description Group signal for XSWI output Executes the command for open direction Executes the command for close direction Indication that the position is substituted Indication that the function is blocked for open commands Indication that the function is blocked for close commands The update of position indication is blocked

Table continued on next page

454

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal POSITION OPENPOS CLOSEPOS CNT_VAL L_CAUSE Description Apparatus position indication Apparatus open position Apparatus closed position The value of the operation counter Latest value of the error indication during command

11.3.6.5

Setting parameters
Table 250:
Parameter tStartMove

Basic general settings for the SXSWI (XS01-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 3.000 Unit s Description Supervision time for the apparatus to move after a command Allowed time for intermediate position The output resets when a new correct end position is reached Output pulse length for open command Output pulse length for close command Switch Type

tIntermediate AdaptivePulse

0.000 - 60.000 Not adaptive Adaptive

0.001 -

15.000 Not adaptive

s -

tOpenPulse tClosePulse SwitchType

0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Load Break Disconnector Earthing Switch HS Earthing Switch

0.001 0.001 -

0.200 0.200 Disconnector

s s -

11.3.7
11.3.7.1

Bay reserve (QCRSV)

Introduction
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or complete substation.

11.3.7.2

Principle of operation
The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. The function starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller SCWI. The signals for

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

455

Section 11 Control

request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV. The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED. If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by activating the output RES_BAYS. When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI (tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-ncontrol" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

Blocking and overriding of reservation

If the function QCRSV is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent operations from another operator place at the same time. The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE input signal, i.e. reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge. 456 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 11 Control
Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay i.e. use of up to eight apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE. If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional QCRSV. The both functions QCRSV have to communicate and this is done through the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 10. If more then one QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
CR01QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

CR02QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_GRT1 RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2 RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4 RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5 RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8 RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS BLK_RES ACK_TO_B OVERRIDE RESERVED RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

1 1 1

RES_BAYS

ACK_TO_B

RESERVED

en05000088.vsd

Figure 220:

Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

457

Section 11 Control
11.3.7.3 Function block
CR01QCRSV EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DAT A RES_GRT 1 RES_GRT 2 RES_GRT 3 RES_GRT 4 RES_GRT 5 RES_GRT 6 RES_GRT 7 RES_GRT 8 RES_BAYS ACK_T O_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT en05000340.vsd

Figure 221:

CR function block

11.3.7.4

Input and output signals

Table 251:
Signal EXCH_IN RES_RQ1 RES_RQ2 RES_RQ3 RES_RQ4 RES_RQ5 RES_RQ6 RES_RQ7 RES_RQ8 BLK_RES OVERRIDE RES_DATA

Input signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block

Description Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation Reservation is not possible and the output signals are reset Signal to override the reservation Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 252:
Signal RES_GRT1 RES_GRT2 RES_GRT3 RES_GRT4 RES_GRT5 RES_GRT6 RES_GRT7

Output signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block

Description Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to operate Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to operate

Table continued on next page

458

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal RES_GRT8 RES_BAYS ACK_TO_B RESERVED EXCH_OUT Description Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to operate Request for reservation of other bays Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved Indicates that the bay is reserved Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks

11.3.7.5

Setting parameters
Table 253:
Parameter tCancelRes

General settings for the QCRSV (CR01-) function

Range 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 Default 10.000 Unit s Description Supervision time for canceling the reservation Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 1 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 2 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 3 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 4 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 5 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 6 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 7 Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of apparatus 8

ParamRequest1

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest2

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest3

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest4

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest5

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest6

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest7

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

ParamRequest8

Other bays res. Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

459

Section 11 Control 11.3.8

11.3.8.1

Reservation input (RESIN)

Introduction
The function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances are available).

11.3.8.2

Principle of operation
The reservation input function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic diagram in figure 222 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.
EXCH_IN INT BIN

& FutureUse 1

ACK_F_B

BAY_ACK

ANY_ACK

& BAY_VAL 1

VALID_TX

RE_RQ_B

BAY_RES

& 1 V _RE_RQ

BIN INT

EXCH_OUT

en05000089.vsd

Figure 222:

Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 223 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions block are connected to the module QCRSV that handles the reservation function in the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the first RESIN module in the chain 460 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 11 Control

has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the function block RESIN (RE01-), where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden for the user.
RE01RESIN BAY_ACK ACK_F_B BAY_VAL ANY_ACK BAY_RES VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

Bay 1

Bay 2

RE02RESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT REnnRESIN EXCH_IN ACK_F_B BAY_ACK ANY_ACK BAY_VAL VALID_TX BAY_RES RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

Bay n

CR01QCRSV RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd

Figure 223:

Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

11.3.8.3

Function block
RE01RESIN BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT en05000341.vsd

Figure 224:

RE function block

11.3.8.4

Input and output signals

Table 254:
Signal BAY_ACK BAY_VAL BAY_RES

Input signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block

Description Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from this bay The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

461

Section 11 Control

Table 255:
Signal ACK_F_B ANY_ACK VALID_TX RE_RQ_B V_RE_RQ EXCH_OUT

Output signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block

Description All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays are valid Request from other bay to reserve this bay Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks

11.3.8.5

Setting parameters
Table 256:
Parameter FutureUse

Basic general settings for the RESIN (RE01-) function

Range Bay in use Bay future use Step Default Bay in use Unit Description The bay for this ResIn block is for future use

11.4
11.4.1

Interlocking
Introduction
The interlocking function blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury. Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each handling the interlocking of one bay. The function is distributed to each control IED and not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs. The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the installation at any given time.

11.4.2

Principle of operation
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus. The reservation function (see section "Apparatus control (APC)") is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the

462

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed. After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices that may affect it. The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking signals can include the following kind of information: Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase) Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module) External release (to add special conditions for release) Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch) Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown in figure 225.
Interlocking modules in other bays Apparatus control modules
SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

Interlocking module

Apparatus control modules

SCILO SCSWI SXCBR

Apparatus control modules

en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

Figure 225:

Interlocking module on bay level.

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the following: Unearthed busbars Busbars connected together Other bays connected to a busbar Received data from other bays is valid

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

463

Section 11 Control

Figure 226 illustrates the data exchange principle.

Station bus
Bay 1 Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Bay n Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Bus coupler WA1 unearthed WA1 unearthed WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

WA1 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn

... ..

WA1 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn

WA1 WA2 QB1 QB2 QA1 QB9 QB1 QB2 QA1 QB9
en05000494.vsd

QB1

QB2

QC1

QC2

QA1

Figure 226:

Data exchange between interlocking modules.

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control terminal, or input board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the function will not be given. On the station HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid. For all interlocking modules these general rules apply: The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and earthing switches are always identical. Earthing switches on the line feeder end, e.g. rapid earthing switches, are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating. Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections e.g. without load/ voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, i.e. the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the earthing switch operation is concerned. Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are earthed on both sides. Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing

464

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and transformer. Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions are available: Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B 1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customers specific requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM 600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions. The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

11.4.3
11.4.3.1

Logical node for interlocking (SCILO)

Introduction
The function SCILO is used to enable a switching operation if the interlocking conditions permit. The function itself does not provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

11.4.3.2

Principle of operation
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position e.g. open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/switch SXCBR/SXSWI and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller SCSWI. One instance per switching device is needed.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

465

Section 11 Control

POSOPEN POSCLOSE

SCILO =1
1 &

EN_OPEN >1

&

OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN
& &

>1

EN_CLOSE
en04000525.vsd

Figure 227:

SCILO function logic diagram

11.4.3.3

Function block
CI01SCILO POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE

en05000359.vsd

Figure 228:

CI function block

11.4.3.4

Input and output signals

Table 257:
Signal POSOPEN POSCLOSE OPEN_EN CLOSE_EN

Input signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block

Description Open position of switch device Closed position of switch device Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 258:
Signal EN_OPEN EN_CLOSE

Output signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block

Description Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled

466

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control 11.4.4

11.4.4.1

Interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE)

Introduction
The interlocking module ABC_LINE is used for a line connected to a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 229. The module can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB9 QC9 QB7

en04000478.vsd

Figure 229:

Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

467

Section 11 Control
11.4.4.2 Function block
IF01ABC_LINE QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLIT L QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9IT L QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1IT L QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2IT L QB7_OP QB7REL QB7_CL QB7IT L QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1IT L QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2IT L QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9IT L QC11_OP QB1OPT R QC11_CL QB1CLT R QC21_OP QB2OPT R QC21_CL QB2CLT R QC71_OP QB7OPT R QC71_CL QB7CLT R BB7_D_OP QB12OPT R BC_12_CL QB12CLT R BC_17_OP VPQB1T R BC_17_CL VPQB2T R BC_27_OP VPQB7T R BC_27_CL VPQB12T R VOLT _OFF VOLT _ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 en05000357.vsd

Figure 230:

IF function block

468

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
11.4.4.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC9 QC2_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX2 ABC_LINE =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & >1
1

VPQA1 VPQB9 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC9 VPQC11 VPQC21 VPQC71 VPVOLT QB9REL QB9ITL &
1

QA1CLREL QA1CLITL

&

en04000527.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

469

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1

&

1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

VPQB2 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2

&

VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1EX3

&

en04000528.vsd

470

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES

&

1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

QB2_EX1

VPQB1 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2

&

VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3

&

en04000529.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

471

Section 11 Control

VPQC9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 QC9_OP QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_OP BC_27_OP EXDU_BC QB7_EX1 VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_17 QA1_CL QB1_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_17_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX2

&

>1
1

QB7REL QB7ITL

&

472

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC71 VP_BB7_D VP_BC_27 QA1_CL QB2_CL QC9_OP QB9_CL QC71_OP EXDU_ES BB7_D_OP EXDU_BPB BC_27_CL EXDU_BC QB7_EX3 VPQC9 VPQC71 QC9_CL QC71_CL EXDU_ES QB7_EX4 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB9 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB9_OP VPQB7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB7_OP QB9_OP VOLT_OFF

&

>1

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

&
1

QC9REL QC9ITL

en04000531.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

473

Section 11 Control

QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB7_OP QB7_CL VPQB7 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 >1 &

QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR VPQB7TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR
en04000532.vsd

11.4.4.4

Input and output signals

Table 259:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP Table continued on next page

Input signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position

474

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal QC71_CL BB7_D_OP BC_12_CL BC_17_OP BC_17_CL BC_27_OP BC_27_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VP_BB7_D VP_BC_12 VP_BC_17 VP_BC_27 EXDU_ES EXDU_BPB EXDU_BC QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QB7_EX3 QB7_EX4 Description Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are open A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA7 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

475

Section 11 Control

Table 260:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB9REL QB9ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR

Output signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QB7 is allowed Switching of QB7 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

11.4.5
11.4.5.1

Interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC)

Introduction
The interlocking module ABC_BC is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 231. The module can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.

476

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) WA7 (C) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 QB20 QB7

QC2

en04000514.vsd

Figure 231:

Switchyard layout ABC_BC

11.4.5.2

Function block
IG01ABC_BC QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BBT R_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBT R VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_12 EXDU_BC QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 QA1OPREL QA1OPIT L QA1CLREL QA1CLIT L QB1REL QB1IT L QB2REL QB2IT L QB7REL QB7IT L QB20REL QB20IT L QC1REL QC1IT L QC2REL QC2IT L QB1OPT R QB1CLT R QB220OT R QB220CT R QB7OPT R QB7CLT R QB12OPT R QB12CLT R BC12OPT R BC12CLT R BC17OPT R BC17CLT R BC27OPT R BC27CLT R VPQB1T R VQB220T R VPQB7T R VPQB12T R VPBC12T R VPBC17T R VPBC27T R

en05000350.vsd

Figure 232:

IG function block

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

477

Section 11 Control
11.4.5.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB20 QB20_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB7 VPQB20 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL ABC_BC =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & & >1
1

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB20 VPQB7 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 VPQC21 VPQC71 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL

&

en04000533.vsd

478

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

&

en04000534.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

479

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

en04000535.vsd

480

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB20 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC71 QA1_OP QB20_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC71_OP EXDU_ES QB7_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC71 QC2_CL QC71_CL EXDU_ES QB7_EX2 VPQA1 VPQB7 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB7_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB20_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QC2_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB20_EX2

&

>1
1

QB7REL QB7ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB20REL QB20ITL

&

en04000536.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

481

Section 11 Control

VPQB1 VPQB20 VPQB7 VPQB2 QB1_OP QB20_OP QB7_OP QB2_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB20_OP QB2_OP VPQB20 VPQB2 QB7_OP QB7_CL VPQB7 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 QA1_OP QB1_OP QB20_OP VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB20 QA1_OP QB1_OP QB7_OP VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB7 QA1_OP QB2_OP QB7_OP VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQB7

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

& &

QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB220OTR QB220CTR VQB220TR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR VPQB7TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR VPBC12TR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR VPBC17TR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPBC27TR
en04000537.vsd

>1 & >1 & >1 & >1 &

11.4.5.4

Input and output signals

Table 261:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL Table continued on next page

Input signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position

482

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal QB2_OP QB2_CL QB7_OP QB7_CL QB20_OP QB20_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL QC71_OP QC71_CL BBTR_OP BC_12_CL VP_BBTR VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_12 EXDU_BC QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 QB20_EX1 QB20_EX2 QB7_EX1 QB7_EX2 Description QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB20 is in open position QB20 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2 busbars No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB20 External condition for apparatus QB20 External condition for apparatus QB7 External condition for apparatus QB7

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

483

Section 11 Control

Table 262:
Signal QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QB7REL QB7ITL QB20REL QB20ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB220OTR QB220CTR QB7OPTR QB7CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR BC12OPTR BC12CLTR BC17OPTR BC17CLTR BC27OPTR BC27CLTR VPQB1TR VQB220TR VPQB7TR VPQB12TR

Output signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block

Description Opening of QA1 is allowed Opening of QA1 is forbidden Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QB7 is allowed Switching of QB7 is forbidden Switching of QB20 is allowed Switching of QB20 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 and QB20 are in open position QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position QB7 is in open position QB7 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2 No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7 No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7 Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7 Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

Table continued on next page

484

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal VPBC12TR VPBC17TR VPBC27TR Description Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are valid Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are valid

11.4.6
11.4.6.1

Interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO)

Introduction
The interlocking module AB_TRAFO is used for a transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 233. The module is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the module ABC_LINE can be used. This module can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QB2 QC1 QA1 AB_TRAFO QC2

T QC3 QA2 QC4 QB3 QB4

QA2 and QC4 are not used in this interlocking

en04000515.vsd

Figure 233:

Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

485

Section 11 Control
11.4.6.2 Function block
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 IE01AB_TRAFO QA1CLREL QA1CLIT L QB1REL QB1IT L QB2REL QB2IT L QC1REL QC1IT L QC2REL QC2IT L QB1OPT R QB1CLT R QB2OPT R QB2CLT R QB12OPT R QB12CLT R VPQB1T R VPQB2T R VPQB12T R

en05000358.vsd

Figure 234:

IE function block

486

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
11.4.6.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB3 VPQB4 VPQC3 QA1_EX2 QC3_OP QA1_EX3 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QA1_EX1 AB_TRAFO =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 &
1

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB3 VPQB4 VPQC3 VPQC11 VPQC21 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL

>1 &

en04000538.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

487

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QA1_OP QB2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQB2 VPQC3 VP_BC_12 QB2_CL QC3_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB1_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

&

en04000539.vsd

488

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC21 QA1_OP QB1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQB1 VPQC3 VP_BC_12 QB1_CL QC3_OP BC_12_CL EXDU_BC QB2_EX2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC2_CL QC3_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

en04000540.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

489

Section 11 Control

VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQB3 VPQB4 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB3_OP QB4_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP VPQB1 VPQB2

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB12TR

en04000541.vsd

>1 &

11.4.6.4

Input and output signals

Table 263:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB3_OP QB3_CL QB4_OP QB4_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL Table continued on next page

Input signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QB3 is in open position QB3 is in closed position QB4 is in open position QB4 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position

490

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal BC_12_CL VP_BC_12 EXDU_ES EXDU_BC QA1_EX1 QA1_EX2 QA1_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB1_EX3 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB2_EX3 Description A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are valid No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches No transmission error from any bus coupler bay External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 264:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR QB12OPTR QB12CLTR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR VPQB12TR

Output signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position QB1 and QB2 are not in open position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

491

Section 11 Control 11.4.7

11.4.7.1

Interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS)

Introduction
The interlocking module A1A2_BS is used for one bus-section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 235. The module can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1

QB1 QA1

QB2

QC2

QC3

QC4

A1A2_BS

en04000516.vsd

Figure 235:

Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

11.4.7.2

Function block
IH01A1A2_BS QA1_OP QA1OPREL QA1_CL QA1OPIT L QB1_OP QA1CLREL QB1_CL QA1CLIT L QB2_OP QB1REL QB2_CL QB1IT L QC3_OP QB2REL QC3_CL QB2IT L QC4_OP QC3REL QC4_CL QC3IT L S1QC1_OP QC4REL S1QC1_CL QC4IT L S2QC2_OP S1S2OPT R S2QC2_CL S1S2CLT R BBT R_OP QB1OPT R VP_BBT R QB1CLT R EXDU_12 QB2OPT R EXDU_ES QB2CLT R QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2T R QA1O_EX2 VPQB1T R QA1O_EX3 VPQB2T R QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 en05000348.vsd

Figure 236:

IH function block

492

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
11.4.7.3 Logic diagram
QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL VPQB1 QB1_OP QA1O_EX1 VPQB2 QB2_OP QA1O_EX2 VP_BBTR BBTR_OP EXDU_12 QA1O_EX3 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS1QC1 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S1QC1_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC3 VPS1QC1 QC3_CL S1QC1_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 A1A2_BS =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & & >1
1

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 QA1OPREL QA1OPITL

& & >1

QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL

&

en04000542.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

493

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPS2QC2 QA1_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP S2QC2_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC4 VPS2QC2 QC4_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1 QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2 QB1_OP QB2_OP QA1_OP VPQB1 VPQB2 VPQA1

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

1 1

QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

>1 &

S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR VPS1S2TR

en04000543.vsd

11.4.7.4

Input and output signals

Table 265:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL Table continued on next page

Input signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position

494

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal QC3_OP QC3_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL BBTR_OP VP_BBTR EXDU_12 EXDU_ES QA1O_EX1 QA1O_EX2 QA1O_EX3 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 Description QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position No busbar transfer is in progress Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External open condition for apparatus QA1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 266:
Signal QA1OPREL QA1OPITL QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB1REL QB1ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC4REL QC4ITL S1S2OPTR S1S2CLTR QB1OPTR QB1CLTR

Output signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block

Description Opening of QA1 is allowed Opening of QA1 is forbidden Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QC4 is allowed Switching of QC4 is forbidden No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2 Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

495

Section 11 Control
Signal QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPS1S2TR VPQB1TR VPQB2TR Description QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are valid Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed) Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

11.4.8
11.4.8.1

Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)

Introduction
The interlocking module A1A2_DC is used for one bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 237. The module can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
QB WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1

QC2

A1A2_DC

en04000492.vsd

Figure 237:

Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

11.4.8.2

Function block
II01A1A2_DC QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBCL_EX1 QBCL_EX2 QBOP_EX1 QBOP_EX2 QBOP_EX3 QBOPREL QBOPIT L QBCLREL QBCLIT L DCOPT R DCCLT R VPDCT R

en05000349.vsd

Figure 238:

II function block

496

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
11.4.8.3 Logic diagram

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

497

Section 11 Control

A1A2_DC QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 VPS1_DC S1QC1_OP S2QC2_OP S1DC_OP EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX1 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 VPS2_DC S1QC1_OP S2QC2_OP S2DC_OP EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBOP_EX2 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2 S1QC1_CL S2QC2_CL EXDU_ES QBOP_EX3 =1 VPQB VPDCTR DCOPTR DCCLTR =1 =1 VPS1QC1 VPS2QC2

&

>1
1

QBOPREL QBOPITL

&

&

en04000544.vsd

498

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

11.4.8.4

Input and output signals

Table 267:
Signal QB_OP QB_CL S1QC1_OP S1QC1_CL S2QC2_OP S2QC2_CL S1DC_OP S2DC_OP VPS1_DC VPS2_DC EXDU_ES EXDU_BB QBCL_EX1 QBCL_EX2 QBOP_EX1 QBOP_EX2 QBOP_EX3

Input signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block

Description QB is in open position QB is in closed position QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2 No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2 External close condition for section disconnector QB External close condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB External open condition for section disconnector QB

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

499

Section 11 Control

Table 268:
Signal QBOPREL QBOPITL QBCLREL QBCLITL DCOPTR DCCLTR VPDCTR

Output signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block

Description Opening of QB is allowed Opening of QB is forbidden Closing of QB is allowed Closing of QB is forbidden The bus section disconnector is in open position The bus section disconnector is in closed position Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

11.4.9
11.4.9.1

Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES)

Introduction
The interlocking module BB_ES is used for one busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 239.

QC

en04000504.vsd

Figure 239:

Switchyard layout BB_ES

11.4.9.2

Function block
IJ01BB_ES QC_OP QC_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR

en05000347.vsd

Figure 240:

IJ function block

500

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
11.4.9.3 Logic diagram

BB_ES VP_BB_DC BB_DC_OP EXDU_BB QC_OP QC_CL QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd

&

11.4.9.4

Input and output signals

Table 269:
Signal QC_OP QC_CL BB_DC_OP VP_BB_DC EXDU_BB

Input signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block

Description Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position All disconnectors on this busbar part are open Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part

Table 270:
Signal QCREL QCITL BBESOPTR BBESCLTR

Output signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block

Description Switching of QC is allowed Switching of QC is forbidden QC on this busbar part is in open position QC on this busbar part is in closed position

11.4.10
11.4.10.1

Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)

Introduction
The interlocking modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B are used for a line connected to a double circuit breaker arrangement according to figure 241.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

501

Section 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 DB_BUS_A QC2 QB61 QB62 QC3 QB9 QC9 QC5 QA2 DB_BUS_B QB2 QC4

DB_LINE

en04000518.vsd

Figure 241:

Switchyard layout double circuit breaker.

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined. DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the busbars.

11.4.10.2

Function block
IB01DB_BUS_A QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB1_OP QB61REL QB1_CL QB61ITL QB61_OP QB1REL QB61_CL QB1ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QB1OPTR QC3_CL QB1CLTR QC11_OP VPQB1TR QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 en05000354.vsd

Figure 242:

IB function block

502

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

IA01DB_LINE QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9REL QB9ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL

en05000356.vsd

Figure 243:

IA function block

IC01DB_BUS_B QA2_OP QA2CLREL QA2_CL QA2CLITL QB2_OP QB62REL QB2_CL QB62ITL QB62_OP QB2REL QB62_CL QB2ITL QC4_OP QC4REL QC4_CL QC4ITL QC5_OP QC5REL QC5_CL QC5ITL QC3_OP QB2OPTR QC3_CL QB2CLTR QC21_OP VPQB2TR QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 en05000355.vsd

Figure 244:

IC function block

11.4.10.3

Logic diagrams

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

503

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VPQB61 VPQB1 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB61_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB61_EX2 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2

DB_BUS_A =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1

1 1

VPQA1 VPQB61 VPQB1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC11 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

en04000547.vsd

504

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

VPQB61 VPQB1 QB61_OP QB1_OP QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR

en04000548.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

505

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA1_OP QA2_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX1

DB_LINE =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & >1

1

VPQA1 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQB62 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQB9 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPVOLT QB9REL QB9ITL

&

en04000549.vsd

506

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB62 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QC9_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX2 VPQA2 VPQB61 VPQC3 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC9 QA2_OP QB61_OP QC3_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC9_OP QB9_EX3 VPQC3 VPQC9 VPQB61 VPQB62 QC3_OP QC9_OP QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_EX4 VPQC3 VPQC9 QC3_CL QC9_CL QB9_EX5

&

>1

&

&

&

en04000550.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

507

Section 11 Control

VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQB9 QB61_OP QB62_OP QB9_OP VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF

&
1

QC3REL QC3ITL

&
1

QC9REL QC9ITL
en04000551.vsd

508

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

QA2_OP QA2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VPQB62 VPQB2 VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC3_OP QB62_EX1 VPQC5 VPQC3 QC5_CL QC3_CL QB62_EX2 VPQA2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC21 QA2_OP QC4_OP QC5_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC4 VPQC21 QC4_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2

DB_BUS_B =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1

1 1

VPQA2 VPQB62 VPQB2 VPQC4 VPQC5 VPQC3 VPQC21 QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

en04000552.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

509

Section 11 Control

VPQB62 VPQB2 QB62_OP QB2_OP QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2

&

1 1

QC4REL QC4ITL QC5REL QC5ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

en04000553.vsd

11.4.10.4

Input and output signals

Table 271:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2

Input signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1

Table 272:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL

Output signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB61 is allowed

Table continued on next page

510

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal QB61ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR Description Switching of QB61 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 273:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QA2_OP QA2_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON QB9_EX1

Input signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QA2 is in open position QA2 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC5 is in open position QC5 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure External condition for apparatus QB9

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

511

Section 11 Control
Signal QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 Description External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 274:
Signal QB9REL QB9ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QC9REL QC9ITL

Output signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block

Description Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden

Table 275:
Signal QA2_OP QA2_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC4_OP QC4_CL QC5_OP QC5_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2

Input signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block

Description QA2 is in open position QA2 is in closed position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC4 is in open position QC4 is in closed position QC5 is in open position QC5 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2

512

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

Table 276:
Signal QA2CLREL QA2CLITL QB62REL QB62ITL QB2REL QB2ITL QC4REL QC4ITL QC5REL QC5ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

Output signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block

Description Closing of QA2 is allowed Closing of QA2 is forbidden Switching of QB62 is allowed Switching of QB62 is forbidden Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC4 is allowed Switching of QC4 is forbidden Switching of QC5 is allowed Switching of QC5 is forbidden QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

11.4.11
11.4.11.1

Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)

Introduction
The interlocking modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter according to figure 245.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

513

Section 11 Control

WA1 (A) WA2 (B) QB1 QC1 QA1 QC2 QB6 BH_LINE_A QC3 QB6 QC3 BH_LINE_B QA1 QC2 QB2 QC1

QB61

QA1

QB62

QB9 QC1 QC9 QC2

QB9 QC9

BH_CONN en04000513.vsd

Figure 245:

Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker and a half switchyard layout.

11.4.11.2

Function blocks

514

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

IL01BH_LINE_A QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLITL QB6_OP QB6REL QB6_CL QB6ITL QB1_OP QB1REL QB1_CL QB1ITL QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1ITL QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2ITL QC3_OP QC3REL QC3_CL QC3ITL QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9ITL QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9ITL CQA1_OP QB1OPTR CQA1_CL QB1CLTR CQB61_OP VPQB1TR CQB61_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 en05000352.vsd

Figure 246:

IL function block

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

515

Section 11 Control

IM01BH_LINE_B QA1_OP QA1CLREL QA1_CL QA1CLIT L QB6_OP QB6REL QB6_CL QB6IT L QB2_OP QB2REL QB2_CL QB2IT L QC1_OP QC1REL QC1_CL QC1IT L QC2_OP QC2REL QC2_CL QC2IT L QC3_OP QC3REL QC3_CL QC3IT L QB9_OP QB9REL QB9_CL QB9IT L QC9_OP QC9REL QC9_CL QC9IT L CQA1_OP QB2OPT R CQA1_CL QB2CLT R CQB62_OP VPQB2T R CQB62_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT _OFF VOLT _ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 en05000353.vsd

Figure 247:

IM function block

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2

IK01BH_CONN QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

en05000351.vsd

Figure 248:

IK function block

11.4.11.3
516

Logic diagrams
Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB61_OP CQB61_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQB9 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2

BH_LINE_A =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1

1 1

VPQA1 VPQB1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 VPCQB61 VPQC11 VPVOLT QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL

&

en04000554.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

517

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC11 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC11_OP EXDU_ES QB1_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC11 QC1_CL QC11_CL EXDU_ES QB1_EX2 VPQB1 VPQB6 QB1_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB61 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB61_OP VPQA1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQB61 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 QB9_EX1 QB6_OP QB9_EX2 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QB9_EX3

&

>1
1

QB1REL QB1ITL

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL

&
1

&

>1

QB9REL QB9ITL

>1 &

en04000555.vsd

518

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

CQB61_OP QB9_EX4 CQA1_OP CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QB1_OP QB1_CL VPQB1

>1 &

&

>1

&

&

QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR

en04000556.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

519

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL CQB62_OP CQB62_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQB9 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC3_OP QB6_EX1 VPQC2 VPQC3 QC2_CL QC3_CL QB6_EX2

BH_LINE_B =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1

1 1

VPQA1 VPQB2 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQB9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 VPCQB62 VPQC21 VPVOLT QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL

&

en04000557.vsd

520

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC21 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QC21_OP EXDU_ES QB2_EX1 VPQC1 VPQC21 QC1_CL QC21_CL EXDU_ES QB2_EX2 VPQB2 VPQB6 QB2_OP QB6_OP VPQB6 VPQB9 VPCQB62 QB6_OP QB9_OP CQB62_OP VPQA1 VPQB6 VPQC9 VPQC1 VPQC2 VPQC3 VPCQA1 VPCQB62 VPCQC1 VPCQC2 QB9_EX1 QB6_OP QB9_EX2 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP QB9_EX3

&

>1
1

QB2REL QB2ITL

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL

&
1

&

>1

QB9REL QB9ITL

>1 &

en04000558.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

521

Section 11 Control

CQB62_OP QB9_EX4 CQA1_OP CQC1_OP CQC2_OP QB9_EX5 QC9_OP QC3_OP QB9_EX6 VPQC9 VPQC3 QC9_CL QC3_CL QB9_EX7 VPQB9 VPVOLT QB9_OP VOLT_OFF QB2_OP QB2_CL VPQB2

>1 &

&

>1

&

&

QC9REL QC9ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR

en04000559.vsd

522

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 1QC3_OP QB61_EX1 VPQC1 VP1QC3 QC1_CL 1QC3_CL QB61_EX2 VPQA1 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QA1_OP QC1_OP QC2_OP 2QC3_OP QB62_EX1 VPQC2 VP2QC3 QC2_CL 2QC3_CL QB62_EX2 VPQB61 VPQB62 QB61_OP QB62_OP

BH_CONN =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 & & >1

1 1

VPQA1 VPQB61 VPQB62 VPQC1 VPQC2 VP1QC3 VP2QC3 QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL

&

&

>1
1

QB62REL QB62ITL

&

&

1 1

QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

en04000560.vsd

11.4.11.4

Input and output signals

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

523

Section 11 Control

Table 277:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QB1_OP QB1_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQB61_OP CQB61_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC11_OP QC11_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB1_EX1 QB1_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4

Input signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB6 is in open position QB6 is in close position QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB1 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table continued on next page

524

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 Description External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 278:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL QB1REL QB1ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB1OPTR QB1CLTR VPQB1TR

Output signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB6 is allowed Switching of QB6 is forbidden Switching of QB1 is allowed Switching of QB1 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB1 is in open position QB1 is in closed position Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 279:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB6_OP QB6_CL QB2_OP QB2_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP

Input signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB6 is in open position QB6 is in close position QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

525

Section 11 Control
Signal QC2_CL QC3_OP QC3_CL QB9_OP QB9_CL QC9_OP QC9_CL CQA1_OP CQA1_CL CQB62_OP CQB62_CL CQC1_OP CQC1_CL CQC2_OP CQC2_CL QC21_OP QC21_CL VOLT_OFF VOLT_ON EXDU_ES QB6_EX1 QB6_EX2 QB2_EX1 QB2_EX2 QB9_EX1 QB9_EX2 QB9_EX3 QB9_EX4 QB9_EX5 QB9_EX6 QB9_EX7 Description QC2 is in closed position QC3 is in open position QC3 is in closed position QB9 is in open position QB9 is in closed position QC9 is in open position QC9 is in closed position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB6 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB2 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 280:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB6REL QB6ITL

Output signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB6 is allowed Switching of QB6 is forbidden

Table continued on next page

526

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal QB2REL QB2ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL QC3REL QC3ITL QB9REL QB9ITL QC9REL QC9ITL QB2OPTR QB2CLTR VPQB2TR Description Switching of QB2 is allowed Switching of QB2 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden Switching of QC3 is allowed Switching of QC3 is forbidden Switching of QB9 is allowed Switching of QB9 is forbidden Switching of QC9 is allowed Switching of QC9 is forbidden QB2 is in open position QB2 is in closed position Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 281:
Signal QA1_OP QA1_CL QB61_OP QB61_CL QB62_OP QB62_CL QC1_OP QC1_CL QC2_OP QC2_CL 1QC3_OP 1QC3_CL 2QC3_OP 2QC3_CL QB61_EX1 QB61_EX2 QB62_EX1 QB62_EX2

Input signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block

Description QA1 is in open position QA1 is in closed position QB61 is in open position QB61 is in closed position QB62 is in open position QB62 is in closed position QC1 is in open position QC1 is in closed position QC2 is in open position QC2 is in closed position QC3 on line 1 is in open position QC3 on line 1 is in closed position QC3 on line 2 is in open position QC3 on line 2 is in closed position External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB61 External condition for apparatus QB62 External condition for apparatus QB62

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

527

Section 11 Control

Table 282:
Signal QA1CLREL QA1CLITL QB61REL QB61ITL QB62REL QB62ITL QC1REL QC1ITL QC2REL QC2ITL

Output signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block

Description Closing of QA1 is allowed Closing of QA1 is forbidden Switching of QB61 is allowed Switching of QB61 is forbidden Switching of QB62 is allowed Switching of QB62 is forbidden Switching of QC1 is allowed Switching of QC1 is forbidden Switching of QC2 is allowed Switching of QC2 is forbidden

528

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control 11.4.12

11.4.12.1

Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

Function block
GR01IntlReceive BLOCK INSTNAME RESRENAM RESGRNAM APP1NAME APP2NAME APP3NAME APP4NAME APP5NAME APP6NAME APP7NAME APP8NAME APP9NAME APP10NAM APP11NAM APP12NAM APP13NAM APP14NAM APP15NAM RESREQ RESGRANT APP1_OP APP1_CL APP1VAL APP2_OP APP2_CL APP2VAL APP3_OP APP3_CL APP3VAL APP4_OP APP4_CL APP4VAL APP5_OP APP5_CL APP5VAL APP6_OP APP6_CL APP6VAL APP7_OP APP7_CL APP7VAL APP8_OP APP8_CL APP8VAL APP9_OP APP9_CL APP9VAL APP10_OP APP10_CL APP10VAL APP11_OP APP11_CL APP11VAL APP12_OP APP12_CL APP12VAL APP13_OP APP13_CL APP13VAL APP14_OP APP14_CL APP14VAL APP15_OP APP15_CL APP15VAL COM_VAL en07000048.vsd

Figure 249:

GR function block

11.4.12.2

Input and output signals

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

529

Section 11 Control

Table 283:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block

Description Block of output signals

Table 284:
Signal RESREQ RESGRANT APP1_OP APP1_CL APP1VAL APP2_OP APP2_CL APP2VAL APP3_OP APP3_CL APP3VAL APP4_OP APP4_CL APP4VAL APP5_OP APP5_CL APP5VAL APP6_OP APP6_CL APP6VAL APP7_OP APP7_CL APP7VAL APP8_OP APP8_CL APP8VAL APP9_OP APP9_CL APP9VAL APP10_OP APP10_CL APP10VAL APP11_OP

Output signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block

Description Reservation request Reservation granted Apparatus 1 position is open Apparatus 1 position is closed Apparatus 1 position is valid Apparatus 2 position is open Apparatus 2 position is closed Apparatus 2 position is valid Apparatus 3 position is open Apparatus 3 position is closed Apparatus 3 position is valid Apparatus 4 position is open Apparatus 4 position is closed Apparatus 4 position is valid Apparatus 5 position is open Apparatus 5 position is closed Apparatus 5 position is valid Apparatus 6 position is open Apparatus 6 position is closed Apparatus 6 position is valid Apparatus 7 position is open Apparatus 7 position is closed Apparatus 7 position is valid Apparatus 8 position is open Apparatus 8 position is closed Apparatus 8 position is valid Apparatus 9 position is open Apparatus 9 position is closed Apparatus 9 position is valid Apparatus 10 position is open Apparatus 10 position is closed Apparatus 10 position is valid Apparatus 11 position is open

Table continued on next page

530

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal APP11_CL APP11VAL APP12_OP APP12_CL APP12VAL APP13_OP APP13_CL APP13VAL APP14_OP APP14_CL APP14VAL APP15_OP APP15_CL APP15VAL COM_VAL Description Apparatus 11 position is closed Apparatus 11 position is valid Apparatus 12 position is open Apparatus 12 position is closed Apparatus 12 position is valid Apparatus 13 position is open Apparatus 13 position is closed Apparatus 13 position is valid Apparatus 14 position is open Apparatus 14 position is closed Apparatus 14 position is valid Apparatus 15 position is open Apparatus 15 position is closed Apparatus 15 position is valid Receive communication status is valid

11.4.12.3

Setting parameters
Table 285:
Parameter Operation

Basic general settings for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off/On

11.5

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
Function block name: SLxx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SLGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

11.5.1

Introduction
The SLGGIO function block (or the selector switch function block) is used within the CAP tool in order to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

531

Section 11 Control

values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems.

11.5.2

Principle of operation
The SLGGIO has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also, depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output activation. Besides the inputs visible in CAP configuration tool, there are other executable inputs that will allow an user to set the desired position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected. The SLGGIO function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.

532

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
11.5.2.1 Functionality and behaviour
From the menu:
REC 670 1.1 Control Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language REC 670/Control Single Line Diagram Commands

REC 670/Ctrl/Com Single Command Selector Switch (GGIO)

1
../Ctrl/Com/Sel Sw SL01 SL02 .. .. SL15

2
../Com/Sel Sw/SL03 Damage ctrl

3 4
../Com/Sel Sw/SL03 Damage ctrl

P:Disc All OK

N: Disc Fe Cancel

4 5
../Com/Sel Sw/ DmgCtrl Damage ctrl:

E
Modify the position with arrows. The pos will not be modified (outputs will not be activated) until you press the E-button for O.K.

The dialog window that appears shows the present position (P:) and the new position (N:), both in clear names, given by the user (max. 13 characters).

en06000420.vsd

Figure 250:

Example 1 on handling the switch from the local HMI.

1 The SLGGIO instances in CAP configuration tool 2 Switch name given by the user (max 13 characters) 3 Position number, up to 32 positions 4 Change position 5 New position

11.5.2.2

Graphical display
There are two possibilities for the SLGGIO:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

533

Section 11 Control

if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters); if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only the first three letters of the name will be used;

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the following sequence of commands will ensue:

From the graphical display:

REC 670 1.1 Control Measurements Events Disturbance records Settings Diagnostics Test Reset Authorization Language REC 670 1.1/Control Single Line Diagram Commands

Change to the "Switches" page of the SLD by left-right arrows. Select switch by up-down arrows

../Control/SLD/Switch AR control WFM Pilot setup OFF Damage control DAL

O E

../Control/SLD/Switch AR control WFM Pilot setup OFF P: Disc OK N: Disc Fe Cancel

Select switch. Press the I or O key. A dialog box appears.

The pos will not be modified (outputs will not be activated) until you press the E-button for O.K.

../Control/SLD/Switch AR control WFM Pilot setup OFF Damage control DFW

en06000421.vsd

Figure 251:

Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.

534

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control 11.5.3 Function block

SL01SLGGIO BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN SWPOS01 SWPOS02 SWPOS03 SWPOS04 SWPOS05 SWPOS06 SWPOS07 SWPOS08 SWPOS09 SWPOS10 SWPOS11 SWPOS12 SWPOS13 SWPOS14 SWPOS15 SWPOS16 SWPOS17 SWPOS18 SWPOS19 SWPOS20 SWPOS21 SWPOS22 SWPOS23 SWPOS24 SWPOS25 SWPOS26 SWPOS27 SWPOS28 SWPOS29 SWPOS30 SWPOS31 SWPOS32 SWPOSN INSTNAME NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAME17 NAME18 NAME19 NAME20 NAME21 NAME22 NAME23 NAME24 NAME25 NAME26 NAME27 NAME28 NAME29 NAME30 NAME31 NAME32 en05000658.vsd

Figure 252:

SL function block, example for SL01SL15

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

535

Section 11 Control 11.5.4 Input and output signals

Table 286:
Signal BLOCK PSTO UP DOWN

Input signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block

Description Block of function Operator place selection Binary "UP" command Binary "DOWN" command

Table 287:
Signal SWPOS01 SWPOS02 SWPOS03 SWPOS04 SWPOS05 SWPOS06 SWPOS07 SWPOS08 SWPOS09 SWPOS10 SWPOS11 SWPOS12 SWPOS13 SWPOS14 SWPOS15 SWPOS16 SWPOS17 SWPOS18 SWPOS19 SWPOS20 SWPOS21 SWPOS22 SWPOS23 SWPOS24 SWPOS25 SWPOS26 SWPOS27 SWPOS28

Output signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block

Description Selector switch position 1 Selector switch position 2 Selector switch position 3 Selector switch position 4 Selector switch position 5 Selector switch position 6 Selector switch position 7 Selector switch position 8 Selector switch position 9 Selector switch position 10 Selector switch position 11 Selector switch position 12 Selector switch position 13 Selector switch position 14 Selector switch position 15 Selector switch position 16 Selector switch position 17 Selector switch position 18 Selector switch position 19 Selector switch position 20 Selector switch position 21 Selector switch position 22 Selector switch position 23 Selector switch position 24 Selector switch position 25 Selector switch position 26 Selector switch position 27 Selector switch position 28

Table continued on next page

536

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Signal SWPOS29 SWPOS30 SWPOS31 SWPOS32 SWPOSN Description Selector switch position 29 Selector switch position 30 Selector switch position 31 Selector switch position 32 Switch position (integer)

11.5.5

Setting parameters
Table 288:
Parameter Operation NrPos OutType tPulse tDelay StopAtExtremes

Basic general settings for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function

Range Off On 32 Pulsed Steady 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60000.000 Disabled Enabled Step 1 0.001 0.010 Default Off 2 - 32 Steady 0.200 0.000 Disabled Unit s s Description Operation Off/On Number of positions in the switch Output type, steady or pulse Operate pulse duration, in [s] Time delay on the output, in [s] Stop when min or max position is reached

11.6

Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)

Function block name: VS ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VSGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

11.6.1

Introduction
The VSGGIO function block (or the versatile switch function block) is a multipurpose function used within the CAP tool for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch. The switch can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the SLD of the LHMI.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

537

Section 11 Control 11.6.2 Principle of operation

This function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as the switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used: for indication, receiving position through the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributing it in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs or to IEC61850 through reporting or GOOSE for command, receiving commands via the HMI. HMI symbols Select button or Indication button from menu (Control / Commands / Versatile Switch) or IEC61850 and sending them in the configuration and especially to the outputs (through a SMBO function block)

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators place , operation from local HMI (Local pos) or through IEC 61850 (Remote pos). An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block will allow operation from Local HMI. As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result:
POS2 0 0 1 1 POS1 0 1 0 1 RESULT intermediate POS1 POS2 bad state POS (integer output) 0 1 2 3

11.6.3

Function block
VS01VSGGIO BLOCK PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2 NAME_UND NAM_POS1 NAM_POS2 NAME_BAD BLOCKED POSITION POS1 POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21

en06000508.vsd

Figure 253:

VS function block

11.6.4

Input and output signals

538

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

Table 289:
Signal BLOCK PSTO IPOS1 IPOS2

Input signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block

Description Block of function Operator place selection Position 1 indicating input Position 2 indicating input

Table 290:
Signal BLOCKED POSITION POS1 POS2 CMDPOS12 CMDPOS21

Output signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block

Description The function is active but the functionality is blocked Position indication, integer Position 1 indication, logical signal Position 2 indication, logical signal Execute command from position 1 to position 2 Execute command from position 2 to position 1

11.6.5

Setting parameters
Table 291:
Parameter Operation CtlModel

Basic general settings for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function

Range Off On Dir Norm SBO Enh Step Default Off Dir Norm Unit Description Operation Off / On Specifies the type for control model according to IEC 61850 Operation mode Max time between select and execute signals Command pulse lenght

Mode tSelect

Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000

0.001

Pulsed 30.000

tPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

11.7

Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)

Function block name: DPx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: DPGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

539

Section 11 Control 11.7.1 Introduction

The DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is especially conceived to be used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.

11.7.2

Principle of operation
Upon receiving the input signals, the DPGGIO function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

11.7.3

Function block
DP01DPGGIO OPEN CLOSE VALID POSITION

en07000200.vsd

Figure 254:

DP function block

11.7.4

Input and output signals

Table 292:
Signal OPEN CLOSE VALID

Input signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block

Description Open indication Close indication Valid indication

Table 293:
Signal POSITION

Output signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block

Description Double point indication

11.7.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

540

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control

11.8

Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO)

Function block name: SCx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: SPC8GGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

11.8.1

Introduction
The SC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) or LOCAL (HMI) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need complicated function blocks that have the capability to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGGIO function blocks.

11.8.2

Principle of operation
The PSTO input will determine which the allowed position for the operator (LOCAL, REMOTE, ALL) is. Upon sending a command from an allowed operator position, one of the 8 outputs will be activated. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.

11.8.3

Function block
SC01SPC8GGIO BLOCK PSTO OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 en07000143.vsd

Figure 255:

SPC function block

11.8.4
REG 670

Input and output signals

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 541

Section 11 Control

Table 294:
Signal BLOCK PSTO

Input signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block

Description Blocks the function operation Operator place selection

Table 295:
Signal OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8

Output signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block

Description Output 1 Output2 Output3 Output4 Output5 Output6 Output7 Output8

11.8.5

Setting parameters
Table 296:
Parameter Operation Latched1

Basic general settings for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function

Range Off On Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Step Default Off Pulsed Unit Description Operation Off/On Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 1 Output1 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 2 Output2 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 3 Output3 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 4 Output4 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 5 Output5 Pulse Time

tPulse1 Latched2

0.01 -

0.10 Pulsed

s -

tPulse2 Latched3

0.01 -

0.10 Pulsed

s -

tPulse3 Latched4

0.01 -

0.10 Pulsed

s -

tPulse4 Latched5

0.01 -

0.10 Pulsed

s -

tPulse5

0.01

0.10

Table continued on next page

542

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 11 Control
Parameter Latched6 Range Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Pulsed Latched 0.01 - 6000.00 Step Default Pulsed Unit Description Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 6 Output6 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 7 Output7 Pulse Time Setting for pulsed/ latched mode for output 8 Output8 pulse time

tPulse6 Latched7

0.01 -

0.10 Pulsed

s -

tPulse7 Latched8

0.01 -

0.10 Pulsed

s -

tPulse8

0.01

0.10

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

543

544

Section 12 Logic

Section 12 Logic
About this chapter
This chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

12.1

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Function block name: TRPxANSI number: 94 IEC 61850 logical node name: SMPPTRC IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

I->O

12.1.1

Introduction
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides the pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions. The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and breaker lockout.

12.1.2

Principle of operation
The duration of a trip output signal from the TRPx function is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening. For three-pole tripping, TRPx function has a single input (TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

545

Section 12 Logic

BLOCK TRIN
Operation Mode = On Program = 3Ph

tTripMin AND t

OR

TRIP

en05000789.vsd

Figure 256:

Simplified logic diagram for three phasetrip

The TRPx function for single- and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable single- and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the expanded TRPx function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded TRPx function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (e.g. carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (e.g. tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection). Additional logic secures a three-pole final trip command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals. The expanded TRPx function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single pole, two pole or three pole trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the auto-reclosing function. The expanded TRPx function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is also provided which disables single- and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be three-pole. In multi-breaker arrangements, one TRPx function block is used for each breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and auto-reclosing is used. The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three pole trip, if desired. It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing only the choice is by setting TripLockout.

546

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic
12.1.2.1 Logic diagram
TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF TRIN Program = 3ph

OR OR OR AND
RSTTRIP - cont.

en05000517.vsd

Figure 257:
TRIN TRINL1 PSL1

Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram

AND

OR

L1TRIP

TRINL2 PSL2

AND

OR

L2TRIP

TRINL3 PSL3

AND OR

OR

L3TRIP

OR
-loop

OR
-loop

OR AND
1PTREF 1PTRZ

AND AND OR
50 ms t

AND

en05000518.vsd

Figure 258:

Phase segregated front logic

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

547

Section 12 Logic

L1TRIP

150 ms

t
2000 ms t

OR OR

RTRIP

OR

AND

L2TRIP

150 ms

t
2000 ms t

OR OR

STRIP

OR

AND

L3TRIP

150 ms

t
2000 ms t

OR OR

TTRIP

OR

AND

OR AND

P3PTR

OR OR
-loop

en05000519.vsd

Figure 259:

Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

548

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic

L1TRIP - cont.

150 ms

t
2000 ms t

OR

OR

RTRIP

AND

L2TRIP

150 ms

t
2000 ms t

OR

OR

STRIP

AND AND

L3TRIP

150 ms

t
2000 ms t

OR

OR

TTRIP

AND

OR AND

TRIP

OR OR
-loop

en05000520.vsd

Figure 260:

Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

549

Section 12 Logic

BLOCK RTRIP

OR
STRIP

AND

TRL1

OR
TTRIP

AND

TRL2

OR
RSTTRIP

AND OR

TRL3

TRIP

AND

OR

AND
-loop

TR3P

AND AND AND AND OR

10 ms

AND

t 5 ms t

TR1P

TR2P

-loop
en05000521.vsd

Figure 261:

Final tripping circuits

12.1.3

Function block
TRP1SMPPTRC_94 BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT

en05000707.vsd

Figure 262:

TRP function block

12.1.4

Input and output signals

550

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic

Table 297:
Signal BLOCK BLKLKOUT TRIN TRINL1 TRINL2 TRINL3 PSL1 PSL2 PSL3 1PTRZ 1PTREF P3PTR SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT

Input signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block

Description Block of function Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT) Trip all phases Trip phase 1 Trip phase 2 Trip phase 3 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3 Zone Trip with a separate phase selection Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase selection Prepare all tripping to be three-phase Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function

Table 298:
Signal TRIP TRL1 TRL2 TRL3 TR1P TR2P TR3P CLLKOUT

Output signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block

Description General trip output signal Trip signal from phase L1 Trip signal from phase L2 Trip signal from phase L3 Tripping single-pole Tripping two-pole Tripping three-pole Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

12.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 299:
Parameter Operation Program

Basic parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function

Range Off On 3 phase 1ph/3ph 1Ph/2Ph/3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default On 1ph/3ph Unit Description Operation Off / On Three ph; single or three ph; single, two or three ph trip Minimum duration of trip output signal

tTripMin

0.001

0.150

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

551

Section 12 Logic

Table 300:
Parameter TripLockout

Advanced parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function

Range Off On Off On Step Default Off Unit Description On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip latch, Off: only outp On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and trip, Off: only inp

AutoLock

Off

12.1.6

Technical data
Table 301:
Function Trip action Minimum trip pulse length Timers

Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)

Range or value 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph (0.000-60.000) s (0.000-60.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

12.2

Trip matrix logic (GGIO)

Function block name: TRxxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: TRMGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

12.2.1

Application
Twelve trip matrix logic blocks are included in the IED. The function blocks are used in the configuration of the IED to route trip signals and/or other logical output signals to the different output relays. The matrix and the physical outputs will be seen in the PCM 600 engineering tool and this allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.

12.2.2

Principle of operation
Tripping matrix logic block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the necessary grouping of connected input signals (e.g. for tripping and alarming purposes) to the three output signals from the function block.

552

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules: 1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the first output signal (i.e. OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT1 via setting parameters "PulseTime1", "OnDelayTime1" & "OffDelayTime1". when any one of second 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the second output signal (i.e. OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT2 via setting parameters "PulseTime2", "OnDelayTime2" & "OffDelayTime2" when any one of all 32 input signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the third output signal (i.e. OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT3 via setting parameters "PulseTime3", "OnDelayTime3" & "OffDelayTime3".

2.

3.

Detailed logical diagram is shown in see figure 263

Pulse Time 1

&

Pulse Input 1 Input 2 Input 16

On Delay Time 1

t pulse

1
t on t off Off Delay Time 1 Pulse Time 2

&

Output 1

Pulse Input 17 Input 18 Input 32

On Delay Time 2

t pulse

&

1
t on t off Off Delay Time 2 Pulse Time 3

&

Output 2

&

Pulse
On Delay Time 3

t pulse

1
t on t off Off Delay Time 3

&

Output 3

en06000514.vsd

Figure 263:

Tripping Matrix Internal Logic.

Output signals from this function block are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to output contacts from the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay on that output signal shall be set to approximately 0,150s in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils. Twelve such function blocks are available in the IED. REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 553

Section 12 Logic 12.2.3 Function block

T R01TRMGGIO INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 INPUT 17 INPUT 18 INPUT 19 INPUT 20 INPUT 21 INPUT 22 INPUT 23 INPUT 24 INPUT 25 INPUT 26 INPUT 27 INPUT 28 INPUT 29 INPUT 30 INPUT 31 INPUT 32 OUT PUT 1 OUT PUT 2 OUT PUT 3

en05000370.vsd

Figure 264:

TR function block

12.2.4

Input and output signals

Table 302:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 Table continued on next page

Input signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block

Description Binary input 1 Binary input 2 Binary input 3 Binary input 4 Binary input 5 Binary input 6 Binary input 7 Binary input 8 Binary input 9 Binary input 10 Binary input 11 Binary input 12 Binary input 13

554

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic
Signal INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT32 Description Binary input 14 Binary input 15 Binary input 16 Binary input 17 Binary input 18 Binary input 19 Binary input 20 Binary input 21 Binary input 22 Binary input 23 Binary input 24 Binary input 25 Binary input 26 Binary input 27 Binary input 28 Binary input 29 Binary input 30 Binary input 31 Binary input 32

Table 303:
Signal OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3

Output signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block

Description OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16 OR function between inputs 17 to 32 OR function between inputs 1 to 32

12.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 304:
Parameter Operation PulseTime OnDelay OffDelay

Basic parameter group settings for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function

Range Off ON 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default ON 0.000 0.000 0.000 Unit s s s Description Operation Off / On Output pulse time Output on delay time Output off delay time

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

555

Section 12 Logic
Parameter ModeOutput1 ModeOutput2 ModeOutput3 Range Steady Pulsed Steady Pulsed Steady Pulsed Step Default Steady Steady Steady Unit Description Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed

12.3
12.3.1

Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

Introduction
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt the configuration to the specific application needs.

12.3.2

Inverter function block (INV)

I001INV INPUT OUT en04000404.vsd

Figure 265:
Table 305:
Signal INPUT

INV function block

Input signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Description Input

Table 306:
Signal OUT

Output signals for the INV (I001-) function block

Description Output

12.3.3

OR function block (OR)

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

556

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic

O001OR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 OUT NOUT

en04000405.vsd

Figure 266:
Table 307:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6

OR function block
Input signals for the OR (O001-) function block
Description Input 1 to OR gate Input 2 to OR gate Input 3 to OR gate Input 4 to OR gate Input 5 to OR gate Input 6 to OR gate

Table 308:
Signal OUT NOUT

Output signals for the OR (O001-) function block

Description Output from OR gate Inverted output from OR gate

12.3.4

AND function block (AND)

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the inputs and one of the outputs are inverted.
A001AND INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4N OUT NOUT

en04000406.vsd

Figure 267:

AND function block

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

557

Section 12 Logic

Table 309:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4N

Input signals for the AND (A001-) function block

Description Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 inverted

Table 310:
Signal OUT NOUT

Output signals for the AND (A001-) function block

Description Output Output inverted

12.3.5

Timer function block (Timer)

The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (parameter T).
T M01Timer INPUT T ON OFF en04000378.vsd

Figure 268:
Table 311:
Signal INPUT

TM function block
Input signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Description Input to timer

Table 312:
Signal ON OFF

Output signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block

Description Output from timer , pick-up delayed Output from timer, drop-out delayed

Table 313:
Parameter T

General settings for the Timer (TM01-) function

Range 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit s Description Time delay of function

558

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic 12.3.6 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)

The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.
TP01Pulse INPUT OUT en04000407.vsd

Figure 269:
Table 314:
Signal INPUT

PULSE function block

Input signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Description Input to pulse timer

Table 315:
Signal OUT

Output signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block

Description Output from pulse timer

Table 316:
Parameter T

General settings for the Pulse (TP01-) function

Range 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.010 Unit s Description Time delay of function

12.3.7

Exclusive OR function block (XOR)

The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The function block XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are equal.
XO01XOR INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUT NOUT en04000409.vsd

Figure 270:
Table 317:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2

XOR function block

Input signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Description Input 1 to XOR gate Input 2 to XOR gate

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

559

Section 12 Logic

Table 318:
Signal OUT NOUT

Output signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block

Description Output from XOR gate Inverted output from XOR gate

12.3.8

Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)

The Set-Reset function SRM is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRM function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.
Table 319:
SET 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRM) function block

RESET OUT 1 0 0 0 NOUT 0 1 1 1

SM01SRM SET RESET OUT NOUT en04000408.vsd

Figure 271:
Table 320:
Signal SET RESET

SM function block
Input signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Description Set input Reset input

Table 321:
Signal OUT NOUT

Output signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block

Description Output Output inverted

560

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic

Table 322:
Parameter Memory

Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operating mode of the memory function

12.3.9

Controllable gate function block (GT)

The GT function block is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.
GT 01GT INPUT OUT en04000410.vsd

Figure 272:
Table 323:
Signal INPUT

GT function block
Input signals for the GT (GT01-) function block
Description Input to gate

Table 324:
Signal OUT

Output signals for the GT (GT01-) function block

Description Output from gate

Table 325:
Parameter Operation

Parameter group settings for the GT (GT01-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off/On

12.3.10

Settable timer function block (TS)

The function block TS timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting On, Off that controls the operation of the timer.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

561

Section 12 Logic

TS01TimerSet INPUT ON OFF en04000411.vsd

Figure 273:
Table 326:
Signal INPUT

TS function block
Input signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Description Input to timer

Table 327:
Signal ON OFF

Output signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block

Description Output from timer, pick-up delayed Output from timer, drop-out delayed

Table 328:
Parameter Operation t

Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function

Range Off On 0.000 - 90000.000 Step 0.001 Default Off 0.000 Unit s Description Operation Off/On Delay for settable timer n

12.3.11

Technical data
Table 329:
Logic block LogicAND LogicOR LogicXOR LogicInverter LogicSRMemory LogicGate LogicTimer LogicPulseTimer LogicTimerSet LogicLoopDelay

Configurable logic blocks

Quantity with update rate fast medium 60 60 10 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 60 60 10 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 normal 160 160 20 80 20 20 20 20 20 20 Range or value (0.000 90000.000) s (0.000 90000.000) s (0.000 90000.000) s (0.000 90000.000) s Accuracy 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms 0.5% 10 ms

562

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic

12.4

Fixed signal function block (FIXD)

Function block name: FIXDANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: FixedSignals IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

12.4.1

Introduction
The fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in the other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.

12.4.2

Principle of operation
There are eight outputs from the FIXD function block: OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value; ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value; INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0; INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1; REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value; STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value; ZEROSMPL is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; GRP_OFF is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; The function does not allow any settings and therefore its not present in PCM 600. For examples on how to use each type of output in the configuration, please read the Application Manual.

12.4.3

Function block
FIXDFixedSignals OFF ON INTZERO INTONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF en05000445.vsd

Figure 274:

FIXD function block

12.4.4

Input and output signals

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

563

Section 12 Logic

Table 330:
Signal OFF ON INTZERO INTONE REALZERO STRNULL ZEROSMPL GRP_OFF

Output signals for the FixedSignals (FIXD-) function block

Description Boolean signal fixed off Boolean signal fixed on Integer signal fixed zero Integer signal fixed one Real signal fixed zero String signal with no characters Channel id for zero sample Group signal fixed off

12.4.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

12.5

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

Function block name: BB-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

12.5.1

Introduction
The B16I function block (or the Boolean 16 to Integer conversion function block) is used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.

12.5.1.1

Principle of operation
The B16I function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B1I6 function block is designed for receiving the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

564

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic
12.5.1.2 Function block
BB01B16I BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT

en07000128.vsd

Figure 275:

The B16I function block.

12.5.1.3

Input and output signals

Table 331:
Signal BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16

Input signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block

Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

565

Section 12 Logic

Table 332:
Signal OUT

Output signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block

Description Output value

12.5.1.4

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

12.6

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation (B16IGGIO)

Function block name: BA-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: B16IGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

12.6.1

Introduction
The B16IGGIO function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals. TheIB16IGGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the PSTO input.

12.6.2

Principle of operation
The B16IGGIO function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B16IGGIO can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value. The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local then no change is applied to the outputs.

566

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic 12.6.3 Function block

BA01B16IGGIO BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 OUT

en07000129.vsd

Figure 276:

The B16IGGIO function block.

12.6.4

Input and output signals

Table 333:
Signal BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16

Input signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block

Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

567

Section 12 Logic

Table 334:
Signal OUT

Output signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block

Description Output value

12.6.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

12.7

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)

Function block name: IY- ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

12.7.1

Introduction
The IB16 function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion function block) is used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.

12.7.2

Principle of operation
The IB16 function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16 function block is designed for receiving the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

568

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic 12.7.3 Function block

IY01IB16 BLOCK IN OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 en06000501.vsd

Figure 277:

The BI16 function block.

12.7.4

Input and output signals

Table 335:
Signal BLOCK IN

Input signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block

Description Block of function input

Table 336:
Signal OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16

Output signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block

Description Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

569

Section 12 Logic 12.7.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

12.8

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation (IB16GGIO)

Function block name: IX-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: IB16GGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

12.8.1

Introduction
The IB16GGIO function block (or the integer to Boolean conversion with logic node representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals. The IB16GGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the PSTO input.

12.8.2

Principle of operation
The IB16GGIO function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The IB16GGIO can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value. The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local then no change is applied to the outputs.

570

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 12 Logic 12.8.3 Function block

IX01IB16GGIO BLOCK PSTO OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 en06000502.vsd

Figure 278:

The BI16GGIO function block.

12.8.4

Input and output signals

Table 337:
Signal BLOCK PSTO

Input signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block

Description Block of function Operator place selection

Table 338:
Signal OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16

Output signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block

Description Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

571

Section 12 Logic 12.8.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

572

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

Section 13 Monitoring
About this chapter
This chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events and disturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

13.1

Measurements (MMXU)
Function block name: SVRxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CVMMXU
P, Q, S, I, U, f

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: CPxx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMMXU

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: VNx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VNMMXU

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

573

Section 13 Monitoring

Function block name: VPxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMMXU

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: CSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CMSQI

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

I1, I2, I0

Function block name: VSQx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: VMSQI

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

U1, U2, U0

13.1.1

Introduction
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level e.g.via IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system. Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function. The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.

574

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs. Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting. The measuring function, SVR (CVMMXU), provides the following power system quantities: P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power PF: power factor U: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude I: phase current magnitude F: power system frequency

The measuring functions CP (CMMXU), VN (VNMMWU) and VP (VMMXU) provides physical quantities: I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU) U: voltages (phase and phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) (VMMXU, VNMMXU)

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5 presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage. The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600. The measuring functions CSQ (CMSQI) and VSQ (VMSQI) provides sequential quantities: I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle) U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).

The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either as instantaneously calculated quantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

575

Section 13 Monitoring 13.1.2

13.1.2.1

Principle of operation
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the preprocessing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in options. The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations: Locally by means of the local HMI Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM 600 or over the station bus Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs". Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the service values within SVR. Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block by means of four built-in operating thresholds, see figure 279. The monitoring has two different modes of operating: Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

Zero point clamping

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 279.

576

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

Y
High-high limit X_RANGE = 3

X_RANGE= 1 High limit X_RANGE=0

Hysteresis

X_RANGE=0 Low limit X_RANGE=2 Low-low limit X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd

Figure 279:

Presentation of operating limits

Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary signals. The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 279. The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is continuous for each measured separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available: Cyclic reporting (Cyclic) Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band) Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-band reporting.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

577

Section 13 Monitoring

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Value Reported Value Reported

Y3 Y2 Y4

Value Reported

Y1

Y5

t (*)

t (*)

t (*)

t (*)

Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

en05000500.vsd

Figure 280:

Periodic reporting

AmplitudeMagnitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than the Y predefined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 281 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

578

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

Y Value Reported (1st) Value Reported Y3 Y2 DY DY DY DY

Value Reported Value Reported DY DY

Y1

t
99000529.vsd

Figure 281:

Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the Y set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit (XZeroDb), figure 282, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other. The last value reported, Y1 in figure 282 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5). The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

579

Section 13 Monitoring

Y A >= pre-set value

A1 >= pre-set value Y3 Y2 A1 Value Reported

A2 >= pre-set value A2 Y4 Value Reported A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >= pre-set value

A4 A3 A5
A6

Value Reported (1st)

Value Reported

A7

Y5 Value Reported t
99000530.vsd

Y1

Figure 282:

Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

13.1.2.2

Service values (MMXU, SVR) Mode of operation

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter phase power calculation Mode 1 L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3
* * *

Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation

Comment

U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3

Used when three phaseto-earth voltages are available Used when three two phase-tophase voltages are available Used when only symmetrical three phase power shall be measured

Arone

S = U L1 L 2 I L1 - U L 2 L 3 I L 3
* *

U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2

PosSeq

S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*

U =

3 U PosSeq

I = I PosSeq
Table continued on next page

580

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter phase power calculation Mode 4 L1L2 Formula used for voltage and current magnitude calculation Comment

S = U L1 L 2 ( I L1 - I L 2 )
* *

U = U L1 L 2 I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2

Used when only UL1L2 phase-tophase voltage is available Used when only UL2L3 phase-tophase voltage is available Used when only UL3L1 phase-tophase voltage is available Used when only UL1 phase-toearth voltage is available Used when only UL2 phase-toearth voltage is available Used when only UL3 phase-toearth voltage is available

L2L3

S = U L 2 L3 ( I L 2 - I L3 )
* *

U = U L2 L3 I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2

L3L1

S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3 - I L1 )
* *

U = U L 3 L1 I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2

L1

S = 3 U L1 I L1
*

U =

3 U L1

I = I L1
8 L2

S = 3 U L2 I L2
*

U =

3 U L2

I = IL2
9 L3

S = 3 U L3 I L3
*

U =

3 U L3

I = I L3
* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes (i.e. 1 & 3) the measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes (i.e. from 3 to 9) it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 152)

Q = Im( S )

(Equation 153)

S = S =

P +Q
2

(Equation 154)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

581

Section 13 Monitoring

PF = cosj = P S

(Equation 155)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor. Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision". Measured currents and voltages used in the SVR function can be calibrated to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 283.
% of Ir -10 IAmpComp5 IAmpComp30 IAmpComp100 -10 5 30 0-5%: Constant 5-30-100%: Linear >100%: Constant 100 Measured current % of Ir Amplitude compensation

Calibration of analog inputs

Degrees -10 IAngComp30 IAngComp5 IAngComp100 -10

Angle compensation

Measured current 5 30 100 % of Ir

en05000652.vsd

Figure 283:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

582

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I & power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
where: X XOld is a new measured value (i.e. P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle (Equation 156)

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitude IGenZeroDb level for current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (i.e. P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in the SVR function, is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement supervision"). In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete measurement chain (i.e. CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors etc.) it is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude (i.e. setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (i.e. setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (i.e. complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (e.g. around rated power) can be done at site. However to perform this calibration it is necessary to have external power meter of the high accuracy class available.

Compensation facility

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

583

Section 13 Monitoring
Directionality

In CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in the following figure 284.

Busbar

Protected Object
en05000373.vsd

Figure 284:

Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

That practically means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar. In some application, like for example when power is measured on the secondary side of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency

Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.

13.1.2.3

Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)

The CP function must be connected to three-phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 283 above.

584

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

13.1.2.4

Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP)

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above. The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

13.1.2.5

Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ)

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CSQ) or voltage (VSQ) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, but XRANG, are calculated within the measuring block and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output. Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

13.1.3

Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

585

Section 13 Monitoring

SVR1CVMMXU I3P U3P S S_RANGE P_INST P P_RANGE Q_INST Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD U U_RANGE I I_RANGE F F_RANGE en05000772.vsd

Figure 285:

SVR function block

CP01CMMXU I3P IL1 IL1RANG IL1ANGL IL2 IL2RANG IL2ANGL IL3 IL3RANG IL3ANGL en05000699.vsd

Figure 286:
VP01VMMXU U3P

CP function block

UL12 UL12RANG UL23 UL23RANG UL31 UL31RANG en05000701.vsd

Figure 287:
CSQ1CMSQI I3P

VP function block

3I0 3I0RANG I1 I1RANG I2 I2RANG en05000703.vsd

Figure 288:

CS function block

586

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

VSQ1VMSQI U3P 3U0 3U0RANG U1 U1RANG U2 U2RANG en05000704.vsd

VSQ1VMSQI V3P 3V0 3V0RANG V1 V1RANG V2 V2RANG en05000704_ansi.vsd

Figure 289:

VS function block

13.1.4

Input and output signals

Table 339:
Signal I3P U3P

Input signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block

Description Group signal for current input Group signal for voltage input

Table 340:
Signal S S_RANGE P_INST P P_RANGE Q_INST Q Q_RANGE PF PF_RANGE ILAG ILEAD U U_RANGE I

Output signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block

Description Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value Apparent Power range Active Power Active Power magnitude of deadband value Active Power range Reactive Power Active Power magnitude of deadband value Reactive Power range Power Factor magnitude of deadband value Power Factor range Current is lagging voltage Current is leading voltage Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value Calcuate voltage range Calculated current magnitude of deadband value

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

587

Section 13 Monitoring
Signal I_RANGE F F_RANGE Description Calculated current range System frequency magnitude of deadband value System frequency range

Table 341:
Signal I3P

Input signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block

Description Group connection abstract block 1

Table 342:
Signal IL1 IL1RANG IL1ANGL IL2 IL2RANG IL2ANGL IL3 IL3RANG IL3ANGL

Output signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block

Description IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value IL1 Amplitude range IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value IL2 Amplitude range IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value IL3 Amplitude range IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 343:
Signal U3P

Input signals for the VNMMXU (VN01-) function block

Description Group connection abstract block 5

Table 344:
Signal UL1 UL1RANG UL1ANGL UL2 UL2RANG UL2ANGL UL3 UL3RANG UL3ANGL

Output signals for the VNMMXU (VN01-) function block

Description UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL1 Amplitude range UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL2 Amplitude range UL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL3 Amplitude range UL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

588

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

Table 345:
Signal U3P

Input signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block

Description Group connection abstract block 2

Table 346:
Signal UL12 UL12RANG UL23 UL23RANG UL31 UL31RANG

Output signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block

Description UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL12 Amplitude range UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL23 Amplitude range UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value UL31 Amplitude range

Table 347:
Signal I3P

Input signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block

Description Group connection abstract block 3

Table 348:
Signal 3I0 3I0RANG I1 I1RANG I2 I2RANG

Output signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block

Description 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value 3I0 Amplitude range I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value I1 Amplitude range I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value I2 Amplitude range

Table 349:
Signal U3P

Input signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block

Description Group connection abstract block 4

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

589

Section 13 Monitoring

Table 350:
Signal 3U0 3U0RANG U1 U1RANG U2 U2RANG

Output signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block

Description 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value 3U0 Amplitude range U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value U1 Amplitude range U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value U2 Amplitude range

13.1.5

Setting parameters
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.
Table 351:
Parameter SLowLim SLowLowLim SMin SMax SRepTyp

Basic general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Range 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Off On 1 - 99999 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 0.000 1000000000.000 Cyclic Unit VA VA VA VA Description Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type

PMin

0.001

-1000000000.000

Minimum value

PMax

0.001

1000000000.000

Maximum value

PRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

QMin

0.001

-1000000000.000

VAr

Minimum value

Operation IBase QMax

1 0.001

Off 3000 1000000000.000

A VAr

Operation Off / On Base setting for current level in A Maximum value

Table continued on next page

590

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter QRepTyp Range Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.05 - 2000.00 L1, L2, L3 Arone Pos Seq L1L2 L2L3 L3L1 L1 L2 L3 0.000 - 6.000 Step Default Cyclic Unit Description Reporting type

UBase Mode

0.05 -

400.00 L1, L2, L3

kV -

Base setting for voltage level in kV Selection of measured current and voltage

PowAmpFact

0.001

1.000

Amplitude factor to scale power calculations Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I &U Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I Minimum value Maximum value Reporting type

PowAngComp

-180.0 - 180.0

0.1

0.0

Deg

0.00 - 1.00

0.01

0.00

PFMin PFMax PFRepTyp

-1.000 - 0.000 0.000 - 1.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

0.001 0.001 -

-1.000 1.000 Cyclic

UMin

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

UMax

0.001

400000.000

Maximum value

URepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

IMin

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

IMax

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

IRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

591

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter FrMin Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit Hz Description Minimum value

FrMax

0.001

70.000

Hz

Maximum value

FrRepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

Table 352:
Parameter SDbRepInt

Advanced general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

SZeroDb SHiHiLim SHiLim SLimHyst

0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001 0.001 0.001

0 900000000.000 800000000.000 5.000

m% VA VA %

PDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

PZeroDb PHiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 900000000.000

m% W

PHiLim

0.001

800000000.000

PLowLim

0.001

-800000000.000

PLowLowLim

0.001

-900000000.000

PLimHyst

0.001

5.000

QDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

QZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Table continued on next page

592

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter QHiHiLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 900000000.000 Unit VAr Description High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Zero point clamping in % of Ubase High High limit (physical value) Zero point clamping in % of Ibase High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value)

QHiLim

0.001

800000000.000

VAr

QLowLim

0.001

-800000000.000

VAr

QLowLowLim

0.001

-900000000.000

VAr

QLimHyst

0.001

5.000

PFDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

PFZeroDb UGenZeroDb PFHiHiLim IGenZeroDb PFHiLim PFLowLim PFLowLowLim PFLimHyst

0 - 100000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 1 - 100 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 -3.000 - 3.000 0.000 - 100.000

1 1 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

0 5 3.000 5 2.000 -2.000 -3.000 5.000

m% % % %

UDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

UZeroDb UHiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

m% V

UHiLim

0.001

450000.000

ULowLim

0.001

380000.000

ULowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

593

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter ULimHyst Range 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit % Description Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur

IDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

IZeroDb IHiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 900.000

m% A

IHiLim

0.001

800.000

ILowLim

0.001

-800.000

ILowLowLim

0.001

-900.000

ILimHyst

0.001

5.000

FrDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

FrZeroDb FrHiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 65.000

m% Hz

FrHiLim

0.001

63.000

Hz

FrLowLim

0.001

47.000

Hz

FrLowLowLim

0.001

45.000

Hz

FrLimHyst

0.001

5.000

UAmpComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Table continued on next page

594

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter IAmpComp5 Range -10.000 - 10.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit % Description Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

IAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAmpComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IAngComp5 IAngComp30 IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000 0.000

Deg Deg Deg

Table 353:
Parameter IL1DbRepInt

Basic general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Base setting for current level in A Maximum value Reporting type

Operation IBase IL1Max IL1RepTyp

Off On 1 - 99999 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

1 0.001 -

Off 3000 1000.000 Cyclic

A A -

IL1AngDbRepInt

10

Type

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value Reporting type

IL2DbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

IL2Max IL2RepTyp

0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

0.001 -

1000.000 Cyclic

A -

IL2AngDbRepInt

10

Type

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

IL3DbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

595

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter IL3Max IL3RepTyp Range 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300 Step 0.001 Default 1000.000 Cyclic Unit A Description Maximum value Reporting type

IL3AngDbRepInt

10

Type

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

Table 354:
Parameter IL1ZeroDb IL1HiHiLim IL1HiLim IAmpComp5

Advanced general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Range 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0 900.000 800.000 0.000 Unit m% A A % Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of Ir Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of Ir Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate current at 100% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir Minimum value Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)

IAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

IL1LowLim IL1LowLowLim IAmpComp100

0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000 0.000

A A %

IAngComp5 IL1Min IAngComp30 IAngComp100 IL1LimHys

-10.000 - 10.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 -10.000 - 10.000 0.000 - 100.000

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000

Deg A Deg Deg %

IL2ZeroDb IL2HiHiLim IL2HiLim IL2LowLim

0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000

1 0.001 0.001 0.001

0 900.000 800.000 0.000

m% A A A

Table continued on next page

596

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter IL2LowLowLim IL2Min IL2LimHys Range 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0.000 0.000 5.000 Unit A A % Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits

IL3ZeroDb IL3HiHiLim IL3HiLim IL3LowLim IL3LowLowLim IL3Min IL3LimHys

0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

0 900.000 800.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000

m% A A A A A %

Table 355:
Parameter UL1DbRepInt

Basic general settings for the VNMMXU (VN01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Base setting for voltage level in kV Maximum value Reporting type

Operation UBase UL1Max UL1RepTyp

Off On 0.05 - 2000.00 0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

0.05 0.001 -

Off 400.00 300000.000 Cyclic

kV V -

UL1LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value

UL1AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

UL2DbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

UL2Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

300000.000

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

597

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter UL2RepTyp Range Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step Default Cyclic Unit Description Reporting type

UL2LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Maximum value Reporting type

UL2AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

UL3DbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

UL3Max UL3RepTyp

0.000 10000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

0.001 -

300000.000 Cyclic

V -

UL3LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s

UL3AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

Type

Table 356:
Parameter UL1ZeroDb UL1HiHiLim UL1HiLim UL1LowLim UL1LowLowLim UAmpComp100

Advanced general settings for the VNMMXU (VN01-) function

Range 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000 Step 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000 200000.000 0.000 Unit m% V V V V % Description Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur Minimum value Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)

UL1Min UL2ZeroDb UL2HiHiLim UL2HiLim UL2LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000

0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000

V m% V V V

Table continued on next page

598

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter UL2LowLowLim UL2Min UL3ZeroDb UL3HiHiLim UL3HiLim UL3LowLim UL3LowLowLim UL3Min Range 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0 - 100000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 0.000 10000000000.000 Step 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Default 200000.000 0.000 0 260000.000 240000.000 220000.000 200000.000 0.000 Unit V V m% V V V V V Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

Table 357:
Parameter UL12DbRepInt

Basic general settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% kV V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range Base setting for voltage level in kV High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of Ur Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of Ur Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100% of Ur

Operation UL12ZeroDb UBase UL12HiHiLim

Off On 0 - 100000 0.05 - 2000.00 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000

1 0.05 0.001

On 0 400.00 460000.000

UL12HiLim

0.001

450000.000

UAmpComp5

0.001

0.000

UAmpComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

UL12LowLim

-10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10.000 - 10.000

0.001

380000.000

UL12LowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

UAmpComp100

0.001

0.000

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

599

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter UL12Min Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 0.000 Unit V Description Minimum value

UL12Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

UL12RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

UL12LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

UL12AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

UL12AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

UL23DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% V

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

UL23ZeroDb UL23HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

UL23HiLim

0.001

450000.000

UL23LowLim

0.001

380000.000

UL23LowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

UL23Min

0.001

0.000

UL23Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

UL23RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

UL23LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

UL23AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

UL23AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

Table continued on next page

600

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter UL31DbRepInt Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

UL31ZeroDb UL31HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

UL31HiLim

0.001

450000.000

UL31LowLim

0.001

380000.000

UL31LowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

UL31Min

0.001

0.000

UL31Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

UL31RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

UL31LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

UL31AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

UL31AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

Table 358:
Parameter 3I0DbRepInt

Basic general settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% A Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value)

3I0ZeroDb 3I0HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

1 0.001

0 900.000

3I0HiLim

0.001

800.000

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

601

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter 3I0LowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default -800.000 Unit A Description Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

3I0LowLowLim

0.001

-900.000

3I0Min

0.001

0.000

3I0Max

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

3I0RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

3I0LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Reporting type

3I0AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

Operation 3I0AngRepTyp

Off On Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Off Cyclic

I1DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% A

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

I1ZeroDb I1HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

1 0.001

0 900.000

I1HiLim

0.001

800.000

I1LowLim

0.001

-800.000

I1LowLowLim

0.001

-900.000

I1Min

0.001

0.000

I1Max

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

I1RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

Table continued on next page

602

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter I1LimHys Range 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit % Description Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

I1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

I1AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

I2DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% A

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

I2ZeroDb I2HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 900.000

I2HiLim

0.001

800.000

I2LowLim

0.001

-800.000

I2LowLowLim

0.001

-900.000

I2Min

0.001

0.000

I2Max

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

I2RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

I2LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

I2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

I2AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

603

Section 13 Monitoring

Table 359:
Parameter 3U0DbRepInt

Basic general settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit s,%, %s 1/100 0% V Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

3U0ZeroDb 3U0HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

3U0HiLim

0.001

450000.000

3U0LowLim

0.001

380000.000

3U0LowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

3U0Min

0.001

0.000

3U0Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

3U0RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

3U0LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Operation Mode On / Off Reporting type

3U0AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

Operation 3U0AngRepTyp

Off On Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Off Cyclic

U1DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% V

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value)

U1ZeroDb U1HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

1 0.001

0 460000.000

U1HiLim

0.001

450000.000

U1LowLim

0.001

380000.000

Table continued on next page

604

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter U1LowLowLim Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 350000.000 Unit V Description Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

U1Min

0.001

0.000

U1Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

U1RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

U1LimHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

U1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

U1AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 1 - 300

Cyclic

U2DbRepInt

10

s,%, %s 1/100 0% V

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit (physical value) High limit (physical value) Low limit (physical value) Low Low limit (physical value) Minimum value

U2ZeroDb U2HiHiLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

1 0.001

0 460000.000

U2HiLim

0.001

450000.000

U2LowLim

0.001

380000.000

U2LowLowLim

0.001

350000.000

U2Min

0.001

0.000

U2Max

0.001

450000.000

Maximum value

U2RepTyp

Cyclic

Reporting type

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

605

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter U2LimHys Range 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit % Description Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Reporting type

U2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

10

s,%, %s -

U2AngRepTyp

Cyclic Dead band Int deadband

Cyclic

13.1.6

Technical data
Table 360:
Function Frequency Voltage Connected current Active power, P Reactive power, Q Apparent power, S Power factor, cos ()

Measurements (MMXU)
Range or value (0.95-1.05) fr (0.1-1.5) Ur (0.2-4.0) Ir 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir Accuracy 2.0 mHz 0.5% of Ur at UUr 0.5% of U at U > Ur 0.5% of Ir at I Ir 0.5% of I at I > Ir 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 1.0% of Sr at S Sr 1.0% of S at S > Sr 0.02

13.2

Event counter (GGIO)

Function block name: CNTxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: CNTGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

13.2.1

Introduction
The function consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of times each counter input has been activated.

606

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring 13.2.2 Principle of operation

The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses per second. The maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the counter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take place. To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. The CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption. The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters at testing. All inputs are configured via PCM 600, CAP531 Application configuration tool.

13.2.2.1

Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input. Refer to Operators manual for procedure. Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from MicroSCADA. The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI graphical display.

13.2.2.2

Design
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each positive edge of the input respectively. The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six counters are blocked and are not updated. Valid number is held. The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters are set to 0.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

607

Section 13 Monitoring 13.2.3 Function block

CNT1CNTGGIO BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 RESET en05000345.vsd

Figure 290:

CNT function block

13.2.4

Input signals
Table 361:
Signal BLOCK COUNTER1 COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 RESET

Input signals for the CNTGGIO (CNT1-) function block

Description Block of function Input for counter1 Input for counter2 Input for counter3 Input for counter4 Input for counter5 Input for counter6 Reset of function

13.2.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

13.2.6

Technical data
Table 362:
Function Counter value Max. count up speed

Event counter (GGIO)

Range or value 0-10000 10 pulses/s Accuracy -

13.3

Event function (EV)

608

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

Function block name: EVxxANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: Event

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

13.3.1

Introduction
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPA communication. Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.

13.3.2

Principle of operation
The main purpose of the event function block is to generate events when the state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition, for which event generation is enabled. Each event function block has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single events, but are also intended for double indication events. The function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events. The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of the event function block. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of 1 ms. The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to be used by the station level. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears. The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The event mask can be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

609

Section 13 Monitoring

NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of the event function block that shall generate events. This can be performed individually for the LON and SPA communication respectively. For each communication type these settings are available: Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16

For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input channel. To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel equals 3 times the configurable setting MaxEvPerSec.

610

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring 13.3.3 Function block

EV01Event BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 en05000697.vsd

13.3.4

Input and output signals

Table 363:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 Table continued on next page

Input signals for the Event (EV01-) function block

Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

611

Section 13 Monitoring
Signal INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 Description Input 14 Input 15 Input 16

13.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 364:
Parameter SPAChannelMask

Basic general settings for the Event (EV01-) function

Range Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 Off Channel 1-8 Channel 9-16 Channel 1-16 NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect Step Default Off Unit Description SPA channel mask

LONChannelMask

Off

LON channel mask

EventMask1

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 1

EventMask2

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 2

EventMask3

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 3

EventMask4

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 4

EventMask5

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 5

EventMask6

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 6

EventMask7

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 7

Table continued on next page

612

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter EventMask8 Range NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect NoEvents OnSet OnReset OnChange AutoDetect 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step Default AutoDetect Unit Description Reporting criteria for input 8

EventMask9

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 9

EventMask10

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 10

EventMask11

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 11

EventMask12

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 12

EventMask13

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 13

EventMask14

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 14

EventMask15

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 15

EventMask16

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 16

MinRepIntVal1 MinRepIntVal2 MinRepIntVal3 MinRepIntVal4 MinRepIntVal5

1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2

s s s s s

Minimum reporting interval input 1 Minimum reporting interval input 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3 Minimum reporting interval input 4 Minimum reporting interval input 5

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

613

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter MinRepIntVal6 MinRepIntVal7 MinRepIntVal8 MinRepIntVal9 MinRepIntVal10 MinRepIntVal11 MinRepIntVal12 MinRepIntVal13 MinRepIntVal14 MinRepIntVal15 MinRepIntVal16 Range 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Unit s s s s s s s s s s s Description Minimum reporting interval input 6 Minimum reporting interval input 7 Minimum reporting interval input 8 Minimum reporting interval input 9 Minimum reporting interval input 10 Minimum reporting interval input 11 Minimum reporting interval input 12 Minimum reporting interval input 13 Minimum reporting interval input 14 Minimum reporting interval input 15 Minimum reporting interval input 16

13.4

Measured value expander block

Function block name: XP ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: RANGE_XP IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

13.4.1

Introduction
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO (MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic.

614

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring 13.4.2 Principle of operation

The input signal must be connected to the RANGE-output of a measuring function block (MMXU, MSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to table 365.
Table 365: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
below low-low between low limit low and low limit High High High High High between low and high limit between high- above highhigh and high high limit limit

Measured supervised value is: Output: LOWLOW LOW NORMAL HIGH HIGHHIGH

13.4.3

Function block
RANGE XP01RANGE_XP HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LO W LOWLOW en05000346.vsd

Figure 291:

XP function block

13.4.4

Input and output signals

Table 366:
Signal RANGE

Input signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block

Description Measured value range

Table 367:
Signal HIGHHIGH HIGH NORMAL LOW LOWLOW

Output signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block

Description Measured value is above high-high limit Measured value is between high and high-high limit Measured value is between high and low limit Measured value is between low and low-low limit Measured value is below low-low limit

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

615

Section 13 Monitoring

13.5

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- DRA4-, DRB1- DRB6ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ABRDRE IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

13.5.1

Introduction
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report functionality. The disturbance report, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block i.e. maximum 40 analog and 96 binary signals. The disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions: Event List (EL) Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Trip Value recorder (TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR)

The function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, starting conditions, recording times and large storage capacity. A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input in the DRAx or DRBy function blocks which is set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of prefault time to the end of post-fault time, will be included in the recording. Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about the recordings, but the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

13.5.2

Principle of operation
The disturbance report (DRP) is a common name for several facilities to supply the operator, analysis engineer, etc. with sufficient information about events in the system.

616

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

The facilities included in the disturbance report are: General disturbance information Indications (IND) Event recorder (ER) Event list (EL) Trip values (phase values) (TVR) Disturbance recorder (DR)

Figure ""Figure 292 shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (DRA1-3). The DR function acquires information from both DRAx and DRBx.
DRA1-- 4Disturbance Report DRP- A4RADR Analog signals Trip Value Rec RDRE

DRB1-- 6-

Disturbance Recorder

Binary signals

B6RBDR Event List Event Recorder Indications

en05000160.vsd

Figure 292:

Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time etc. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

617

Section 13 Monitoring

Disturbance report

Record no. N

Record no. N+1

Record no. N+100

General dist. information

Indications

Trip values

Event recordings

Disturbance recording

Event list

en05000161.vsd

Figure 293:

Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is over-written by the new one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. The figure 294 shows number of recordings vs total recording time tested for a typical configuration, i.e. in a 50 Hz system its possible to record 100 where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (IND, ER, EL and TVR).

Number of recordings 100 80 60

6,3 s 3,4 s 40 analog 96 binary 3,4 s 20 analog 96 binary

6,3 s 50 Hz

40

6,3 s 60 Hz

Total recording time 250 300 350 400 s

en05000488.vsd

Figure 294:

Number of recordings.

Disturbance information

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are available on the local human-machine interface (LHMI). To acquire a 618 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

complete disturbance report the use of a PC and PCM600 is required. The PC may be connected to the IED-front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

Indications (IND)

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the disturbance (not time-tagged). (See section "Indications (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or PCM 600. (See section "Event recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

Event recorder (ER)

Event list (EL)

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via LHMI or PCM 600. (See section "Event list (RDRE)" for more detailed information.) The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during the fault. (See section "Trip value recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

Trip value recorder (TVR)

Disturbance recorder (DR)

The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault. (See section "Disturbance recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

Time tagging

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging within the disturbance report

Recording times

The disturbance report (DRP) records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. The disturbance recorder (DR), the event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time. The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording =

PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

619

Section 13 Monitoring

Trig point TimeLimit PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

3
en05000487.vsd

Figure 295:
PreFaultRecT, 1 tFault, 2

The recording times definition

Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time. Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).

PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time. TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances.Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external analog signals, i.e. signals from the analog input modules (TRM) and line differential communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (Sum3Ph). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents etc.).

620

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

PRxxSMAI External analog signals TRM, LDCM SUxx GRPNAME AI1NAME AI2NAME AI3NAME AI4NAME AI3P AI1 AI2 AI3 AI4 AIN

DRA1A1RADR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 ... A4RADR INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 ... INPUT40
en05000653.vsd

DRA2A2RADR DRA3A3RADR

Internal analog signals T2Dx, T3Dx, REFx, HZDx, L3D, L6D, LT3D, LT6D SVRx, CPxx, VP0x, CSQx, VSQx, MVxx

Figure 296:

Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration) available as an input signal on the DRAx- function block via the PRxx function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, the Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available. If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used. The preprocessor function block (PRxx) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). PRxx makes the information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as a input signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the PRxx-block. Connect the signals to the DRAx accordingly. For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

621

Section 13 Monitoring

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers. Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by the disturbance report.The signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be recorded when: the corresponding function block is included in the configuration the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Binary signals

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (operationON/OFF). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI (setLED=On/Off). The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with the LHMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

Trigger signals

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions. A trigger can be of type: Manual trigger Binary-signal trigger Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, from PCM600 or via station bus (IEC61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to Operators manual for procedure.

Binary-signal trigger

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe. 622 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name. If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately performed for each channel. This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network. All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600, see table 368. The disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during a recording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line. In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = On)during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording. When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new complete recording will be fetched. The disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

Post Retrigger

13.5.3

Function block
DRP-RDRE DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED en05000406.vsd

Figure 297:

DRP function block

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

623

Section 13 Monitoring

DRA1A1RADR INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 en05000430.vsd

Figure 298:

DRA1 function block, analog inputs, example for DRA1DRA3

DRA4A4RADR INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40 NAME31 NAME32 NAME33 NAME34 NAME35 NAME36 NAME37 NAME38 NAME39 NAME40 en05000431.vsd

Figure 299:

DRA4 function block, derived analog inputs

624

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

DRB1B1RBDR INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 en05000432.vsd

Figure 300:

DRB1 function block, binary inputs, example for DRB1DRB6

13.5.4

Input and output signals

Table 368:
Signal DRPOFF RECSTART RECMADE CLEARED MEMUSED

Output signals for the RDRE (DRP--) function block

Description Disturbance report function turned off Disturbance recording started Disturbance recording made All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared More than 80% of memory used

Table 369:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5

Input signals for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function block

Description Group signal for input 1 Group signal for input 2 Group signal for input 3 Group signal for input 4 Group signal for input 5

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

625

Section 13 Monitoring
Signal INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 Description Group signal for input 6 Group signal for input 7 Group signal for input 8 Group signal for input 9 Group signal for input 10

Table 370:
Signal INPUT31 INPUT32 INPUT33 INPUT34 INPUT35 INPUT36 INPUT37 INPUT38 INPUT39 INPUT40

Input signals for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function block

Description Analogue channel 31 Analogue channel 32 Analogue channel 33 Analogue channel 34 Analogue channel 35 Analogue channel 36 Analogue channel 37 Analogue channel 38 Analogue channel 39 Analogue channel 40

Table 371:
Signal INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16

Input signals for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function block

Description Binary channel 1 Binary channel 2 Binary channel 3 Binary channel 4 Binary channel 5 Binary channel 6 Binary channel 7 Binary channel 8 Binary channel 9 Binary channel 10 Binary channel 11 Binary channel 12 Binary channel 13 Binary channel 14 Binary channel 15 Binary channel 16

626

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring 13.5.5 Setting parameters

Table 372:
Parameter Operation PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT TimeLimit PostRetrig

Basic general settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function

Range Off On 0.05 - 1.00 0.1 - 10.0 0.5 - 10.0 Off On 1 - 30 Step 0.01 0.1 0.1 Default Off 0.10 0.5 1.0 Off Unit s s s Description Operation Off/On Pre-fault recording time Post-fault recording time Fault recording time limit Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off) Trip value recorder, phasor reference channel Operation mode during test mode

ZeroAngleRef

Ch

OpModeTest

Off On

Off

Table 373:
Parameter Operation01 NomValue01 UnderTrigOp01

Basic general settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function

Range Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Step 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Off Unit Description Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 1 Use under level trig for analogue cha 1 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 1 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 1 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 1 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 2 Use under level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off)

UnderTrigLe01

50

OverTrigOp01

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe01

200

Operation02 NomValue02 UnderTrigOp02

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

627

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter UnderTrigLe02 Range 0 - 200 Step 1 Default 50 Unit % Description Under trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 2 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 2 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 3 Use under level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 3 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 3 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 4 Use under level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 4 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 4 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 5 Use under level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal

OverTrigOp02

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe02

200

Operation03 NomValue03 UnderTrigOp03

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe03

50

OverTrigOp03

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe03

200

Operation04 NomValue04 UnderTrigOp04

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe04

50

OverTrigOp04

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe04

200

Operation05 NomValue05 UnderTrigOp05

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe05

50

Table continued on next page

628

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter OverTrigOp05 Range Off On 0 - 5000 Step Default Off Unit Description Use over level trig for analogue cha 5 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 5 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 6 Use under level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 6 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 6 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 7 Use under level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 7 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 7 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 8 Use under level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 8 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe05

200

Operation06 NomValue06 UnderTrigOp06

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe06

50

OverTrigOp06

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe06

200

Operation07 NomValue07 UnderTrigOp07

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe07

50

OverTrigOp07

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe07

200

Operation08 NomValue08 UnderTrigOp08

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe08

50

OverTrigOp08

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

629

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter OverTrigLe08 Range 0 - 5000 Step 1 Default 200 Unit % Description Over trigger level for analogue cha 8 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 9 Use under level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 9 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 9 in % of signal Operation On/Off Nominal value for analogue channel 10 Use under level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 10 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 10 in % of signal

Operation09 NomValue09 UnderTrigOp09

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe09

50

OverTrigOp09

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe09

200

Operation10 NomValue10 UnderTrigOp10

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe10

50

OverTrigOp10

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe10

200

Table 374:
Parameter Operation31 NomValue31 UnderTrigOp31

Basic general settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function

Range Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Step 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Off Unit Description Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 31 Use under level trig for analogue cha 31 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 31 in % of signal

UnderTrigLe31

50

Table continued on next page

630

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter OverTrigOp31 Range Off On 0 - 5000 Step Default Off Unit Description Use over level trig for analogue cha 31 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 31 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 32 Use under level trig for analogue cha 32 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 32 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 32 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 33 Use under level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 33 (on) or not (off) Overtrigger level for analogue cha 33 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 34 Use under level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 34 (on) or not (off)

OverTrigLe31

200

Operation32 NomValue32 UnderTrigOp32

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe32

50

OverTrigOp32

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe32

200

Operation33 NomValue33 UnderTrigOp33

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe33

50

OverTrigOp33

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe33

200

Operation34 NomValue34 UnderTrigOp34

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe34

50

OverTrigOp34

Off On

Off

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

631

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter OverTrigLe34 Range 0 - 5000 Step 1 Default 200 Unit % Description Over trigger level for analogue cha 34 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 35 Use under level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 35 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 35 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 36 Use under level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 36 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 36 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 37 Use under level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 37 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 37 in % of signal

Operation35 NomValue35 UnderTrigOp35

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe35

50

OverTrigOp35

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe35

200

Operation36 NomValue36 UnderTrigOp36

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe36

50

OverTrigOp36

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe36

200

Operation37 NomValue37 UnderTrigOp37

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe37

50

OverTrigOp37

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe37

200

Table continued on next page

632

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter Operation38 NomValue38 UnderTrigOp38 Range Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200 Step 0.1 Default Off 0.0 Off Unit Description Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 38 Use under level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 38 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 38 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 39 Use under level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 39 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 39 in % of signal Operation On/off Nominal value for analogue channel 40 Use under level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off) Under trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal Use over level trig for analogue cha 40 (on) or not (off) Over trigger level for analogue cha 40 in % of signal

UnderTrigLe38

50

OverTrigOp38

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe38

200

Operation39 NomValue39 UnderTrigOp39

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe39

50

OverTrigOp39

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe39

200

Operation40 NomValue40 UnderTrigOp40

Off On 0.0 - 999999.9 Off On 0 - 200

0.1 -

Off 0.0 Off

UnderTrigLe40

50

OverTrigOp40

Off On 0 - 5000

Off

OverTrigLe40

200

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

633

Section 13 Monitoring

Table 375:
Parameter Operation01 TrigLevel01

Basic general settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function

Range Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Step Default Off Trig on 1 Unit Description Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 1 Indication mask for binary channel 1 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 1 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 2 Indication mask for binary channel 2 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 2 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 3 Indication mask for binary channel 3 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 3 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 4 Indication mask for binary channel 4 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 4 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 5 Indication mask for binary channel 5 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 5 Trigger operation On/ Off

IndicationMa01 SetLED01 Operation02 TrigLevel02

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa02 SetLED02 Operation03 TrigLevel03

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa03 SetLED03 Operation04 TrigLevel04

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa04 SetLED04 Operation05 TrigLevel05

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa05 SetLED05 Operation06

Hide Off Off

Table continued on next page

634

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter TrigLevel06 Range Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Step Default Trig on 1 Unit Description Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 6 Indication mask for binary channel 6 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 6 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 7 Indication mask for binary channel 7 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 7 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 8 Indication mask for binary channel 8 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 8 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 9 Indication mask for binary channel 9 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 9 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 10 Indication mask for binary channel 10 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 10 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 11 Indication mask for binary channel 11

IndicationMa06 SetLED06 Operation07 TrigLevel07

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa07 SetLED07 Operation08 TrigLevel08

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa08 SetLED08 Operation09 TrigLevel09

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa09 SetLED09 Operation10 TrigLevel10

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa10 SetLED10 Operation11 TrigLevel11

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa11

Hide

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

635

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter SetLED11 Operation12 TrigLevel12 Range Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On Off On Trig on 0 Trig on 1 Hide Show Off On 0 - 255 Step Default Off Off Trig on 1 Unit Description Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 11 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 12 Indication mask for binary channel 12 Set red-LED on HMI for binary input 12 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 13 Indication mask for binary channel 13 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 13 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 14 Indication mask for binary channel 14 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 14 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 15 Indication mask for binary channel 15 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 15 Trigger operation On/ Off Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for binary inp 16 Indication mask for binary channel 16 Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 16 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103)

IndicationMa12 SetLED12 Operation13 TrigLevel13

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa13 SetLED13 Operation14 TrigLevel14

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa14 SetLED14 Operation15 TrigLevel15

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa15 SetLED15 Operation16 TrigLevel16

Hide Off Off Trig on 1

IndicationMa16 SetLED16 FUNT1

Hide Off 0

FunT

Table continued on next page

636

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter FUNT2 Range 0 - 255 Step 1 Default 0 Unit FunT Description Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC -60870-5-103)

FUNT3

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT4

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT5

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT6

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT7

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT8

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT9

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT10

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT11

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT12

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT13

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT14

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT15

0 - 255

FunT

FUNT16

0 - 255

FunT

INFNO1

0 - 255

INFN O INFN O

INFNO2

0 - 255

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

637

Section 13 Monitoring
Parameter INFNO3 Range 0 - 255 Step 1 Default 0 Unit INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O INFN O Description Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 10 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 11 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 12 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 13 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 14 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 15 (IEC -60870-5-103) Information number for binary channel 16 (IEC -60870-5-103)

INFNO4

0 - 255

INFNO5

0 - 255

INFNO6

0 - 255

INFNO7

0 - 255

INFNO8

0 - 255

INFNO9

0 - 255

INFNO10

0 - 255

INFNO11

0 - 255

INFNO12

0 - 255

INFNO13

0 - 255

INFNO14

0 - 255

INFNO15

0 - 255

INFNO16

0 - 255

13.5.6

Technical data

638

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

Table 376:
Function Pre-fault time Post-fault time Limit time

Disturbance report (RDRE)

Range or value (0.050.30) s (0.15.0) s (0.56.0) s 100 1 ms 30 + 10 (external + internally derived) 96 30 Accuracy See table27 -

Maximum number of recordings Time tagging resolution Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of binary inputs Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording Maximum number of events in the Event list Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value) Sampling rate Recording bandwidth

96 150 1000, first in - first out 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz 1 kHz at 50 Hz 1.2 kHz at 60 Hz (5-300) Hz

13.6
13.6.1

Event list (RDRE)

Introduction
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring of the system from an overview perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions. The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The list may contain of up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer. The event list information is available in the IED and is reported to higher control systems via the station bus together with other logged events in the IED. In absence of any software tool the information seeker may use the local HMI to view the event list.

13.6.2

Principle of operation
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list in

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

639

Section 13 Monitoring

chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten when a new event arrives. The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the LHMI. The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function, which is only active during a disturbance. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function (ER). The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).

13.6.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

13.6.4

Input signals
The event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the Disturbance Report function.

13.6.5

Technical data
Table 377:
Function Buffer capacity Resolution Accuracy Maximum number of events in the list

Event list (RDRE)

Value 1000 1 ms Depending on time synchronizing

13.7
13.7.1

Indications (RDRE)
Introduction
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system it is important to know e.g. binary signals that have

640

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective to get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way. There are three LEDs on the LHMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status information about the IED and the Disturbance Report function (trigged). The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function that have changed status during a disturbance. The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the information.

13.7.2

Principle of operation
The LED indications display this information: Green LED:
Steady light Flashing light Dark In Service Internal fail No power supply

Yellow LED:
Steady light Flashing light A disturbance report is triggered The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode

Red LED:
Steady light Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On

Indication list: The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance report function and disturbance recorder The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of indications the:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

641

Section 13 Monitoring

the signal must be connected to binary input (DRB1-6) function block the DRP parameter Operation must be set On the DRP must be trigged (binary or analog) the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.

Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuring the binary inputs. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the userdefined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER).

13.7.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

13.7.4

Input signals
The indication function may log the same binary input signals as the Disturbance Report function.

13.7.5

Technical data
Table 378:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance Maximum number of recorded disturbances

Indications
Value 96 100

13.8
13.8.1

Event recorder (RDRE)

Introduction
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. corrective actions) and in the long term (e.g. Functional Analysis). The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance Report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.

642

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED. The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool. The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).

13.8.2

Principle of operation
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report flash memory at the end of each recording. In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signal appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files. The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER). The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.

13.8.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

13.8.4

Input signals
The event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance Report function.

13.8.5

Technical data

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

643

Section 13 Monitoring

Table 379:
Function Buffer capacity

Event recorder (RDRE)

Value Maximum number of events in disturbance report Maximum number of disturbance reports 150 100 1 ms Depending on time synchronizing

Resolution Accuracy

13.9
13.9.1

Trip value recorder (RDRE)

Introduction
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for the disturbance evaluation. The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal. The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED. The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool. The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record (Comtrade file).

13.9.2

Principle of operation
The trip value recorder (TVR) calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault amplitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference. The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL). When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number. When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after

644

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the signals. If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as prefault and fault values. The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the Disturbance recorder function (DR). The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FLOC) and managed in via the LHMI or PCM 600.

13.9.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP- block and uses information from the DRBx- block.

13.9.4

Input signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to DRA1-3 (not DRA4).

13.9.5

Technical data
Table 380:
Function Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of disturbance reports

Trip value recorder (RDRE)

Value 30 100

13.10
13.10.1

Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Introduction
The Disturbance Recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (e.g. corrective actions) and long perspective (e.g. Functional Analysis). The Disturbance Recorder acquires sampled data from all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the Disturbance Report function (maximum 40 analog

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

645

Section 13 Monitoring

and 96 binary signals). The binary signals are the same signals as available under the event recorder function. The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions. The disturbance recorder information for the last 100 disturbances are saved in the IED and the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to view the list of recordings. The disturbance recording information can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.

13.10.2

Principle of operation
Disturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differential communication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derived analog signals. For details, refer to section "Disturbance report (RDRE)". DR collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time. Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the postfault time and it can be set in the disturbance report. The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory, intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the oldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED. The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig). A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for all functions within the disturbance report functionality.

13.10.2.1

Memory and storage

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs. This post-recording processing comprises:

646

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance Handling tool (part of PCM 600) Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation. The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT). The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the disturbance i.e. information from the Disturbance Report functions (ER, TVR). The Disturbance Handling tool use this information and present the recording in a userfriendly way. General: Station name, object name and unit name Date and time for the trig of the disturbance Record number Sampling rate Time synchronization source Recording times Activated trig signal Active setting group

Analog: Signal names for selected analog channels Information e.g. trig on analog inputs Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating Over- or Undertrig: level and operation Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig CT direction

Binary: Signal names Status of binary input signals

The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency, channel info etc. The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number and time stamp for each set of samples.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

647

Section 13 Monitoring
13.10.2.2 IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbance recordings from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). The standard describes how to handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages) using the public range and binary signals. The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master. When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED). To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first 8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the private range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to table 381.
Table 381:
Signal IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UN

Configuration of analog channels

Disturbance recorder DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 DRA1 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8

The binary signals connected to DRB1-DRB6 are reported by polling. The function blocks include function type and information number.

13.10.3

Function block
The object has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRP-, DRAx and DRBx- block.

13.10.4

Input and output signals

For signals see section, in Disturbance report, "Input and output signals".

13.10.5

Setting parameters
For Setting parameters see table 372 - table 375.

13.10.6
648

Technical data
Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 13 Monitoring

Table 382:
Function Buffer capacity

Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Value Maximum number of analog inputs Maximum number of binary inputs Maximum number of disturbance reports 40 96 100 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of channels, typical value)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

649

650

Section 14 Metering

Section 14 Metering
About this chapter
This chapter describes among others, Pulse counter logic which is a function used to meter externally generated binary pulses. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

14.1

Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Function block name: PCx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: PCGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

14.1.1

Introduction
The pulse counter logic function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the pulse counter function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality.

14.1.2

Principle of operation
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset. The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60 minutes and is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

651

Section 14 Metering

The pulse counter in REx670 supports unidirectional incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED. The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Value, Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of: Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error) Wrapped around Blocked Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. The pulse counter function updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function. The pulse counter function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that is specially adapted to the pulse counter function. Figure 301 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and outputs.
SingleCmdFunc OUTx SingleCmdFunc OUTx I/O-module Pulse INPUT OUT Pulse length >1s Reset counter PulseCounter BLOCK INVALID RESTART READ_VAL BLOCKED NEW_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT NAME SCAL_VAL EVENT INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4

IEC EVENT

SMS settings 1.Operation = Off/On 2.tReporting = 0s...60min 3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events 4.Scale = 1-90000

Database Pulse counter value: 0...2147483647

en05000744.vsd

Figure 301:

Overview of the pulse counter function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks, which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected 652 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 14 Metering

to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second. The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module (BIM). The NAME input is used for a user-defined name with up to 13 characters. The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter. Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block. The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration. The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED startup, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle. The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two reasons why the counter is blocked: The BLOCK input is set, or The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since last report. The SCAL_VAL signal consists of value, time and status information.

14.1.3

Function block
PC01PCGGIO BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT NAME INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL SCAL_VAL en05000709.vsd

Figure 302:

PC function block

14.1.4

Input and output signals

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

653

Section 14 Metering

Table 383:
Signal BLOCK READ_VAL BI_PULSE RS_CNT

Input signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block

Description Block of function Initiates an additional pulse counter reading Connect binary input channel for metering Resets pulse counter value

Table 384:
Signal INVALID RESTART BLOCKED NEW_VAL SCAL_VAL

Output signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block

Description The pulse counter value is invalid The reported value does not comprise a complete integration cycle The pulse counter function is blocked A new pulse counter value is generated Scaled value with time and status information

14.1.5

Setting parameters
Table 385:
Parameter Operation EventMask

Basic general settings for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function

Range Off On NoEvents ReportEvents Off RisingEdge Falling edge OnChange 1.000 - 90000.000 Step Default Off NoEvents Unit Description Operation Off/On Report mask for analog events from pulse counter Pulse counter criteria

CountCriteria

RisingEdge

Scale

0.001

1.000

Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit per counted value Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output

Quantity

Count ActivePower ApparentPower ReactivePower ActiveEnergy ApparentEnergy ReactiveEnergy 0 - 3600

Count

tReporting

60

Cycle time for reporting of counter value

14.1.6
654

Technical data
Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 14 Metering

Table 386:
Function Input frequency

Pulse counter logic (GGIO)

Setting range See Binary Input Module (BIM) (03600) s Accuracy -

Cycle time for report of counter value

14.2

Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)

Function block name: ETPx ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: ETPMMTR IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

14.2.1

Introduction
Outputs from measurement function (MMXU) can be used to calculate energy. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import respectively export direction. Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also calculated by the function.

14.2.2

Principle of operation
The instantaneous values outputs of active and reactive power from the Measurements (CVMMXU) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the integrated energy. The energy values are presented as communication outputs but also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter. Values are in Ws resp Vars. Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset from the HMI reset menu or with input RSTACC. The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXRAFD, MAXRARD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until reset with input RSTDMD or from the LHMI reset menu.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

655

Section 14 Metering

SVR1 CVMMXU

PINST QINST

P Q

ETP1 ETPMMTR

TRUE FALSE FALSE

STACC RSTACC RSTDMD

en07000121.vsd

Figure 303:

Connection of the energy metering function to the outputs of the measuring function

14.2.3

Function block
ETP1ETPMMTR P Q STACC RSTACC RSTDMD ACCST EAFPULSE EARPULSE ERFPULSE ERRPULSE EAFALM EARALM ERFALM ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD MAXPRRD en07000120.vsd

Figure 304:

ETP function block

14.2.4

Input and output signals

Table 387:
Signal P Q STACC RSTACC RSTDMD

Input signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block

Description Measured active power Measured reactive power Start to accumulate energy values Reset accumulated energy values. Level sensitive used by ch: reset maximum demand

656

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 14 Metering

Table 388:
Signal ACCST EAFPULSE EARPULSE ERFPULSE ERRPULSE EAFALM EARALM ERFALM ERRALM EAFACC EARACC ERFACC ERRACC MAXPAFD MAXPARD MAXPRFD MAXPRRD

Output signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block

Description Start of accumulating energy values. Accumulated forward active energy pulse Accumulated reverse active energy pulse Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval Accumulated forward active energy value in KWh Accumulated reverse active energy value in kWh Accumulated forward reactive energy value in kVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in kVArh Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction

14.2.5

Setting parameters
Table 389:
Parameter Operation StartAcc

Basic general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function

Range Off On Off On 1 Minute 5 Minutes 10 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes 180 Minutes 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Off Off Unit Description Operation Off/On Activate the accumulation of energy values Time interval for energy calculation

tEnergy

1 Minute

tEnergyOnPls tEnergyOffPls

0.001 0.001

1.000 0.500

s s

Energy accumulated pulse ON time in secs Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in secs Pulse quantity for active forward accumulated energy value

EAFAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

0.001

100.000

MWh

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

657

Section 14 Metering
Parameter EARAccPlsQty Range 0.001 - 10000.000 Step 0.001 Default 100.000 Unit MWh Description Pulse quantity for active reverse accumulated energy value Pulse quantity for reactive forward accumulated energy value Pulse quantity for reactive reverse accumulated energy value

ERFAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

0.001

100.000

MVAr h

ERVAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

0.001

100.000

MVAr h

Table 390:
Parameter EALim ERLim DirEnergyAct

Advanced general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function

Range 0.001 10000000000.000 0.001 10000000000.000 Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Off On 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 - 10000.000 Step 0.001 0.001 Default 1000000.000 1000.000 Forward Unit MWh MVAr h Description Active energy limit Reactive energy limit Direction of active energy flow Forward/ Reverse Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/ Reverse Enable of zero point clamping detection function Zero point clamping level at active Power Zero point clamping level at reactive Power Preset Initial value for forward active energy Preset Initial value for reverse active energy Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy

DirEnergyReac

Forward

EnZeroClamp

On

LevZeroClampP LevZeroClampQ

0.001 0.001

10.000 10.000

MW MVAr

EAFPrestVal EARPrestVal ERFPresetVal

0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000 0.000 - 10000.000

0.001 0.001 0.001

0.000 0.000 0.000

MWh MWh MVAr h MVAr h

ERVPresetVal

0.000 - 10000.000

0.001

0.000

658

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Section 15 Station communication

About this chapter
This chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to the substation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

15.1

Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus. Following communication protocols are available: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol LON communication protocol SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol DNP3.0 communication protocol

Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

15.2
15.2.1

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Introduction
Single or double optical Ethernet ports for the new substation communication standard IEC61850-8-1 for the station bus are provided. IEC61850-8-1 allows intelligent devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies SA engineering. Peer- to peer communication according to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided. When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address 138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IPaddress 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

659

Section 15 Station communication 15.2.2

15.2.2.1

Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)

Introduction
The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

15.2.2.2

Principle of operation
Upon receiving a signal at its input, the SPGGIO function block will send the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests this signal. To be able to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: Engineering of the IED and define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

15.2.2.3

Function block
SP01SPGGIO BLOCK IN NAME en07000124.vsd

Figure 305:

SP function block

660

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

MP01SP16GGIO BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAMEOR

en07000125.vsd

Figure 306:

MP function block

15.2.2.4

Input and output signals

Table 391:
Signal IN

Input signals for the SPGGIO (SP01-) function block

Description Input status

Table 392:
Signal BLOCK IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7

Input signals for the SP16GGIO (MP01-) function block

Description Block of function Input 1 status Input 2 status Input 3 status Input 4 status Input 5 status Input 6 status Input 7 status

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

661

Section 15 Station communication

Signal IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 Description Input 8 status Input 9 status Input 10 status Input 11 status Input 12 status Input 13 status Input 14 status Input 15 status Input 16 status

Table 393:
Signal NAMEOR

Output signals for the SP16GGIO (MP01-) function block

Description User define string for logic OR output signal

15.2.2.5

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600)

15.2.3
15.2.3.1

Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)

Introduction
The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

15.2.3.2

Principle of operation
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the MVGGIO block will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC61850-8-1 the value and the deadband, to other equipment or systems in the substation.

662

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

15.2.3.3 Function block
MV01MVGGIO IN VALUE RANGE en05000408.vsd

Figure 307:

MV function block

15.2.3.4

Input and output signals

Table 394:
Signal BLOCK IN

Input signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block

Description Block of function Analogue input value

Table 395:
Signal VALUE RANGE

Output signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block

Description Magnitude of deadband value Range

15.2.3.5

Setting parameters
Table 396:
Parameter MV db

Basic general settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function

Range 1 - 300 Step 1 Default 10 Unit Type Description Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int Db: In %s Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range High High limit

MV zeroDb MV hhLim

0 - 100000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000

1 0.001

500 90.000

m% -

MV hLim

0.001

80.000

High limit

MV lLim

0.001

-80.000

Low limit

MV llLim

0.001

-90.000

Low Low limit

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

663

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter MV min Range -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 -10000000000.00 010000000000.000 Cyclic Dead band Int deadband 0.000 - 100.000 Step 0.001 Default -100.000 Unit Description Minimum value

MV max

0.001

100.000

Maximum value

MV dbType

Dead band

Reporting type

MV limHys

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all limits)

15.2.4

Setting parameters
Table 397:
Parameter Operation GOOSE

Basic general settings for the IEC61850-8-1 (IEC1-) function

Range Off ON Front OEM311_AB OEM311_CD Step Default Off OEM311_AB Unit Description Operation Off/On Port for GOOSE communication

15.2.5

Technical data
Table 398:
Function Protocol Communication speed for the IEDs

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Value IEC 61850-8-1 100BASE-FX

15.3
15.3.1

LON communication protocol

Introduction
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals. The LON protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low

664

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International Standardization Organization (ISO). In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the LON communication protocol in general.

15.3.2

Principle of operation
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection and control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet). The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master. The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and explicit read and write messages to access device data. The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.

Introduction of LON protocol

For more information see LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control, Users manual and Technical description, 1MRS 750035-MTD EN.

LON protocol
Configuration of LON Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

665

Section 15 Station communication

network is easily accessible on a single tool program. For details see the Operators manual. Activate LONCommunication Activate LON communication in the PST Parameter Setting Tool under Settings -> General settings > Communication > SLM configuration > Rear optical LON, where ADE should be set to ON. Add LON Device Types LNT A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDT IED 670 package version 1p2 r03. LON net address To be able to establish a LON connection with the 670IEDs, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED. Vertical communication Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using explicit messages. Events and indications Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H) with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed in the 670IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal. Binary events Binary events are generated in event function blocks EV01 to EV20 in the 670IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 399 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EV17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294. For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can be used for other type of events at the same event block. As basic, 3 event function blocks EV01-EV03 running with a fast loop time (3 ms) is available in the 670IEDS. The remaining event function blocks EV04-EV09 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EV10-EV20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals. 16 pulse counter value function blocks PC01 to PC16 and 24 mA input service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the 670IEDs.

666

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 399
Table 399:
Function block EV01 EV02 EV03 EV04 EV05 EV06 EV07 EV08 EV09 EV10 EV11 EV12 EV13 EV14 EV15 EV16 EV17 EV18 EV19 EV20

LON adresses for Event functions

First LON address in function block 1024 1040 1056 1072 1088 1104 1120 1136 1152 1168 1184 1200 1216 1232 1248 1264 1280 1296 1312 1328

Event masks The event mask for each input can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) Under: Settings > General Settings > Monitoring > Event function as. No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event function block. Single indication Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 667

Section 15 Station communication

Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the event function block. Double indications Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is done in the event function block. Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an event function block. 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0 01 generates an open event with the read status 1 10 generates a close event with the read status 2 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the event function block.

Figure 308:

Connection of protection signals for event handling.

Command handling

668

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service. Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message. For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, i.e. the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPA addresses are according to table 400

Horizontal communication

Network variables are used for communication between REx 5xx and 670IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values. The multiple command send function block (MTxx) is used to pack the information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by a multiple command function block (CMxx). At horizontal communication the input BOUND on the event function block (MTxx) must be set to 1. There are 10 MT and 60 CM function blocks available. The MT and CM function blocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON. This is an overview description how to configure the network variables for 670IEDs. Configuration of LON network variables Configure the Network variables according to your application from the LON network Tool. For more details see LNT 505 in Operators manual. The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning e.g. interlocking between two 670IEDs.
LON BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MT07

CM09

CM09

en05000718.vsd

Figure 309:

Examples connections between MT and CM function blocks in three terminals.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

669

Section 15 Station communication

The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT window select Connections -> NVConnections -> New

en05000719.vsd

Figure 310:

The network variables window in LNT.

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either you use the drag-anddrop method where you select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there. Or the traditional menu selection, Configuration -> Download...

670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

en05000720.vsd

Figure 311:

The download configuration window in LNT.

Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
Table 400:
Name BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD Table continued on next page

SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Function block SCSWI01 SCSWI02 SCSWI02 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SPA address 1 I 5115 1 I 5139 1 I 5161 1 I 5186 1 I 5210 1 I 5234 1 I 5258 1 I 5283 1 I 5307 Description SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

671

Section 15 Station communication

Name BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD BL_CMD CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SCSWI01 SCSWI02 SCSWI03 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SPA address 1 I 5331 1 I 5355 1 I 5379 1 I 5403 1 I 5427 1 I 5451 1 I 5475 1 I 5499 1 I 5523 1 I 5545 1 I 5571 1 I 5594 1 I 5619 1 I 5643 1 I 5667 1 I 5691 1 I 5715 1 I 5739 1 I 5763 1 I 5787 1 I 5811 1 I 5835 1 I 5859 1 I 5107 1 I 5131 1 I 5153 1 I 5178 1 I 5202 1 I 5226 1 I 5250 1 I 5275 1 I 5299 1 I 5323 Description SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for block command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command

672

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Name CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SPA address 1 I 5347 1 I 5371 1 I 5395 1 I 5419 1 I 5443 1 I 5467 1 I 5491 1 I 5515 1 I 5537 1 I 5563 1 I 5586 1 I 5611 1 I 5635 1 I 5659 1 I 5683 1 I 5707 1 I 5731 1 I 5755 1 I 5779 1 I 5803 1 I 5827 1 I 5851 Description SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command SPA parameters for cancel command

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

673

Section 15 Station communication

Name SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, SELOpen+ILO=10, SELClose+ILO=11, SELOpen+SCO=20, SELClose+SCO=21, SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30, SELClose+ILO+SCO=31 SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI01 SPA address 1 I 5105 Description SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command Note: Send select command before operate command

SCSWI02 SCSWI03 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12 SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22

1 I 5129 1 I 5151 1 I 5176 1 I 5200 1 I 5224 1 I 5248 1 I 5273 1 I 5297 1 I 5321 1 I 5345 1 I 5369 1 I 5393 1 I 5417 1 I 5441 1 I 5465 1 I 5489 1 I 5513 1 I 5535 1 I 5561 1 I 5584 1 I 5609

SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command

674

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Name SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. SELECTOpen=00, SELECTClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, ExcOpen+ILO=10, ExcClose+ILO=11, ExcOpen+SCO=20, ExcClose+SCO=21, ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30, ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31 ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. Table continued on next page Function block SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SCSWI01 SPA address 1 I 5633 1 I 5657 1 I 5681 1 I 5705 1 I 5729 1 I 5753 1 I 5777 1 I 5801 1 I 5825 1 I 5849 1 I 5106 Description SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for select (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command Note: Send select command before operate command

SCSWI02 SCSWI02 SCSWI04 SCSWI05 SCSWI06 SCSWI07 SCSWI08 SCSWI09 SCSWI10 SCSWI11 SCSWI12

1 I 5130 1 I 5152 1 I 5177 1 I 5201 1 I 5225 1 I 5249 1 I 5274 1 I 5298 1 I 5322 1 I 5346 1 I 5370

SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

675

Section 15 Station communication

Name ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. ExcOpen=00, ExcClose=01, etc. Sub Value Function block SCSWI13 SCSWI14 SCSWI15 SCSWI16 SCSWI17 SCSWI18 SCSWI19 SCSWI20 SCSWI21 SCSWI22 SCSWI23 SCSWI24 SCSWI25 SCSWI26 SCSWI27 SCSWI28 SCSWI29 SCSWI30 SCSWI31 SCSWI32 SXCBR01 SPA address 1 I 5394 1 I 5418 1 I 5442 1 I 5466 1 I 5490 1 I 5514 1 I 5536 1 I 5562 1 I 5585 1 I 5610 1 I 5634 1 I 5658 1 I 5682 1 I 5706 1 I 5730 1 I 5754 1 I 5778 1 I 5802 1 I 5826 1 I 5850 2 I 7854 Description SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameters for operate (Open/ Close) command SPA parameter for position to be substituted Note: Send the value before Enable SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted

Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Table continued on next page

SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04

2 I 7866 2 I 7884 2 I 7904

676

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Name Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Table continued on next page Function block SXCBR05 SXCBR06 SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SPA address 2 I 7923 2 I 7942 2 I 7961 2 I 7980 3I7 3 I 26 3 I 45 3 I 56 3 I 74 3 I 94 3 I 120 3 I 133 3 I 158 3 I 179 3 I 196 3 I 216 3 I 235 3 I 254 3 I 272 3 I 292 3 I 310 3 I 330 3 I 348 3 I 359 Description SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

677

Section 15 Station communication

Name Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Value Sub Enable Function block SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28 SXCBR01 SPA address 3 I 378 3 I 397 3 I 416 3 I 435 3 I 454 3 I 473 3 I 492 3 I 511 3 I 530 3 I 549 3 I 568 3 I 587 3 I 606 3 I 625 3 I 644 3 I 663 3 I 682 3 I 701 2 I 7855 Description SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for position to be substituted SPA parameter for substitute enable command Note: Send the Value before Enable SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command

Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Table continued on next page

SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04 SXCBR05 SXCBR06

2 I 7865 2 I 7885 2 I 7903 2 I 7924 2 I 7941

678

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Name Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Table continued on next page Function block SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SPA address 2 I 7962 2 I 7979 3I8 3 I 25 3 I 46 3 I 55 3 I 75 3 I 93 3 I 121 3 I 132 3 I 159 3 I 178 3 I 197 3 I 215 3 I 234 3 I 252 3 I 271 3 I 290 3 I 309 3 I 328 3 I 347 3 I 360 3I 379 3 I 398 Description SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

679

Section 15 Station communication

Name Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Sub Enable Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Table continued on next page Function block SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28 SXCBR01 SXCBR02 SXCBR03 SXCBR04 SXCBR05 SXCBR06 SXCBR07 SXCBR08 SPA address 3 I 417 3 I 436 3 I 455 3 I 474 3 I 493 3 I 512 3 I 531 3 I 550 3 I 569 3 I 588 3 I 607 3 I 626 3 I 645 3 I 664 3 I 683 3 I 702 2 I 7853 2 I 7864 2 I 7883 2 I 7905 2 I 7922 2 I 7943 2 I 7960 2 I 7981 Description SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for substitute enable command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command

680

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Name Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Table continued on next page Function block SXCBR09 SXCBR10 SXCBR11 SXCBR12 SXCBR13 SXCBR14 SXCBR15 SXCBR16 SXCBR17 SXCBR18 SXSWI01 SXSWI02 SXSWI03 SXSWI04 SXSWI05 SXSWI06 SXSWI07 SXSWI08 SXSWI09 SXSWI10 SXSWI11 SXSWI12 SXSWI13 SXSWI14 SPA address 3I6 3 I 27 3 I 44 3 I 57 3 I 73 3 I 92 3 I 122 3 I 131 3 I 160 3 I 177 3 I 198 3 I 214 3 I 236 3 I 253 3 I 273 3 I 291 3 I 311 3 I 329 3 I 349 3 I 358 3 I 377 3 I 396 3 I 415 3 I 434 Description SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

681

Section 15 Station communication

Name Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Update Block Function block SXSWI15 SXSWI16 SXSWI17 SXSWI18 SXSWI19 SXSWI20 SXSWI21 SXSWI22 SXSWI23 SXSWI24 SXSWI25 SXSWI26 SXSWI27 SXSWI28 SPA address 3 I 453 3 I 472 3 I 491 3 I 510 3 I 529 3 I 548 3 I 567 3 I 586 3 I 605 3 I 624 3 I 643 3 I 662 3 I 681 3 I 700 Description SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command SPA parameter for update block command

15.3.3

Setting parameters
Table 401:
Parameter Operation

General settings for the NVLON (NV---) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation

Table 402:
Parameter Operation TimerClass

General settings for the LON (ADE1-) function

Range Off On Slow Normal Fast Step Default Off Slow Unit Description Operation Timer class

682

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication 15.3.4 Technical data

Table 403:
Function Protocol Communication speed

LON communication protocol

Value LON 1.25 Mbit/s

15.4
15.4.1

SPA communication protocol

Introduction
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.

15.4.2

Principle of operation
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. Recommended baud rate for each type of terminal will be found in the Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (e.g. for event information) or only on demand. The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocol

The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an IED 670 with the SPA communication protocol implemented. The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MI03-MI16) are found in table404

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

683

Section 15 Station communication

Table 404:
Function block MI03-CH1 MI03-CH2 MI03-CH3 MI03-CH4 MI03-CH5 MI03-CH6 MI04-CH1 MI04-CH2 MI04-CH3 MI04-CH4 MI04-CH5 MI04-CH6 MI05-CH1 MI05-CH2 MI05-CH3 MI05-CH4 MI05-CH5 MI05-CH6 MI06-CH1 MI06-CH2 MI06-CH3 MI06-CH4 MI06-CH5 MI06-CH6 MI07-CH1 MI07-CH2 MI07-CH3 MI07-CH4 MI07-CH5 MI07-CH6 MI08-CH1 MI08-CH2 MI08-CH3 MI08-CH4 MI08-CH5 MI08-CH6 MI09-CH1 MI09-CH2

SPA addresses for the MIM (MI03-MI16) function

SPA address 4-O-6508 4-O-6511 4-O-6512 4-O-6515 4-O-6516 4-O-6519 4-O-6527 4-O-6530 4-O-6531 4-O-6534 4-O-6535 4-O-6538 4-O-6546 4-O-6549 4-O-6550 4-O-6553 4-O-6554 4-O-6557 4-O-6565 4-O-6568 4-O-6569 4-O-6572 4-O-6573 4-O-6576 4-O-6584 4-O-6587 4-O-6588 4-O-6591 4-O-6592 4-O-6595 4-O-6603 4-O-6606 4-O-6607 4-O-6610 4-O-6611 4-O-6614 4-O-6622 4-O-6625

Table continued on next page

684

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Function block MI09-CH3 MI09-CH4 MI09-CH5 MI09-CH6 MI10-CH1 MI10-CH2 MI10-CH3 MI10-CH4 MI10-CH5 MI10-CH6 MI11-CH1 MI11-CH2 MI11-CH3 MI11-CH4 MI11-CH5 MI11-CH6 MI12-CH1 MI12-CH2 MI12-CH3 MI12-CH4 MI12-CH5 MI12-CH6 MI13-CH1 MI13-CH2 MI13-CH3 MI13-CH4 MI13-CH5 MI13-CH6 MI14-CH1 MI14-CH2 MI14-CH3 MI14-CH4 MI14-CH5 MI14-CH6 MI15-CH1 MI15-CH2 MI15-CH3 MI15-CH4 MI15-CH5 Table continued on next page SPA address 4-O-6626 4-O-6629 4-O-6630 4-O-6633 4-O-6641 4-O-6644 4-O-6645 4-O-6648 4-O-6649 4-O-6652 4-O-6660 4-O-6663 4-O-6664 4-O-6667 4-O-6668 4-O-6671 4-O-6679 4-O-6682 4-O-6683 4-O-6686 4-O-6687 4-O-6690 4-O-6698 4-O-6701 4-O-6702 4-O-6705 4-O-6706 4-O-6709 4-O-6717 4-O-6720 4-O-6721 4-O-6724 4-O-6725 4-O-6728 4-O-6736 4-O-6739 4-O-6740 4-O-6743 4-O-6744

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

685

Section 15 Station communication

Function block MI15-CH6 MI16-CH1 MI16-CH2 MI16-CH3 MI16-CH4 MI16-CH5 MI16-CH6 SPA address 4-O-6747 4-O-6755 4-O-6758 4-O-6759 4-O-6762 4-O-6763 4-O-6766

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PC01 PC16 are found in table 405
Table 405:
Function block PC01 PC02 PC03 PC04 PC05 PC06 PC07 PC08 PC09 PC10 PC11 PC12 PC13 PC14 PC15 PC16

SPA addresses for the PCGGIO (PC01-PC16 function)

SPA address CNT_VAL 3-O-5834 3-O-5840 3-O-5846 3-O-5852 3-O-5858 3-O-5864 3-O-5870 3-O-5876 3-O-5882 3-O-5888 3-O-5894 3-O-5900 3-O-5906 3-O-5912 3-O-5918 3-O-5924 SPA address NEW_VAL 3-O-5833 3-O-5839 3-O-5845 3-O-5851 3-O-5857 3-O-5863 3-O-5869 3-O-5875 3-O-5881 3-O-5887 3-O-5893 3-O-5899 3-O-5905 3-O-5911 3-O-5917 3-O-5923

I/O modules To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block are used, i.e. the addresses for BI1 BI16. The SPA addresses are found in a separate document, refer to section "Related documents". Single command function The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.

686

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

The single command function consists of three function blocks; CD01 CD03 for 16 binary output signals each. The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. The SPA addresses for the single command function (CD) are shown in Table 3. For the single command function block, CD01 to CD03, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD02 function block has the 5O533 address. The SPA addresses for the single command functions CD01 CD03 are found in table 406
Table 406:
Function block CD01-Cmd1 CD01-Cmd2 CD01-Cmd3 CD01-Cmd4 CD01-Cmd5 CD01-Cmd6 CD01-Cmd7 CD01-Cmd8 CD01-Cmd9 CD01-Cmd10 CD01-Cmd11 CD01-Cmd12 CD01-Cmdt13 CD01-Cmd14 CD01-Cmd15 CD01-Cmd16 CD02-Cmd1 CD02-Cmd2 CD02-Cmdt3 CD02-Cmd4 CD02-Cmd5 CD02-Cmd6 CD02-Cmd7 CD02-Cmd8 CD02-Cmd9 CD02-Cmd10 CD02-Cmd11 CD02-Cmd12 Table continued on next page

SPA addresses for the SingleCmd (CD01-CD03) function

SPA address CMD Input 4-S-4639 4-S-4640 4-S-4641 4-S-4642 4-S-4643 4-S-4644 4-S-4645 4-S-4646 4-S-4647 4-S-4648 4-S-4649 4-S-4650 4-S-4651 4-S-4652 4-S-4653 4-S-4654 4-S-4672 4-S-4673 4-S-4674 4-S-4675 4-S-4676 4-S-4677 4-S-4678 4-S-4679 4-S-4680 4-S-4681 4-S-4682 4-S-4683 SPA address CMD output 5-O-511 5-O-512 5-O-513 5-O-514 5-O-515 5-O-516 5-O-517 5-O-518 5-O-519 5-O-520 5-O-521 5-O-522 5-O-523 5-O-524 5-O-525 5-O-526 5-O-527 5-O-528 5-O-529 5-O-530 5-O-531 5-O-532 5-O-533 5-O-534 5-O-535 5-O-536 5-O-537 5-O-538

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

687

Section 15 Station communication

Function block CD02-Cmd13 CD02-Cmd14 CD02-Cmd15 CD02-Cmd16 CD03-Cmd1 CD03-Cmd2 CD03-Cmd3 CD03-Cmd4 CD03-Cmd5 CD03-Cmd6 CD03-Cmd7 CD03-Cmd8 CD03-Cmd9 CD03-Cmd10 CD03-Cmd11 CD03-Cmd12 CD03-Cmd13 CD03-Cmd14 CD03-Cmd15 CD03-Cmd16 SPA address CMD Input 4-S-4684 4-S-4685 4-S-4686 4-S-4687 4-S-4705 4-S-4706 4-S-4707 4-S-4708 4-S-4709 4-S-4710 4-S-4711 4-S-4712 4-S-4713 4-S-4714 4-S-4715 4-S-4716 4-S-4717 4-S-4718 4-S-4719 4-S-4720 SPA address CMD output 5-O-539 5-O-540 5-O-541 5-O-542 5-O-543 5-O-544 5-O-545 5-O-546 5-O-547 5-O-548 5-O-549 5-O-550 5-O-551 5-O-552 5-O-553 5-O-554 5-O-555 5-O-556 5-O-557 5-O-558

Table 406 SPA addresses for the signals on the single command functions Figure 312 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection terminal for control of a circuit breaker. A pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal normally performs this type of command control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in CD01 are shown in table 406

688

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Figure 312:

Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker.

The MODE input defines if the output signals from CD01 shall be off, steady or pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting > General Settings > Control > Commands > Single Command. Event function This event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (e.g. operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. All must The internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears. Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal, Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51). The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting > General Setting > Monitoring > Event Function as. No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 407

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

689

Section 15 Station communication

Table 407:
Event block EV01 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16 EV02 EV03 EV20

Status and event codes

Status Single indication1) Double indication Set event Reset event Intermedia Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined te 00 11 22E33 22E35 22E37 22E39 22E41 22E43 22E45 22E47 22E49 22E51 22E53 22E55 22E57 22E59 22E61 22E63 23E.. 24E.. 41E.. 22E32 22E34 22E36 22E38 22E40 22E42 22E44 22E46 22E48 22E50 22E52 22E54 22E56 22E58 22E60 22E62 23E.. 24E.. 41E.. 22E0 22E4 22E8 22E12 22E16 22E20 22E24 22E28 23E.. 24E.. 41E.. 22E1 22E5 22E9 22E13 22E17 22E21 22E25 22E29 23E.. 23E.. 41E.. 22E2 22E6 22E10 22E14 22E18 22E22 22E26 22E30 23E.. 24E.. 41E.. 22E3 22E7 22E11 22E15 22E19 22E23 22E27 22E31 23E.. 24E.. 41E..

22O1 22O2 22O3 22O4 22O5 22O6 22O7 22O8 22O9 22O10 22O11 22O12 22O13 22O14 22O15 22O16 230.. 240.. 410..

1) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF. Connection of signals as events Signals coming from different protection and control functions and shall be sent as events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event function block according to figure 313

690

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Figure 313:

Connection of protection signals for event handling.

Note that corresponding Event mask must be set to an applicable value via the Parameter Setting Tool (PST), under: Settings > General Settings > Monitoring > Event Function as. No events OnSet, at pick-up of the signal OnReset, at drop-out of the signal OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

15.4.2.1

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

691

Section 15 Station communication

pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module. The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installation and commissioning manual for respective IED.

15.4.3

Design
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using the rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is: Optical fibres Opto/electrical converter for the PC PC

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware is needed plus telephone modems. The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM 600. When communicating between the LHMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a front-connection cable.

15.4.4

Setting parameters
Table 408:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate

General settings for the SPA (SPA1-) function

Range 1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd 57600 Bd Step 1 Default 30 9600 Bd Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line

Table 409:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate

General settings for the SPAviaSLM (SPA1-) function

Range 1 - 899 300 Bd 1200 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd 38400 Bd Step 1 Default 30 9600 Bd Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line

692

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Table 410:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress

General settings for the SPAviaLON (SPA4-) function

Range Off On 1 - 899 Step 1 Default Off 30 Unit Description Operation Slave address

15.4.5

Technical data
Table 411:
Function Protocol Communication speed Slave number

SPA communication protocol

Value SPA 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd 1 to 899

15.5
15.5.1

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Introduction
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection terminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

15.5.2
15.5.2.1

Principle of operation
General
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

Introduction of IEC 608705103 protocol

The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of these functions: Event handling Report of analog service values (measurements) Fault location Command handling

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

693

Section 15 Station communication

Autorecloser ON/OFF Teleprotection ON/OFF Protection ON/OFF LED reset Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)

File transfer (disturbance files) Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103

The tables in the following sections specify the information types supported by the IED 670 products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented. To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection and control IED. Commands in control direction Terminal commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD Command block in control direction with defined terminal signals. Number of instances: 1 Command block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no 19 23 24 25 26 Message LED Reset Activate setting group 1 Activate setting group 2 Activate setting group 3 Activate setting group 4 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD Function command block in control direction with defined output signals. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.
Info. no. 16 17 18 Message Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off Supported Yes Yes Yes

694

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals. Number of instances: 4 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 1 - 4. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Info. no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Message Output signal 01 Output signal 02 Output signal 03 Output signal 04 Output signal 05 Output signal 06 Output signal 07 Output signal 08 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Status Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined terminal functions. Number of instances: 1 Indication block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signals.
Info. no. 19 23 24 25 26 21 Message LED reset Setting group 1 active Setting group 2 active Setting group 3 active Setting group 4 active Test mode active Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals. Number of instances: 20 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 5 - 24. One for each instance. REG 670 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 695

Section 15 Station communication

INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in range 1 - 8
Info. no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Message Input signal 01 Input signal 02 Input signal 03 Input signal 04 Input signal 05 Input signal 06 Input signal 07 Input signal 08 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for output signals.
Info. no. 32 33 37 38 46 47 Message Measurand supervision I Measurand supervision U I>>back-up operation VT fuse failure Group warning Group alarm Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Info. no. 51 52 Message Earth fault forward Earth fault reverse Supported Yes Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions. 696 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

The instance type is suitable for distance protection function. FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal. Number of instances: 1
Info. no. 64 65 66 67 84 69 70 71 68 74 75 78 79 80 81 82 76 77 73 Message Start L1 Start L2 Start L3 Start IN General start Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 General trip Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Signal transmitted Signal received SCL, Fault location in ohm Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions. The instance type is suitable for linediff, transformerdiff, overcurrent and earthfault protection functions. FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal. Number of instances: 1
Info. no. 64 65 66 Message Start L1 Start L2 Start L3 Supported Yes Yes Yes

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

697

Section 15 Station communication

Info. no. 67 84 69 70 71 68 74 75 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 Message Start IN General start Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 General trip Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Breaker failure Trip measuring system L1 Trip measuring system L2 Trip measuring system L3 Trip measuring system N Over current trip I> Over current trip I>> Earth fault trip IN> Earth fault trip IN>> Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions. Number of instances: 1 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block. INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.
Info. no. 16 128 130 Message Autorecloser active CB on by Autorecloser Autorecloser blocked Supported Yes Yes Yes

Measurands Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXU. Measurands in public range, I103Meas Number of instances: 1 The IED will report all valid measuring types depending on connected signals. Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value. Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value. 698 Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Info. no. 148 144, 145, 148 148 147 148 148 148 145, 146 147 146, 148 146, 148 148 Message IL1 IL2 IL3 IN, Neutral current UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1-UL2 UN, Neutral voltage P, active power Q, reactive power f, frequency Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr Number of instances: 3 FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in private range 25 27. One for each instance. INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Default value 1.
Info. no. Message Meas1 Meas2 Meas3 Meas4 Meas5 Meas6 Meas7 Meas8 Meas9 Supported Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Disturbance recordings The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined in the standard. Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with: REG 670 IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block DRA1 IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block DRA1 IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block DRA1 699

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 15 Station communication

IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block DRA1 VL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block DRA1 VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block DRA1

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range 64 to 95. Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER. Disturbance Upload All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder will be reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be reported to the master again. When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances will be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. I.e. when a disturbance is deleted (by other client e.g. SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance. Deviations from the standard Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in Rex67x. This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard. ASDU23 In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether: Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test mode. Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than start/pick-up

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is always set (hard coded) to:

700

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

TP TM OTEV

Recorded fault with trip. [1] Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0] Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. In Rex67x FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance. ASDU26 When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number should indicate fault number in the power system, i.e. a fault in the power system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN should be incremented). NOF is in Rex67x, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number. To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever he connects to the corresponding input. Interoperability, physical layer
Supported Electrical Interface EIA RS-485 number of loads Optical interface glass fibre plastic fibre Transmission speed 96000 bit/s 19200 bit/s Link Layer DFC-bit used Connectors connector F-SMA connector BFOC/2.5 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

701

Section 15 Station communication

Interoperability, application layer
Supported Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction ASDU 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 Time-tagged message Time-tagged message with rel. time Measurands I Time-tagged message with rel. time Identification Time synchronization End of general interrogation Measurands II Generic data Generic identification List of recorded disturbances Ready for transm. of disturbance data Ready for transm. of a channel Ready for transm of tags Transmission of tags Transmission fo disturbance data End of transmission Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction ASDU 6 7 10 20 21 24 25 Time synchronization General interrogation Generic data General command Generic command Order for disturbance data transmission Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes

Selection of basic application functions Test mode Blocking of monitoring direction Disturbance data Private data Generic services No Yes Yes Yes No

702

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

15.5.2.2 Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

15.5.3

Function block
BLOCK ICMAI103IEDCMD 19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4 en05000689.vsd

ICMDI103CMD BLOCK 16-AR 17-DIFF 18-PROT en05000684.vsd

BLOCK

ICM1I103UserCMD OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 en05000693.vsd

IEV1I103IED BLOCK 19_LEDRS 23_GRP1 24_GRP2 25_GRP3 26_GRP4 21_TESTM en05000688.vsd

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

703

Section 15 Station communication

IS01I103UsrDef BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 en05000694.vsd

ISU1I103Superv BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL en05000692.vsd

ISEFI103EF BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV en05000685.vsd

IZ01I103FltDis BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG en05000686.vsd

704

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

IFL1I103FltStd BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP 86_MTRL1 87_MTRL2 88_MTRL3 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG en05000687.vsd

IAR1I103AR BLOCK 16_ARACT 128_CBON 130_UNSU en05000683.vsd

IMM1I103Meas BLOCK IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1L2 UN P Q F en05000690.vsd

IMU1I103MeasUsr BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 en05000691.vsd

15.5.4
REG 670

Input and output signals

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B 705

Section 15 Station communication

Table 412:
Signal BLOCK 16_ARACT 128_CBON 130_UNSU

Input signals for the I103AR (IAR1-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 16, auto-recloser active Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing

Table 413:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block

Description Block of commands

Table 414:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block

Description Block of commands

Table 415:
Signal BLOCK 19_LEDRS 23_GRP1 24_GRP2 25_GRP3 26_GRP4 21_TESTM

Input signals for the I103IED (IEV1-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 19, reset LEDs Information number 23, setting group 1 is active Information number 24, setting group 2 is active Information number 25, setting group 3 is active Information number 26, setting group 4 is active Information number 21, test mode is active

Table 416:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block

Description Block of commands

Table 417:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2

Input signals for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Binary signal Input 1 Binary signal input 2

Table continued on next page

706

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Signal INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 Description Binary signal input 3 Binary signal input 4 Binary signal input 5 Binary signal input 6 Binary signal input 7 Binary signal input 8

Table 418:
Signal BLOCK 32_MEASI 33_MEASU 37_IBKUP 38_VTFF 46_GRWA 47_GRAL

Input signals for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 32, measurand supervision of I Information number 33, measurand supervision of U Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection Information number 38, fuse failure VT Information number 46, group warning Information number 47, group alarm

Table 419:
Signal BLOCK 51_EFFW 52_EFREV

Input signals for the I103EF (ISEF-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 51, earth-fault forward Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

Table 420:
Signal BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW

Input signals for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 64, start phase L1 Information number 65, start phase L2 Information number 66, start phase L3 Information number 67, start residual current IN Information number 84, start general Information number 69, trip phase L1 Information number 70, trip phase L2 Information number 71, trip phase L3 Information number 68, trip general Information number 74, forward/line

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

707

Section 15 Station communication

Signal 75_REV 78_ZONE1 79_ZONE2 80_ZONE3 81_ZONE4 82_ZONE5 76_TRANS 77_RECEV 73_SCL FLTLOC ARINPROG Description Information number 75, reverse/bus Information number 78, zone 1 Information number 79, zone 2 Information number 79, zone 3 Information number 79, zone 4 Information number 79, zone 5 Information number 76, signal transmitted Information number 77, signal recevied Information number 73, fault location in ohm Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE) Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

Table 421:
Signal BLOCK 64_STL1 65_STL2 66_STL3 67_STIN 84_STGEN 69_TRL1 70_TRL2 71_TRL3 68_TRGEN 74_FW 75_REV 85_BFP 86_MTRL1 87_MTRL2 88_MTRL3 89_MTRN 90_IOC 91_IOC 92_IEF 93_IEF ARINPROG

Input signals for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function block

Description Block of status reporting Information number 64, start phase L1 Information number 65, start phase L2 Information number 66, start phase L3 Information number 67, start residual curent IN Information number 84, start general Information number 69, trip phase L1 Information number 70, trip phase L2 Information number 71, trip phase L3 Information number 68, trip general Information number 74, forward/line Information number 75, reverse/bus Information number 85, breaker failure Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase L2 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N Information number 90, over current trip, stage low Information number 91, over current trip, stage high Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

708

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Table 422:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9

Input signals for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function block

Description Block of service value reporting Service value for measurement on input 1 Service value for measurement on input 2 Service value for measurement on input 3 Service value for measurement on input 4 Service value for measurement on input 5 Service value for measurement on input 6 Service value for measurement on input 7 Service value for measurement on input 8 Service value for measurement on input 9

Table 423:
Signal BLOCK IL1 IL2 IL3 IN UL1 UL2 UL3 UL1L2 UN P Q F

Input signals for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function block

Description Block of service value reporting Service value for current phase L1 Service value for current phase L2 Service value for current phase L3 Service value for residual current IN Service value for voltage phase L1 Service value for voltage phase L2 Service value for voltage phase L3 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2 Service value for residual voltage UN Service value for active power Service value for reactive power Service value for system frequency

Table 424:
Signal 19-LEDRS 23-GRP1 24-GRP2 25-GRP3 26-GRP4

Output signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block

Description Information number 19, reset LEDs Information number 23, activate setting group 1 Information number 24, activate setting group 2 Information number 25, activate setting group 3 Information number 26, activate setting group 4

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

709

Section 15 Station communication

Table 425:
Signal 16-AR 17-DIFF 18-PROT

Output signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block

Description Information number 16, block of autorecloser Information number 17, block of differential protection Information number 18, block of protection

Table 426:
Signal OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8

Output signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block

Description Command output 1 Command output 2 Command output 3 Command output 4 Command output 5 Command output 6 Command output 7 Command output 8

15.5.5

Setting parameters
Table 427:
Parameter SlaveAddress BaudRate RevPolarity CycMeasRepTim e

General settings for the I103SLM (IECC-) function

Range 0 - 255 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Off On 1.0 - 3600.0 Step 1 0.1 Default 30 9600 Bd On 5.0 Unit Description Slave address Baudrate on serial line Invert polarity Cyclic reporting time of measurments

Table 428:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function

Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 255 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 429:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function

Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 1 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

710

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Table 430:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103IED (IEV1-) function

Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 1 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 431:
Parameter PULSEMOD T FUNTYPE INFNO_1 INFNO_2 INFNO_3 INFNO_4 INFNO_5 INFNO_6 INFNO_7 INFNO_8

General settings for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function

Range 0-1 0.200 - 60.000 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 0.001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Default 1 0.400 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Unit Mode s FunT InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo InfNo Description Pulse mode 0=Steady, 1=Pulsed Pulse length Function type (1-255) Information number for output 1 (1-255) Information number for output 2 (1-255) Information number for output 3 (1-255) Information number for output 4 (1-255) Information number for output 5 (1-255) Information number for output 6 (1-255) Information number for output 7 (1-255) Information number for output 8 (1-255)

Table 432:
Parameter FUNTYPE INFNO_1

General settings for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function

Range 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 1 Default 5 1 Unit FunT InfNo Description Function type (1-255) Information number for binary input 1 (1-255) Information number for binary input 2 (1-255) Information number for binary input 3 (1-255) Information number for binary input 4 (1-255) Information number for binary input 5 (1-255)

INFNO_2

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_3

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_4

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_5

1 - 255

InfNo

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

711

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter INFNO_6 Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 6 Unit InfNo Description Information number for binary input 6 (1-255) Information number for binary input 7 (1-255) Information number for binary input 8 (1-255)

INFNO_7

1 - 255

InfNo

INFNO_8

1 - 255

InfNo

Table 433:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function

Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 1 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 434:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103EF (ISEF-) function

Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 160 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 435:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function

Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 128 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 436:
Parameter FUNTYPE

General settings for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function

Range 1 - 255 Step 1 Default 1 Unit FunT Description Function type (1-255)

Table 437:
Parameter FUNTYPE INFNO

General settings for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function

Range 1 - 255 1 - 255 Step 1 1 Default 25 1 Unit FunT InfNo Description Function type (1-255) Information number for measurands (1-255) Rated value for measurement on input 1 Rated value for measurement on input 2

RatedMeasur1

0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur2

0.05

1000.00

Table continued on next page

712

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter RatedMeasur3 Range 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 0.05 10000000000.00 Step 0.05 Default 1000.00 Unit Description Rated value for measurement on input 3 Rated value for measurement on input 4 Rated value for measurement on input 5 Rated value for measurement on input 6 Rated value for measurement on input 7 Rated value for measurement on input 8 Rated value for measurement on input 9

RatedMeasur4

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur5

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur6

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur7

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur8

0.05

1000.00

RatedMeasur9

0.05

1000.00

Table 438:
Parameter RatedIL1 RatedIL2 RatedIL3 RatedIN RatedUL1 RatedUL2 RatedUL3 RatedUL1-UL2 RatedUN RatedP RatedQ RatedF FUNTYPE

Basic general settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function

Range 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 1 - 99999 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 0.00 - 2000.00 50.0 - 60.0 1 - 255 Step 1 1 1 1 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 10.0 1 Default 3000 3000 3000 3000 230.00 230.00 230.00 400.00 230.00 1200.00 1200.00 50.0 1 Unit A A A A kV kV kV kV kV MW MVA Hz FunT Description Rated current phase L1 Rated current phase L2 Rated current phase L3 Rated residual current IN Rated voltage for phase L1 Rated voltage for phase L2 Rated voltage for phase L3 Rated voltage for phase-phase L1-L2 Rated residual voltage UN Rated value for active power Rated value for reactive power Rated system frequency Function type (1-255)

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

713

Section 15 Station communication 15.5.6 Technical data

Table 439:
Function Protocol Communication speed

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Value IEC 60870-5-103 9600, 19200 Bd

15.6
15.6.1

Automation bits (AUBI)

Introduction
The AUBI function block (or the automation bits function block) is used within the CAP tool in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the DNP3.0 protocol. In this respect, this function block plays the same role as the BinGOOSEReceive (for IEC61850) or MultiCmdReceive (for LON).

15.6.2

Principle of operation
The AUBI function block have 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate a AUBI output point you send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulseOff, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give you 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart. There is a BLOCK inputs signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that upon activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set on 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receiving data from the DNP master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP master again, momentarily. For the AUBI, the PSTO input determines the operator place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.

714

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication 15.6.3 Function block

ABI1AutoBits BLOCK PSTO NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 NAME17 NAME18 NAME19 NAME20 NAME21 NAME22 NAME23 NAME24 NAME25 NAME26 NAME27 NAME28 NAME29 NAME30 NAME31 NAME32 CMDBIT1 CMDBIT2 CMDBIT3 CMDBIT4 CMDBIT5 CMDBIT6 CMDBIT7 CMDBIT8 CMDBIT9 CMDBIT10 CMDBIT11 CMDBIT12 CMDBIT13 CMDBIT14 CMDBIT15 CMDBIT16 CMDBIT17 CMDBIT18 CMDBIT19 CMDBIT20 CMDBIT21 CMDBIT22 CMDBIT23 CMDBIT24 CMDBIT25 CMDBIT26 CMDBIT27 CMDBIT28 CMDBIT29 CMDBIT30 CMDBIT31 CMDBIT32

en06000504.vsd

Figure 314:

AUBI function block

15.6.4

Input and output signals

Table 440:
Signal BLOCK PSTO

Input signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block

Description Block of function Operator place selection

Table 441:
Signal CMDBIT1 CMDBIT2 CMDBIT3 CMDBIT4 CMDBIT5

Output signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block

Description Command out bit 1 Command out bit 2 Command out bit 3 Command out bit 4 Command out bit 5

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

715

Section 15 Station communication

Signal CMDBIT6 CMDBIT7 CMDBIT8 CMDBIT9 CMDBIT10 CMDBIT11 CMDBIT12 CMDBIT13 CMDBIT14 CMDBIT15 CMDBIT16 CMDBIT17 CMDBIT18 CMDBIT19 CMDBIT20 CMDBIT21 CMDBIT22 CMDBIT23 CMDBIT24 CMDBIT25 CMDBIT26 CMDBIT27 CMDBIT28 CMDBIT29 CMDBIT30 CMDBIT31 CMDBIT32 Description Command out bit 6 Command out bit 7 Command out bit 8 Command out bit 9 Command out bit 10 Command out bit 11 Command out bit 12 Command out bit 13 Command out bit 14 Command out bit 15 Command out bit 16 Command out bit 17 Command out bit 18 Command out bit 19 Command out bit 20 Command out bit 21 Command out bit 22 Command out bit 23 Command out bit 24 Command out bit 25 Command out bit 26 Command out bit 27 Command out bit 28 Command out bit 29 Command out bit 30 Command out bit 31 Command out bit 32

15.6.5

Setting parameters
Table 442:
Parameter Operation

Basic general settings for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function

Range Off On Step Default Off Unit Description Operation Off / On

Table 443:
Parameter Operation

Basic general settings for the DNP3 (DNP--) function

Range Off ON Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode Off / On

716

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Table 444:
Parameter Operation BaudRate

Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function

Range Off Serial-Mode 300 Bd 600 Bd 1200 Bd 2400 Bd 4800 Bd 9600 Bd 19200 Bd Four-wire Two-wire Step Default Off 9600 Bd Unit Description Operation mode Baud-rate for serial port

WireMode

Two-wire

RS485 wire mode

Table 445:
Parameter DLinkConfirm

Advanced general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function

Range Never Sometimes Always 0.000 - 60.000 0 - 255 0.000 - 60.000 5-8 1-2 No Even Odd No Yes 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 - 60.000 Step Default Never Unit Description Data-link confirm

tDLinkTimeout DLinkRetries tRxToTxMinDel DataBits StopBits Parity

0.001 1 0.001 1 1 -

2.000 3 0.000 8 1 Even

s s -

Data-link confirm timeout in s Data-link maximum retries Rx to Tx minimum delay in s Data bits Stop bits Parity

RTSEnable tRTSWarmUp tRTSWarmDown tBackOffDelay tMaxRndDelBkOf

0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No 0.000 0.000 0.050 0.100

s s s s

RTS enable RTS warm-up in s RTS warm-down in s RS485 back-off delay in s RS485 maximum back-off random delay in s

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

717

Section 15 Station communication

Table 446:
Parameter Operation

Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch2TCPIP (DNC2-) function

Range Off TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData

1 1

20000 20000

TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP portfor initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master

UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast

1 - 65535 0 - 65535

1 1

20000 0

Table 447:
Parameter Operation

Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch3TCPIP (DNC3-) function

Range Off TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData

1 1

20000 20000

TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP port for initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master

UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast

1 - 65535 0 - 65535

1 1

20000 0

Table 448:
Parameter Operation

Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch4TCPIP (DNC4-) function

Range Off TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData

1 1

20000 20000

TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP port for initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master

UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast

1 - 65535 0 - 65535

1 1

20000 0

718

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Table 449:
Parameter Operation

Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch5TCPIP (DNC5-) function

Range Off TCP/IP UDP-Only 1 - 65535 1 - 65535 Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort UDPPortAccData

1 1

20000 20000

TCP/IP listen port UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from master UDP port for initial NULL response UDP port to remote client/master

UDPPortInitNUL UDPPortCliMast

1 - 65535 0 - 65535

1 1

20000 0

Table 450:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar

Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF Step 1 1 Default Off 1 1 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation

Obj4DefVar

3:DIChWithRelTi me

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar

2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

719

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter Obj22DefVar Range 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step Default 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT Unit Description Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 451:
Parameter ValMasterAddr AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes

Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function

Range No Yes No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 Step 0.01 Default Yes Yes 10.00 Yes Unit s Description Validate source (master) address Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line Unsolicited response, event class mask

ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline UREvClassMask

Yes Yes No Off

Table continued on next page

720

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter UROfflineRetry Range 0 - 10 Step 1 Default 5 Unit Description Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout

tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1

0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100

0.01 0.01 1

5.00 30.00 5

s s -

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout

No Yes 1 - 3600

No 1800

TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout

No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0

0.1

Yes No No Yes 30.0

Table 452:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr

Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes Step 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

721

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation

Obj4DefVar

3:DIChWithRelTi me

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar

2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWou tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

722

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Table 453:
Parameter AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes

Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function

Range No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10 Step 0.01 Default Yes 10.00 Yes Unit s Description Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line Unsolicited response, event class mask

ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline UREvClassMask

Yes Yes No Off

UROfflineRetry

Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated

tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1

0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100

0.01 0.01 1

5.00 30.00 5

s s -

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout

No Yes 1 - 3600

No 1800

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

723

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT Range No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step 0.1 1 1 Default Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10 Unit s s s Description Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer

Table 454:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar

Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast3TCPIP (DNM3-) function

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF Step 1 1 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation

Obj4DefVar

3:DIChWithRelTi me

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar

2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation

Table continued on next page

724

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter Obj22DefVar Range 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step Default 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT Unit Description Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 455:
Parameter AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes

Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast3TCPIP (DNM3-) function

Range No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10 Step 0.01 Default Yes 10.00 Yes Unit s Description Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line Unsolicited response, event class mask

ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline UREvClassMask

Yes Yes No Off

UROfflineRetry

Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

725

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 Range 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 Step 0.01 0.01 1 Default 5.00 30.00 5 Unit s s Description Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout

No Yes 1 - 3600

No 1800

TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT

No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600

0.1 1 1

Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10

s s s

Table 456:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr

Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast4TCPIP (DNM4-) function

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes Step 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address

Table continued on next page

726

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar Range 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step 1 1 Default 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation

Obj4DefVar

3:DIChWithRelTi me

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar

2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWou tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

727

Section 15 Station communication

Table 457:
Parameter AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes

Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast4TCPIP (DNM4-) function

Range No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10 Step 0.01 Default Yes 10.00 Yes Unit s Description Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line Unsolicited response, event class mask

ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline UREvClassMask

Yes Yes No Off

UROfflineRetry

Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated

tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1

0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100

0.01 0.01 1

5.00 30.00 5

s s -

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout

No Yes 1 - 3600

No 1800

Table continued on next page

728

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT Range No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600 Step 0.1 1 1 Default Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10 Unit s s s Description Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer

Table 458:
Parameter Operation SlaveAddress MasterAddres ValMasterAddr MasterIP-Addr MasterIPNetMsk Obj1DefVar Obj2DefVar

Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast5TCPIP (DNM5-) function

Range Off ON 0 - 65519 0 - 65519 No Yes 0 - 18 0 - 18 1:BISingleBit 2:BIWithStatus 1:BIChWithoutTim e 2:BIChWithTime 3:BIChWithRelTi me 1:DIChWithoutTim e 2:DIChWithTime 3:DIChWithRelTi me 1:BO 2:BOStatus 1:BinCnt32 2:BinCnt16 5:BinCnt32WoutF 6:BinCnt16WoutF Step 1 1 1 1 Default Off 1 1 Yes 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 1:BISingleBit 3:BIChWithRelTi me Unit Description Operation Off / On Slave address Master address Validate source (master) address Master IP-address Master IP net mask Object 1, default variation Object 2, default variation

Obj4DefVar

3:DIChWithRelTi me

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar Obj20DefVar

2:BOStatus 5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 10, default variation Object 20, default variation

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

729

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter Obj22DefVar Range 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT 2:BinCnt16EvWou tT 5:BinCnt32EvWith T 6:BinCnt16EvWith T 1:AI32Int 2:AI16Int 3:AI32IntWithoutF 4:AI16IntWithoutF 5:AI32FltWithF 6:AI64FltWithF 1:AI32IntEvWoutF 2:AI16IntEvWoutF 3:AI32IntEvWithF T 4:AI16IntEvWithF T 5:AI32FltEvWithF 6:AI64FltEvWithF 7:AI32FltEvWithF T 8:AI64FltEvWithF T Step Default 1:BinCnt32EvWou tT Unit Description Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 459:
Parameter AddrQueryEnbl tApplConfTout ApplMultFrgRes

Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast5TCPIP (DNM5-) function

Range No Yes 0.00 - 60.00 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Off Class 1 Class 2 Class 1 and 2 Class 3 Class 1 and 3 Class 2 and 3 Class 1, 2 and 3 0 - 10 Step 0.01 Default Yes 10.00 Yes Unit s Description Address query enable Application layer confim timeout Enable application for multiple fragment response Confirm each multiple fragment Unsolicited response enabled Unsolicited response sends when on-line Unsolicited response, event class mask

ConfMultFrag UREnable URSendOnline UREvClassMask

Yes Yes No Off

UROfflineRetry

Unsolicited response retries before off-line retry mode

Table continued on next page

730

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Parameter tURRetryDelay tUROfflRtryDel UREvCntThold1 Range 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 - 60.00 1 - 100 Step 0.01 0.01 1 Default 5.00 30.00 5 Unit s s Description Unsolicited response retry delay in s Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s Unsolicited response class 1 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 2 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer timeout Unsolicited response class 3 event count report treshold Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer timeout Delete oldest event when buffer is full Time synch timeout before error status is generated Time synchronization request after timeout Allow DNP to set time in IED Use average of 3 time requests Enable paired point Select timeout Broken connection timeout Keep-Alive timer

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

DelOldBufFull tSynchTimeout

No Yes 1 - 3600

No 1800

TSyncReqAfTout DNPToSetTime Averag3TimeReq PairedPoint tSelectTimeout tBrokenConTout tKeepAliveT

No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1.0 - 60.0 0 - 3600 0 - 3600

0.1 1 1

Yes No No Yes 30.0 0 10

s s s

15.7
15.7.1

Single command, 16 signals (CD)

Introduction
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local human-machine interface, LHMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

731

Section 15 Station communication 15.7.2 Principle of operation

The single command function consists of a function block CD for 16 binary output signals. The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters from the CAP configuration tool. The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting is done via the LHMI or PCM 600 and is common for the whole function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode the function block has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

15.7.3

Function block
CD01SingleCmd BLOCK NAME1 NAME2 NAME3 NAME4 NAME5 NAME6 NAME7 NAME8 NAME9 NAME10 NAME11 NAME12 NAME13 NAME14 NAME15 NAME16 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16

en05000698.vsd

15.7.4

Input and output signals

Table 460:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block

Description Block single command function

732

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Table 461:
Signal OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16

Output signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block

Description Single command output 1 Single command output 2 Single command output 3 Single command output 4 Single command output 5 Single command output 6 Single command output 7 Single command output 8 Single command output 9 Single command output 10 Single command output 11 Single command output 12 Single command output 13 Single command output 14 Single command output 15 Single command output 16

15.7.5

Setting parameters
Table 462:
Parameter Mode

Basic general settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function

Range Off Steady Pulsed Step Default Off Unit Description Operation mode

15.8
15.8.1

Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT)

Introduction
The IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/ inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with 16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

733

Section 15 Station communication 15.8.2 Principle of operation

Two multiple transmit function blocks MT01-MT02 and 8 slow multiple transmit function blocks MT03-MT10 are available in IED 670. Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple command block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT). Twelve multiple command function block CM12 with fast execution time and 48 multiple command function blocks CM13-CM60 with slower execution time are available in the IED 670s. The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, which can be controlled from other IEDs. The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the terminal. The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID to 0 if the block did not receive data within set maximum time.

15.8.3
15.8.3.1

Design
General
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from the PCM 600 setting tool. 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway. 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the station level. 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer than the execution cycle time for the command function block.

15.8.4

Function block

734

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

CM01MultiCmd BLOCK ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14 OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 VALID en06000007.vsd

Figure 315:

CM function block

MT01MultiTransm BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 ERROR

en06000008.vsd

Figure 316:

MT function block

15.8.5

Input and output signals

Table 463:
Signal BLOCK

Input signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block

Description Block of function

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

735

Section 15 Station communication

Table 464:
Signal BLOCK INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16

Input signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block

Description Block of function Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Input 16

Table 465:
Signal ERROR NEWDATA OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT4 OUTPUT5 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT7 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT9 OUTPUT10 OUTPUT11 OUTPUT12 OUTPUT13 OUTPUT14

Output signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block

Description MultiReceive error New data is received Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14

Table continued on next page

736

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 15 Station communication

Signal OUTPUT15 OUTPUT16 VALID Description Output 15 Output 16 Output data is valid

Table 466:
Signal ERROR

Output signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block

Description MultiSend error

15.8.6

Setting parameters
Table 467:
Parameter tMaxCycleTime

General settings for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function

Range 0.050 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 11.000 Unit s Description Maximum cycle time between receptions of input data Minimum cycle time between receptions of input data Mode for output signals Pulse length for multi command outputs

tMinCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

Mode tPulseTime

Steady Pulsed 0.000 - 60.000

0.001

Steady 0.200

Table 468:
Parameter tMaxCycleTime

General settings for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function

Range 0.000 - 200.000 Step 0.001 Default 5.000 Unit s Description Maximum time interval between transmission of output data Minimum time interval between transmission of output data

tMinCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

737

738

Section 16 Remote communication

Section 16 Remote communication

About this chapter
This chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardware functionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

16.1

Binary signal transfer to remote end

Function block name: BSR--, BST-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: BSDGGIO IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

Function block name: BRx--;BTx-ANSI number: IEC 61850 logical node name: BSTGGIO

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

16.1.1

Introduction
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection in RED670, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 600 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for any purpose e.g. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs. Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an LDCMs (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a 64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs. Each IED can be equipped with up to four LDCMs, thus enabling communication with four remote IEDs.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

739

Section 16 Remote communication 16.1.2 Principle of operation

The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).
Start flag 8 bits Information n x 16 bits CRC 16 bits Stop flag 8 bits

en01000134.vsd

Figure 317:

Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is included in the data field. The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation. When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as sampled values. When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity of 192 signals.

16.1.3

Function block
The function blocks are not represented in CAP 531 configuration tool. The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMBI) of the IED670 and used internally in the configuration.

740

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 16 Remote communication

CRM1LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL en07000043.vsd

CRM2LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL en07000044.vsd

Figure 318:

CRM function blocks

CRB1LDCMRecBinStat COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGT HERR CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL en05000451.vsd

Figure 319:

CRB function block

16.1.4

Input and output signals

Table 469:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR Table continued on next page

Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function block

Description Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

741

Section 16 Remote communication

Signal LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL Description Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Transmission time is longer than permitted Indicates when echo synchronication is used Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization Link error, values are substituted Low signal level on the receive link

Table 470:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR TRDELERR SYNCERR REMCOMF REMGPSER SUBSTITU LOWLEVEL

Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function block

Description Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Transmission time is longer than permitted Indicates when echo synchronication is used Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization Link error, values are substituted Low signal level on the receive link

Table 471:
Signal COMFAIL YBIT NOCARR NOMESS ADDRERR LNGTHERR CRCERROR REMCOMF LOWLEVEL

Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function block

Description Detected error in the differential communication Detected error in remote end with incoming message No carrier is detected in the incoming message No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message Incoming message from a wrong terminal Wrong length of the incoming message Identified error by CRC check in incoming message Remote terminal indicates problem with received message Low signal level on the receive link

742

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 16 Remote communication 16.1.5 Setting parameters

Table 472:
Parameter ChannelMode

Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function

Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Summation mode for transmitted current values

TerminalNo

0 - 255

RemoteTermNo DiffSync

0 Echo GPS Block Echo

1 -

0 - 255 Echo

GPSSyncErr

Block

CommSync

Slave Master LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 5 - 500

Slave

OptoPower

LowPower

TransmCurr

CT-GRP1

ComFailAlrmDel

100

ms

Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

100

ms

RedChSwTime

5 - 500

ms

RedChRturnTime

5 - 500

100

ms

AsymDelay

-20.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

ms

MaxTransmDelay CompRange

0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA

1 -

20 0-25kA

ms -

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

743

Section 16 Remote communication

Parameter MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21 Range 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Off On Step 1 1 Default 600 300 Off Unit us us Description Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication

Table 473:
Parameter ChannelMode

Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function

Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO, 1=GPS Operation mode when GPS synchroniation signal is lost Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Summation mode for transmitted current values

TerminalNo

0 - 255

RemoteTermNo DiffSync

0 Echo GPS Block Echo

1 -

0 - 255 Echo

GPSSyncErr

Block

CommSync

Slave Master LowPower HighPower CT-GRP1 CT-GRP2 CT-SUM CT-DIFF1 CT-DIFF2 RedundantChann el 5 - 500

Slave

OptoPower

LowPower

TransmCurr

CT-GRP1

ComFailAlrmDel

100

ms

Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Time delay before switching in redundant channel Time delay before switching back from redundant channel

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

100

ms

RedChSwTime

5 - 500

ms

RedChRturnTime

5 - 500

100

ms

Table continued on next page

744

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 16 Remote communication

Parameter AsymDelay Range -20.00 - 20.00 Step 0.01 Default 0.00 Unit ms Description Asymmetric delay when communication use echo synch. Max allowed transmission delay Compression range

MaxTransmDelay CompRange

0 - 40 0-10kA 0-25kA 0-50kA 0-150kA 200 - 2000 200 - 1000 Off On

1 -

20 0-25kA

ms -

MaxtDiffLevel DeadbandtDiff InvertPolX21

1 1 -

600 300 Off

us us -

Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up Deadband for t Diff Invert polarization for X21 communication

Table 474:
Parameter ChannelMode

Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function

Range Off On OutOfService 0 Step Default On Unit Description Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON, 2=OutOfService Terminal number used for line differential communication Terminal number on remote terminal Com Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=Slave, 1=Master Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High Time delay before communication error signal is activated Reset delay before communication error signal is reset Invert polarization for X21 communication

TerminalNo

0 - 255

RemoteTermNo CommSync

0 Slave Master LowPower HighPower 5 - 500

1 -

0 - 255 Slave

OptoPower

LowPower

ComFailAlrmDel

100

ms

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

100

ms

InvertPolX21

Off On

Off

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

745

746

Section 17 Hardware

Section 17 Hardware
About this chapter
This chapter includes descriptions of the different hardware modules. It includes diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminals and modules.

17.1
17.1.1

Overview
Variants of case- and HMI display size

xx04000458.eps

Figure 320:

1/2 19 case with medium HMI display.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

747

Section 17 Hardware

xx04000459.eps

Figure 321: Figure 322:

1/2 19 case with small HMI display. 3/4 19 case with medium HMI display.

xx04000460.eps

Figure 323:

1/1 19 case with medium HMI display.

748

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

xx04000461.eps

Figure 324:

1/1 19 case with small HMI display.

17.1.2

Case from the rear side

Table 475: Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module PSM BIM, BOM, SOM or IOM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or GSM SLM IRIG-B 1) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) TRM

Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and X52 X51, X52 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X401

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2 or P31:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2 Note! 1 One LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

Table 476:

Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

749

Section 17 Hardware

Module PSM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, MIM or GSM SLM IRIG-B or LDCM 1,2) LDCM 2) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) TRM

Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X161 and X162 X161, X162 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X303 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X401

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P30:2 and P30:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2 Note! 2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

750

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

Table 477:

Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots

Module PSM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or MIM BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM, MIM or GSM SLM IRIG-B or LDCM 1,2) LDCM 2) OEM RS485 or LDCM 2) 3) LDCM 2) LDCM 2) LDCM 2) TRM 1 TRM 2

Rear Positions X11 X31 and X32 etc. to X131 and X132 X131, X132 X301:A, B, C, D X302 X303 X311:A, B, C, D X312 X313 X322 X323 X401 X411

1) IRIG-B installation, when included in seat P30:2 2) LDCM installation sequence: P31:2, P31:3, P32:2, P32:3, P30:2 and P30:3 3) RS485 installation, when included in seat P31:2 Note! 2-4 LDCM can be included depending of availability of IRIG-B respective RS485 modules.

17.2
17.2.1

Hardware modules
Overview
Table 478:
Module Combined backplane module (CBM)

Basic modules, always included

Description A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals between modules in an IED. Only the TRM is not connected directly to this board. A backplane PCB that forms part of the IED backplane with connectors for TRM, ADM etc. Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits. An internal fail alarm output is available.

Universal backplane module (UBM) Power supply module (PSM)

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

751

Section 17 Hardware
Module Numerical module (NUM) Description Module for overall application control. All information is processed or passed through this module, such as configuration, settings and communication. The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect a PC to the IED. Transformer module that galvanically separates the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12 analog inputs. Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.

Local Human machine interface (LHMI)

Transformer input module (TRM)

Analog digital conversion module (ADM)

Table 479:
Module

Application specific modules

Description Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole command outputs including supervision function Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs. Modules used for digital communication to remote terminal. Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103 communication PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication. Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically separated channels. Used to provide the IED with GPS time synchronization. Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change over output relays. Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both pulse-width modulated signals and amplitude modulated signals and one is used for optical input type ST for PPS time synchronization.

Binary input module (BIM) Binary output module (BOM) Binary I/O module (IOM) Line data communication modules (LDCM), short range, medium range, longrange, X21 Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103 communication modules (SLM) Optical ethernet module (OEM) mA input module (MIM) GPS time synchronization module (GSM) Static output module (SOM) IRIG-B Time synchronization module

17.2.2
17.2.2.1

Combined backplane module (CBM)

Introduction
The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.

17.2.2.2

Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBM backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.

752

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able to communicate with CAN based modules. If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal Fail signal IRF.

17.2.2.3

Design
There are two basic versions of the CBM: with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two are used by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs. See figure 326 with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is used by for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 325

Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors are connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.

2
en05000516.vsd

Figure 325:
Pos Description 1 2 CAN slots CPCI slots

CBM for 1 TRM.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

753

Section 17 Hardware

2 en05000755.vsd

Figure 326:
Pos Description 1 2 CAN slots CPCI slots

CBM for 2 TRM.

en05000756.vsd

Figure 327:
Pos Description 1 CBM

CBM position, rear view.

754

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware 17.2.3

17.2.3.1

Universal backplane module (UBM)

Introduction
The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mounted above the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).

17.2.3.2

Functionality
The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analog signals from the transformer input module to the analog digital converter module. The Numerical processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on the front panel as well as the internal ethernet contacts are connected to the UBM which provides the signal path to the NUM board.

17.2.3.3

Design
It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM). The UBM exists in 2 versions. for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 329 for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 330.

The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The 48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

755

Section 17 Hardware

TRM

ADM

NUM

AD Data
X1 X2 X4

X3

RS485 X10 X10

Front port

Ethernet

LHMI connection
Ethernet X5

en05000489.vsd

Figure 328:

UBM block diagram.

en05000757.vsd

Figure 329:

UBM for 1 TRM.

en05000758.vsd

Figure 330:

UBM for 2 TRM.

756

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

en05000759.vsd

Figure 331:
Pos Description 1 UBM

UBM position, rear view.

17.2.4
17.2.4.1

Power supply module (PSM)

Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.

17.2.4.2

Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input voltage ranges see table 480. The power supply module contains a built-in, selfregulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

757

Section 17 Hardware
Block diagram

Input connector

Filter

Power supply

Supervision

99000516.vsd

Figure 332:

PSM Block diagram.

17.2.4.3

Technical data
Table 480:
Quantity Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) Power consumption Auxiliary DC power in-rush

PSM - Power supply module

Rated value EL = (24 - 60) V EL = (90 - 250) V 50 W typically < 5 A during 0.1 s Nominal range EL 20% EL 20% -

17.2.5
17.2.5.1

Numeric processing module (NUM)

Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection functions and logic. For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.

Backplane connector

758

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware
17.2.5.2 Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelf compact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector. The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted. To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge. The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash file system. The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of the real time clock. No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

759

Section 17 Hardware
17.2.5.3 Block diagram

Compact Flash

Logic

PMC connector PC-MIP

Memory

Ethernet

North bridge PCI-PCIbridge

CPU

en04000473.vsd

Figure 333:

Numeric processing module block diagram

17.2.6

Local human-machine interface (LHMI)

Refer to Chapter "Local human-machine interface" for information.

17.2.7
17.2.7.1

Transformer input module (TRM)

Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.

Backplane connector

UBM connector

760

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.

17.2.7.2

Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers. Basic versions: 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels 7 current channels and 5 voltage channels 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels 12 current channels 6 current channels

The rated values of the current inputs are selected at order. The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM. Configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)".

17.2.7.3

Technical data
Table 481:
Quantity Current Operative range Permissive overload Burden Ac voltage Operative range Permissive overload Burden Frequency
*)

TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits

Rated value Ir = 1 or 5 A (0-100) x Ir 4 Ir cont. 100 Ir for 1 s *) < 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A Ur = 110 V (0340) V 420 V cont. 450 V 10 s < 20 mVA at 110 V fr = 50/60 Hz 5% 0.5288 V Nominal range (0.2-40) Ir

max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

761

Section 17 Hardware 17.2.8

17.2.8.1

Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization (ADM)

Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according to table 482. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board. The UBM connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).
Table 482:
PC-MIP cards LDCM LR-LDCM MR-LDCM X21-LDCM IRIG-B RS485

PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PMC cards SLM OEM 1 ch OEM 2 ch

17.2.8.2

Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter. Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency. The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

762

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

AD1 AD2
1.2v

AD3 AD4

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd

Figure 334:

The ADM layout

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

763

Section 17 Hardware 17.2.9

17.2.9.1

Binary input module (BIM)

Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.

17.2.9.2

Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of the binary input is selected at order. For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)". A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set. Figure 335 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels. The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.

764

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

[V] 300

176 144 88 72 38 32 19 18 24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V

xx06000391.vsd

Figure 335:

Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Guaranteed operation Operation uncertain No operation

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via the CAN-bus on the backplane. The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure 336 and 337.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

765

Section 17 Hardware

[mA] 30

1 35 70 [ms]
en07000104.vsd

Figure 336:

Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.

[mA] 30

1 3.5 7.0 [ms]

en07000105.vsd

Figure 337:

Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

766

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

Opto isolated input

Process connector

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input
Microcontroller

Opto isolated input

CAN

Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input Opto isolated input

99000503.vsd
Figure 338: Block diagram of the Binary input module.

17.2.9.3

Technical data

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Backplane connector
767

Process connector

Opto isolated input

Memory

Section 17 Hardware

Table 483:
Quantity Binary inputs DC voltage, RL

BIM - Binary input module

Rated value 16 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input 10 pulses/s max Blocking settable 140 Hz Release settable 130 Hz Nominal range RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% -

Power consumption 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V Counter input frequency Oscillating signal discriminator

Table 484:
Quantity Binary inputs DC voltage, RL

BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities

Rated value 16 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input 10 pulses/s max 40 pulses/s max Blocking settable 140 Hz Release settable 130 Hz Nominal range RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% -

Power consumption 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V Counter input frequency Balanced counter input frequency Oscillating signal discriminator

17.2.10
17.2.10.1

Binary output modules (BOM)

Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or any signalling purpose.

17.2.10.2

Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 339. This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED.

768

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required. For configuration of the output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)".
Output module

3
xx00000299.vsd

Figure 339:

Relay pair example

1 Output connection from relay 1 2 Output signal power source connection 3 Output connection from relay 2

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

769

Section 17 Hardware

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Process connector

Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay

Relay
Trip and Signal relays 24 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms 8A 10 A

Microcontroller

Memory

99000505.vsd

Figure 340:

Block diagram of the Binary Output Module

17.2.10.3

Technical data
Table 485:
Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Table continued on next page

BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity

Backplane connector

Process connector

CAN

770

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware
Function or quantity Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms Trip and Signal relays 30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A

17.2.11
17.2.11.1

Static binary output module (SOM)

Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.

17.2.11.2

Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6 electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts. The SOM consists mainly of: An MCU A CAN-driver 6 static relays outputs 6 electromechanical relay outputs A DC/DC converter Connectors interfacing CAN-bus to backplane CBM IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)

The following parts are supervised: Interruption in relay coil Short circuit of relay coil Driver failure

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

771

Section 17 Hardware

Drive & Read back Drive & Read back

Process connector

Drive & Read back Drive & Read back Drive & Read back Drive & Read back

Codeflash

MCU

CANdriver

Drive & Read back Drive & Read back

Process connector

DC/DC
Drive & Read back

Drive & Read back

Internal_fail_n AC_fail_n RCAN_ID Sync

Drive & Read back

Reset
Drive & Read back

en07000115.vsd

Figure 341:

Block diagram of the static output module

Backplane connector

772

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

Figure 342:

Connection diagram of the static output module

17.2.11.3

Technical data
Table 486: SOM - Static output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Trip and Signal relays 6 6 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms 8A 10 A

Function or quantity Static binary outputs Electromechanical relay outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Static binary outputs: Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum capacitance of 0.2 mF 0.2 s 1.0 s Electromechanical relay outputs: Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms

20 A 10 A

20 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A <1 ms

Operating time, Static outputs

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

773

Section 17 Hardware 17.2.12

17.2.12.1

Binary input/output module (IOM)

Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signalling purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input information.

17.2.12.2

Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts. Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 336. Inputs are debounced by software. Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply earth faults, see figure 335. The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering. I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the event recorder if present. The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see figure 343. The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is connected in parallel to the standard output relay. For configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)" and section "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)". The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

774

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

Figure 343:

Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to rear position X31, X41, etc. and output contacts named XB to rear position X32, X42, etc.

The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of the contacts. The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary input/output module.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

775

Section 17 Hardware

xx04000069.vsd

Figure 344:

IOM with MOV protection, relay example

17.2.12.3

Technical data
Table 487:
Quantity Binary inputs DC voltage, RL

IOM - Binary input/output module

Rated value 8 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V max. 0.05 W/input max. 0.1 W/input max. 0.2 W/input max. 0.4 W/input Nominal range RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% RL 20% -

Power consumption 24/40 V 48/60 V 110/125 V 220/250 V

Table 488:

IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Trip and signal relays 10 250 V AC, DC 1000 V rms Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay) 2 250 V AC, DC 800 V DC

Function or quantity Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms

8A 10 A

8A 10 A

30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A -

0.4 A 0.4 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 125 V/0.35 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A 10 nF

Maximum capacitive load

776

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

Table 489:

IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 60255-23)

Trip and Signal relays IOM: 10 250 V AC, DC 250 V rms Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay) IOM: 2 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC

Function or quantity Binary outputs Max system voltage Test voltage across open contact, 1 min Current carrying capacity Continuous 1s Making capacity at inductive loadwith L/R>10 ms 0.2 s 1.0 s Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms

8A 10 A

8A 10 A

30 A 10 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A -

0.4 A 0.4 A 250 V/8.0 A 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A 220 V/0.2 A 250 V/0.15 A 10 nF

Maximum capacitive load

17.2.13
17.2.13.1

Line data communication module (LDCM)

Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between the IEDs situated at distances <150 km or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/ ANSI standard format is used. The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 345. The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates. Alternative cards for Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short range (900 nm multi mode) are available. Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes. Never look into the laser beam.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

777

Section 17 Hardware
17.2.13.2 Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be mounted on: the ADM the NUM

ID

ST

IO-connector

ST

32,768 MHz

16.000 MHz

en07000087.vsd

Figure 345:

The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector
X1
ADN 2841 2.5V ID

DS 3904

DS 3904

FPGA 256 FBGA

PCI9054 TQ176

MAX 3645

3 2

en06000393.vsd

Figure 346:

The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

17.2.13.3

Technical data

778

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

Table 490:
Characteristic Type of LDCM Type of fibre

Line data communication modules (LDCM)

Range or value Short range (SR) Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm or 50/125 mm 820 nm 11 dB (typical distance about 3 km *) 7 dB (typical distance about 2 km *) Type ST C37.94 Medium range (MR) Long range (LR) Singlemode 8/125 mm Singlemode 8/125 mm

Wave length Optical budget Graded-index multimode 62.5/125 mm, Graded-index multimode 50/125 mm

1310 nm 20 dB (typical distance 80 km *)

1550 nm 26 dB (typical distance 120 km *)

Optical connector Protocol

Type FC/PC C37.94 implementation **) Synchronous 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal

Type FC/PC C37.94 implementatio n **) Synchronous 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal

Data transmission Transmission rate / Data rate Clock source

Synchronous 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s Internal or derived from received signal

*) depending on optical budget calculation **) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94

17.2.14
17.2.14.1

Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM)

Introduction
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication. The module has two communication ports, one for serial communication and one dedicated for LON communication.

17.2.14.2

Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of optical fiber connectors, see figure 347. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

779

Section 17 Hardware

Figure 347:
A B 1 2

The SLM variants

Snap in connector for plastic fiber ST connector for glass fiber LON port SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port

Figure 348:
1 2 3 4

The SLM layout overview

Receiver, LON Transmitter, LON Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103

780

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware
17.2.14.3 Technical data
Table 491:
Quantity Optical connector Fibre, optical budget Fibre diameter

SLM LON port

Range or value Glass fibre: type ST Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *) Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *) Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm Plastic fibre: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

Table 492:
Quantity Optical connector

SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port

Range or value Glass fibre: type ST Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in Glass fibre: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *) Plastic fibre: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *) Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm Plastic fibre: 1 mm

Fibre, optical budget Fibre diameter

*) depending on optical budget calculation

17.2.15
17.2.15.1

Galvanic RS485 communication module

Introduction
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.

17.2.15.2

Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM module. The internal structure of the RS485 can be seen in figure 349:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

781

Section 17 Hardware

FPGA

Wishbone interconnect switch

32 MHz

PCI-con

Internal bus PCI-bus PCIController Local bus to wishbone Status Register ID-chip Control Register

UART Isolation

RS485 tranceiver Rx

PCI-con

Isolation
Termination

Info Register Isolated DC/DC Soft ground

Figure 349:

The internal structure of the RS485 card

RS485 connector pinouts

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 350) are presented in table 493:
Table 493:
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6

The arrangement for the pins

Name 4-wire TX+ TX T-Term R-Term RX RX+ Description Receive/transmit high or transmit high Receive/transmit Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver in 2wir case) (connect to TX+) Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+) Receive low Receive high

Name 2-wire RS485+ RS485 Term N.A. N.A. N.A.

Angle bracket

Screw terminal X3

Screw terminal X1

1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6

RS485 PWB

Backplane

Figure 350:

RS485 connector

782

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

2-pole connector

6-pole-connector

Isolation

Tx

Section 17 Hardware

2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5 Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Soft ground connector pinouts

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be used in two combinations like: Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part . Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV

17.2.15.3

Technical data
Table 494:
Quantity Communication speed External connectors

Galvanic RS485 communication module

Range or value 240019200 bauds RS-485 6-pole connector Soft ground 2-pole connector

17.2.16
17.2.16.1

Optical ethernet module (OEM)

Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. The module has one or two optical ports with ST connectors.

17.2.16.2

Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according to IEC6185081 have been implemented.

17.2.16.3

Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card on the ADM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single channel or double channel unit.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

783

Section 17 Hardware

PCI - bus Connector EEPROM Ethernet Controller

100Base-FX Transmitter 100Base-FX Receiver

ST fiber optic connectors

PCI - PCI Bridge

ID chip EEPROM IO - bus Connector

100Base-FX Transmitter Ethernet Controller 100Base-FX Receiver ST fiber optic connectors

en04000472.vsd

Figure 351:

OEM block diagram.

ID chip

LED
25MHz oscillator

Ethernet cont.

Transmitter

Receiver

Ethernet cont.

Transmitter

25MHz oscillator

PCI to PCI bridge

en05000472.vsd

Figure 352:

OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels

17.2.16.4

Technical data
Table 495:
Quantity Number of channels Standard Type of fiber Wave length Optical connector Communication speed

OEM - Optical ethernet module

Rated value 1 or 2 IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre 1300 nm Type ST Fast Ethernet 100 MB

784

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

PCI bus

LED

IO bus

Receiver

Section 17 Hardware 17.2.17

17.2.17.1

mA input module (MIM)

Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to +20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers.The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.

17.2.17.2

Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module. For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)". The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory on the module. The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The module communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

785

Section 17 Hardware

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC Optoisolation DC/DC Optoisolation DC/DC

Process connector

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Protection & filter

A/D Converter Volt-ref

Optoisolation DC/DC

Memory

Microcontroller

99000504.vsd

Figure 353:

MIM block diagram

17.2.17.3

Technical data
Table 496:
Quantity: Input range Input resistance Power consumption each mA-board each mA input

MIM - mA input module

Rated value: 5, 10, 20mA 0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA Rin = 194 Ohm 4W 0.1 W Nominal range: -

Backplane connector

CAN

786

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware 17.2.18

17.2.18.1

GPS time synchronization module (GSM)

Introduction
This module includes the GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one SMA contact for connection to an antenna.

17.2.18.2

Design
The GPS time synchronization module is 6U high and occupies one slot. The slot closest to the NUM shall always be used. The GSM consists of CAN carrier module (CCM) GPS clock module (GCM) GPS receiver unit

The CCM is a carrier board for the GCM mezzanine PMC card and GPS unit, see figure 355. There is a cable between the external antenna input on the back of the GCM and the GPS-receiver. This is a galvanic connection vulnerable to electromagnetic interference. The connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to reduce the risk. The second cable is a flat cable that connects the GPS and the GCM. It is used for communication between the GCM and the GPS-receiver. All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the CAN-bus. The CMPPS signal is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at sampling level.
PMC GPS antenna GPS receiver GPS clock module
CMPPS

CAN controller

CAN

en05000675.vsd

Figure 354:

GSM block diagram

Backplane CAN connector

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

787

Section 17 Hardware

en07000086.vsd

Figure 355:
1 GPS receiver

A CCM with the GCM and GPS mounted with cables

2 GPS Clock module (GCM) 3 CAN carrier module (CCM) 4 Antenna connector

17.2.18.3

Technical data
Table 497:
Function Receiver Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new position or after power loss longer than 1 month Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer than 48 hours Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter than 48 hours

GPS time synchronization module (GSM)

Range or value <30 minutes <15 minutes <5 minutes Accuracy 1s relative UTC

788

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware 17.2.19

17.2.19.1

GPS antenna
Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna with applicable cable must be used.

17.2.19.2

Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on an antenna mast. See figure 356
1 6

2 3

xx04000155.vsd

Figure 356:
where: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Antenna with console

GPS antenna TNC connector Console, 78x150 mm Mounting holes 5.5 mm Tab for securing of antenna cable Vertical mounting position Horizontal mounting position

Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sight visibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of 50% clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

789

Section 17 Hardware

99001046.vsd

Figure 357:

Antenna line-of-sight

Antenna cable Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GSM. Choose cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz. Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.

17.2.19.3

Technical data
Table 498:
Function Max antenna cable attenuation Antenna cable impedance Lightning protection Antenna cable connector

GPS Antenna and cable

Value 26 db @ 1.6 GHz 50 ohm Must be provided externally SMA in receiver end TNC in antenna end

790

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware 17.2.20

17.2.20.1

IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B

Introduction
This module includes the IRIG-B time synchronization and the PPS time synchronization.

17.2.20.2

Design
The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.
32 MHz FPGA OPTO_INPUT PCI-bus PCI-Controller

Registers

PCI-con

4 mm barrier

ID-chip Capture1 Capture2

Amplitude modulator Isolated receiver Zero-cross detector

ZXING

IO-con

MPPS PPS CMPPS TSU Isolated DC/DC 5 to +- 12V

en06000303.vsd

Figure 358:

IRIG-B block diagram

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

BNCconnector

IRIGDecoder

IRIG_INPUT

STconnector

PCI-con

791

Section 17 Hardware

A1

C C

Y2

3 2

en06000304.vsd

Figure 359:

IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for IRIG-B signal input

17.2.20.3

Technical data
Table 499:
Quantity Number of channels IRIG-B Number of channels PPS Electrical connector IRIG-B Optical connector PPS Type of fibre

IRIG-B
Rated value 1 1 BNC Type ST 62.5/125 m multimode fibre

17.3
17.3.1

Dimensions
Case without rear cover

792

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

C
O O

ST

DC//DC

A1

Section 17 Hardware

D A
F

C
xx04000448.vsd

G H

Figure 360:

Case without rear cover Figure 361:

xx04000464.vsd

Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit

Case size (mm) A 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 265.9

B 223.7 448.3

C 201.1 201.1

D 252.9 252.9

E 205.7 430.3

F 190.5 190.5

G 203.7 428.3

H 465.1

J 187.6 187.6

K 482.6

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit

17.3.2

Case with rear cover

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

793

Section 17 Hardware

K
D A

G
C
xx05000501.vsd

J
xx05000502.vsd

Figure 362:

Case with rear cover.

Figure 363:

Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit.

xx05000503.vsd

Figure 364:

Rear cover case with details.

Case size (mm) A 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 265.9

B 223.7 448.3

C 242.1 242.1

D 255.8 255.8

E 205.7 430.3

F 190.5 190.5

G 203.7 428.3

H 465.1

J 228.6 228.6

K 482.6

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.

Case size (inches) 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

A 10.47 10.47

B 8.81 17.65

C 9.53 9.53

D 10.07 10.07

E 8.10 16.86

F 7.50 7.50

G 8.02 16.86

H 18.31

J 9.00 9.00

K 19.00

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.

794

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware 17.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions

A B

E D
xx04000465.vsd

Figure 365:

Flush mounting
Cut-out dimensions (mm) A +/-1 210.1 322.4 434.7 B +/-1 254.3 254.3 254.3 C 4.0-10.0 4.0-10.0 4.0-10.0 D 12.5 12.5 12.5

Case size Tolerance 6U, 1/2 x 19" 6U, 3/4 x 19" 6U, 1/1 x 19"

E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

795

Section 17 Hardware 17.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

xx06000182.vsd

Figure 366:

A 1/2 x 19 size IED 670 side-by-side with RHGS6.

A
G

C
xx05000505.vsd

Figure 367:

Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

796

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware 17.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions

A B E

en04000471.vsd

Figure 368:

Wall mounting

Case size (mm) 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

A 292.0 516.0

B 267.1 491.1

C 272.8 272.8

D 390.0 390.0

E 243.0 243.0

17.3.6

External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection

WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national low/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or in a separate box!

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

797

Section 17 Hardware

[6.97]

[4.02]

[1.48]

[0.33]

[18.31] [18.98]

[0.79]

[7.68]

Dimension mm [inches]

xx06000232.eps

Figure 369:
[1.50]

Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[10.47]

[7.50]

[0.33]

[18.31] [18.98]

[0.79]

[7.68]

[inches]

en06000234.eps

Figure 370:

Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit

17.4
17.4.1
17.4.1.1

Mounting alternatives
Flush mounting
Overview
All IED sizes, 1/2 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and RHGS6 6U 1/4 x 19, cases, can be flush mounted. Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54 protection. The flush mounting kit are utilized for IEDs of sizes: 1/2 x 19 and 1/1 x 19 and are also suitable for mounting of RHGS6, 6U 1/4 x 19 cases.

798

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED.

17.4.1.2

Mounting procedure for flush mounting

1 7

2 6 3 4 5

xx06000246.vsd

Figure 371:
PosNo 1

Flush mounting details.

Description Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory mounted between the case and front plate. Fastener Groove Screw, self tapping Quantity Type -

2 3 4

4 4

2,9x9,5 mm

Table continued on next page

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

799

Section 17 Hardware

5 6 7

Joining point of sealing strip (rear view) Panel Screw

M5x25

17.4.2
17.4.2.1

19 panel rack mounting

Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws for the angles. The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle. Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-byside mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be selected so that the total size equals 19.

When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

800

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware
17.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting
2

1a

1b

xx04000452.vs d

Figure 372:
PosNo 1a, 1b 2

19 panel rack mounting details

Quantity 2 8 Type M4x6

Description Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to the left or right side of the case. Screw

17.4.3
17.4.3.1

Wall mounting
Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19 and 1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle. When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

801

Section 17 Hardware

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall mounting is therefore not recommended for communication modules with fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communication module (SLM), Optical Ethernet module (OEM) and Line data communication module (LDCM).

17.4.3.2

Mounting procedure for wall mounting

3 2 1 4

5 6 xx04000453.vs d

Figure 373:
PosNo 1 2 3 4 5 6

Wall mounting details.

Description Bushing Screw Screw Mounting bar Screw Side plate Quantity 4 8 4 2 6 2 Type M4x10 M6x12 or corresponding M5x8 -

17.4.3.3

How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover which is recommended to use with this type of mounting. See figure 374.

802

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mmis required on the unhinged side.
View from above 1 3

80 mm

en06000135.vsd

Figure 374:
PosNo 1 2 3

How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

Description Screw Screw Rear protection cover Type M4x10 M5x8 -

17.4.4
17.4.4.1

Side-by-side 19 rack mounting

Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately. When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

803

Section 17 Hardware
17.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting
2 1

xx04000456.vsd

Figure 375:
PosNo 1 2, 3 4

Side-by-side rack mounting details.

Description Mounting plate Screw Mounting angle Quantity 2 16 2 Type M4x6 -

17.4.4.3

IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two trip relays.

804

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

xx06000180.vsd

Figure 376:

IED 670 (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base.

17.4.5
17.4.5.1

Side-by-side flush mounting

Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required. If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19. With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see section "Flush mounting".

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

805

Section 17 Hardware
17.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting
1 2

3 4

xx06000181.vsd

Figure 377:

Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19 IED).

Description Mounting plate Screw Mounting angle Quantity 2 16 2 Type M4x6 -

PosNo 1 2, 3 4

17.5
17.5.1

Technical data
Enclosure
Table 500:
Material Front plate Surface treatment Finish

Case
Steel sheet Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI Aluzink preplated steel Light grey (RAL 7035)

806

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware

Table 501:
Front

Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip) IP20

Rear, sides, top and bottom

Table 502:
Case size 6U, 1/2 x 19 6U, 1/1 x 19

Weight
Weight 10 kg 18 kg

17.5.2

Connection system
Table 503:
Connector type Terminal blocks of feed through type Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals

CT and VT circuit connectors

Rated voltage and current 250 V AC, 20 A 250 V AC, 20 A Maximum conductor area 4mm2 4 mm2

Table 504:
Connector type

Binary I/O connection system

Rated voltage 250 V AC 300 V AC Maximum conductor area 2.5 mm2 2 1 mm2 3 mm2

Screw compression type Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals

Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.

17.5.3

Influencing factors
Table 505:
Parameter Ambient temperature, operate value Relative humidity Operative range Storage temperature

Temperature and humidity influence

Reference value +20 C 10%-90% 0%-95% -40 C to +70 C Nominal range -10 C to +55 C 10%-90% Influence 0.02% /C -

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

807

Section 17 Hardware

Table 506:
Dependence on

Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Reference value max. 2% Full wave rectified Within nominal range Influence 12% of EL 20% of EL 24-60 V DC 20% 90-250 V DC 20% No restart Correct behaviour at power down <180 s 0.01% /% 0.01% /%

Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage Operative range Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate value Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage Interruption interval 050 ms 0 s

Restart time

Table 507:
Dependence on

Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602556)

Within nominal range fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr Influence 1.0% / Hz 1.0%

Frequency dependence, operate value Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content)

17.5.4

Type tests according to standard

Table 508:
Test 1 MHz burst disturbance Ring wave immunity test Surge withstand capability test Electrostatic discharge Direct application Indirect application Electrostatic discharge Direct application Indirect application Fast transient disturbance Surge immunity test Power frequency immunity test Power frequency magnetic field test Damped oscillatory magnetic field test Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Table continued on next page

Electromagnetic compatibility
Type test values 2.5 kV 2-4 kV 2.5 kV, oscillatory 4.0 kV, fast transient 15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge 15 kV air discharge 8 kV contact discharge 8 kV contact discharge 4 kV 1-2 kV, 1.2/50 ms high energy 150-300 V, 50 Hz 1000 A/m, 3 s 100 A/m 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz Reference standards IEC 60255-22-1, Class III IEC 61000-4-12, Class III ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1

IEC 60255-22-4,Class A IEC 60255-22-5 IEC 60255-22-7, Class A IEC 61000-4-8, Class V IEC 61000-4-10, Class V IEC 60255-22-3

808

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 17 Hardware
Test Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance Conducted electromagnetic field disturbance Radiated emission Conducted emission Type test values 20 V/m, 80-2500 MHz 35 V/m 26-1000 MHz 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz 30-1000 MHz 0.15-30 MHz Reference standards EN 61000-4-3 IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-25 IEC 60255-25

Table 509:
Test Dielectric test

Insulation
Type test values 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J >100 MW at 500 VDC Reference standard IEC 60255-5

Impulse voltage test Insulation resistance

Table 510:
Test Cold test Storage test Dry heat test

Environmental tests
Type test value Test Ad for 16 h at -25C Test Ad for 16 h at -40C Test Bd for 16 h at +70C Test Ca for 4 days at +40 C and humidity 93% Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55 C and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24 hours) Reference standard IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-30

Damp heat test, steady state Damp heat test, cyclic

Table 511:
Test Immunity Emissivity

CE compliance
According to EN 50263 EN 50263 EN 50178

Low voltage directive

Table 512:
Test Vibration Shock and bump Seismic

Mechanical tests
Type test values Class I Class I Class I Reference standards IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

809

810

Section 18 Labels

Section 18 Labels
About this chapter
This chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them on the IED.

18.1

Different labels

1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7
xx06000574.eps

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

811

Section 18 Labels

1 2 3 4 5 6

Product type, description and serial number Order number, dc supply voltage and rated frequency Optional, customer specific information Manufacturer Transformer input module, rated currents and voltages Transformer designations

Ordering and serial number

812

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 18 Labels

1 2 3

4
en06000573.eps

1 2 3

Warning label Caution label Class 1 laser product label

Warning label

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

813

814

Section 19 Connection diagrams

Section 19 Connection diagrams

This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and optical connector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and optical connections to the IED.

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

815

Section 19 Connection diagrams

816

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 19 Connection diagrams

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

817

Section 19 Connection diagrams

818

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 19 Connection diagrams

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

819

Section 19 Connection diagrams

820

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 19 Connection diagrams

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

821

Section 19 Connection diagrams

822

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 19 Connection diagrams

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

823

Section 19 Connection diagrams

824

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 19 Connection diagrams

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

825

Section 19 Connection diagrams

826

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 19 Connection diagrams

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

827

Section 19 Connection diagrams

828

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 19 Connection diagrams

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

829

Section 19 Connection diagrams

830

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

About this chapter
This chapter describes current dependant time delay functionality. Both ANSI and IEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.

20.1

Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in different points in the network different time delays for the different relays are normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections connected in series.

I>
Figure 378:

I>

I>
xx05000129.vsd

Three overcurrent protections connected in series

Stage 3

Time Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1

Stage 1

Stage 1

Fault point position

en05000130.vsd

Figure 379:

Definite time overcurrent characteristics

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

831

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

Time

Fault point position

en05000131.vsd

Figure 380:

Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and still assure the selectivity between protections. To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series: Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault Reset time of the protection Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

A1 B1

Feeder

I>

I>

Time axis

t=0

t=t1

t=t2

t=t3
en05000132.vsd

Figure 381:
where: t=0 t=t1 t=t2

Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

is The fault occurs is Protection B1 trips is Breaker at B1 opens

832

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

t=t3

is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped. In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications: If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system. Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic reclosing to a permanent fault. Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release function.

20.2
20.2.1

Principle of operation
Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time delay mode or in a current dependent inverse time delay mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr. Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen. If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal startValue), a timer, according to the selected operate mode, is started. The component

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

833

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations. In case of definite time the timer will run constantly until the trip time is reached or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed. For definite time delay curve index no 5 (ANSI/IEEE Definite time) or 15 (IEC Definite time) are chosen. The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 157.

A t[ s ] = + Bk i p -C in >
where: p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type, in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current.

(Equation 157)

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

(top - B k )

i p - C = Ak in >

(Equation 158)

where: top is the operation time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to equation 159, in addition to the constant time delay:

i p - C dt A k in > 0
t

(Equation 159)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

834

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

Dt

i( j ) p - C A k j =1 in >
n

(Equation 160)

where: j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected, i.e. when

i in >
Dt n

>1

is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm, is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled, i.e. when a trip is given and is the fault current at time j

i (j)

For inverse time operation, the inverse-time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The list of characteristics in table 513 matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 spec.
Table 513:
Curve name Curve name ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normal Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse ANSI Long Time Very Inverse IEC Normal Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Inverse IEC Extremely. Inverse IEC Short Time Inverse IEC Long Time Inverse

Curve name and index no.

Curve index no. 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

For the ANSI/IEEE characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to table 514:

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

835

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

Table 514:

Inverse time curves for ANSI/IEEE characteristics

A 28.2 19.61 0.0086 0.0515 64.07 28.55 0.086 B 0.1217 0.491 0.0185 0.1140 0.250 0.712 0.185 C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 p 2.0 2.0 0.02 0.02 2.0 2.0 0.02

Parameter/operationMode 1 = ANSI Extremely inverse 2 = ANSI Very inverse 3 = ANSI Inverse 4 = ANSI Moderately inverse 6 = ANSI Long-time extremely inverse 7 = ANSI Long-time very inverse 8 = ANSI Long-time inverse

For the IEC characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to table 515:
Table 515: Inverse time curves for IEC characteristics
A(b) 0.14 13.5 0.14 80.0 0.05 120 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 1 1 1 1 1 1 p (a) 0.02 1.0 0.02 2.0 0.04 1.0

Parameter/operationMode 9 = IEC Normal inverse 10 = IEC Very inverse 11 = IEC Inverse 12 = IEC Extremely inverse 13 = IEC Short-time inverse 14 = IEC Long-time inverse

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time delay of operation, see figure 382.

836

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

Operate time

tnMin

Current
en05000133.vsd

Figure 382:

Minimum time delay operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse curve for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k. In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional curves available; the 18 = RI time inverse and the 19 = RD time inverse. The 18 = RI time inverse curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 162:

k t[ s ] = in > 0.339 - 0.235 i

where: in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current.

(Equation 162)

The 19 = RD time inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

837

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

sensitive residual earth fault current protection, with ability to detect high resistive earth faults. The curve is described by equation 163:

t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln

i k in >

(Equation 163)

where: in> k i is the set start current for step n, is set time multiplier for step n and is the measured current

If the curve type is chosen as 17 the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve according to the general equation 164.

A t[ s ] = + Bk i p -C in >

(Equation 164)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. We have the possibility to choose between three different reset type delays. Available alternatives are listed in table 516.
Table 516:
Curve name Instantaneous IEC Reset ANSI Reset

Reset type delays

Curve index no. 1 2 3

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis. If IEC reset is chosen the timer is reset the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis. If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 165.

838

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

tr t[ s ] = i 2 -1 in >
where: The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

(Equation 165)

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice of time delay characteristic. For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1 - 4 and 6 - 8) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9 - 14) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset). For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 166:

tr t[ s ] = i pr - cr in >

(Equation 166)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics (type 18 and 19) the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

20.3

Inverse characteristics

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

839

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

Table 517:
Function

Inverse time characteristics ANSI

Range or value k = 0.05-999 in steps of 0.01 unless otherwise stated Accuracy -

Operate characteristic:

t =

A P ( I - 1)

+ B k

Reset characteristic:
t = tr
2

(I

-1

I = Imeasured/Iset ANSI Extremely Inverse no 1 ANSI Very inverse no 2 ANSI Normal Inverse no 3 ANSI Moderately Inverse no 4 ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse no 6 ANSI Long Time Very Inverse no 7 ANSI Long Time Inverse no 8 A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0, tr=29.1 A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0, tr=21.6 A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46 A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85 A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30 A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46 k=(0.01-1.20) in steps of 0.01 A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6 ANSI/IEEE C37.112, class 5 + 30 ms

Table 518:
Function

Inverse time characteristics IEC

Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy -

Operate characteristic:

t =

A P k ( I - 1)

I = Imeasured/Iset Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time IEC Normal Inverse no 9 IEC Very inverse no 10 IEC Inverse no 11 IEC Extremely inverse no 12 IEC Short-time inverse no 13 IEC Long-time inverse no 14 Table continued on next page (0.000-60.000) s A=0.14, P=0.02 A=13.5, P=1.0 A=0.14, P=0.02 A=80.0, P=2.0 A=0.05, P=0.04 A=120, P=1.0 0.5% of set time 10 ms IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

840

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

Function Customer defined characteristic no 17 Operate characteristic: Range or value k=0.5-999 in steps of 0.1 A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01 C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1 P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001 TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001 CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1 PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001 k=(0.05-999) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy IEC 60255, class 5 + 40 ms

t =

A P (I - C )

+ B k

Reset characteristic:
t = TR
PR

(I

- CR

I = Imeasured/Iset RI inverse characteristic no 18

t = 1 k

IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

0.339 -

0.236 I

I = Imeasured/Iset Logarithmic inverse characteristic no 19

t = 5.8 - 1.35 In

k=(0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

k
I

I = Imeasured/Iset

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

841

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

Table 519:
Function Type A curve:

Inverse time characteristics for Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)
Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy Class 5 +40 ms

t =

U < -U

U<

U< = Uset U = UVmeasured Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

2.0

t =

k 480

32 U < -U - 0.5 U <

+ 0.055

U< = Uset U = Umeasured Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

kA +D t = P U < -U -C B U <
U< = Uset U = Umeasured

842

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

Table 520:
Function Type A curve:
t =

Inverse time characteristics for Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)
Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy Class 5 +40 ms

U -U > U>

U> = Uset U = Umeasured Type B curve:

t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k 480

32 U - U > - 0.5 U >

2.0

- 0.035
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

Type C curve:
t =

k 480

32 U - U > - 0.5 U >

3.0

- 0.035
k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

Programmable curve:
t = kA +D

B U - U > U >

-C

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

843

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

Table 521:
Function Type A curve:
t =

Inverse time characteristics for Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)
Range or value k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 Accuracy Class 5 +40 ms

U -U > U>

U> = Uset U = Umeasured Type B curve:

t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k 480
2.0

32 U - U > - 0.5 U >

- 0.035

Type C curve:
t =

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k 480
3.0

32 U - U > - 0.5 U >

- 0.035

Programmable curve:

t =

kA

B U - U > U >

-C

+D

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001 B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01 C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1 D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001 P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001

844

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k= 15 10 7 5 3 2

0.1
0.5

0.01

10

100

I/I>

xx05000764.vsd

Figure 383:

ANSI Extremely inverse

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

845

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k= 15 10

7 5 3 2 1

0.1
0.5

0.01

10

100

I/I>

xx05000765.vsd

Figure 384:

ANSI Very inverse

846

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k= 15 10

7 5 3 2 1

0.1
0.5

0.01

10

100

I/I>

xx05000766.vsd

Figure 385:

ANSI Inverse

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

847

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

100

k=

10

15 10 7 5 3 2

1 0.5

0.1

0.01

10

100

I/I>

xx05000767.vsd

Figure 386:

Moderately inverse

848

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k= 1.1 0.9 0.7

0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1

0.1

0.05

0.01

10

100 I/I>
xx05000768.vsd

Figure 387:

IEC Normal inverse

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

849

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

1
k= 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.3

0.1

0.2 0.1 0.05

0.01

10

100

I/I>

xx05000769.vsd

Figure 388:

Very inverse

850

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

REG 670

Section 20 Time inverse characteristics

100

10

k=

0.1

1.1 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.3 0.2

0.01

10

0.1 0.05

100

I/I>

xx05000770.vsd

Figure 389:

Extremely inverse

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

851

852

Section 21 Glossary

Section 21 Glossary
About this chapter
This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical documentation.

21.1

Glossary
AC A/D converter ADBS ADM ANSI AR ArgNegRes ArgDir ASCT ASD AWG BBP BFP BIM BOM BR BS BSR BST C37.94 CAN CAP 531 Alternating current Analog to digital converter Amplitude dead -band supervision Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization American National Standards Institute Autoreclosing Setting parameter/ZD/ Setting parameter/ZD/ Auxiliary summation current transformer Adaptive signal detection American Wire Gauge standard Busbar protection Breaker failure protection Binary input module Binary output module External bi-stable relay British standard Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial communication Configuration and programming tool 853

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 21 Glossary

CB CBM CCITT

Circuit breaker Combined backplane module Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body within the International Telecommunications Union. CAN carrier module Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI Combined mega pulses per second Close-open cycle Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions Standard format according to IEC 60255-24 Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals Central processor unit Carrier receive Cyclic redundancy check Carrier send Current transformer Capacitive voltage transformer Delayed auto-reclosing Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.) Dead bus dead line Dead bus live line Direct current Discrete Fourier transform Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board Dead line live bus Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std. 1379-2000 Disturbance recorder Dynamic random access memory Disturbance report handler REG 670

CCM CCVT Class C CMPPS CO cycle Co-directional

COMTRADE Contra-directional

CPU CR CRC CS CT CVT DAR DARPA DBDL DBLL DC DFT DIP-switch DLLB DNP DR DRAM DRH 854

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 21 Glossary

DSP DTT EHV network EIA EMC EMF EMI EnFP ESD FOX 20 FOX 512/515 FOX 6Plus G.703

Digital signal processor Direct transfer trip scheme Extra high voltage network Electronic Industries Association Electro magnetic compatibility Electro motive force Electro magnetic interference End fault protection Electrostatic discharge Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and protection signals Access multiplexer Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module General interrogation command Gas insulated switchgear Generic object oriented substation event Global positioning system GPS time synchronization module High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard Plastic fiber connector Human machine interface High speed auto reclosing High voltage High voltage direct current Integrating dead band supervision International Electrical Committee IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance

GCM GI GIS GOOSE GPS GSM HDLC protocol HFBR connector type HMI HSAR HV HVDC IDBS IEC IEC 60044-6

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

855

Section 21 Glossary

IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 IEEE IEEE 802.12 IEEE P1386.1

Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Substation Automation communication standard Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common mezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF Electro Motive Force. Intelligent electronic device Intelligent gas insulated switchgear Binary input/output module When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but will have a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of function. 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data link layer. 2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 54 Internal fail signal InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200 International Telecommunications Union Local area network High voltage software module Liquid crystal display Line differential communication module Local detection device REG 670

IED I-GIS IOM Instance

IP

IP 20 IP 40 IP 54 IRF IRIG-B: ITU LAN LIB 520 LCD LDCM LDD 856

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 21 Glossary

LED LNT LON MCB MCM MIM MPM MVB NCC NUM OCO cycle OCP OEM OLTC OV Overreach

Light emitting diode LON network tool Local operating network Miniature circuit breaker Mezzanine carrier module Milli-ampere module Main processing module Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for use in trains. National Control Centre Numerical module Open-close-open cycle Overcurrent protection Optical ethernet module On load tap changer Over voltage A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not have seen it. Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus Pulse code modulation Protection and control IED manager Mezzanine card standard Process interface for sensors & actuators PCI Mezzanine card Permissive overreach transfer trip Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the measured and/or controlled components Power supply module Parameter setting tool Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio Permissive underreach transfer trip Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX 857

PCI PCM PCM 600 PC-MIP PISA PMC POTT Process bus PSM PST PT ratio PUTT RASC REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 21 Glossary

RCA REVAL RFPP RFPE RISC RMS value RS422 RS485 RTC RTU SA SC SCS SCT SLM SMA connector SMS SNTP

Relay characteristic angle Evaluation software Resistance for phase-to-phase faults Resistance for phase-to-earth faults Reduced instruction set computer Root mean square value A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-point connections Serial link according to EIA standard RS485 Real time clock Remote terminal unit Substation Automation Switch or push-button to close Station control system System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850 Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC communication. Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant impedance. Station monitoring system Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required accuracy. Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication Switch for CB ready condition Switch or push-button to trip Neutral point of transformer or generator Static VAr compensation Trip coil Trip circuit supervision Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet. Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD REG 670

SPA SRY ST Starpoint SVC TC TCS TCP TCP/IP 858

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

Section 21 Glossary

Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet working and encompasses both network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP. TEF TNC connector TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Underreach Time delayed earth-fault protection function Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedance version of a BNC connector Current transformer class according to IEC A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For example a distance relay is under-reaching when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach. Process interface components that deliver measured voltage and current values Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"s orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero. Undervoltage Weak end infeed logic Voltage transformer A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the residual or the earth-fault current Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

U/I-PISA UTC

UV WEI VT X.21 3IO 3UO

REG 670

Technical reference manual 1MRK502013-UEN rev. B

859

860